Electrical network protection

Sepam series 60

User’s manual
02/2016
 Safety instructions 0

Safety symbols and messages

Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
1 the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.

Risk of electric shock

The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not
followed.
ANSI symbol. IEC symbol.

Safety alert
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.

Safety messages
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Important notes
Restricted liability
Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out
of the use of this manual. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for
untrained persons.

Device operation
The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are
suitable for its application. The user is responsible for reading and following the
device’s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or
maintain it. Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and
constitute a hazard for people and property.

Protective grounding
The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national
electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.

SEPED310017EN
Sepam series 60 General contents

Introduction 1

Metering functions 2

Protection functions 3

Control and monitoring functions

4

Modbus communication
5

Installation
6

Use
7

SEPED310017EN 1
Sepam series 60 General contents

General contents 2

Introduction 7
Selection guide by application 8
Protection functions suitable for low voltage 10
Presentation 12
Modular architecture 13
Selection table 14
Technical characteristics 16
Environmental characteristics 17
General settings 22
Characteristics 23
Processing of measured signals 24
Phase current
Residual current 26
Demand current and peak demand currents 27
Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase-to-neutral voltage 28
Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage 29
Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage 30
Frequency 31
Active, reactive
and apparent power 32
Peak demand active and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ) 34
Active and reactive energy 35
Temperature 36
Rotation speed 37
Phasor diagram 38
Network diagnosis functions 39
Tripping context
Tripping current 39
Number of phase fault trips
Number of earth fault trips 40
Negative sequence / unbalance 41
Current total harmonic distortion
Voltage total harmonic distortion 42
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0S
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 43
Disturbance recording 44
Data log (DLG) 45
Synchro-check:
voltage comparison and
out-of-sync context 50

2 SEPED310017EN
Sepam series 60 General contents

Machine operation assistance functions 51

Thermal capacity used
Cooling time constant 51 1
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping 52
Running hours and operating time counter
Starting current and starting time 53
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time 54
Apparent positive sequence impedance
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances 55
Capacitance 56
Capacitor unbalance current 57
Motor start report (MSR) 58
Motor start trend (MST) 60
Switchgear diagnosis functions 63
VT supervision 63
CT supervision 65
Trip circuit and open/closed matching supervision 66
Closing circuit and open/close orders supervision 67
Cumulative breaking current
Number of operations 68
Operating time
Charging time 69
Number of racking out operations 70
Protection functions 72
Setting ranges 74
Overspeed 79
Underspeed 80
Underimpedance 81
Synchro-check 82
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 84
Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction
check 85
Remanent undervoltage 86
Directional active overpower 87
Directional reactive overpower 88
Phase undercurrent 89
Directional active underpower 91
Temperature monitoring 92
Field loss 93
Negative sequence / unbalance 96
Negative sequence overvoltage 99

SEPED310017EN 3
Sepam series 60 General contents

Excessive starting time, locked rotor 100

Thermal overload for cables 102
Thermal overload for capacitors 107
Thermal overload for motors 121
Thermal overload for machines 135
Breaker failure 146
Phase overcurrent 148
Earth fault 150
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 153
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 155
Neutral voltage displacement 157
Restricted earth fault differential 158
Starts per hour 161
Directional phase overcurrent 165
Directional earth fault 168
Recloser 175
Overfrequency 179
Underfrequency 180
Rate of change of frequency 181
General 184
Control and monitoring functions 191
Description 192
Definition of symbols 193
Logic input / output assignment 194
Switchgear control 197
Latching / acknowledgement 203
TC / switchgear position discrepancy
Tripping 204
Disturbance-recording trigger 205
Switching of groups of settings 206
Logic discrimination 207
Load shedding 222
Restart 223
Generator shutdown and tripping 225
Automatic transfer 229
Automatic "one out of two" transfer 231
Automatic "two out of three" transfer 239
Triggering the Motor start report (MSR) 249
Activating / Deactivating the Data log function (DLG) 250
Change of phase rotation direction 251
Local indication 252

4 SEPED310017EN
Sepam series 60 General contents

Local control 255

Control matrix 258
Logic equations 260 1
Self-tests and fail-safe position 264
Modbus Communication 271
Presentation 272
Managing the Modbus protocol 273
Configuring the communication interfaces 274
Commissioning and diagnosis 280
Data addresses and coding 287
Addresses in direct-access mode 289
Time-setting and synchronization 308
Time-tagged events 310
Transferring records 312
Access to remote settings 315
Customized table 317
Security 318
Reading Sepam identification 319
Appendix 1. Modbus protocol 320
Appendix 2. Function settings 325
Installation 337
Precautions 339
Equipment identification 340
List of Sepam series 60 references 342
Base unit 344
1 A/5 A current transformers 358
LPCT type current sensors 361
CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs 364
CSH30 interposing ring CT 366
ACE990 Core balance CT interface 368
Voltage transformers 370
MES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 input / 6 output modules 371
Remote modules 374
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module 376
MSA141 Analog output module 378
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module 380
MCS025 Synchro-check module 382
Communication accessory selection guide 386
Connection of communication interfaces 387
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface 389
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface 390

SEPED310017EN 5
Sepam series 60 General contents

ACE937 fiber optic interface 391

ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces 392
ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi-protocol interfaces 398
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter 404
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters 406
ECI850
IEC 61850 Sepam server 408
Use 413
User-machine interfaces 414
Description of the advanced UMI 416
Description of the mimic-based UMI 417
Local operation on the UMI 418
SFT2841 setting and operating software 426
SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor 443
Commissioning 453
Principles 453
Methods 454
Testing and metering equipment required 455
General examination and preliminary actions 456
Checking of phase current and voltage input connections 457
Checking of residual current
and residual voltage input connections 462
Checking of residual current input connection 463
Checking of residual voltage input connection 464
Checking of Sepam C60 unbalance current
input connections 466
Checking of logic input and output connections 467
Checking of GOOSE logic input connections 468
Checking of optional module connections 469
Validation of the complete protection chain 470
Test sheet 471
Maintenance 473
Troubleshooting assistance 473
Replacing the base unit
Replacing the battery 477
Maintenance tests 478
Firmware modifications 479

6 SEPED310017EN
Introduction Contents

Selection guide by application 8

1
Protection functions suitable for low voltage 10
Presentation 12
Modular architecture 13
Selection table 14
Technical characteristics 16
Environmental characteristics 17

SEPED310017EN 7
 Sepam range Selection guide by application

The selection guide by application suggests Sepam type(s) suitable for your protection requirements, based on your application
characteristics. The most typical applications are presented along with the associated Sepam type.

1 Each application example is described:

b By a single-line diagram specifying:
v the device to be protected Series 20 Series 40
v the network configuration
v the position of the metering
sensors
b By the standard and specific
Sepam functions to be implemented
to protect the application concerned.

Protections
Current b b b b b b b
Voltage b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b
Specific Breaker Disconnec- Directional Directional Directional
failure tion earth fault earth fault and earth fault
(ROCOF) phase

Applications

Characteristics
Logic inputs/ Inputs 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
outputs Outputs 4 to 8 4 to 8 4 to 8
Temperature sensors 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 16
Channel Current 3I + I0 – 3I + I0
Voltage – 3V + V0 3V
LPCT (1) Yes – Yes
Communication ports 1 to 2 1 to 2 1 to 2
Control Matrix (2) Yes Yes Yes
Logic equation editor – – Yes
Logipam (3) – – –
Other Memory cartridge with – – –
settings
Backup battery – – –
(1) LPCT: Low-Power Current Transducer conforming to standard (4) S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions:
IEC 60044-8. b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up
(2) Control matrix used for simple assignment of data from the protection, b broken conductor detection
control and monitoring functions. b fault locator
(3) Logipam: Ladder language PC programming environment for extended (5) T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional functions:
use of Sepam series 80 functions. b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up
b broken conductor detection

8 SEPED310017EN
 Sepam range Selection guide by application

The list of protection functions is given for information only.

Direct earthing or impedance earthing have been represented by the same pictogram, i.e. by a direct earthing system.

Series 60 Series 80
11

b b b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b
Direc- Directional Directional Directional Disconnect Transformer Machine Busbar voltage and Capacitor bank
tional earth fault earth fault earth fault ion or machine- differential frequency protection unbalance
earth and phase and phase (ROCOF) transformer
fault unit
differential

0 to 28 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42
4 to 16 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23
0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16
3I + I0 3I + 2 x I0 2 x 3I + 2 x I0 3I + I0 2 x 3I + 2 x I0
3V, 2U + V0 or Vnt 3V + V0 3V + V0 2 x 3V + 2 x V0 3V + V0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 to 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
– Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

All the information relating to the Sepam range can be found in the following documents: b Sepam series 80 operation manual, reference SEPED303003EN
b Sepam catalog, reference SEPED303005EN b Sepam DNP3 communication user's manual,
b Sepam series 20 user's manual, reference PCRED301005EN reference SEPED305001EN
b Sepam series 40 user's manual, reference PCRED301006EN b Sepam IEC 60870-5-103 communication user's manual,
b Sepam series 60 user's manual, reference SEPED310017EN reference SEPED305002EN
b Sepam series 80 functions user's manual, reference SEPED303001EN b Sepam IEC 61850 communication user's manual,
b Sepam series 80 Modbus communication user's manual, reference SEPED306024EN
reference SEPED303002EN

SEPED310017EN 9
 Sepam range Protection functions suitable for
low voltage

Low voltage earthing systems

1
There are 4 low voltage (LV) earthing systems designated by a 2 or 3-letter acronym:
b TN-S
b TN-C
b TT
b IT

The letters making up the acronym have the following meanings:

Letter Meaning
First letter Transformer neutral point
I Earthed with an impedance
T Directly earthed
Second letter Electrical exposed conductive parts of the consumer
T Earthed
N Connected to the neutral conductor
Third letter (optional) Protective Earth conductor
S Separate N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor
C Combined N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor
(PEN)

10 SEPED310017EN
Sepam range Protection functions suitable for
low voltage

Compatibility of Sepam low voltage

protection functions
Sepam protection functions can be used with low voltage (LV) as long as the 11
conditions below are met:
b The distribution circuit must be rated higher than 32 A.
b The installation must comply with standard IEC 60364.
For additional information about the compatibility of Sepam protection functions with
low voltage, please contact Schneider Electric technical support.

The table below lists the Sepam protection functions suitable for low voltage
according to the earthing system used. Sepam protection functions not listed in this
table are not suitable for low voltage. The protection functions listed in this table are
available according to the Sepam type.

Protection ANSI Earthing system Comments

code
TN-S TN-C TT IT
Phase overcurrent 50/51 b b b b Neutral conductor not protected
Earth fault/Sensitive earth fault 50N/51N b b b (1)

Earth fault/Sensitive earth fault 50G/51G b b b (3)

Negative sequence/unbalance 46 b b b b Threshold to be adapted to the phase unbalance

Thermal overload for cables/capacitor/ 49RMS b b b b Neutral conductor not protected
transformer/motor/generic
Restricted earth fault 64REF b b b (3)

Two-winding transformer differential 87T b b b b

Directional phase overcurrent 67 b b b (4) b (4)

Directional earth fault 67N/67NC Incompatible with LV diagrams (4-wire)

Directional active overpower 32P b b (2) (2)

Directional reactive overpower 32Q b b (2) (2)

Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 b b b b

Remanent undervoltage 27R b b b b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 b b b b
Neutral voltage displacement 59N b b (4) (4) Residual voltage not available with 2 VTs
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 b b b b
Overfrequency 81H b b b b
Underfrequency 81L b b b b
Rate of change of frequency 81R b b b b
Synchro-check 25 b b b b
b : Protection function suitable for low voltage (according to Sepam)
(1) Not recommended even on the second fault.
(2) 2-wattmeter method not suitable for unbalanced loads.
(3) Residual current too low in IT.
(4) 2 phase-to-phase VTs.

SEPED310017EN 11
 Introduction Presentation

The Sepam range of protection relays is Sepam series 60 main characteristics

designed for the operation of machines and
1
b protection of closed ring networks or networks with parallel incomers by directional
electrical distribution networks of industrial protection and logic discrimination
installations and utility substations at all b directional earth fault protection for impedance-earthed and isolated or
levels of voltage. compensated neutral systems
b advanced protection of transformers, motors and generators
It includes 4 families b synchro-check between 2 networks before coupling
b Sepam series 20 b measurement of harmonic distortion, current and voltage, to assess network
b Sepam series 40 power quality
b Sepam series 60 b 28 inputs / 16 outputs for comprehensive equipment control
b mimic-based UMI for local switchgear control
b Sepam series 80 b SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software, a simple and complete tool
to cover all needs, from the simplest to the that is indispensable for all Sepam users:
most complete. v assisted preparation of parameter and protection settings
v complete information during commissioning
v remote equipment management and diagnostics during operation
b logic equation editor built into the SFT2841 software to adapt the predefined
control functions
PE80711

b 1 communication port to integrate Sepam in 1 communication network

b removable memory cartridge to get equipment in operation again quickly after the
replacement of a faulty base unit
b battery backup to save historical and disturbance recording data.

Sepam series 60 with integrated advanced UMI.

Selection guide
The Sepam series 60 family includes 8 types to offer the right solution for each
application.

Specific protection functions available Applications

Substation Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor
S60 T60 G60 C60
Directional earth fault M61
Directional earth fault and phase overcurrent S62 T62 G62

12 SEPED310017EN
Introduction Modular architecture

Flexibility and upgrading capability

To adapt to as many situations as possible, and allow for future installation
upgrading, optional modules may be added to Sepam at any time for new functions. 1
1 Base unit, with different types of User-Machine
Interface (UMI):

PE80712
b Integrated mimic-based UMI
b Integrated or remote advanced UMI

2 Parameter and protection settings saved on

removable memory cartridge

3 28 logic inputs and 16 relay outputs

with 2 optional modules providing 14 inputs and
6 outputs

4 1 communication port
b Connection:
v direct, to 2-wire RS 485, 4-wire RS 485 or fiber
optic networks
v to Ethernet TCP/IP network via PowerLogic
Ethernet server (Transparent ReadyTM)
b Protocols:
v DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-103 with ACE969
communication interface
v IEC 61850 and Modbus TCP with ACE850
communication interface

5 Processing of data from 16 temperature

sensors
Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120
6 1 low level analog output
0-1 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA

7 Synchro-check module

8 Software tools:
b Sepam parameter and protection setting and
adaptation of the predefined functions
b Local or remote installation operation Ease of installation
b Retrieval and display of disturbance recording b Light, compact base unit
data b Easy to integrate due to Sepam’s adaptation capabilities:
v universal supply voltage for Sepam and its logic inputs: 24 to 250 V DC
v phase currents can be measured by 1 A or 5 A current transformers, or LPCT
(Low Power Current Transducer) type sensors
v residual current calculated or measured by a choice of methods to fit requirements
b The same, easy-to-install remote modules for all Sepam units:
v mounted on DIN rail
v connected to the Sepam base unit by prefabricated cords

Commissioning assistance
b Predefined functions implemented by simple parameter setting
b User-friendly, powerful SFT2841 PC setting software tool used on all Sepam units
to provide users with all the possibilities offered by Sepam

Intuitive use
b Integrated or remote advanced User Machine Interface (UMI) installed in the most
convenient place for the facility manager
b Integrated mimic-based User Machine Interface for local control of switchgear
b User-friendly User Machine Interface, with direct access to data
b Clear graphic LCD display of all data required for local operation and installation
diagnosis
b Working language can be customized to be understood by all users.

SEPED310017EN 13
 Introduction Selection table

Substation Transformer Motor Generator Cap.

Protection ANSI code S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60
1 Phase overcurrent (1)
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1)
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for cables 49RMS 1
Generic thermal overload (1) or 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for 2 2 1
motors/transformers
Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS 1
Restricted earth fault 64REF 2 2
Directional phase overcurrent (1) 67 2 2 2
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 2 2 2 2 2
Directional reactive overpower 32Q 1 1 1
Directional active underpower 37P 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 48/51LR 1
Starts per hour 66 1
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 1 1 1
Overspeed (2 set points) (2) 12 v v v
Underspeed (2 set points) (2) 14 v v v
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V 1 1
Underimpedance 21B 1 1
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Rate of change of frequency 81R 2 2 2 2
Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 79 v v
Thermostat / Buchholz (2) 26/63 v v v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4) 25 v v v v v v
Control and monitoring
Circuit breaker / contactor control 94/69 v v v v v v v v
Automatic transfer (AT) (2) v v v v v v
Load shedding / automatic restart b
De-excitation b b
Genset shutdown b b
Logic discrimination (2) 68 v v v v v v v v
Latching / acknowledgement 86 b b b b b b b b
Annunciation 30 b b b b b b b b
Triggering a Motor start report b b b b b b b b
Activating/Deactivating a Data log b b b b b b b b
Change of phase rotation direction b b b b b b b b
Switching of groups of settings b b b b b b b b
Adaptation using logic equations b b b b b b b b
The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function.
b standard, v optional
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings
(2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules
(3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module

14 SEPED310017EN
Introduction Selection table

Substation Transformer Motor Generator Cap.

Metering S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS
Measured residual current I0, calculated I0Σ
Demand current I1, I2, I3
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 b b b b b b b b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 b b b b b b b b
Residual voltage V0 b b b b b b b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction b b b b b b b b
Negative sequence voltage Vi b b b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b b b
Active power P, P1, P2, P3 b b b b b b b b
Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 b b b b b b b b
Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 b b b b b b b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b b b b b b b
Power factor b b b b b b b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) b b b b b b b b
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (1) (± Wh, ± VARh) v v v v v v v v
Temperature (16 RTDs) (3) v v v v v
Rotation speed (2) v v v
Neutral point voltage Vnt b b b
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping context b b b b b b b b
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3 b b b b b b b b
Phase fault and earth fault trip counters b b b b b b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b b b b b b b b
Harmonic distortion (THD), current and voltage Ithd, Uthd b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0Σ b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 b b b b b b b b
Disturbance recording b b b b b b b b
Motor start report (MSR) b
Motor start trend (MST) b
Data log (DLG) b b b b b b b b
Thermal capacity used b b b b b b b
Remaining operating time before overload tripping b b b b b b b
Waiting time after overload tripping b b b b b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b b b b b
Starting current and time b
Start inhibit time b
Number of starts before inhibition b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b b b
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b b b b b b b b
Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual b b
Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of voltages compared for synchro-check (4) v v v v v v
Capacitor unbalance current and capacitance b
Switchgear diagnosis ANSI code
CT / VT supervision 60/60FL b b b b b b b b
Trip circuit supervision (2) 74 v v v v v v v v
Cumulative breaking current b b b b b b b b
Number of operations, operating time, charging time, number of racking out operations (2) v v v v v v v v
Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 communication or IEC 61850 (Editions 1 and 2)
Measurement readout (5) (6) v v v v v v v v
Remote indication and time tagging of events (5) (6) v v v v v v v v
Remote control orders (5) (6) v v v v v v v v
Remote protection setting (5) (6) v v v v v v v v
Transfer of disturbance recording data (5) (6) v v v v v v v v
IEC 61850 GOOSE message (6) v v v v v v v v
b standard, v optional
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings
(2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules
(3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module
(5) With ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP-2 or ACE969FO-2 communication interface
(6) With ACE850TP or ACE850FO communication interface

SEPED310017EN 15
 Installation Technical characteristics

Weight
Base unit with advanced UMI Base unit with mimic-based UMI

1 Minimum weight (base unit without MES120)

Maximum weight (base unit with 2 MES120)
2.4 kg (5.29 lb)
3.5 kg (7.72 lb)
3.0 kg (6.61 lb)
4.0 kg (8.82 lb)
Sensor inputs
Phase current inputs 1 A or 5 A CT
Input impedance < 0.02 Ω
Consumption < 0.02 VA (1 A CT)
< 0.5 VA (5 A CT)
Continuous thermal withstand 4 In
1 second overload 100 In (500 A)
Voltage inputs Phase Residual
Input impedance > 100 kΩ > 100 kΩ
Consumption < 0.015 VA (100 V VT) < 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
Continuous thermal withstand 240 V 240 V
1-second overload 480 V 480 V
Isolation of inputs from other Enhanced Enhanced
isolated groups
Relay outputs
Control relay outputs O1 to O3 and Ox01 (1)
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A/4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R Load < 20 6A/2A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
L/R Load < 40 ms 4A/1A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
Resistive load - - - - 8A
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 5A
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Annunciation relay output O5 and Ox02 to Ox06
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 2A/1A 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R Load < 20 ms 2A/1A 0.5 A 0.15 A - -
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 1A
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC -20 % / +10 %
Maximum consumption < 16 W
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms
Acceptable ripple content 12%
Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms
Battery
Format 1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V
Service life 10 years Sepam energized
Minimum 3 years, typical 6 years
Analog output (MSA141 module)
Current 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA, 0 - 1 mA
Load impedance < 600 Ω (wiring included)
Accuracy 0.50 % full scale or 0.01 mA
(1) Relay outputs complying with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations).

16 SEPED310017EN
Installation Environmental characteristics

Electromagnetic compatibility Standard Level/Class Value

1
Emission tests
Disturbing field emission IEC 60255-25
EN 55022 A
Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255-25
EN 55022 A
Immunity tests - Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
30 V/m non-modulated; 800MHz - 2GHz (1)
ANSI C37.90.2 (2004) 20 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 (1) IV 15 kV air; 8 kV contact
IEC 60255-22-2 8 kV air; 6 kV contact
ANSI C37.90.3 8 kV air; 4 kV contact
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency (2) IEC 61000-4-8 4 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s)
Immunity to pulsed magnetic fields (1) IEC 61000-4-9 IV 600A/m
Immunity tests - Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255-22-6 III 10 V
Electrical fast transients/burst IEC 60255-22-4 A and B 4 kV; 2.5 kHz/2 kV; 5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4 IV 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM
100 kHz damped sinusoidal wave IEC 61000-4-12 III 2 kV CM
IV (1) 4 kV MC ; 2,5 kV DM
Slow damped oscillating wave (100 kHz to 1 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
Fast damped oscillating wave (3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 III 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM
GOST R 50746-2000 (1) 4 200 A
Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from 0 Hz to 150 IEC 61000-4-16 III
kHz
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100% for 20 ms
Mechanical robustness Standard Level/Class Value
Energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ±1 mm
IEC 60068-2-64 2M1
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn/11 ms
Earthquakes IEC 60255-21-3 2 2 Gn (horizontal axes)
1 Gn (vertical axes)
De-energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 2 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 27 Gn/11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 20 Gn/16 ms
(1) Test conducted with a mimic-based HMI in the case of GOST performance testing.
(2) When protection functions 50N/51N or 67N are used and I0 is calculated on the sum of the phase currents, Is0 must be higher than 0.1In0.

SEPED310017EN 17
 Installation Environmental characteristics

Climatic withstand Standard Level/Class Value

During operation

1 Exposure to cold
Exposure to dry heat
Continuous exposure to damp heat
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-78
Ad
Bd
Cab
-25°C (-13°F)
+70°C (+158°F)
10 days; 93% RH; 40°C (104°F)
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb/2 3 days
Influence of corrosion/2-gas test IEC 60068-2-60 Method 1 21 days; 75% RH; 25°C (77°F);
0.1 ppm H2S; 0.5 ppm SO2
Influence of corrosion/4-gas test IEC 60068-2-60 Method 4 21 days; 75% RH; 25°C (77°F);
0.01 ppm H2S; 0.2 ppm SO2;
0.2 ppm NO2; 0.01 ppm Cl2
EIA 364-65A IIIA 42 days ; 75% RH ; 30 °C (86 °F) ;
0.1 ppm H2S ; 0.2 ppm SO2 ;
0.2 ppm NO2 ; 0.02 ppm Cl2
In storage (1)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068-2-14 Nb -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) 5°C/min
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25°C (-13°F)
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70°C (+158°F)
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 56 days; 93% RH; 40°C (104°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 Db 6 days; 95% RH; 55°C (131°F)
Safety Standard Level/Class Value
Enclosure safety tests
Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels IP20
NEMA Type 12
Fire withstand IEC 60695-2-11 650°C (1200°F) with glow wire
Electrical safety tests
1.2/50 µ s impulse wave IEC 60255-5 5 kV (2)
Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 2 kV 1min (3)
ANSI C37.90 1 kV 1 min (annunciation output)
1.5 kV 1 min (control output)
Certification
EN 50263 European directives:
harmonized standard 89/336/EECElectromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC)
92/31/EECAmendment
93/68/EECAmendment
73/23/EECLow Voltage Directive
93/68/EECAmendment
UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 no. 14-95 File E212533
CSA CSA C22.2 no. 14-95/no. 94-M91/no. 0.17-00 File 210625
(1) Sepam must be stored in its original packaging.
(2) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode.
(3) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.

18 SEPED310017EN
 1

SEPED310017EN 19
 Metering functions Contents

General settings 22
Characteristics 23
Processing of measured signals 24
Phase current
Residual current 26
Demand current and peak demand currents 27
2 Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase-to-neutral voltage 28
Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage 29
Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage 30
Frequency 31
Active, reactive and apparent power 32
Peak demand active and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ) 34
Active and reactive energy 35
Temperature 36
Rotation speed 37
Phasor diagram 38
Tripping context
Tripping current 39
Number of phase fault trips
Number of earth fault trips 40
Negative sequence / unbalance 41
Current total harmonic distortion
Voltage total harmonic distortion 42
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0S
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 43
Disturbance recording 44
Data log (DLG) 45
Synchro-check:
voltage comparison and out-of-sync context 50
Thermal capacity used
Cooling time constant 51
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping 52
Running hours and
operating time counter
Starting current and starting time 53
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time 54
Apparent positive sequence impedance
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances 55

20 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Contents

Capacitance 56
Capacitor unbalance current 57
Motor start report (MSR) 58
Motor start trend (MST) 60
VT supervision 63

2
ANSI code 60FL 63
CT supervision 65
ANSI code 60 65
Trip circuit and open/closed matching supervision 66
ANSI code 74 66
Closing circuit and open/close orders supervision 67
ANSI code 74 67
Cumulative breaking current
Number of operations 68
Operating time
Charging time 69
Number of racking out operations 70

SEPED310017EN 21
 Metering functions General settings

connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection
functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software "General
Characteristics", "CT-VT Sensors" and "Particular characteristics" tabs.

General settings Selection Value

In Rated phase current 2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs 1 A to 15 k A
(sensor primary current) 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A (1)
Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment(2) 0.2 to 1.3 In

2 In0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents

CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT
1 A/5 A CT
See In rated phase current
2 A or 20 A rating
1 A to 15 k A
Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio According to current monitored
1/n must be such that 50 n 1500) and use of ACE990
Unp Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated 0 A<In≤ 6.25 kA: 220 V ≤ Unp ≤ 250 kV
primary phase-to-neutral vol tage Vnp = Unp/ 3 ) 6.25 kA<In≤15 kA: 220V≤ Unp ≤ 20 kV
Uns Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 90 to 230 V
2 VTs: U21, U32 90 to 120 V
1 VT: U21 90 to 120 V
1 VT: V1 90 to 230 V
Uns0 Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns/3 or Uns/ 3
sequence voltage Unp/ 3
Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage 220 V to 250 kV
(generator application)
Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage 57.7 V to 133 V
(generator application)
fn Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Phase rotation direction 1-2-3 or u 1-3-2
Integration period (for demand current and peak 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
demand current and power)
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments acti ve energy 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh
Increments reactive energy 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh
S Transformer rated apparent power 100 kVA to 999 MVA
Transformer vector shift 0 to 11
Ωn Rated speed (motor, generator) 100 to 3600 rpm
R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) 1 to 1800 (Ωn x R/ 60 1500)
Zero speed se t point 5 to 20 % of Ω n
(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
(2) Even if the value is within the range, it has to be rounded according to the setting step of 1 or 10A (i.e.: Ib = 12.2A  13A).

22 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Characteristics

Functions Measurement range Accuracy (1) MSA141 Saving

Metering
Phase current 0.02 to 40 In ±0.5 % b
Residual current Calculated 0.005 to 40 In ±1 % b
Measured 0.005 to 20 In0 ±1 % b
Demand current 0.02 to 40 In ±0.5 %
Peak demand current 0.02 to 40 In ±0.5 % v
Phase-to-phase voltage 0.06 to 1.2 Unp ±0.5 % b

2
Phase-to-neutral voltage 0.06 to 1.2 Vnp ±0.5 % b
Residual voltage 0.04 to 3 Vnp ±1 %
Neutral point voltage 0.04 to 3 Vntp ±1 %
Positive sequence voltage 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp ±2 %
Negative sequence voltage 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp ±2 %
Frequency 25 to 65 Hz ±0.01 Hz b
Active power (total or per phase) 0.015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % b
Reactive power (total or per phase) 0.015 Sn to 999 MVAR ±1 % b
Apparent power (total or per phase) 0.015 Sn to 999 MVA ±1 % b
Peak demand active power 0.015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % v
Peak demand reactive power 0.015 Sn to 999 MVAR ±1 % v
Power factor -1 to + 1 (CAP/IND) ±0.01 b
Calculated active energy 0 to 2.1 x 108 MWh ±1 % ±1 digit v v
Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2.1 x 108 MVARh ±1 % ±1 digit v v
Temperature -30 °C to +200 °C or -22 °F to +392 °F ±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C b
Rotation speed 0 to 7200 rpm ±1 rpm
Network diagnosis assistance
Tripping context v
Tripping current 0.02 to 40 In ±5 % v
Number of trips 0 to 65535 - v v
Negative sequence / unbalance 1 to 500 % of Ib ±2 %
Total harmonic distortion, current 0 to 100 % ±1 %
Total harmonic distortion, voltage 0 to 100 % ±1 %
Phase displacement ϕ0 (between V0 and I0) 0 to 359° ±2°
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 (between V and I) 0 to 359° ±2°
Disturbance recording v
Amplitude difference 0 to 1.2 Usync1 ±1 %
Frequency difference 0 to 10 Hz ±0.5 Hz
Phase difference 0 to 359° ±2°
Out-of-sync context v
Machine operating assistance
Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 % (100 % for phase I = Ib) ±1 % b v v
Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 min ±1 min
Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 min ±1 min
Running hours counter / operating time 0 to 65535 hours ±1 % or ±0.5 h v v
Starting current 1.2 Ib to 40 In ±5 % v
Starting time 0 to 300 s ±300 ms v
Number of starts before inhibition 0 to 60
Start inhibit time 0 to 360 min ±1 min
Apparent impedance Zd, Z21, Z32, Z13 0 to 200 kΩ ±5 %
Capacitance 0 to 30 F ±5 %
Capacitor unbalance current 0.02 to 40 I0 ±5 %
Switchgear diagnosis assistance
Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA² ±10 % v v
Number of operations 0 to 4 x 109 - v v
Operating time 20 to 100 ms ±1 ms v v
Charging time 1 to 20 s ±0.5 s v v
Number of rackouts 0 to 65535 - v v
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup
v v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage, even without battery
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
(1) Typical accuracy, see details on subsequent pages.

SEPED310017EN 23
 Metering functions Processing of measured signals

Measured physical values

Sepam measures the following physical values:
b phase currents (3I)
DE80858

b residual current (I0)

b phase voltages (3V)
b residual voltage (V0).
Each measured signal is processed by Sepam to produce all the values necessary
for the metering, diagnosis and protection functions.

2 The charts below indicate, for the various functions, the values produced from the
signals measured, with:
b RMS = RMS value up to the 13th harmonic
b H1 = fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component
b ΣH1 = vector sum of the fundamental components of the three phases

Values produced by Sepam from the signals measured.

Values used by the metering and diagnosis

functions
3I I0 3V V0
Metering RMS H1 ΣH1 H1 RMS H1 ΣH1 H1
RMS phase current I1, I2, I3 b
Calculated residual current I0Σ b
Demand current I1, I2, I3 b
Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 b
Measured residual current I0 b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 b
Residual voltage V0 v v
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction b
Negative sequence voltage Vi b
Frequency f b
Active power P, P1, P2, P3 b b
Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 b b
Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b
Power factor b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (± Wh, ± VARh) b b
Neutral point voltage Vnt b
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3 b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b
Harmonic distortion (THD), current Ithd b b
Harmonic distortion (THD), voltage Uthd b b
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0Σ b b v v
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 b b
Thermal capacity used b
Starting current b
Switchgear diagnosis ANSI code
CT / VT supervision 60/60FL b b
Cumulative breaking current b
b standard
v according to measurement sensors connected.

24 SEPED310017EN
 Metering functions Processing of measured signals

Values used by the protection functions

3I I0 3V V0
Protections ANSI code RMS H1 ΣH1 H1 RMS H1 ΣH1 H1
Phase overcurrent 50/51 b
Earth fault 50N/51N v v
Sensitive earth fault 50G/51G
Breaker failure 50BF b

2
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 b
Thermal overload for cables 49RMS b
Generic thermal overload 49RMS b
Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS b
Thermal overload for motors 49RMS b
Thermal overload for transformers 49RMS b
Restricted earth fault 64REF b b
Directional phase overcurrent 67 b b
Directional earth fault 67N/67NC v v v v
Directional active overpower 32P b b
Directional reactive overpower 32Q b b
Directional active underpower 37P b b
Phase undercurrent 37 b
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 48/51LR b
Starts per hour 66 b
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 b b
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V b b
Underimpedance 21B b b
Positive sequence undercurrent 27D b
Remanent undervoltage 27R b
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 b
Neutral voltage displacement 59N v v
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 b
Overfrequency 81H b
Underfrequency 81L b
Rate of change of frequency 81R b
b standard
v according to measurement sensors connected.

Phase rotation direction

The rotation direction of the 3 phases of the network may be 1-2-3, or 1-3-2, the
phase order in the trigonometric (counter-clockwise) direction.
DE50333

The phase rotation direction needs to be set for correct calculation of the symmetrical
components (Vd, Vi, V0Σ, Id, Ii, I0Σ).
The phase rotation direction directly affects:
b the direction of energy flow measured in the Sepam relay
b the sign and calculation of the powers and directional functions.

Phase rotation direction 1-2-3.

DE50109

Phase rotation direction 1-3-2.

SEPED310017EN 25
 Metering functions Phase current
Residual current

Phase current
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents:
b I1: phase 1 current,
b I2: phase 2 current,
b I3: phase 3 current,
It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to the
13th.

2 Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current:

b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.02 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±2 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Residual current
Operation
This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
2 types of residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and
sensors connected to it:
b the residual currents I0Σ, calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents
b the measured residual currents I0.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current:
b CSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer
b any core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range I0Σ 0.005 to 40 In (1)
I0 measured by CSH core balance CT Rating In0 = 2 A 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
In0 = 20 A 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
I0 measured by core balance CT with ACE990 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
I0 measured by CT 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Accuracy (2) ±1 % typical at In0
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In0
±5 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In0
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) In, In0: nominal rating set in the general settings.
(2) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), excluding sensor accuracy.

26 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Demand current
and peak demand currents

Operation
Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase
currents I1, I2 and I3:
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes
b peak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current
drawn by peak loads.
Peak demand currents may be cleared. They are saved in the event of a power
failure.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
2
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Resetting to zero
b via the clear key on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed
b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link (remote control order TC4).

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.02 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±2 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In
Display format 3 significant digits
Integration period 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC4 BO12 - MSTA1.RsMaxA.ctlVal

SEPED310017EN 27
 Metering functions Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase-to-neutral voltage

Phase-to-phase voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of
the phase-to-phase voltages:
DE50334

v ( U21 = V1 – V2 ) , voltage between phases 2 and 1

2
v ( U32 = V2 – V3 ) , voltage between phases 3 and 2

v ( U13 = V3 – V1 ) , voltage between phases 1 and 3.

Readout
1-2-3 network: phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages. The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
DE50333

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.06 to 1.2 Unp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Unp
±2 % from 0.06 to 0.5 Unp
Display format 3 significant digits
1-3-2 network: phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages. Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Un rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At Unp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Phase-to-neutral voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of
the phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 measured on phases 1, 2 and 3.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.06 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Vnp
±2 % from 0.06 to 0.5 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
(2) At Vnp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

28 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage

Residual voltage
Operation
This function gives the value of the residual voltage :

V0 = V1 + V2 + V3

The residual voltage value may be:

b calculated by an open star/delta VT
b or calculated by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages.
It is based on the measurement of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component
of the voltages.
2
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.04 to 3 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vnp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
±5 % from 0.04 to 0.05 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).

Neutral point voltage

Operation
This function gives the value of the zero sequence voltage Vnt, measured at the
neutral point of a generator or motor by a dedicated VT:

Vnt = ( V1 + V2 + V3 ) ⁄ 3

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.04 Vnp to 3 Vntp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vntp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vntp
±5 % from 0.04 to 0.05 Vntp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vntp: neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage.

SEPED310017EN 29
 Metering functions Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage

Positive sequence voltage

Operation
This function calculates the value of the positive sequence voltage Vd:
b from the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vd = --- × ( V1 + aV2 + a V3 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vd = --- × ( V1 + a V2 + aV3 )

2 3
b or from the 2 phase-to-phase voltages:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vd = --- × ( U21 – a U32 )
3
1
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vd = --- × ( U21 – aU32 )
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±2 % at Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).

Negative sequence voltage

Operation
This function calculates the value of the negative sequence voltage Vi:
b from the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vi = --- × ( V1 + a V2 + aV3 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vi = --- × ( V1 + aV2 + a V3 )
3
b or from the 2 phase-to-phase voltages:
1
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vi = --- × ( U21 – aU32 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vi = --- × ( U21 – a U32 )
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±2 % at Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).

30 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Frequency

Operation
This function gives the frequency value.
Frequency is measured via the following:
b based on U21 or V1, if only one phase-to-phase voltage is connected to the Sepam
b based on positive sequence voltage in other cases.
Frequency is not measured if:
b the voltage U21 (or V1) or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 % of Un
b the frequency f is outside the measurment range.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
2
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Range 25 to 65 Hz
Resolution (1) 0.01 Hz
Accuracy (2) ±0.01 Hz
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) On SFT2841.
(2) At Unp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 31
 Metering functions Active, reactive
and apparent power

Operation
Power values are calculated from the phase currents I1, I2 and I3:
b active power = 3.U.I cos ϕ
b reactive power = 3.U.I.sin ϕ
b apparent power = 3.U.I.
According to the sensors used, power calculations may be based on the 2 or 3
wattmeter method (see table below).
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current, but it is
not applicable if the neutral is distributed.

2 The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3-phase and phase by

phase powers in all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.

Connection of voltage Connection of current P, Q, S calculation method Power per phase

channels channels P1, P2, P3
Q1, Q2, Q3
S1, S2, S3
3V I1, I2, I3 3 wattmeters Available
I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U32, U21 + V0 I1, I2, I3 3 wattmeters Available
I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U32, U21 without V0 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U21 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
The system voltage is considered to be balanced
V1 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 No calculation P1, Q1, S1 only

Power calculation
b by 3 wattmeter method:

P = V1 I1 cos (V1,I1) + V2 I2 cos (V2,I2) + V3 I3 cos (V3,I3)

Q = V1 I1 sin (V1,I1) + V2 I2 sin (V2,I2) + V3 I3 sin (V3,I3)

b by 2 wattmeter method:

P = U21 I1 cos (U21,I1) – U32 I3 cos (U32,I3)

Q = U21 I1 sin (U21,I1) – U32 I3 sin (U32,I3)

2 2
b S = P +Q .

According to standard practice, it is considered that:

b for the outgoing circuit (1):
v power supplied by the busbars is positive
v power supplied to the busbars is negative
DE50646

b for the incoming circuit (1):

v power supplied to the busbars is positive
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.
DE50647

(1) Choice to be set in the general settings.

32 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Active, reactive
and apparent power

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics

2
Active power Reactive power Apparent power
P, P1, P2, P3 Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 S, S1, S2, S3
Measurement range ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 MW) (1) ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 Mvar) (1) 1.5 % Sn at 999 MVA (1)
Units kW, MW kvar, Mvar kVA, MVA
Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar 0.1 kVA
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn
±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn (2) ±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn (3) ±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn
Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical) 1 second (typical) 1 second (typical)
(1) Sn = 3Unp.In.
(2) Cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(3) Cos ϕ < 0.6 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 33
 Metering functions Peak demand active
and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ)

Peak demand active and reactive power

Operation
This function gives the greatest demand active or reactive power value since the last
reset.
The values are refreshed after each "integration interval", an interval that may be set
from 5 to 60 min (common interval with peak demand phase currents). The values
are saved in the event of a power failure.

2 Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Resetting to zero
b via the clear key on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed
b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link (remote control order TC5).

Characteristics
Demand active power Demand reactive power
Measurement range ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 MW) (1) ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 Mvar) (1)
Units kW, MW kvar, Mvar
Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar
Accuracy ±1 %, typical (2) ±1 % typical (3)
Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits
Integration period 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
(1) Sn = 3Unp.In.
(2) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(3) At In, Unp, cos ϕ < 0.6 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC5 BO14 - MSTA1.RsMaxPwr.ctlVal

Power factor (cos ϕ)

Operation
MT10257

The power factor is defined by: cos ϕ = P ⁄ P2 + Q2 .

It expresses the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase-to-
neutral voltages.
The + and - signs and IND (inductive) and CAP (capacitive) indications give the
direction of power flow and the type of load.

Readout
MT10258

The measurements may be accessed via:

b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range -1 at 1 IND/CAP
Resolution 0.01
IEC convention Accuracy (1) 0.01 typical
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

34 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Active and reactive energy

Accumulated active and reactive energy

Operation
This function gives the following for the active and reactive energy values, calculated
according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2 and I3:
b accumulated energy conveyed in one direction
b accumulated energy conveyed in the other direction.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

2
The accumulated energy values are saved in the event of a power failure.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Active energy Reactive energy
Metering capacity 0 to 2.1 108 MW.h 0 to 2.1 108 Mvar.h
Units MW.h Mvar.h
Resolution 0.1 MW.h 0.1 Mvar.h
Accuracy ±1 % typical (1) ±1 % typical (1)
Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits
(1) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Accumulated active and reactive energy

by pulse metering
Operation
This function is used for energy metering via logic inputs. Energy incrementing is
associated with each input (one of the general parameters to be set). Each input
pulse increments the meter. 4 inputs and 4 accumulated energy metering options are
available:
b positive and negative active energy
b positive and negative reactive energy.
The accumulated active and reactive energy values are saved in the event of a
power failure.

Readout
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Active energy Reactive energy
Metering capacity 0 to 2.1 108 MW.h 0 to 2.1 108 Mvar.h
Units MW.h Mvar.h
Resolution 0.1 MW.h 0.1 Mvar.h
Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits
Increment 0.1 kW.h to 5 MW 0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.h
Pulse 15 ms min. 15 ms min.

SEPED310017EN 35
 Metering functions Temperature

Operation
This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs):
b platinum Pt100 (100 Ω at 0 °C or 32 °F) in accordance with the IEC 60751 and
DIN 43760 standards
b nickel 100 Ω or 120 Ω (at 0 °C or 32 °F).
Each RTD channel gives one measurement:
tx = RTD x temperature.
The function also indicates RTD faults:

2 b RTD disconnected (t > 205 °C or t > 401 °F)

b RTD shorted (t < -35 °C or t < -31 °F).
In the event of a fault, display of the value is inhibited.
The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key, in °C or °F
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Range -30 °C to +200 °C -22 °F to +392 °F
Resolution 1 °C 1 °F
Accuracy ±1 °C from +20 °C to +140 °C ±1.8 °F from +68 °F to +284 °F
±2 °C from -30 °C to +20 °C ±3.6 °F from -22 °F to +68 °F
±2 °C from +140 °C to +200 °C ±3.6 °F from +284 °F to +392 °F
Refresh interval 5 seconds (typical)

Accuracy derating according to wiring

b connection in 3-wire mode: the error Δt is proportional to the length of the connector
and inversely proportional to the connector cross-section:
I ( km )
Δt ( ° C ) = 2 × ----------------------
S ( mm2 )
v ±2.1 °C/km for a cross-section of 0.93 mm2 (AWG 18)
v ±1 °C/km for a cross-section of 1.92 mm2 (AWG 14).

36 SEPED310017EN
Metering functions Rotation speed

Operation
This function gives the rotation speed of a motor or generator rotor. It is calculated
by measurement of the time between two pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor
at each passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft. The
number of pulses per rotation is set in the "particular characteristics" screen of the
SFT2841 software. The proximity sensor is connected to logic input I104.

DE10359
2

1 Rotor with 2 cams.

2 Proximity sensor.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Range 0 to 7200 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Pulses per rotation (R) 1 to 1800 with Ωn R/60 y1500
(Ωn: rated speed in rpm)
Proximity sensor Pass-band (in Hz) > 2.Ωn R/60
Output 24 to 250 V DC, 3 mA minimum
Leakage current < 0.5 mA
in open status
Voltage dip in closed status < 4 V (with 24 V DC power supply)
Pulse duration 0 status > 120 μs
1 status > 200 μs

SEPED310017EN 37
 Metering functions Phasor diagram

Operation
This function displays a phasor diagram of the fundamental component of the current
and voltage measurements as acquired by Sepam without any correction. It provides
effective assistance in the checking of cables and the implementation of directional
protection functions.
It is fully parameterizable and the following choices are proposed to adapt the phasor
diagram according to requirements:
b choice of measurements to be displayed in the phasor diagram
b choice of reference phasor

2
b choice of display mode.

Measurements to be displayed
b phase currents
b residual currents measured or with sum
b symmetrical components of current Id, Ii, I0Σ/3
b phase-to-neutral voltages
b phase-to-phase voltages
b residual voltages
b symmetrical components of voltage Vd, Vi, V0/3.

Reference phasor
The reference phasor according to which the phase shifts of the other phasors
displayed are calculated may be chosen from the phase or residual current or voltage
phasors. When the reference phasor is too small (< 2 % In for currents or 5 % Un for
voltages), display is impossible.

Display mode
b Display as true values: the measurements are displayed without any modification
PE80753

in a scale chosen in relation to the respective rated values:

v 0 to 2 Max (In) for currents
v 0 to 2 Max (Unp) for voltages.
b Display as values normalized in relation to the maximum, i.e. the measurements
are normalized in relation to the greatest measurement of the same type. The
greatest measurement is displayed full scale with a modulus equal to 1, and the
others are displayed as relative values compared to the modulus 1 value. This
display provides maximum angular resolution, regardless of the measured values,
while maintaining the relative values between measurements.
b Display as values normalized to 1: all the measurements are normalized in relation
to themselves and displayed with a modulus of 1, equal to full scale. This mode
provides optimal display of the angles between phasors but does not allow moduli to
be compared.
b Display of phase-to-phase voltage values in a triangle arrangement: for a more
Phasor diagram on SFT2841
common display of phase-to-phase voltage phasors.
b Display / elimination of the scale: for more convenient reading of the displayed
phasors.

Characteristics
Diagram display options of an SFT2841 phasor diagram
Measurements to be displayed
Multiple selection from: I1, I2, I3, I0, I0Σ, Id, Ii, I0Σ/3
V1, V2, V3, V0, U21, U32, U13, Vd, Vi, V0/3
Reference phasor
Single choice from: I1, I2, I3, I0, I0Σ
V1, V2, V3, V0, U21, U32, U13
Display mode
Current display true (true value)
/ max (value normalized in relation to maximum)
= 1 (normalized to 1)
Voltage display true (true value)
/ max (value normalized in relation to maximum)
= 1 (normalized to 1)
Phase-to-phase voltage star/delta
Display of scale yes/no

38 SEPED310017EN
 Network diagnosis Tripping context
functions Tripping current

Tripping context
Operation
This function gives the values at the time of tripping (activation of the tripping contact
on output O1) to enable analysis of the cause of the fault.
Values available on the Sepam display:
b tripping currents
b residual currents I0, I0Σ

2
b phase-to-phase voltages
b residual voltage
b neutral point voltage
b frequency
b active power
b reactive power
b apparent powe
b phase rotation direction 1-2-3/1-3-2
In addition to the values available on the Sepam display, the following values are
available with the SFT2841 software:
b phase-to-neutral voltages
b negative sequence voltage
b positive sequence voltage.
The values for the last five trips are stored with the date and time of tripping.
They are saved in the event of a power failure.
Once 5 tripping contexts have been stored, the following new tripping value
overwrites the oldest tripping context in the memory.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

I TRIP 1 Tripping current

MT10180

Operation
This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip:
b TRIPI1: phase 1 current
b TRIPI2: phase 2 current
b TRIPI3: phase 3 current
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
tripping order
This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms
30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1.

Readout
T0 t
The measurements may be accessed via:
Tripping current (TRIPI1) acquisition. b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.1 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±5 % ±1 digit
Display format 3 significant digits
(1) In, rated current set in the general settings.

SEPED310017EN 39
 Network diagnosis Number of phase fault trips
functions Number of earth fault trips

Number of phase fault trips

Operation
This function counts the network phase faults that have caused circuit breaker
tripping.
It counts only trips triggered by protection functions 50/51, 50V/51V and 67, when the
circuit breaker is closed.
If there is discrimination between several circuit breakers, the fault is only counted by
the Sepam that issues the trip order.

2 Transient faults cleared by the recloser are counted.

The number of phase fault trips is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Number of earth fault trips

Operation
This function counts earth faults on the network that have caused circuit breaker
tripping.
It counts only trips triggered by protection functions 50N/51N and 67N when the
circuit breaker is closed.
If there is discrimination between several circuit breakers, the fault is only counted by
the Sepam that issues the trip order.
Transient faults cleared by the recloser are counted.

The number of earth fault trips is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

40 SEPED310017EN
Network diagnosis Negative sequence / unbalance
functions

Operation
This function gives the negative sequence component: T = Ii/Ib.
The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents:
b 3 phases:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Ii = --- × ( I1 + a I2 + aI3 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Ii = --- × ( I1 + aI2 + a I3 )
3

2
b 2 phases:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: I i = ------- × I1 – a I3
3
1
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: I i = ------- × I1 – aI3
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e

When there are no earth faults, the formulas for 2 phase currents are equivalent to
those for 3 phase currents.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 10 to 500 %
Units % Ib
Resolution 1%
Accuracy ±2 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

SEPED310017EN 41
 Network diagnosis Current total harmonic distortion
functions Voltage total harmonic distortion

Current total harmonic distortion

Operation
Current total harmonic distortion Ithd may be used to assess the quality of the
current. It is calculated based on phase I1, taking into account harmonics up to the
13th.

Ithd is calculated over 50 periods using the following formula:

2
2
RMS
Ithd = 100 % ⎛⎝ --------------⎞⎠ – 1
H1
with:
RMS = RMS value of current I1 up to the 13th harmonic
H1 = value of the fundamental of current I1

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 100 %
Units %
Resolution 0.1 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Voltage total harmonic distortion

Operation
Voltage total harmonic distortion Uthd may be used to assess the quality of the
voltage. It is calculated based on the measurement of U21 or V1 according to the
configuration, taking into account harmonics up to the 9th.

Uthd is calculated over 50 periods using the following formula:

2
RMS
Uthd = 100 % ⎛⎝ --------------⎞⎠ – 1
H1
with:
RMS = RMS value of voltage U21 or V1 up to the 9th harmonic
H1 = value of the fundamental of voltage U21 or V1

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 100 %
Units %
Resolution 0.1 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

42 SEPED310017EN
 Network diagnosis Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0Σ
functions Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3

Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0Σ

Operation
DE50412

This function gives the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage
and residual current in the trigonometric (counter-clockwise) direction (see diagram).
The measurement is useful during commissioning to check that the directional earth
fault protection unit is connected correctly.
Phase displacement ϕo.
Three values are available:

2
b ϕ0, angle between V0 and measured I0
b ϕ0Σ, angle between V0 and I0Σ calculated as the sum of the phase currents.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 2 seconds (typical)

Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3

I1 Operation
MT11029

This function gives the phase displacement between the V1, V2, V3 voltages
and I1, I2, I3 currents respectively, in the trigonometric (counter-clockwise) direction
1 (see diagram).
V1
The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned to check that the voltage
Phase displacement ϕ1. and current inputs are wired correctly. When the phase-to-phase voltages U21 and
U32 are connected to Sepam and there is no measurement of residual voltage V0,
the residual voltage is presumed to be zero. The function does not operate when only
the voltage U21 or V1 is connected to Sepam.
This function takes into account the convention regarding the direction of flow of
energy in the outgoing and incoming circuits (see "Power measurements").
Therefore, the angles ϕ1, ϕ2 and ϕ3 are adjusted by 180° with respect to the values
acquired by Sepam for the incoming circuits.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 2 seconds (typical)

SEPED310017EN 43
 Network diagnosis Disturbance recording
functions

Operation
This function is used to record analog signals and logical states.
The storage of recordings is activated by one or more events set using the SFT2841
software.
The stored event begins before the event and continues afterwards.
Recordings comprise the following information:
b values sampled from the different signals
b date
b characteristics of the recorded channels.

2 The duration and number of recordings may be set using the SFT2841 software tool.
The files are recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: when the
maximum number of recordings is reached, the oldest recording is erased when a
new recording is triggered.
Transfer
Files may be transferred locally or remotely:
b locally: using a PC which is connected to the front panel and includes the SFT2841
software tool
b remotely: using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control
system.
Recovery
The signals are recovered from a recording by means of the software tool compatible
with COMTRADE format.

Block diagram
stored record
MT10181

time

triggering event

Characteristics
Recording content Set-up file:
date, channel characteristics, measuring chain
transformer ratio
Sample file:
recorded signals
Sampling frequency (1) 12 or 36 samples per network period
Analog signals recorded (2) I1, I2, I3, I0 current channels
V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32, phase voltage channels
V0 or Vnt residual voltage channels
Logical states recorded (1) (3) Some or all of the following data is recorded:
b all logic inputs / outputs
b all GOOSE logic inputs G401 to G416 and G501 to
G516 (if recording configured in SFT2841 software
disturbance recording screen)
b pick-up signal
b 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor
(V_FLAGREC)
Number of recordings stored (1) 1 to 19
Total duration of a recording (1) 1 s to 20 s
Maximum recording capacity 22 s at 50 Hz, 12 samples per period
(dist. rec. memory usage = 100 %) 18 s at 60 Hz, 12 samples per period
7 s at 50 Hz, 36 samples per period
6 s at 60 Hz, 36 samples per period
Periods recorded before triggering 0 to 99 periods
event (1)
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
(1) To be set using the SFT2841 software.
(2) According to type and connection of sensors.
(3) According to Sepam hardware configuration.

44 SEPED310017EN
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions

Operation
This function is used to record and back up a set of measurements available in the
Sepam relay, in the form of a COMTRADE file. The number of backed-up files and
the number of measurements per file depend on the type of cartridge installed. The
recording mode and selection of measurements can be configured by the user via
the SFT2841 software.
Back up any existing files before changing the DLG The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
function parameter settings as this will result in loss of of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest.

2
the existing files. Using the DLG function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's active
Any change to the Sepam time affects the Data logs protection functions.
because the time system in which they operate will
have changed.
If a Data log (in Circular or Limited mode) is in progress, Transfer
the corresponding operating mode is as follows: The files can be retrieved on a medium external to the Sepam locally or remotely:
the Data log is stopped Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
the user must explicitly reset the command he has software
triggered before being able to trigger another one. Remotely: when the Sepam has the ACE850 and ACE969 communication
modules (TP and FO) and a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred. A remote indication data item is created at
the end of recording.

Read
The files can be viewed after being transferred to a PC using software compatible
with the COMTRADE format.

Operating modes
After starting up the DLG function, the measurements are captured continuously.
The stop condition and file management differ according to which of the following 2
modes is used:
Limited (default mode): the DLG function stops automatically when the end of
recording time is reached or on receipt of an external event (a logic input for
example). However, the method used to stop must be the same as that used for
startup. Thus, it is not possible to start a Data log using the SFT2841 software and
stop it with a remote control order (TC)
Circular: the file content is managed in a FIFO memory: when the file is full, the
write operation continues and starts again at the start of the file. Stopping the write
operation only results from an external event. In the absence of the stop command,
recording is continuous.

These 2 modes are exclusive: it is not possible to have a Data log configured in
Limited mode simultaneously with a Data log configured in Circular mode.

Space not
DE81242

used in the file

file1 file2 file3 file4 Space available

4
T
T

AR
AR

T
ST
ST

AR
ST

1 2

3 STOP

Data log in Limited mode.

SEPED310017EN 45
 Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions

DE81243
2
file1 file2 file3 file4 file5 file6 file7

2
1 Triggering event

The figure below illustrates the principle of padding on a short-lived interruption and
a prolonged interruption for a Data log configured in Circular mode.
1
DE81244

A (most recent data) B (oldest data)

Most recent data Oldest data

2 STOP
Circular mode: stopping recording

Downgraded operation
In the event of loss of the power supply during execution of the Data log function,
storage is interrupted then automatically restarted when the power supply returns.
In both Limited and Circular configuration modes, on restarting the value 0x8000 is
recorded in the file as a padding value for the period of non-operation.
The figure below illustrates the principle of padding on a short-lived interruption and
a prolonged interruption for a Data log configured in Limited mode.
The principle of padding does not apply to a Data log configured in Limited mode and
deliberately stopped by the user prior to completion.
DE81245

Padding
Case 1 “Limited” data log no. 1

Padding
Case 2 “Limited” data log no. 2 End of data log

Loss of power supply Programmed end of Case 2

Programmed end of Case 1

Limited mode: padding after interruption of the recording.

46 SEPED310017EN
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions

DE81246
Padding

2 Resumption

1 LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY

2
DE81247
Padding Padding

2 Resumption

1 LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY

Circular mode: padding after interruption of the recording.

Characteristics
Configuration parameters
Content of a COMTRADE file Configuration file (*.CFG):
date, variable characteristics, transformation
ratio of the selected variable values
Samples file (*.DAT):
recorded variables
Total file duration 1 s to 30 days
Sampling period 1 s to 24 hours
Variables available for recording See the table of available data below.
Number of files 1 to 20
Number of variables per file 1 to 15
Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
b Logic equation
b Remote communication
b Logic or GOOSE input
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
Nota : These parameters are configured with the SFT2841 software.

The following measurements, when available in the Sepam relay, can be selected using the
SFT2841 software.
Available measurements Designation Units
Current
Phase current I1 A
(main inputs) I2
I3
Measured residual current I0m A
Calculated residual current I0c A
Demand current I1ave A
I2ave
I3ave
Peak demand current I1max A
I2max
I3max

SEPED310017EN 47
 Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions

Available data Designation Units

Voltage
Phase-to-neutral voltages V1 V
(main inputs) V2
V3
Phase-to-phase voltages U21 V
(main inputs) U32
U13
Residual voltage V0 V
V’0

2 Neutral-point voltage
Positive-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Vnt
Vd
Vi
V
V
V
Frequency F Hz
Energy
Active power P MW
Active peak demand power Pmax MW
Active power per phase P1 MW
P2
P3
Reactive power Q Mvar
Reactive peak demand power Qmax Mvar
Reactive power per phase Q1 Mvar
Q2
Q3
Apparent power S MVA
Apparent power per phase S1 MVA
S2
S3
Power factor (cos ϕ) cosPhi MVA
Active energy meter (+ and -) Eam+ MW.h
Eam-
Calculated active energy meter Eac+ MW.h
(+ and -) Eac-
Reactive energy meter (+ and -) Erm+ Mvar.h
Erm-
Calculated reactive energy meter Erc+ Mvar.h
(+ and -) Erc-
Other
Rotor speed of rotation meas.speed rpm
Temperature T1 to T16 ° C /° F
Network diagnosis
Unbalance ratio Ii / Ib % Ib
Current THD Ithd %
Voltage THD Uthd %
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ0Σ ϕ0, ϕ0Σ °
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 °

48 SEPED310017EN
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions

Available data Designation Units

Assistance with maintenance
Thermal capacity used Ech %
Running hours counter Ch hours
Positive-sequence and phase-to-earth Zd Ω
apparent impedances Z21
Z32
Z13
Breaking current monitoring S(kA)2 (kA)2

2
Capacitive current unbalance Ir’0 A
Input
Designation Syntax Equations
Triggering DLG V_DLG_START b
Output
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Recording in progress V_DLG_TRIGGED b

SEPED310017EN 49
 Network diagnosis Synchro-check:
functions voltage comparison and
out-of-sync context

Operation
Voltage comparison
For the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the
amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked,
Usynch1 and Usynch2.
The measurement of the differences between the 2 voltages is useful to implement
the function and identify the value that is impeding synchronization. The differences
are calculated in the following order: amplitude, frequency and phase. As soon as a
difference is greater than the threshold set in the synchro-check function, the

2 following differences are not calculated.

Out-of-sync context
Out-of-sync context gives a precise indication of the cause of the failure of a
synchronization request.
It is only provided when the switchgear control function with the "closing with
synchro-check" option is activated.

When a synchronization request fails, the amplitude, frequency and phase

differences of the Usynch1 and Usynch2 voltages measured by the MCS025 module
are recorded, with the date and time, at the end of the switchgear control function
"closing request time" delay.

Readout
The amplitude, frequency and phase differences and out-of-sync context may be
accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Amplitude difference
Measurement range 0 to 120 % of Usynch1 (or Vsynch1)
Unit % of Usynch1 (or Vsynch1)
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy ±2 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Frequency difference
Measurement range 0 to 10 Hz
Unit Hz
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Accuracy 0.05 Hz
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Phase difference
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Unit °
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

50 SEPED310017EN
Machine operation Thermal capacity used
assistance functions Cooling time constant

Thermal capacity used

Operation
The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal overload protection function
for cables, capacitors or machines.
The thermal capacity used is related to the load. The thermal capacity used
measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity.

Saving of thermal capacity used

The thermal capacity used is saved in the event of a Sepam power outage. The
saved value is used again after the outage. 2
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Resetting to zero
The thermal capacity used may be reset to zero, after entry of a password, on:
b the Sepam display via the clear key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 800 %
Units %
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1%
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Cooling time constant

Operation
The machine thermal overload protection function (49 RMS machine) uses a cooling
time constant (T2) that may be entered by the user, according to the data given by
the machine manufacturer or automatically learnt by Sepam.
T2 is estimated:
b after a heating/cooling sequence:
v heating period detected by ES > 70 %
v followed by a shutdown detected by I < 10 % of Ib
b when the machine temperature is measured by RTDs connected to MET148-2
module no. 1:
v RTD 1, 2 or 3 assigned to motor/generator stator temperature measurement
v RTD 1, 3 or 5 assigned to transformer temperature measurement.
After each new heating/cooling sequence is detected, a new T2 value is estimated
and displayed in the related SFT2841 screen. Measurement accuracy may be
improved by using RTD 8 to measure the ambient temperature.
The machine thermal overload function has 2 groups of thermal settings for cases
such as natural or forced ventilation or 2-speed motors. A time constant is estimated
for each group of thermal settings.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 5 to 600 min
Units min
Resolution 1 min
Accuracy ±5 %
Display format 3 significant digits

SEPED310017EN 51
 Machine operation Operating time before tripping
assistance functions Waiting time after tripping

Remaining operating time before overload

tripping
Operation
The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal overload protection function
for cables, capacitors or machines. The time depends on the thermal capacity used.

Readout

2
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Waiting time before authorization of

overload closing
Operation
This period corresponds to the time it takes the motor to have cooled down enough
to allow restarting without tripping again.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

52 SEPED310017EN
 Machine operation Running hours and
assistance functions operating time counter
Starting current and starting time

Running hours and operating time counter

The counter gives the running total time during which the protected device (motor,
generator or transformer) has been operating, i.e. whenever a phase current is over
10% Ib.
The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software.
The counters are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Readout

2
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Range 0 to 65535
Units hours

Starting current and starting time

Operation
The starting time is defined as follows:
DE80237

b If the locked rotor/excessive starting time protection (ANSI code 48/51LR) is

active, the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase
currents exceeds Is and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below Is, Is being
the value of the current set point for protection function 48/51LR.
b If the locked rotor/excessive starting time protection (ANSI code 48/51LR) is not
active, the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase
currents exceeds 1.2 Ib and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below 1.2 Ib.
The maximum phase current obtained during this time corresponds to the starting
current.
Both values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
or Is Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Starting time
Measurement range 0 to 300 s
Units s or ms
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Starting current
Measurement range 48/51LR active Is to 24 In (1)
48/51LR inactive 1.2 Ib to 24 In (1)
Units A or kA
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Or 65.5 kA.

SEPED310017EN 53
 Machine operation Number of starts before inhibition
assistance functions Start inhibit time

Number of starts before inhibition

Operation
The number of starts allowed before inhibition is calculated by the number of starts
protection function (ANSI code 66).
The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor.

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:

2 b the Sepam display via the key

b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Resetting to zero
The number of starts counters may be reset to zero, after entry of a password, on:
b the Sepam display via the clear key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 60
Units None
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Start inhibit time

Operation
The start inhibit time only applies to the motor application M61. It depends on both
the starts per hour protection (ANSI code 66) and the machine thermal overload
protection (ANSI code 49RMS) if they have been activated. This time expresses the
waiting time until another start is allowed.

If at least one of these functions picks up, a "START INHIBIT" message informs the
user that starting is not allowed.

Readout
The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 360 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

54 SEPED310017EN
Machine operation Apparent positive sequence
assistance functions impedance
Apparent phase-to-phase
impedances

Apparent positive sequence impedance

Operation
Apparent positive sequence impedance is used to facilitate the implementation of the
underimpedance field loss protection function (ANSI 40).
Vd
Zd = -----------
Id

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
2
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 200 kΩ
Units Ω
Resolution 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Un, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Apparent phase-to-phase impedances

Operation
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances are used to facilitate the implementation of
the backup underimpedance protection function (ANSI 21B). They are expressed as
the ratio of phase-to-phase voltage to phase-to-phase current.

U21
Z21 = -------------- with I21 = I1 – I2
I 21

U32 with I32 = I2 – I3

Z32 = --------------
I 32

U13 with I13 = I3 – I1

Z13 = --------------
I 13

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 200 kΩ
Units Ω
Resolution 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Un, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 55
 Machine operation Capacitance
assistance functions

Operation
This operation gives the total capacitance for each phase of the connected capacitor
to allow the condition of the capacitors to be monitored.
It covers star and delta connections (parameter set in the "Particular characteristics"
screen of the SFT2841 setting and operating software). For this measurement, the
installation is considered a perfect capacitance, without any consideration of the
resistances added by the connection of the capacitors.
b Capacitances measured for star-connected capacitors:
v C1: total capacitance phase 1

2 v C2: total capacitance phase 2

v C3: total capacitance phase 3
b Capacitances measured for delta-connected capacitors:
v C21: total capacitance between phases 1 and 2
v C32: total capacitance between phases 2 and 3
v C13: total capacitance between phases 3 and 1.

Readout
The capacitance measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 30 F
Unit µF, mF or F
Resolution 0.1 µF
Accuracy ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Accuracy
The measurement accuracy is valid if the resistance and inductance per phase of the
capacitor bank connecting cable (cable between the Sepam CT and the capacitors)
respect the following conditions:
b for a star-connected bank:
1 where R is the resistance per phase in Ω
Lω < 0.05 × ------
-
Cω L is the inductance per phase in H
1
R < 0.027 × ------ ω is the angular frequency in radians/s
-
Cω C is the total capacitance per phase in F

b for a delta-connected bank:

1 where R is the resistance per phase in Ω
Lω < 0.017 × ------ -
Cω L is the inductance per phase in H
1 ω is the angular frequency in radians/s
R < 0.009 × -------
Cω C is the total capacitance between phases in F

56 SEPED310017EN
 Machine operation Capacitor unbalance current
assistance functions

Operation
This function measures the unbalance current of double star-connected capacitors.
DE80944

This type of current is characteristic of capacitor module damage.

The measurement is carried out via the residual current input I0.

Readout
C60 The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key

2
b the screen of a PC with the SFT2841 software
I0 b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.02 to 20 I0
Unit A
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

SEPED310017EN 57
 Machine operation help Motor start report (MSR)
function

Operation
This Data log function, available only in motor applications, is used to view in the form
of curves how some measurements change during motor starting.
The number of measurements and recording duration can be configured using the
SFT2841 software.
Back up any existing files before changing the MSR The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
function parameter settings as this will result in loss of of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest.
the existing files. Using the Motor start report function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's
active protection functions.

2 A Motor start report in progress cannot be interrupted by another motor start.

In the event of loss of the power supply or changes to parameters apart from the
duration, the sampling frequency and/or the selected variables, the file currently being
recorded is still saved (it is however ignored when calculating the MST), but the
completed files are backed up using the battery.

Transfer
The files are transferred locally or remotely:
b Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
software
b Remotely: using a ACE850 and ACE969 communication module (TP and FO) and
a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred.

Read
The files can be viewed:
b after downloading, on a PC screen, using the WaveWin software
b on the Sepam display using the key then the Diagnosis menu.

In the latter case, depending on the type of Sepam display (integrated advanced UMI
or integrated mimic-based UMI), up to three graphics can be viewed. Each graphic
is used to display 2 curves corresponding to the selected variables using the
SFT2841 software.
1 Time tagging of the selected file and file selection
zone 1
DE81164

2 Name of the 1st variable associated with the Y-axis MSR 2001/01/01 00:59:00.364
3 Selection zone for the variable to be associated
with the Y-axis 447A 11.7kV
4 Maximum value observed for the recorded variable
5 Duration of read time

Id fund <2s> Vd fund 3

2
4 0.00x1 0.00x1

Rotor temp <2s> C

0.00rpm 447A

calc. speed <2s> Id fund

5

Remote
Local
Test

View of 3 graphics relating to 1 MSR on an integrated mimic-based UMI.

58 SEPED310017EN
Machine operation help Motor start report (MSR)
functions

Configuring the display

1 To select the MSR file to be viewed:
Press the key as many times as necessary, with the current file selection
zone active (item 1).
The file number in the series is briefly displayed before giving way to the time-
tagged data.
2 To associate one of the selected variables with each Y-axis:

2
b Select the axis to be configured by moving to the symbol using the (go to
the previous axis) and (go to the next axis) keys.
b Once the axis has been selected, use the key to modify the variable to be
used. The screen is automatically refreshed.
Pressing the key can briefly hide the values appearing on the graphics. This
option is only found on the integrated advanced UMI.
Note: The curve display on Sepam should be used with caution because it does not achieve the
accuracy obtained with COMTRADE file viewing software.
Characteristics
Configuration parameters
Content of a COMTRADE file Configuration file (*.CFG):
date, variable characteristics, transformation ratio of the
selected variable values
Samples file (*.DAT):
recorded variables
Total file duration 2 s to 144 s
Sampling frequency Depends on the configured duration (144 s maximum).
Example: For a duration of 144 s the frequency is 1 Hz,
for a duration of 2 s the frequency is 72 Hz.
Variables available for recording See the table of available data below.
Number of files 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
Number of variables per file 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
Note: These parameters are configured with the SFT 2841 software.

Available data Designation Units

Phase-to-phase voltages u21_fund V
U21, U32, U13 u32_fund
u13_fund
I1, I2, I3 i1_fund A
i2_fund
i3_fund
Temperature T1_to_T16 °C/°F
Rotor speed of rotation (1) calc.speed rpm
Rotor speed of rotation (2) meas.speed rpm
Rotor resistance (3) Rr+ Ω
Rotor thermal capacity used (3) Rotor_temp pu
Stator resistance (4) Rs Ω
Stator thermal capacity used (3) Stator_temp pu
Motor thermal capacity used (3) Motor_temp pu
Positive-sequence current Id_fund A
(1) The value used is that provided by the 49RMS motor thermal Negative-sequence current Ii_fund A
overload protection if this has been activated. Positive-sequence voltage Vd_fund V
(2) The value used is that for input I104 if the 49RMS generic
Negative-sequence voltage Vi_fund V
thermal overload protection has been activated.
(3) The value used is that provided by the 49RMS motor thermal Measured residual current Io_fund A
overload protection if this has been activated. The value is 0 if Calculated residual current Sum_Io A
the 49RMS generic thermal overload protection has been Residual voltage Vo_fund V
activated.
Motor torque (3) C pu
(4) The value used is that for the active 49RMS protection:
motor thermal overload or generic thermal overload. Slip (1) g pu
(5) Only available for the main voltage channels. Frequency (5) F Hz

Input
Designation Syntax Equations
Triggering MSR V_MSR_START b
Output
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
MSR in progress V_MSR_TRIGGED b

SEPED310017EN 59
 Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions

Operation
This function, only available for motor applications, is related to the Motor start trend
function. It is used to calculate and display in the form of curves the minimum, demand
and maximum values for each value recorded by the Motor start report function
(MSR).
These recalculated values which are stored in a file of 144 samples covering a 30-
day period, can be viewed on the Sepam screen. When the current 30-day period
has ended, it is automatically archived in COMTRADE format and will no longer be
able to be viewed on the Sepam display (see the Read section).

2 The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest. The number of files available is 12.
The trends are only recalculated at the end of each Motor start report.
DE81248
MSR

MSR1 10 ...

MSR2 20 ...

MSR3 90 ...

Maximum 90 ...
Demand 52.5 ... MST
Minimum 10 ...

1 2 3 144 Samples
Calculating an MST using the available MSRs.

A Motor start report interrupted prior to completion is not taken into account when
calculating the Motor start trend function.
Using the Motor start report function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's
active protection functions.
Comment on managing date changes:
On changing to a date prior to the start date of the current MST, this MST is not
closed and any new MSR will be taken into account in its calculation.
On changing to a date after the end date of the current MST, this MST is closed and
a new MST is created.
Transfer
The files are transferred locally or remotely:
b Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
software
b Remotely: using a ACE850 and ACE969 communication module (TP and FO) and
a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred.

Downloading an MST file for the current period is automatically cancelled in the
following cases:
b Triggering an MSR
b Triggering calculation of an MST at the end of an MSR.
Downloading an MST file for another period is automatically cancelled when this file
is the oldest and needs to be replaced by a new file due to the FIFO memory being
full.

60 SEPED310017EN
Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions

Read
b The current file and all completed files can be downloaded and viewed on a PC
screen, using software compatible with the COMTRADE format.
b Only the current file can be viewed on the Sepam display:
1 Press the key
2 Select the Diagnosis menu
3 Press the key

2
Depending on the type of Sepam display (integrated advanced UMI or integrated
mimic-based UMI), 1 to 3 graphics can be viewed simultaneously. Each graphic can
be used to restore curves representing the change in the minimum, demand and
maximum values for the values recorded by the Motor start report function (MSR).
Note: The curve display on Sepam should be used with caution because it does not achieve the
accuracy obtained with COMTRADE file viewing software.

1 Time tagging of the current file

2 Selection of the variable to be associated with the
DE81165

Y-axis MST 2001/01/01 00:00:10.036 1

3 Name of the analyzed variable
2.56 kA
4 Duration of read time for each file max
demand

min

2 Id fund <2s>

11.7kV

Vd fund <2s> 4
3
0.00x1

Rotor temp <2s>

Remote
Local
Test

View of 3 graphics relating to an MST on an integrated mimic-based UMI.

Block diagrams
MSR no. 5 is incomplete and is not
included in the MST calculation
DE81249

MST calculated MST calculated on a base of 2 MSRs,

on a base of 4 MSRs one of which is incomplete

MSR1 MSR2 MSR3 MSR4 MSR6

MST – month n MST – month n+1

30-day period 30-day period

Taking account of the MSRs when calculating an MST.

The current MST file is only refreshed when recording of the MSR file is complete.
The current MST file is archived 30 days after its creation. A new MST file is initiated
after the 1st restart in the following period.

SEPED310017EN 61
 Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions

DE81250
MSR1

MSR2
MSR 3
incomplete
Trigger MST
calculation MSR4

max
max

demand
demand
max
demand
min

min

min
Evolution of an MST file during the operating time of the observed motor starts.

Characteristics
Content of a COMTRADE file Configuration file (*.CFG):
date, variable characteristics, transformation ratio of the
selected variable values
Samples file (*.DAT):
recorded variables
Total file duration 30 days/144 samples
Sampling period 5 hours
Variables available for recording See table of available data for the MST function.
Number of files 1 to 12 with standard cartridge
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
Note: These parameters are configured with the SFT 2841 software.

62 SEPED310017EN
Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision
functions ANSI code 60FL

Operation Block diagram: phase voltage fault detection.

The VT (Voltage Transformer) supervision function is
Partial loss of phase voltages
used to supervise the complete phase and residual

DE80996
voltage measurement chain:
Ii Ii < Isi
b voltage transformers
b VT connection to Sepam
T1 0
b Sepam voltage analog inputs. &

The function processes the following failures: Vi Vi > Vsi

2
b partial loss of phase voltages, detected by:
v presence of negative sequence voltage
circuit breaker
v and absence of negative sequence current closed
b loss of all phase voltages, detected by:
v presence of current on one of the three phases Loss of all phase voltages
v and absence of all measured voltages
max (voltages measured)
b tripping of the phase VT (and/or residual VT) < 10 % Unp
protection relay, detected by the acquisition on a logic
1
input of the fuse blown contact or auxiliary contact of & T2 0
the circuit breaker protecting the VTs max (I1, I2, I3)
> 10 % In
b other types of failures may be processed using the
logic equation editor.
circuit breaker
closed
The "Phase voltage fault" and "Residual voltage fault"
voltage presence
information disappears automatically when the PVTS_1_117
situation returns to normal, i.e. as soon as:
b the cause of the fault has disappeared
phase VT fuse blown 1 phase voltage fault
b and all of the measured voltages are present.
phase VT fuse 0 PVTS_1_3
Use of circuit breaker closed information and
PVTS_1_103
The "circuit breaker closed" information is used to “VT fault message”
detect the loss of one, two or three voltages, if it is
min. (voltages measured) > 40% Unp
connected to a logic input.
In certain applications, the position of the circuit
breaker is not sufficient to determine the presence of
voltages. In such cases, the equation editor can be
Block diagram: residual voltage fault detection.
used to precisely define the conditions for voltage
presence. phase voltage fault
PVTS_1_3 &
DE80998

V0 1 residual voltage fault

(no residual VT)
V0 VT fuse blown

“V0 VT fault” message

Consequences of a VT fault on protection functions

A "Phase voltage fault" affects the following protection functions:
b 21B, 27, 27D, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 47, 51V
b 59, only in cases where the protection function is set up for phase-to-neutral
overvoltage, when the voltages are measured by two phase VTs + V0VTs
b 67.

A "residual voltage fault" affects the following protection functions:

b 59N
b 67N/67NC.

The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a "Phase voltage fault" or
Residual voltage fault" is to be set up and the following choices are proposed:
b for protection functions 21B, 27, 27D, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 47, 51V, 59N, 59:
inhibition or no inhibition
b for protection function 67: inhibition or non-directional operation (50/51)
b for protection function 67N/67NC: inhibition or non-directional operation
(50N/ 51N).

SEPED310017EN 63
 Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision
functions ANSI code 60FL

Setting advice
The partial loss of voltages is based on the detection of the presence of negative
sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current.
By default:
b the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when: Vi > 10 % Vnp (Vsi)
b the absence of negative sequence current is detected when: Ii < 5 % In (Isi)
b time delay T1 is 1 s.
These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event
of short-circuits or transient phenomena on the network.

2 The Isi set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks.
Time delay T1 is to be set shorter than the voltage and power protection function
tripping times.
Time delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the
time it takes for a short-circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50/51 or 67,
to avoid the detection of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3-phase short-
circuit.
The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2
time delays used for the detection of voltage losses.

Characteristics
Validation of the detection of partial loss of phase voltages
Setting Yes / No
Vsi set point
Setting 10 % to 100 % of Vnp
Accuracy ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Pick-up / drop-out ratio 95 % ±2.5 %
Isi set point
Setting 5 % to 100 % of In
Accuracy ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Pick-up / drop-out ratio 105 % ±2.5 % or > (1 + 0.01 In/Isi) x 100 %
Time delay T1 (partial loss of phase voltages)
Setting 0.1 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Validation of the detection of the loss of all phase voltages
Setting Yes / No
Detection of the loss of all voltages with verification of the presence of current
Setting Yes / No
Voltage presence detected by
Setting Breaker closed / Logic equation
Time delay T2 (loss of all voltages)
Setting 0.1 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Voltage and power protection behavior
Setting No action / inhibition
Protection 67 behavior
Setting Non-directional / inhibition
Protection 67N/67NC behavior
Setting Non-directional / inhibition
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Phase VT fault PVTS_1_103 b
Inhibition of function PVTS_1_113 b
Voltage presence PVTS_1_117 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Function output PVTS_1_3 b b
Function inhibited PVTS_1_16 b

64 SEPED310017EN
Switchgear diagnosis CT supervision
functions ANSI code 60

Operation
The CT (Current Transformer) supervision function is used to supervise the complete
phase current measurement chain:
b phase current sensors (1 A/5 A CTs or LPCTs)
b phase current sensor connection to Sepam
b Sepam phase current analog inputs.
The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected.
The "CT fault" information disappears automatically when the situation returns to
normal, i.e. as soon as the 3 phase currents are measured and have values greater
than 10 % of In.
In the event of the loss of a phase current, the following protection functions may be
2
inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping:
b 21B, 46, 40, 32P, 37P, 32Q, 64REF
b 51N and 67N, if I0 is calculated by the sum of the phase currents.

Block diagram

I1 < 1 % In
DE80997

I2 > 5 % In

< 1,2 In
loss of phase 1
&
I3 > 5 % In

T1 0
1 CT fault
< 1,2 In PCTS_1_3

I2
110° < angle (I3, I2) < 130°
I3
loss of phase 2

loss of phase 3

Characteristics
Time delay
Setting 0.15 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ± 25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Inhibition of protection functions 21B, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 46, 51N, 64REF, 67N
Setting No action / inhibition
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Inhibition of function PCTS_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Delayed output PCTS_1_3 b b
Phase 1 fault PCTS_1_7 b
Phase 2 fault PCTS_1_8 b
Phase 3 fault PCTS_1_9 b
Function inhibited PCTS_1_16 b

SEPED310017EN 65
 Switchgear diagnosis Trip circuit and open/closed
functions matching supervision
ANSI code 74

Operation
This supervision function is designed for trip circuits:
DE10364

DE50111 b with shunt trip units

The function detects:
v circuit continuity
v loss of supply
v mismatching of position indication contacts.
The function inhibits closing of the breaking device.
b with undervoltage trip units

2 The function detects:

v only mismatching of position indication contacts, trip unit supervision being
unnecessary in this case.
Connection for shunt trip unit Connection for undervoltage The information is accessible in the matrix ("trip circuit" message) and via remote
supervision. trip unit supervision. indication TS1.

Block diagram
DE81061

Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Trip circuit supervision fault V_TCS b

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS1 BI17 1, 160, 36 XCBR1.EEHealth.stVal

66 SEPED310017EN
 Switchgear diagnosis Closing circuit and open/close
functions orders supervision
ANSI code 74

Closing circuit supervision

DE10365

Operation
This function monitors closing coil continuity. It calls for the wiring diagram opposite,
connected to a logic input configured with the "Closing coil supervision" function.
The information is accessible in the matrix ("closing circuit" message) and via remote
indication TS234.

Block diagram
2
DE10417

Connection for closing circuit Outputs

supervision. Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Closing circuit supervision fault V_CCS b

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS234 BI121 2, 21, 23 XCBR1.EEHealth.stVal

Open/close orders supervision

Operation
Following a circuit breaker open or close order, the system checks whether, after a
200 ms time delay, the circuit breaker has actually changed status.
If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent, a "Control fault"
message and remote indication TS2 are generated.

Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Control fault V_CTRLFAUT b
(circuit breaker monitoring)

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS2 BI16 1, 20, 5 Command Termination -

SEPED310017EN 67
 Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current
functions Number of operations

Cumulative breaking current monitoring

Operation
This function gives the cumulative breaking current in (kA)2 for five current ranges.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component on current channels (I).
The current ranges displayed are:
b 0 < I < 2 In
b 2 In < I < 5 In
b 5 In < I < 10 In

2 b 10 In < I < 40 In
b I > 40 In.
This function gives the cumulative breaking current in (kA)² for five current
ranges.This value is monitored by an adjustable set point. When the set point is
overrun, an alarm is sent and is available in the matrix and via remote indication
TS235.
Each value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into
account the real state of a breaking device used.
Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Cumulative breaking current measured
Range 0 to 65535 (kA)2
Units primary (kA)2
Resolution 1(kA)2
Accuracy (1) ±10 % ±1 digit
Alarm set point
Setting 0 to 65535 (kA)2
Resolution 1(kA)2
Accuracy (1) ±10 % ±1 digit
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Cumulative breaking current V_MAXBRKCUR b
threshold overrun
(1) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS235 BI135 2, 21, 40 XCBR1.SumSwAAlm.stVal

Number of operations
Operation
The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations.
It is activated by tripping orders (O1 relay).
The number of operations is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Range 0 to 4.109
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

68 SEPED310017EN
Switchgear diagnosis Operating time
functions Charging time

Operating time
Operation
This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device (1)
and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the I102 input (2)
The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Readout

2
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
(2) Optional MES module.

Characteristics
Measurement range 20 to 300
Units ms
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy ±2 ms typical
Display format 3 significant digits

Charging time
Operation
This function gives the value of the breaking device (1) operating mechanism charging
time, determined according to the device closed position status change contact and
the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam logic inputs (2).
The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
(2) Optional MES module.

Characteristics
Measurement range 1 to 20
Units s
Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±0.5 s
Display format 3 significant digits

SEPED310017EN 69
 Switchgear diagnosis Number of racking out operations
functions

Operation
This function keeps a count of circuit breaker or contactor rackouts.
The information may be used for breaking device maintenance.
The breaking device "racked out" or "disconnected" position must be wired to a logic
input and set up in the SFT2841 software in order for rackouts to be counted.
The number of rackouts is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. It may be
reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.

Readout

2
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

70 SEPED310017EN
 2

SEPED310017EN 71
 Protection functions Contents

Setting ranges 74
Overspeed 79
ANSI code 12 79
Underspeed 80
ANSI code 14 80
Underimpedance 81
ANSI code 21B 81
Synchro-check 82
ANSI code 25 82
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 84
ANSI code 27 84
Positive sequence undervoltage and

3 phase rotation direction check

ANSI code 27D
85
85
Remanent undervoltage 86
ANSI code 27R 86
Directional active overpower 87
ANSI code 32P 87
Directional reactive overpower 88
ANSI code 32Q 88
Phase undercurrent 89
ANSI code 37 89
Directional active underpower 91
ANSI code 37P 91
Temperature monitoring 92
ANSI code 38/49T 92
Field loss 93
ANSI code 40 93
Negative sequence / unbalance 96
ANSI code 46 96
Negative sequence overvoltage 99
ANSI code 47 99
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 100
ANSI code 48/51LR 100
Thermal overload for cables 102
ANSI code 49RMS 102
Thermal overload for capacitors 107
ANSI code 49RMS 107
Thermal overload for motors 121
ANSI code 49RMS 121
Thermal overload for machines 135
ANSI code 49RMS 135
Breaker failure 146
ANSI code 50BF 146
Phase overcurrent 148
ANSI code 50/51 148
Earth fault 150
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G 150
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 153
ANSI code 50V/51V 153

72 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Contents

Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 155

ANSI code 59 155
Neutral voltage displacement 157
ANSI code 59N 157
Restricted earth fault differential 158
ANSI code 64REF 158
Starts per hour 161
ANSI code 66 161
Directional phase overcurrent 165
ANSI code 67 165
Directional earth fault 168
ANSI code 67N/67NC 168
Recloser
ANSI code 79
175
175
3
Overfrequency 179
ANSI code 81H 179
Underfrequency 180
ANSI code 81L 180
Rate of change of frequency 181
ANSI code 81R 181
General 184
Tripping curves 184

SEPED310017EN 73
 Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 12 - Overspeed
100 to 160 % of Ωn 1 to 300 s
ANSI 14 - Underspeed
10 to 100 % of Ωn 1 to 300 s
ANSI 21B - Underimpedance
Impedance Zs 0.05 to 2.00 Vn/Ib
ANSI 25 - Synchro-check
Measured voltages Phase-to-phase Phase-to-neutral
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage
Unp sync1 (Vnp sync1 = Unp sync1/3) 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV
Unp sync2 (Vnp sync2 = Unp sync2/3) 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage
Uns sync1 90 V to 120 V 90 V to 230 V
Uns sync2 90 V to 120 V 90 V to 230 V

3
Synchro-check setpoints
dUs set point 3 % to 30 % of Unp sync1 3 % to 30 % of Vnp sync1
dfs set point 0.05 to 0.5 Hz 0.05 to 0.5 Hz
dPhi set point 5 to 80° 5 to 80°
Us high set point 70 % to 110 % Unp sync1 70 % to 110 % Vnp sync1
Us low set point 10 % to 70 % Unp sync1 10 % to 70 % Vnp sync1
Other settings
Lead time 0 to 0.5 s 0 to 0.5 s
Operating modes: no-voltage conditions Dead1 AND Live2 Dead1 AND Live2
for which coupling is allowed Live1 AND Dead2 Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
Tripping curve Definite time
IDMT
Definite time with a curve that can be customized
Set point 5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage
Set point and time delay 15 to 60 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
Set point and time delay 5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower
1 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower
5 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
0.05 to 1 Ib 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower
5 to 100 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring
Alarm set point TS1 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
Trip set point TS2 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
ANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)
Common point: Xa 0.02 Vn/Ib to 0.2 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Circle 1: Xb 0.2 Vn/Ib to 1.4 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.05 to 300 s
Circle 2: Xc 0.6 Vn/Ib to 3 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.1 to 300 s
(1) Sn = √3.In.Unp.

74 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Tripping curve Definite time
Schneider Electric
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
RI² (setting constant from 1 to 100)
Is set point 0.1 to 5 Ib Definite time 0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) IDMT 0.1 to 1s
0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE)
0.03 to 0.2 Ib (RI²)
ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage
Set point and time delay 1 to 50 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting time
Is set point 0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0.5 s to 300 s

ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for cables

Admissible current 1 to 1.73 Ib
LT and LTS time delays 0.05 s to 300 s
3
Time constant T1 1 to 600 min
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for capacitors
Alarm current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Trip current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Positioning of the hot tripping curve Current setting 1.02 x trip current to 2 Ib
Time setting 1 to 2000 minutes (variable range depending on the trip current and current
setting)
ANSI 49RMS - Generic thermal overload Mode 1 Mode 2
Accounting for negative sequence component 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
Time constant Heating T1: 1 to 600 min T1: 1 to 600 min
Cooling T2: 5 to 600 min T2: 5 to 600 min
Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2) 0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
Initial thermal capacity used (Es0) 0 to 100 %
Switching of thermal settings condition by logic input
by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib
Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 °C (140 °F to 392 °F)
ANSI 49RMS - Motor thermal overload
Measurement origin I1, I2, I3
Choice of thermal model 2 time constants/generic (see settings associated with generic thermal overload)
Current set point - change of thermal 1 to 10 pu of lb (± 0.1 pu of lb)
settings
Characteristic times Operating time accuracy ± 2 % or ±1 s
Stator thermal settings
Time constants Motor thermal capacity used (τ long) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Stator thermal capacity used (τ short) 1 to 60 mn ± 0.1 mn
Cooling (τ cool) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Tripping current set point (K) 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Alarm current set point 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Thermal exchange coefficient between 0 to 1 (± 0.01)
the stator and the motor (α)
Current characterizing hot state 0.5 to 1 pu of Ib (± 0.1 pu of lb)
Accounting for ambient temperature yes / no
Maximum equipment temperature (Tmax) 70 to 250 °C (± 1 °C) or 158 to 482 °F (± 1 °F)
Rotor thermal settings
Locked rotor amperes (IL) 1 to 10 pu of Ib (± 0.01 pu of lb)
Locked rotor torque (LRT) 0.2 to 2 pu of nominal torque (+/- 0.01 pu of nominal torque)
Locked rotor cold limit time (Tc) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)
Locked rotor hot limit time (Th) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)

SEPED310017EN 75
 Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 49RMS - Transformer thermal overload
Choice of thermal model Dry-type transformer
Immersed transformer
Generic
Measurement origin I1, I2, I3
Type of dry-type transformer Natural ventilation (AN) / Forced ventilation (AF)
Type of oil-filled transformer Distribution ONAN / Power ONAN / ONAF / OF / OD
Alarm set point (θ alarm) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Dry-type transformer: 95 to 245 °C (± 1 °C) or 203 to 473 °F (± 1 °F)
Tripping set point (θ trip) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Dry-type transformer: 95 to 245 °C (± 1 °C) or 203 to 473 °F (± 1 °F)
Time constant for dry-type transfo (τ ) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Time constant for oil-filled transfo winding (τ wdg) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
oil (τ oil) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure

3 Presence of current
Operating time
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
0.2 to 2 In
0.05 s to 3 s

Tripping time delay Timer hold

Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Is set point 0.05 to 24 In Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.05 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
Measurement origin Main channels (I)
Harmonic 2 restraint 5 to 50 %
Min short-circuit current Isc In to 999 kA
Confirmation None
By negative sequence overvoltage
By phase-to-phase undervoltage
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.

76 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault
Tripping time delay Timer hold
Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
CEI: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
EPATR-B, EPATR-C DT
Customized DT
Is0 set point 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
0.6 to 5 A EPATR-B 0.5 to 1 s
0.6 to 5 A EPATR-C 0.1 to 3 s

3
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
Measurement origin I0 input or sum of phase currents I0Σ
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Tripping time delay Timer hold
Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Is set point 0.5 to 24 In Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
Set point and time delay 50 to 150 % of Unp or Vnp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
Tripping curve Definite time
IDMT
Set point 2 to 80 % of Unp Definite time 0.05 to 300 s
2 to 10 % of Unp IDMT 0.1 to 100 s
ANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differential
Is0 set point 0.05 to 0.8 In (In u 20 A)
0.1 to 0.8 In (In < 20 A)
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
Permitted number of consecutive cold 1 to 5 Time delay consecutive starts 1 to 90 min
starts (Nc)
Permitted number of consecutive hot 1 to (Nc - 1) Time delay stop/start 0 to 90 min
starts (Nh)
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.

SEPED310017EN 77
 Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent
Characteristic angle 30°, 45°, 60°
Tripping time delay Timer hold delay
Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Is set point 0.1 to 24 In Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 projection

3 Characteristic angle
Is0 set point
-45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
0.01 to 15 In0 (mini. 0,1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
Vs0 set point 2 to 80 % of Unp
Memory time T0mem time 0; 0.05 s to 300 s
V0mem validity set point 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp
ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping half-plane
Characteristic angle -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Tripping time delay Timer hold delay
Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Is0 set point 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Vs0 set point 2 to 80 % of Unp
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
Measurement origin I0 input or sum of phase currents I0Σ
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping sector
Tripping sector start angle 0° to 359°
Tripping sector end angle 0° to 359°
Is0 set point CSH core balance CT (2 A rating) 0.1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst; 0.05 to 300 s
1 A CT 0.005 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT + ACE990 (range 1) 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Vs0 set point Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) 2 to 80% of Unp
Measured V0 (external VT) 0.6 to 80% of Unp
Measurement origin I0 input or sum of phase currents I0Σ
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Set point and time delay 49 to 55 Hz or 59 to 65 Hz 0.1 to 300 s
Measurement origin Main channels (U)
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Set point and time delay 40 to 51 Hz or 50 to 61 Hz 0.1 to 300 s
Measurement origin Main channels (U)
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.15 to 300 s
(1) Tripping from 1.2 Is.

78 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Overspeed
ANSI code 12

Detection of excessive machine speeds to Description

protect generators and processes. Detection of machine overspeed to detect synchronous generator racing due to loss
of synchronism, or for process monitoring, for example.
The rotation speed is calculated by measuring the time between pulses transmitted
by a proximity sensor at each passage of one or more cams driven by the rotation of
the motor or generator shaft (see a more in-depth description in the "Metering
functions" chapter).
The speed acquisition parameters must be set on the "Particular characteristics"
screen of the SFT2841 software.
The "Rotor speed measurement" function must be assigned to logic input I104 for the
function to work.
The protection picks up if the speed measured exceeds the speed set point.
The protection includes a definite time delay T.

Block diagram

3
DE50764

Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 100 to 160 % of Ωn
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 95 %
Time delay T
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±25 ms or ±(60000/(Ωs (2) x R (3))) ms
Resolution 1s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P12_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P12_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P12_x_1 b
Delayed output P12_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P12_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Ωs in rpm.
(3) R: Number of pulses (cam) per rotation.

SEPED310017EN 79
 Protection functions Underspeed
ANSI code 14

Monitoring of underspeeds and detection of Description

rotor locking. Monitoring of machine speed:
b detection of machine underspeed after starting, for process monitoring, for
example
b zero-speed data for detection of locked rotor.
The rotation speed is calculated by measuring the time between pulses transmitted
DE50818

by a proximity sensor at each passage of one or more cams driven by the rotation of
the motor or generator shaft (see a more in-depth description in the "Metering
functions" chapter).
The speed-acquisition and zero-speed detection parameters must be set on the
"Particular characteristics" screen of the SFT2841 software.
The "Rotor speed measurement" function must be assigned to logic input I104 for the
function to work.
The protection function picks up if the speed measured drops below the speed set
point after having first exceeded the set point by 5 %. Zero speed is detected by unit
1 and is used by protection function 48/51 LR to detect rotor locking.

3
The protection includes a definite (DT) time delay T.

Block diagram
DE51539

Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 10 to 100 % of Ωn
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Time delay T
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±25 ms or ±(60000/(Ωs (2) x R (3))) ms
Resolution 1 s with T>(60/(Ωs (2) x R (3)))
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P14_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P14_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P14_x_1 b
Delayed output P14_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P14_x_16 b
Zero speed P14_x_38 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Ωs in rpm.
(3) R: Number of pulses (cam) per rotation.

80 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Underimpedance
ANSI code 21B

Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection for Description

generators. The protection function is made up of a circular tripping characteristic on the
impedance plane (R, X), with a definite time delay.
It picks up when one of the apparent, phase-to-phase impedances enters the circular
tripping characteristic.
Apparent impedances:
DE50317

U 21 U 32 U 13
Z 21 = ---------------- , Z 32 = ---------------- , Z 13 = ---------------- .
I1 – I2 I2 – I3 I3 – I1

Block diagram

DE51540

Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 0.05Vn/Ib y Zs y 2 Vn/Ib or 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Time delay T
Setting range 200 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms from infinite to Zs/2 (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P21B_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P21B_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P21B_1_1 b
Delayed output P21B_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P21B_1_16 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Example: synchronous generator Protection setting

Synchronous generator data: To set the protection function, it is necessary to calculate the rated generator
b S = 3.15 MVA impedance:
b Un1 = 6.3 kV b Ib = S/(3Un1) = 289 A
b Xd = 233 % b Zn = Un1/ (3Ib) = 12.59 Ω.
b X'd = 21 % The tripping parameter is typically set to 30 % of the rated generator impedance:
Zs = 0.30 x Zn = 3.77 Ω.
This protection function is used to back up other protection functions. Its setting must
therefore ensure discrimination with the other protection functions.
T = 0.9 s, for example, for a network where faults are cleared in 0.6 s.

SEPED310017EN 81
 Protection functions Synchro-check
ANSI code 25

Protection function which checks the Operation

synchronization of the electrical networks The synchro-check function is designed to allow circuit breaker closing without any
upstream and downstream of a circuit risk of dangerous coupling between two voltages Usync1 and Usync2. The voltages
compared may be two phase-to-phase voltages or two phase-to-neutral voltages.
breaker and allows closing when the
differences in voltage, frequency and phase The function is activated when there is a phase, frequency or amplitude difference,
are within authorized limits. within set limits, between the voltages that are compared.

The function is available in the optional MCS025 module. The "Close enable" logic
data must be cabled to a logic input on the Sepam. All other data and measurements
are transmitted to the Sepam base unit via the CCA785 connection cord.

Block diagram

3
DE80238

dfs

Anticipation
It is possible to anticipate the function by a time Ta, taking into account the frequency
difference and the circuit breaker closing time, in order for the voltages to be
synchronized at the time of coupling.

Voltage checking
When one of the two voltages is absent, coupling may be authorized according to one
of five voltage checking modes.
b Usync1 absent and Usync2 present (Dead1 AND Live2)
b Usync1 present and Usync2 absent (Live1 AND Dead2)
b One voltage is present and the other is absent (Dead1 XOR Dead2)
b One or both of the two voltages are absent (Dead1 OR Dead2)
b Both voltages are absent (Dead1 AND Dead2).
The presence of each of the voltages is detected by comparing the voltage to the
high set point (Us high set point). The absence of either of the voltages is detected
by comparing the voltage to the low set point (Us low set point).

82 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Synchro-check
ANSI code 25

User information
The following measurements are available:
b voltage difference
b frequency difference
b phase difference.

Characteristics
Settings
dUs set point
Setting range 3 % Unsync1 to 30 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±2.5 % or 0,003 Unsync1
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
dfs set point
Setting range 0.05 Hz to 0.5 Hz
Accuracy (1)
Resolution
Drop out/pick up
±10 mHz
0.01 Hz
< 15 mHz
3
dPhis set point
Setting range 5° to 50°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Resolution 1°
Drop out/pick up ratio 120 %
Us high set point
Setting range 70 % Unsync1 to 110 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 %
Us low set point
Setting range 10 % Unsync1 to 70 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
Anticipation of circuit breaker closing time
Setting range 0 to 500 ms
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Voltage checking
Setting range On / Off
Operating mode with no voltage
Setting range Dead1 AND Live2
Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time < 190 ms
dU operation time < 120 ms
df operation time < 190 ms
dPhi operation time < 190 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Outputs (1)
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Close enable
Synchro-check P25_1_46 b
No voltage P25_1_47 b
Phase difference P25_1_49 b
Frequency difference P25_1_50 b
Voltage difference P25_1_51 b
No Usync1 P25_1_52 b
No Usync2 P25_1_53 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 83
 Protection functions Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)
ANSI code 27

Protection against phase-to-neutral or Block diagram

phase-to-phase voltage dips.

DE51543
Operation
Protection against voltage dips or detection of
abnormally low voltage in order to:
b Trigger automatic load shedding
b Trigger a source transfer
b Disconnect a generator, in conformity with a "Grid
code".
It includes a time delay T with:
b definite time (DT)
b inverse definite minimum time (see the tripping curve
equation on page 185)
b definite time with a curve T(U/Un) that can be
customized point by point.

3 Whether operation is phase-to-neutral or phase-to-

phase voltage depends on the connection chosen for
the voltage inputs.

Custom "Grid code" curve

Production installations must stay connected to the grid Characteristics
whenever the voltage is higher than that defined by the Settings
"Grid code" curve. The custom curve is defined point by
Voltage mode
point, with the disconnection time Tc in seconds on the
Setting range Phase-to-phase voltage / Phase-to-neutral voltage
X-axis and the voltage U/Un in pu on the Y-axis.
Tripping curve
1 Setting range Definite / IDMT / customizable
0.9 Us (or Vs) set point
DE81252

0.8 Setting range 5 % of Unp (or Vnp) to 100 % of Unp (or Vnp)
0.7 Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
0.6 Resolution 1%
U/Un

0.5
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 % ±2 %
0.4
Time delay T (tripping time for zero voltage)
0.3
0.2 Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
0.1 Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
0 Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
0 0.5 1 1.5 Characteristic times
Tc in sec Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from 1.1 Us (Vs) to 0.9 Us (Vs)
(typically 25 ms)
Grid code" curve. Overshoot time < 40 ms from 1.1 Us (Vs) to 0.9 Us (Vs)
Reset time < 50 ms from 0.9 Us (Vs) to 1.1 Us (Vs)
Connection conditions Inputs
Type of connection V1, V2, V3 (1) U21, U32 U21, Designation Syntax Equations
+ V0 U32
Phase-to-neutral operation YES YES NO Protection reset P27_x_101 b
Phase-to-phase operation YES YES YES Protection inhibition P27_x_113 b
Outputs
Type of connection U21 (1) V1 (1) Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Phase-to-neutral operation NO On V1 only Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27_x_1 b
Phase-to-phase operation On U21 only NO Delayed output P27_x_3 b b
1) With or without V0. Fault phase 1 (2) P27_x_7 b
Fault phase 2 (2) P27_x_8 b
Fault phase 3 (2) P27_x_9 b
Protection inhibited P27_x_16 b
Instantaneous output V1 or U21 P27_x_23 b
Instantaneous output V2 or U32 P27_x_24 b
Instantaneous output V3 or U13 P27_x_25 b
Delayed output V1 or U21 P27_x_26 b
Delayed output V2 or U32 P27_x_27 b
Delayed output V3 or U13 P27_x_28 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2)When the protection function is used for phase-to-neutral voltage.

84 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Positive sequence
undervoltage and phase rotation
direction check
ANSI code 27D
Motor protection against incorrect voltages. Description
Protection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced
network voltage. It is based on measurement of the positive sequence voltage Vd.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It does not operate when only a single phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage is
connected.
This protection also detects the phase rotation direction. The protection function
considers that the phase rotation direction is reversed when the positive sequence
voltage is less than 10 % of Unp and when the phase-to-phase voltage is greater
than 80 % of Unp. When this is the case, the alarm message "ROTATION –" is
generated.

Block diagram
DE51544

Characteristics
Settings
Vsd set point
Setting range 15 % Unp to 60 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from1.1 Vsd to 0.9 Vsd
Overshoot time < 40 ms from1.1 Vsd to 0.9 Vsd
Reset time < 50 ms from 0.9 Vsd to 1.1 Vsd
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P27D_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P27D_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27D_x_1 b
Delayed output P27D_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P27D_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 85
 Protection functions Remanent undervoltage
ANSI code 27R

Detection of the remanent voltage sustained Description

by rotating machines. Protection used to check that remanent voltage sustained by rotating machines has
been cleared before allowing the busbars supplying the machines to be re-
energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.
This protection is single-phase. It picks up when the U21 or V1 voltage is less than
the Us set point. The protection includes a definite time delay.

Block diagram

DE50768

Characteristics
Settings

3 Us set point
Setting range 5 % Unp to 100 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 45 ms from 1.1 Us to 0.9 Us
Overshoot time < 35 ms from 1.1 Us to 0.9 Us
Reset time < 35 ms from 0.9 Us to 1.1 Us
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P27R_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P27R_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27R_x_1 b
Delayed output P27R_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P27R_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

86 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional active overpower
ANSI code 32P

Protection against reverse power and The protection function picks up if the active power flowing in one direction or the
overloads. other (supplied or drawn) is greater than the Ps set point.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
Description b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
Two-way protection based on calculated active power, b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
for the following applications: b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
allow load shedding b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
b reverse active power protection: b other cases: protection function unavailable.
v against generators running like motors when the The function is enabled only if the following condition is met:
generators draw active power P u 3.1 % Q which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event
v against motors running like generators when the of short-circuits.
motors supply active power. The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter,
according to the convention:
b for the feeder circuit:
v power supplied by the busbars is positive 3

DE50769
v power supplied to the busbar is negative
DE50771

b for the incomer circuit:

v power supplied to the busbar is positive

DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.

Block diagram
DE50772

Operating zone.

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Overpower/reverse power
Ps set point
Setting range 1 % of Sn (2) to 120 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±0.3 % Sn for Ps between 1 % Sn and 5 % Sn
±5 % for Ps between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
±3 % for Ps between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.004 Sn/Ps) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 90 ms at 2 Ps
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Ps
Reset time < 105 ms at 2 Ps
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P32P_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P32P_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P32P_x_1 b
Delayed output P32P_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P32P_x_16 b
Positive active power P32P_x_19 b
Negative active power P32P_x_20 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3 Un In.

SEPED310017EN 87
 Protection functions Directional reactive overpower
ANSI code 32Q

Protection against field loss on synchronous The protection function picks up if the reactive power flowing in one direction or the
machines. other (supplied or drawn) is greater than the Qs set point.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
Description b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b reactive overpower protection for motors which b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
consume more reactive power following field loss b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators b other cases: protection function unavailable.
which consume reactive power following field loss. The function is enabled only if the following condition is met:
Q u 3.1 % P which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event
of short-circuits.
The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter,
according to the convention:

3
b for the feeder circuit:
v power supplied by the busbars is positive

DE50769
v power supplied to the busbar is negative
DE50773

b for the incomer circuit:

v power supplied to the busbar is positive

DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.

Block diagram
DE50774

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Overpower/reverse power
Qs set point
Setting range 5 % of Sn (2) to 120 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % for Qs between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
Operating zone. ±3 % for Qs between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1- 0.004 Sn/Qs) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 90 ms at 2 Qs
Overshoot time < 95 ms at 2 Qs
Reset time < 95 ms at 2 Qs
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P32Q_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P32Q_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P32Q_1_1 b
Delayed output P32Q_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P32Q_1_16 b
Positive reactive power P32Q_1_54 b
Negative reactive power P32Q_1_55 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3 Un In.

88 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Phase undercurrent
ANSI code 37

Protection for pumps. This protection is single-phase.

b it picks up when phase 1 current (I1) drops below the Is set point.

Description

DE50775
Protection of pumps against the consequences of a
loss of priming by detection of motor no-load operation.

Current sag.

b it is inactive when the current is less than 1.5 % of In.

b it is insensitive to current drops due to circuit breaker tripping.

3
DE50776

Circuit breaker tripping.

b the protection function includes a definite time delay.

DE50529

This protection function may be inhibited by a logic

input.
It can be remotely reset by a remote control order
(TC32).

Block diagram
DE50777

SEPED310017EN 89
 Protection functions Phase undercurrent
ANSI code 37

Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 5 % Ib to 100 % Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 % ±3 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 55 ms from 2 Is to 0.02 In
Overshoot time < 40 ms from 2 Is to 0.02 In
Reset time < 45 ms from 0.02 In to 2 Is
Inputs

3
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P37_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P37_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P37_1_1 b
Delayed output P37_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P37_1_16 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC32 BO13 20, 105, 101 A37_PTUC.ProRs.ctlVal

90 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional active underpower
ANSI code 37P

Check on active power flow. Description

Two-way protection based on active power. The function monitors the calculated
active power flows:
b to adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the network load power demand
b to create an isolated system in an installation with its own generating unit.
DE51382

The protection function picks up if the active power flowing in one direction or the
other (supplied or drawn) is less than the Ps set point.
It includes a definite (DT) time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
Tripping zone (normal direction).
b other cases: protection function unavailable.

3
The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter,
according to the convention:
b for the feeder circuit:
DE51383

v power supplied by the busbars is positive (normal direction)

DE50769
v power supplied to the busbars is negative

b for the incomer circuit:

v power supplied to the busbar is positive (normal direction)

DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.

Tripping zone (reverse direction).

Block diagram
DE50824

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Normal / reverse
Ps set point
Setting range 5 % of Sn (2) to 100 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % for Ps between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
±3 % for Ps between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 120 ms
Overshoot time < 65 ms
Reset time < 60 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P37P_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P37P_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P37P_x_1 b
Delayed output P37P_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P37P_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3.Un In.

SEPED310017EN 91
 Protection functions Temperature monitoring
ANSI code 38/49T

Protection against heat rise in equipment by Description

measuring the temperature with a sensor. Protection that detects abnormal heat rise by measuring the temperature inside
equipment fitted with sensors:
b transformer: protection of primary and secondary windings
b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
This protection function is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum (100 Ω at
0 °C or 32 °F) or nickel (Ni100 or Ni120) type, in accordance with the IEC 60751 and
DIN 43760 standards.
b it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point
b it has two independent set points:
v alarm set point
v tripping set point
b when the protection function is activated, it detects whether the RTD is shorted or
disconnected:
v RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than -35 °C or
-31 °F (measurement displayed "****")

3
v RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than
+205 °C or +401 °F (measurement displayed "-****").
If an RTD fault is detected, the protection function is inhibited and its output relays
are set to zero.
The "RTD fault" item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm
message is generated specifying the number of the MET148-2 module for the faulty
RTD.

Block diagram
DE50778

Characteristics
Settings
Alarm and trip set points TS1, TS2
Setting range 0°C to 180°C 32°F to 356°F
Accuracy (1) ±1.5°C ±2.7°F
Resolution 1°C 1°F
Pick up / drop out difference 3°C 5.4°F
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P38/49T_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P38/49T_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Protection output P38/49T_x_3 b b
Alarm P38/49T_x_10 b b
RTD fault P38/49T_x_12 b
Protection inhibited P38/49T_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

92 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40

Protection against field loss on synchronous Description

machines or generators. The protection function is made up of two circular tripping characteristics on the
impedance plane (R, X). It picks up when the positive sequence impedance Zd enters
one of the circular tripping characteristics.

Vd
Zd = --------
Id

DE50306

Circular tripping characteristics

b Case of a generator incomer or motor feeder
Circle 1 Circle 2
Centre C1 = -(Xa + Xb)/2 C2 = -(Xa + Xc)/2
Radius R1 = (Xb - Xa)/2 R2 = (Xc - Xa)/2

b Case of a generator feeder or motor incomer:

the tripping characteristics are symmetrical with respect to the R axis
Circle 1 Circle 2
Centre C1 = (Xa + Xb)/2 C2 = (Xa + Xc)/2
Radius R1 = (Xb - Xa)/2 R2 = (Xc - Xa)/2

Block diagram
DE50825

SEPED310017EN 93
 Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40

SFT2841 setting help

The SFT2841 software includes a setting assistance function to calculate the values
PE50148

of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and

transformer, when applicable).
Data used:
b synchronous machine:
v synchronous reactance Xd in %
v transient synchronous reactance X'd in %
b transformer:
v winding 1 voltage Un1 in V/kV
v short-circuit voltage Usc in %
v rated power in kVA/MVA
v copper losses in kΩ/MΩ.
The proposed settings are circle 1 with a diameter Zn if Xd u 200 % or a diameter
Xd/2 in all other cases, and circle 2 with a diameter Xd.
The two circles are offset from zero by -X'd/2.
Zn = the rated machine impedance:

3 Un1
Zn = ------------- .
3Ib

Characteristics
Settings
Common point: Xa
Setting range 0.02Vn/Ib y Xa y 0.20Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ or 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Circle 1: Xb
Setting range 0.20Vn/Ib y Xb y 1.40Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 % ±3 % of circle 1 diameter
Circle 2: Xc
Setting range 0.60Vn/Ib y Xc y 3Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 % ±3 % of circle 2 diameter
T1 time: tripping time delay circle 1
Setting range 50 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
T2 time: tripping time delay circle 2
Setting range 100 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from 0 to C1 (typically 25 ms)
Pick-up < 40 ms from 0 to C2 (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset time < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P40_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P40_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P40_1_1 b
Delayed output P40_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P40_1_16 b
Instantaneous protection 1 (circle 1) P40_1_23 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

94 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40

Example 1. Synchronous generator

Synchronous generator data
b S = 3.15 MVA
b Un1 = 6.3 kV
b Xd = 233 %
b X'd = 21 %
Protection setting
To set the protection function, it is necessary to calculate the rated generator
impedance Zn:
b Ib = S/(3.Un1) = 289 A
b Zn = Un1/ (3.Ib) = 12.586 Ω.
Generally speaking, circle 1 is set with a diameter Zn, offset by -X'd/2, and circle 2 is
set with a diameter Xd, offset by -X'd/2:
b Xa = (X'd(%)/200)Zn = 1.321 Ω
b Xb = (X'd(%)/200 + min(1,Xd/200))×Zn = 15.984 Ω

3
b Xc = (X'd(%)/200 + Xd/100)Zn = 30.646 Ω.
The faults detected in circle 1 are violent field-loss faults that must be cleared rapidly.
Circle 2 may concern faults other than field-loss faults and its tripping time is longer:
b T1 = 70 ms
b T2 = 500 ms.

Example 2. Generator-transformer unit applications

Synchronous generator data
b Sg = 19 MVA
b Un2 = 5.5 kV
b Xd = 257 %
b X'd = 30 %
Transformer data
b St = 30 MVA
b Un1 = 20 kV / Un2 = 5.5 kV
b Usc = 7 %
b Pcu = 191 kW
Protection setting
To set the protection function, it is necessary to calculate the rated generator
impedance at voltage Un1:
b Ib = Sg/(3Un1) = 548 A
b Zn = Un1/ (3.Ib) = 21.071 Ω.
The transformer impedance at voltage Un1 is:
Zt = Usc/100.(Un1)²/St = 0.933 Ω.
The transformer resistance at voltage Un1 is:
Rt = Pcu.(Un1/St)² = 0.085 Ω.
The transformer reactance at voltage Un1 is:
2 2
Xt = Zt – Rt = 0,929 Ω .
Circle 1 is set with a diameter Zn, offset by -X'd/2 and the transformer reactance.
Circle 2 is set with a diameter Xd, offset by -X'd/2 and the transformer reactance.
b Xa = (X'd(%)/200)Zn + Xt = 4.09 Ω
b Xb = (X'd(%)/200 + 1)Zn + Xt = 25.161 Ω
b Xc = (X'd(%)/200 + Xd(%)/100)Zn + Xt = 58.243 Ω.
The faults detected in circle 1 are violent field-loss faults that must be cleared rapidly.
Circle 2 may concern faults other than field-loss faults and its tripping time is longer:
b T1 = 70 ms
b T2 = 500 ms.

SEPED310017EN 95
 Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46

Phase unbalance protection for lines and Description

equipment. Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative
sequence current:
b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines
b protection of equipment against temperature rise, caused by an unbalanced power
supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current unbalance.
This function picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is
greater than the operation set point.
It is time-delayed. The time delay may be definite time or IDMT according to a
standardized curve, a specially adapted Schneider curve or an RI2 curve for
generator protection.
Tripping curve
Schneider IDMT
IEC inverse time SIT / A
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C

3 IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D)

IEEE very inverse (IEC / E)
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F)
RI2 curve

Block diagram
DE50839

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping curve
Setting range See list above
Is set point
Setting range definite time 10 % to 500 % of Ib
Schneider IDMT 10 % to 50 % of Ib
IEC or IEEE IDMT 10 % to 100 % of Ib
RI2 curve 3 % to 20 % of Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.005 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range definite time 100 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 1 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time ±2 % or ±25 ms
IDMT ±5 % or ±35 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
K (RI2 curve only)
Setting range 1 to 100
Resolution 1
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 55 ms at 2 Is
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 55 ms at 2 Is
Inputs
x: unit number. Designation Syntax Equations
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode: Protection reset P46_x_101 b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.034 to 0.336 Protection inhibition P46_x_113 b
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.067 to 0.666 Outputs
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.008 to 0.075
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.124 to 1.237
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.415 to 4.142 Instantaneous output (pick-up) P46_x_1 b
IEEE very inverse: 0.726 to 7.255 Delayed output P46_x_3 b b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.231 to 12.30. Protection inhibited P46_x_16 b

96 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46

Setting example for RI2 curves

A generator can handle a certain level of negative sequence current on a continuous
DE50715

basis. The Is continuous level, indicated by the manufacturer, is generally between

5 and 10 % of the base current Ib.
Typical values are:
Type of generator Ii permissible (% Ib)
Salient poles with amortisseur windings 10
without amortisseur windings 5
Cylindrical rotors Indirectly cooled 10
Sn y 960 MVA 8
960 MVA < Sn y 1200 MVA 6
RI2 curve. 1200 MVA < Sn 5
Reference IEEE C37.102-1987.

When this current level is exceeded, the generator can handle a negative sequence
current Ii for a time td, corresponding to the following equation:
K
td = -----------------2
Ii ⎞
3
⎛ ---------
⎝ Ib ⎠

The K value is an adjustable constant that depends on the type of generator,

generally between 1 and 40. Typical values of K are:
Type of generator K
Salient poles 40
Synchronous condenser 30
Cylindrical rotors Indirectly cooled 20
Sn y 800 MVA 10
800 MVA < Sn y 1600 MVA 10 - 0.00625.(MVA - 800)
Reference IEEE C37.102-1987.

Schneider IDMT curve

For Ii > Is, the time delay depends on the value of Ii/Ib (Ib: base current of the
DE50716

protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set).

T corresponds to the time delay for Ii/Ib = 5.
The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations:

b for Is/Ib y Ii/Ib y 0.5

3.19
t = --------------------------
1.5
-× T
( Ii ⁄ Ib )

b for 0.5 y Ii/Ib y 5

Schneider curve.
4.64
t = ----------------------------
0.96
-× T
( Ii ⁄ Ib )

b for Ii/Ib > 0.5

t = T.
.

SEPED310017EN 97
 Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46

Determination of tripping time for Schneider IDMT tripping curve

different negative sequence current t(s)
values for a given Schneider curve
10000
Use the table to find the value of X that corresponds to
the required negative sequence current. The tripping 5000
time is equal to XT.
Example 2000
given a tripping curve with the setting T = 0.5 s. 1000
What is the tripping time at 0.6 Ib?
Use the table to find the value of X that corresponds to 500
60 % of Ib.
The table indicates X = 7.55. The tripping time is equal 200
to: 0.5 x 7.55 = 3.755 s.
100

50

3 20

10
max. curve (T=1s)

0.5

0.2

0,1

0.05 min. curve (T=0,1s)

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.001 I/Ib

0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20

li (% lb) 10 15 20 25 30 33.33 35 40 45 50 55 57.7 60 65 70 75

X 99.95 54.50 35.44 25.38 19.32 16.51 15.34 12.56 10.53 9.00 8.21 7.84 7.55 7.00 6.52 6.11

li (% lb) cont. 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
X cont. 5.74 5.42 5.13 4.87 4.64 4.24 3.90 3.61 3.37 3.15 2.96 2.80 2.65 2.52 2.40 2.29

li (% lb) cont. 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370
X cont. 2.14 2.10 2.01 1.94 1.86 1.80 1.74 1.68 1.627 1.577 1.53 1.485 1.444 1.404 1.367 1.332

li (% lb) cont. 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 u 500
X cont. 1.298 1.267 1.236 1.18 1.167 1.154 1.13 1.105 1.082 1.06 1.04 1.02 1

98 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Negative sequence overvoltage
ANSI code 47

Phase unbalance protection. Description

Protection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion, unbalanced
supply or distant fault, detected by the measurement of negative sequence voltage
Vi.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It does not operate when only one voltage is connected to Sepam.

Block diagram

DE50779

Characteristics
Settings
Vsi set point
Setting range 1 % Unp to 50 % Unp
3
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±1 % or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vsi) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Vsi
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Vsi
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Vsi
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P47_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P47_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P47_x_1 b
Delayed output P47_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P47_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 99
 Protection functions Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
ANSI code 48/51LR

Detection of excessive starting time and Description

locked rotors for motor protection. Protection against motor overheating caused by:
b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient
supply voltage
b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
DE50826

v during normal operation, after a normal start

v directly at motor start, before detection of an excessive starting time.
This function is three-phase.
Starting is detected when the current drawn is greater than 5 % of current Ib.
This function comprises two parts:
b excessive starting time: during starting, the protection picks up when one of the 3
phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the ST
time delay (normal starting time)
b locked rotor:
v during normal operation (after starting), the protection picks up when one of the 3
phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the LT
time delay (DT).

3
v locked on start: large motors may have very long starting times, due to their inertia
Case of normal starting. or a reduction in the voltage. This starting time may be longer than the permissible
rotor locking time. To protect such a motor against rotor locking, an LTS time may be
set to initiate tripping if a start is detected (I > Is) and if the motor speed is zero.
Zero motor speed is detected by one of the three following options:
DE50827

b Rotor rotation detection logic input from a zero speed sensor

b minimum speed function (ANSI 14)
b motor thermal overload function (ANSI 49)
Motor re-acceleration
During re-acceleration, the motor draws a level of current similar to the start-up
current (> Is), but in this case the current did not first drop to a level under 5 % of Ib.
The ST time delay, which corresponds to the normal starting time, can be reinitialised
by a logic input or information from a logic equation ("motor re-acceleration" input)
and enables the user to:
b reinitialize the excessive starting time protection
b set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value.

Case of excessive starting time.

Block diagram
DE50829
DE50828

Case of locked rotor.

DE50851

Case of locked rotor at start.

100 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
ANSI code 48/51LR

Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 50 % to 500 % of
Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Time delay T
Setting range ST 500 ms to 300 s
LT 50 ms to 300 s
LTS 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms at 2 Is
Resolution 10 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations

3
Protection reset P48/51LR_1_101 b
Motor re-acceleration P48/51LR_1_102 b
Protection inhibition P48/51LR_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Protection output P48/51LR_1_3 b b
Locked rotor P48/51LR_1_13 b b
Excessive starting time P48/51LR_1_14 b b
Locked rotor at start-up P48/51LR_1_15 b b
Protection inhibited P48/51LR_1_16 b
Starting in progress P48/51LR_1_22 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 101
 Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS

Protection of cables against thermal Description

damage caused by overloads. This protection function is used to protect cables against overloads, based on
measurement of the current drawn.
The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which
takes into account harmonics up to number 13.
The highest current of the three phases I1, I2 and I3, subsequently called phase
DE51548

current Iph, is used to calculate the heat rise:

Iph = max ( I1, I2, I3 ) .
The calculated heat rise, proportional to the square of the current drawn, depends on
the current drawn and the previous temperature status. Under steady-state
conditions, it is equal to:
Iph 2
E = ⎛ ---------⎞ × 100 in %
⎝ Ib ⎠
The protection function issues the trip order when the phase current is greater than the
permissible current for the cable. The value of the base current Ib must absolutely be
less than the permissible current Ia. By default, we use Ib ≈ Ia/1.4.

3
Tripping curves.
The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T.
2
⎛ ⎛ ----I- ⎞ ⎞
t ⎜ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎟
Cold curve: --- = In ⎜ ------------------------------------
-
2⎟
where ln: natural logarithm.
T I 2
⎜ ⎛ ----- ⎞ – ⎛ ----- ⎞ ⎟ Ia
⎝
⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠
2
⎛ ⎛ ----- I ⎞ ⎞
t ⎜ ⎝ Ib ⎠ – 1 ⎟
Hot curve: --- = In ⎜ ------------------------------------
- ⎟ where ln: natural logarithm.
T I ⎞2 ⎛ Ia ⎞2 ⎟
⎜ ⎛ ----- – -----
⎝ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠
The present heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Block diagram
DE80268

User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b time before tripping (with constant current).

Characteristics
Settings
Permissible current Ia
Setting range < 1 to 1.73 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Time constant T
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b
Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b
Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b
Inhibit thermal overload P49RMS_1_32 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

102 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS

Example
Consider a copper cable, 185 mm2, with a permissible current Ia = 485 A and a
DE50840

1- second thermal withstand Ith_1 s = 22.4 kA.

The thermal time constant of a cable depends in its installation method. Typical time-
constant values are between 10 and 60 minutes. For buried cables, the time constant
is between 20 and 60 minutes, for non-buried cables, it is between 10 and 40
minutes.
For the cable in question, the selected values are T = 30 minutes and Ib = 350 A.
Check on compatibility between the 49RMS curve and the adiabatic thermal
withstand.
Conditions are correct at 10 Ib.
In the range of currents close to the permissible current, the 1-second thermal
withstand is used to estimate maximum thermal withstand for the cable, assuming
there are no heat exchanges. The maximum tripping time is calculated as:
I2 x tmax = constant = (Ith_1 s)2 x 1.

3
For the cable in question and at 10 Ib:
tmax = (Ith_1 s/ I0Ib)2 = (22400 / 3500)2 = 41 s.
For I = 10 Ib = 3500 A and Ia/Ib = 1.38, the value of k in the cold tripping curve table
is k ≈ 0.0184.
The tripping time at 10 Ib is therefore:
t = k x T x 60 = 0.0184 x 30 x 60 = 35.6s < tmax.
For a 10 Ib fault occuring after a rated operation phase, with 100 % heat rise, the
value of k is:
k ≈ 0,0097.
The tripping time is:
t = k x T x 60 = 0.0097 x 30 x 60 = 17.5 s
Check on discrimination
Discrimination between 49RMS for the cable and the downstream protection curves,
including 49RMS protection functions, must be checked to avoid any risk of nuisance
tripping.

SEPED310017EN 103
 Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Curves for initial heat rise = 0 %

Iph/Ib 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
Ia/Ib
0.50 1.7513 1.1856 0.8958 0.7138 0.5878 0.4953 0.4247 0.3691 0.3244 0.2877 0.2572 0.2314 0.2095 0.1907 0.1744 0.1601
0.55 1.8343 1.2587 0.9606 0.7717 0.6399 0.5425 0.4675 0.4082 0.3603 0.3207 0.2877 0.2597 0.2358 0.2152 0.1972
0.60 1.9110 1.3269 1.0217 0.8267 0.6897 0.5878 0.5090 0.4463 0.3953 0.3531 0.3178 0.2877 0.2619 0.2396
0.65 1.9823 1.3907 1.0793 0.8789 0.7373 0.6314 0.5491 0.4832 0.4295 0.3849 0.3473 0.3153 0.2877
0.70 2.0488 1.4508 1.1338 0.9287 0.7829 0.6733 0.5878 0.5191 0.4629 0.4159 0.3763 0.3424
0.75 2.1112 1.5075 1.1856 0.9762 0.8267 0.7138 0.6253 0.5540 0.4953 0.4463 0.4047
0.80 2.1699 1.5612 1.2349 1.0217 0.8687 0.7527 0.6615 0.5878 0.5270 0.4759
0.85 2.2254 1.6122 1.2819 1.0652 0.9091 0.7904 0.6966 0.6206 0.5578
0.90 2.2780 1.6607 1.3269 1.1069 0.9480 0.8267 0.7306 0.6526
0.95 2.3279 1.7070 1.3699 1.1470 0.9855 0.8618 0.7636
1.00 2.3755 1.7513 1.4112 1.1856 1.0217 0.8958
1.05 2.4209 1.7937 1.4508 1.2228 1.0566

3 1.10
1.15
1.20
2.4643 1.8343
2.5060
1.4890
1.8734
2.5459
1.2587
1.5258
1.9110
1.25 2.5844

Iph/Ib 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40
Ia/Ib
0.50 0.1475 0.1365 0.1266 0.1178 0.1099 0.1028 0.0963 0.0905 0.0852 0.0803 0.0759 0.0718 0.0680 0.0645 0.0530 0.0444
0.55 0.1815 0.1676 0.1553 0.1444 0.1346 0.1258 0.1178 0.1106 0.1040 0.0980 0.0925 0.0875 0.0829 0.0786 0.0645 0.0539
0.60 0.2201 0.2029 0.1878 0.1744 0.1623 0.1516 0.1418 0.1330 0.1251 0.1178 0.1111 0.1051 0.0995 0.0943 0.0773 0.0645
0.65 0.2637 0.2428 0.2243 0.2080 0.1934 0.1804 0.1686 0.1581 0.1485 0.1397 0.1318 0.1245 0.1178 0.1116 0.0913 0.0762
0.70 0.3132 0.2877 0.2653 0.2456 0.2281 0.2125 0.1984 0.1858 0.1744 0.1640 0.1545 0.1459 0.1380 0.1307 0.1067 0.0889
0.75 0.3691 0.3383 0.3113 0.2877 0.2667 0.2481 0.2314 0.2165 0.2029 0.1907 0.1796 0.1694 0.1601 0.1516 0.1236 0.1028
0.80 0.4326 0.3953 0.3630 0.3347 0.3098 0.2877 0.2680 0.2503 0.2344 0.2201 0.2070 0.1952 0.1843 0.1744 0.1418 0.1178
0.85 0.5049 0.4599 0.4210 0.3873 0.3577 0.3316 0.3084 0.2877 0.2691 0.2523 0.2371 0.2233 0.2107 0.1992 0.1617 0.1340
0.90 0.5878 0.5332 0.4866 0.4463 0.4112 0.3804 0.3531 0.3289 0.3072 0.2877 0.2701 0.2541 0.2396 0.2263 0.1832 0.1516
0.95 0.6836 0.6170 0.5608 0.5127 0.4710 0.4347 0.4027 0.3744 0.3491 0.3265 0.3061 0.2877 0.2710 0.2557 0.2064 0.1704
1.00 0.7956 0.7138 0.6456 0.5878 0.5383 0.4953 0.4578 0.4247 0.3953 0.3691 0.3456 0.3244 0.3052 0.2877 0.2314 0.1907
1.05 0.9287 0.8267 0.7431 0.6733 0.6142 0.5633 0.5191 0.4804 0.4463 0.4159 0.3888 0.3644 0.3424 0.3225 0.2585 0.2125
1.10 1.0904 0.9606 0.8569 0.7717 0.7005 0.6399 0.5878 0.5425 0.5027 0.4675 0.4363 0.4082 0.3830 0.3603 0.2877 0.2358
1.15 1.2934 1.1231 0.9916 0.8862 0.7996 0.7269 0.6651 0.6118 0.5654 0.5246 0.4884 0.4563 0.4274 0.4014 0.3192 0.2609
1.20 1.5612 1.3269 1.1549 1.0217 0.9147 0.8267 0.7527 0.6897 0.6353 0.5878 0.5460 0.5090 0.4759 0.4463 0.3531 0.2877
1.25 1.9473 1.5955 1.3593 1.1856 1.0509 0.9425 0.8531 0.7780 0.7138 0.6583 0.6098 0.5671 0.5292 0.4953 0.3898 0.3165
1.30 2.6214 1.9823 1.6286 1.3907 1.2155 1.0793 0.9696 0.8789 0.8026 0.7373 0.6808 0.6314 0.5878 0.5491 0.4295 0.3473
1.35 2.6571 2.0161 1.6607 1.4212 1.2445 1.1069 0.9959 0.9041 0.8267 0.7604 0.7029 0.6526 0.6081 0.4725 0.3804
1.40 2.6915 2.0488 1.6918 1.4508 1.2727 1.1338 1.0217 0.9287 0.8502 0.7829 0.7245 0.6733 0.5191 0.4159
1.45 2.7249 2.0805 1.7220 1.4796 1.3001 1.1601 1.0467 0.9527 0.8733 0.8050 0.7458 0.5699 0.4542
1.50 2.7571 2.1112 1.7513 1.5075 1.3269 1.1856 1.0712 0.9762 0.8958 0.8267 0.6253 0.4953
1.55 2.7883 2.1410 1.7797 1.5347 1.3529 1.2106 1.0952 0.9992 0.9179 0.6859 0.5397
1.60 2.8186 2.1699 1.8074 1.5612 1.3783 1.2349 1.1185 1.0217 0.7527 0.5878
1.65 2.8480 2.1980 1.8343 1.5870 1.4031 1.2587 1.1414 0.8267 0.6399
1.70 2.8766 2.2254 1.8605 1.6122 1.4272 1.2819 0.9091 0.6966

104 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Curves for initial heat rise = 0 %

Iph/Ib 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50
Ia/Ib
0,50 0.0377 0.0324 0.0282 0.0247 0.0219 0.0195 0.0175 0.0157 0.0143 0.0130 0.0119 0.0109 0.0101 0.0083 0.0070 0.0059
0.55 0.0458 0.0393 0.0342 0.0300 0.0265 0.0236 0.0212 0.0191 0.0173 0.0157 0.0144 0.0132 0.0122 0.0101 0.0084 0.0072
0.60 0.0547 0.0470 0.0408 0.0358 0.0316 0.0282 0.0252 0.0228 0.0206 0.0188 0.0172 0.0157 0.0145 0.0120 0.0101 0.0086
0.65 0.0645 0.0554 0.0481 0.0421 0.0372 0.0331 0.0297 0.0268 0.0242 0.0221 0.0202 0.0185 0.0170 0.0141 0.0118 0.0101
0.70 0.0752 0.0645 0.0560 0.0490 0.0433 0.0385 0.0345 0.0311 0.0282 0.0256 0.0234 0.0215 0.0198 0.0163 0.0137 0.0117
0.75 0.0869 0.0745 0.0645 0.0565 0.0499 0.0444 0.0397 0.0358 0.0324 0.0295 0.0269 0.0247 0.0228 0.0188 0.0157 0.0134
0.80 0.0995 0.0852 0.0738 0.0645 0.0570 0.0506 0.0453 0.0408 0.0370 0.0336 0.0307 0.0282 0.0259 0.0214 0.0179 0.0153
0.85 0.1130 0.0967 0.0837 0.0732 0.0645 0.0574 0.0513 0.0462 0.0418 0.0380 0.0347 0.0319 0.0293 0.0242 0.0203 0.0172
0.90 0.1276 0.1091 0.0943 0.0824 0.0726 0.0645 0.0577 0.0520 0.0470 0.0427 0.0390 0.0358 0.0329 0.0271 0.0228 0.0194
0.95 0.1433 0.1223 0.1057 0.0923 0.0813 0.0722 0.0645 0.0581 0.0525 0.0477 0.0436 0.0400 0.0368 0.0303 0.0254 0.0216
1.00 0.1601 0.1365 0.1178 0.1028 0.0905 0.0803 0.0718 0.0645 0.0584 0.0530 0.0484 0.0444 0.0408 0.0336 0.0282 0.0240

3
1.05 0.1780 0.1516 0.1307 0.1139 0.1002 0.0889 0.0794 0.0714 0.0645 0.0586 0.0535 0.0490 0.0451 0.0371 0.0311 0.0264
1.10 0.1972 0.1676 0.1444 0.1258 0.1106 0.0980 0.0875 0.0786 0.0711 0.0645 0.0589 0.0539 0.0496 0.0408 0.0342 0.0291
1.15 0.2177 0.1848 0.1589 0.1383 0.1215 0.1076 0.0961 0.0863 0.0779 0.0708 0.0645 0.0591 0.0544 0.0447 0.0374 0.0318
1.20 0.2396 0.2029 0.1744 0.1516 0.1330 0.1178 0.1051 0.0943 0.0852 0.0773 0.0705 0.0645 0.0593 0.0488 0.0408 0.0347
1.25 0.2629 0.2223 0.1907 0.1656 0.1452 0.1285 0.1145 0.1028 0.0927 0.0842 0.0767 0.0702 0.0645 0.0530 0.0444 0.0377
1.30 0.2877 0.2428 0.2080 0.1804 0.1581 0.1397 0.1245 0.1116 0.1007 0.0913 0.0832 0.0762 0.0700 0.0575 0.0481 0.0408
1.35 0.3142 0.2646 0.2263 0.1960 0.1716 0.1516 0.1349 0.1209 0.1091 0.0989 0.0901 0.0824 0.0757 0.0621 0.0520 0.0441
1.40 0.3424 0.2877 0.2456 0.2125 0.1858 0.1640 0.1459 0.1307 0.1178 0.1067 0.0972 0.0889 0.0816 0.0670 0.0560 0.0475
1.45 0.3725 0.3122 0.2661 0.2298 0.2007 0.1770 0.1574 0.1409 0.1269 0.1150 0.1047 0.0957 0.0878 0.0720 0.0602 0.0510
1.50 0.4047 0.3383 0.2877 0.2481 0.2165 0.1907 0.1694 0.1516 0.1365 0.1236 0.1124 0.1028 0.0943 0.0773 0.0645 0.0547
1.55 0.4391 0.3659 0.3105 0.2674 0.2330 0.2050 0.1820 0.1627 0.1464 0.1325 0.1205 0.1101 0.1010 0.0828 0.0691 0.0585
1.60 0.4759 0.3953 0.3347 0.2877 0.2503 0.2201 0.1952 0.1744 0.1568 0.1418 0.1290 0.1178 0.1080 0.0884 0.0738 0.0625
1.65 0.5154 0.4266 0.3603 0.3091 0.2686 0.2358 0.2089 0.1865 0.1676 0.1516 0.1377 0.1258 0.1153 0.0943 0.0786 0.0666
1.70 0.5578 0.4599 0.3873 0.3316 0.2877 0.2523 0.2233 0.1992 0.1789 0.1617 0.1469 0.1340 0.1229 0.1004 0.0837 0.0709

Iph/Ib 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Ia/Ib
0.50 0.0051 0.0045 0.0039 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
0.55 0.0062 0.0054 0.0047 0.0042 0.0037 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
0.60 0.0074 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0036 0.0023 0.0016 0.0012 0.0009
0.65 0.0087 0.0075 0.0066 0.0059 0.0052 0.0047 0.0042 0.0027 0.0019 0.0014 0.0011
0.70 0.0101 0.0087 0.0077 0.0068 0.0061 0.0054 0.0049 0.0031 0.0022 0.0016 0.0012
0.75 0.0115 0.0101 0.0088 0.0078 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0036 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
0.80 0.0131 0.0114 0.0101 0.0089 0.0079 0.0071 0.0064 0.0041 0.0028 0.0021 0.0016
0.85 0.0149 0.0129 0.0114 0.0101 0.0090 0.0080 0.0073 0.0046 0.0032 0.0024 0.0018
0.90 0.0167 0.0145 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
0.95 0.0186 0.0162 0.0142 0.0126 0.0112 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
1.00 0.0206 0.0179 0.0157 0.0139 0.0124 0.0111 0.0101 0.0064 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
1.05 0.0228 0.0198 0.0174 0.0154 0.0137 0.0123 0.0111 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
1.10 0.0250 0.0217 0.0191 0.0169 0.0151 0.0135 0.0122 0.0078 0.0054 0.0040 0.0030
1.15 0.0274 0.0238 0.0209 0.0185 0.0165 0.0148 0.0133 0.0085 0.0059 0.0043 0.0033
1.20 0.0298 0.0259 0.0228 0.0201 0.0179 0.0161 0.0145 0.0093 0.0064 0.0047 0.0036
1.25 0.0324 0.0282 0.0247 0.0219 0.0195 0.0175 0.0157 0.0101 0.0070 0.0051 0.0039
1.30 0.0351 0.0305 0.0268 0.0237 0.0211 0.0189 0.0170 0.0109 0.0075 0.0055 0.0042
1.35 0.0379 0.0329 0.0289 0.0255 0.0228 0.0204 0.0184 0.0117 0.0081 0.0060 0.0046
1.40 0.0408 0.0355 0.0311 0.0275 0.0245 0.0220 0.0198 0.0126 0.0087 0.0064 0.0049
1.45 0.0439 0.0381 0.0334 0.0295 0.0263 0.0236 0.0212 0.0135 0.0094 0.0069 0.0053
1.50 0.0470 0.0408 0.0358 0.0316 0.0282 0.0252 0.0228 0.0145 0.0101 0.0074 0.0056
1.55 0.0503 0.0437 0.0383 0.0338 0.0301 0.0270 0.0243 0.0155 0.0107 0.0079 0.0060
1.60 0.0537 0.0466 0.0408 0.0361 0.0321 0.0288 0.0259 0.0165 0.0114 0.0084 0.0064
1.65 0.0572 0.0496 0.0435 0.0384 0.0342 0.0306 0.0276 0.0176 0.0122 0.0089 0.0068
1.70 0.0608 0.0527 0.0462 0.0408 0.0363 0.0325 0.0293 0.0187 0.0129 0.0095 0.0073

SEPED310017EN 105
 Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Curves for initial heat rise = 100 %

Iph/Ib 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90
Ia/Ib
1.10 1.0531 0.6487 0.4673 0.3629 0.2948 0.2469 0.2113 0.1839 0.1622 0.1446 0.1300 0.1178 0.1074 0.0984 0.0907 0.0839
1.15 1.3203 0.8518 0.6300 0.4977 0.4094 0.3460 0.2984 0.2613 0.2316 0.2073 0.1871 0.1700 0.1555 0.1429 0.1319
1.20 1.5243 1.0152 0.7656 0.6131 0.5093 0.4339 0.3765 0.3314 0.2950 0.2650 0.2400 0.2187 0.2004 0.1846
1.25 1.6886 1.1517 0.8817 0.7138 0.5978 0.5126 0.4472 0.3954 0.3533 0.3185 0.2892 0.2642 0.2427
1.30 1.8258 1.2685 0.9831 0.8030 0.6772 0.5840 0.5118 0.4543 0.4073 0.3682 0.3352 0.3070
1.35 1.9433 1.3705 1.0729 0.8830 0.7492 0.6491 0.5713 0.5088 0.4576 0.4148 0.3785
1.40 2.0460 1.4610 1.1536 0.9555 0.8149 0.7092 0.6263 0.5596 0.5047 0.4586
1.45 2.1371 1.5422 1.2267 1.0218 0.8755 0.7647 0.6776 0.6072 0.5489
1.50 2.2188 1.6159 1.2935 1.0829 0.9316 0.8165 0.7257 0.6519
1.55 2.2930 1.6832 1.3550 1.1394 0.9838 0.8650 0.7708
1.60 2.3609 1.7452 1.4121 1.1921 1.0327 0.9106
1.65 2.4233 1.8027 1.4652 1.2415 1.0787

3 1.70 2.4813 1.8563 1.5150 1.2879

Iph/Ib 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60 4.80
Ia/Ib
1.10 0.0779 0.0726 0.0562 0.0451 0.0371 0.0312 0.0266 0.0230 0.0201 0.0177 0.0157 0.0141 0.0127 0.0115 0.0105 0.0096
1.15 0.1223 0.1137 0.0877 0.0702 0.0576 0.0483 0.0411 0.0355 0.0310 0.0273 0.0243 0.0217 0.0196 0.0177 0.0161 0.0147
1.20 0.1708 0.1586 0.1217 0.0970 0.0795 0.0665 0.0566 0.0488 0.0426 0.0375 0.0333 0.0298 0.0268 0.0243 0.0221 0.0202
1.25 0.2240 0.2076 0.1584 0.1258 0.1028 0.0858 0.0729 0.0628 0.0547 0.0482 0.0428 0.0382 0.0344 0.0311 0.0283 0.0259
1.30 0.2826 0.2614 0.1981 0.1566 0.1276 0.1063 0.0902 0.0776 0.0676 0.0594 0.0527 0.0471 0.0424 0.0383 0.0348 0.0318
1.35 0.3474 0.3204 0.2410 0.1897 0.1541 0.1281 0.1085 0.0932 0.0811 0.0713 0.0632 0.0564 0.0507 0.0458 0.0417 0.0380
1.40 0.4194 0.3857 0.2877 0.2253 0.1823 0.1512 0.1278 0.1097 0.0953 0.0837 0.0741 0.0661 0.0594 0.0537 0.0488 0.0445
1.45 0.4999 0.4581 0.3384 0.2635 0.2125 0.1758 0.1483 0.1271 0.1103 0.0967 0.0856 0.0763 0.0686 0.0619 0.0562 0.0513
1.50 0.5907 0.5390 0.3938 0.3046 0.2446 0.2018 0.1699 0.1454 0.1260 0.1104 0.0976 0.0870 0.0781 0.0705 0.0640 0.0584
1.55 0.6940 0.6302 0.4545 0.3491 0.2790 0.2295 0.1928 0.1646 0.1425 0.1247 0.1102 0.0982 0.0881 0.0795 0.0721 0.0657
1.60 0.8134 0.7340 0.5213 0.3971 0.3159 0.2589 0.2169 0.1849 0.1599 0.1398 0.1234 0.1098 0.0984 0.0888 0.0805 0.0734
1.65 0.9536 0.8537 0.5952 0.4492 0.3553 0.2901 0.2425 0.2063 0.1781 0.1555 0.1372 0.1220 0.1093 0.0985 0.0893 0.0814
1.70 1.1221 0.9943 0.6776 0.5059 0.3977 0.3234 0.2695 0.2288 0.1972 0.1720 0.1516 0.1347 0.1206 0.1086 0.0984 0.0897

Iph/Ib 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Ia/Ib
1.10 0.0088 0.0072 0.0060 0.0051 0.0044 0.0038 0.0033 0.0030 0.0026 0.0024 0.0021 0.0014 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
1.15 0.0135 0.0111 0.0093 0.0078 0.0067 0.0059 0.0051 0.0045 0.0040 0.0036 0.0033 0.0021 0.0014 0.0011 0.0008
1.20 0.0185 0.0152 0.0127 0.0107 0.0092 0.0080 0.0070 0.0062 0.0055 0.0049 0.0045 0.0028 0.0020 0.0014 0.0011
1.25 0.0237 0.0194 0.0162 0.0137 0.0118 0.0102 0.0090 0.0079 0.0071 0.0063 0.0057 0.0036 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
1.30 0.0292 0.0239 0.0199 0.0169 0.0145 0.0126 0.0110 0.0097 0.0087 0.0078 0.0070 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0017
1.35 0.0349 0.0285 0.0238 0.0201 0.0173 0.0150 0.0131 0.0116 0.0103 0.0093 0.0083 0.0053 0.0037 0.0027 0.0021
1.40 0.0408 0.0334 0.0278 0.0235 0.0202 0.0175 0.0154 0.0136 0.0121 0.0108 0.0097 0.0062 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
1.45 0.0470 0.0384 0.0320 0.0271 0.0232 0.0202 0.0177 0.0156 0.0139 0.0124 0.0112 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
1.50 0.0535 0.0437 0.0364 0.0308 0.0264 0.0229 0.0200 0.0177 0.0157 0.0141 0.0127 0.0081 0.0056 0.0041 0.0031
1.55 0.0602 0.0491 0.0409 0.0346 0.0297 0.0257 0.0225 0.0199 0.0177 0.0158 0.0143 0.0091 0.0063 0.0046 0.0035
1.60 0.0672 0.0548 0.0456 0.0386 0.0330 0.0286 0.0251 0.0221 0.0197 0.0176 0.0159 0.0101 0.0070 0.0051 0.0039
1.65 0.0745 0.0607 0.0505 0.0427 0.0365 0.0317 0.0277 0.0245 0.0218 0.0195 0.0176 0.0112 0.0077 0.0057 0.0043
1.70 0.0820 0.0668 0.0555 0.0469 0.0402 0.0348 0.0305 0.0269 0.0239 0.0214 0.0193 0.0122 0.0085 0.0062 0.0047

106 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

Protection of equipment against thermal Description

damage due to overloads. This function is used to protect capacitor banks with or without anti-harmonic
inductors against overloads, based on the measurement of the current drawn.
101
DE51606

The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which
100
takes into account harmonics up to number 13.
The highest current of the three phases I1, I2 and I3, subsequently called phase
10-1 current Iph, is used to calculate the heat rise:
Iph = max ( I1 ,I2 ,I3 )
10-2

Operation curve
10-3 The protection function gives a tripping order when the current drawn is greater than
0 5 10
the overload current, with respect to the rated current of the sequence.
Tripping curves.
The tripping time is set by assigning a hot tripping time to a setting current. This
setting is used to calculate a time factor:

⎛ ⎛ ----- Is⎞2
1
C = ------------------------------------------------
–1 ⎞
3
⎜ ⎝ Ib⎠ ⎟ where In: natural logarithm.
In ⎜ ------------------------------------ ⎟
Is⎞
⎜ ⎛ ----- 2 Itrip 2
– ⎛ -------------⎞ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ Ib⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠
The tripping time with an initial heat rise of 0 % is then given by:

⎛ ⎛ Iph
---------⎞
2
⎞
⎜ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎟ where In: natural logarithm.
t = C × In ⎜ -------------------------------------------- ⎟ × Ts
Iph 2 Itrip
⎜ ⎛ ---------⎞ – ⎛ -------------⎞ ⎟ 2
⎝ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠

= k x Ts

The tripping time with an intial heat rise of 100 % is then given by:

⎛ ⎛ Iph 2
---------⎞ – 1 ⎞
⎜ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎟
t = C × In ⎜ -------------------------------------------- ⎟ × Ts where In: natural logarithm.
Iph 2 Itrip
⎜ ⎛ ---------⎞ – ⎛ -------------⎞ ⎟ 2
⎝ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠

= k x Ts

The tripping curve tables give the values of k for an inital heat rise from 0 % to 100 %.
The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Block diagram
DE81004

SEPED310017EN 107
 Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b time before tripping (with constant current).

Characteristics
Settings
Alarm current Ialarm
Setting range 1.05 to 1.70 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Tripping current Itrip
Setting range 1.05 to 1.70 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Setting current Is

3
Setting range 1.02 Itrip to 2 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Setting time Ts
Setting range 1 to 2000 minutes (range varies depending on the tripping and
setting currents)
Resolution 1 mn
Characteristic times
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±2 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b
Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Delayed output P49RMS _1_3 b b
Alarm P49RMS _1_10 b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11 b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16 b
Hot state P49RMS _1_18 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

108 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

Curves for initial heat rise = 0 %

Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 9.1282 6.7632 5.4705 4.6108 3.9841 3.5018 3.1171 2.8020 2.5389 2.3157 2.1239 1.9574 1.8115 1.6828 1.5683
1.10 3.7989 2.8277 2.2954 1.9404 1.6809 1.4809 1.3209 1.1896 1.0798 0.9865 0.9061 0.8362 0.7749 0.7207
1.15 1.8980 1.4189 1.1556 0.9796 0.8507 0.7510 0.6712 0.6056 0.5506 0.5037 0.4634 0.4282 0.3973

Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 1.4660 1.3741 1.2911 1.2158 0.9747 0.8011 0.6713 0.5714 0.4927 0.4295 0.3779 0.3352 0.2995 0.2692
1.10 0.6725 0.6293 0.5905 0.5554 0.4435 0.3635 0.3040 0.2584 0.2226 0.1939 0.1704 0.1511 0.1349 0.1212
1.15 0.3699 0.3456 0.3237 0.3040 0.2417 0.1976 0.1649 0.1399 0.1204 0.1047 0.0920 0.0815 0.0728 0.0653

3
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 15.0540 11.1530 9.0217 7.6039 6.5703 5.7750 5.1405 4.6210 4.1871 3.8189 3.5027 3.2281 2.9875 2.7752 2.5864
1.10 6.7905 5.0545 4.1030 3.4684 3.0047 2.6470 2.3611 2.1265 1.9301 1.7633 1.6197 1.4948 1.3852 1.2883
1.15 3.9779 2.9738 2.4220 2.0530 1.7829 1.5740 1.4067 1.2692 1.1539 1.0557 0.9711 0.8974 0.8327
1.20 2.5077 1.8824 1.5378 1.3070 1.1375 1.0063 0.9010 0.8143 0.7415 0.6794 0.6257 0.5790
1.25 1.5305 1.1532 0.9449 0.8050 0.7021 0.6223 0.5582 0.5052 0.4607 0.4227 0.3898

Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 2.4177 2.2661 2.1292 2.0051 1.6074 1.3211 1.1071 0.9424 0.8126 0.7084 0.6233 0.5529 0.4939 0.4440
1.10 1.2021 1.1249 1.0555 0.9927 0.7927 0.6498 0.5435 0.4619 0.3979 0.3465 0.3047 0.2701 0.2412 0.2167
1.15 0.7753 0.7242 0.6785 0.6372 0.5066 0.4141 0.3456 0.2933 0.2523 0.2195 0.1929 0.1709 0.1525 0.1370
1.20 0.5378 0.5013 0.4688 0.4396 0.3478 0.2834 0.2360 0.1999 0.1717 0.1493 0.1310 0.1160 0.1035 0.0929
1.25 0.3611 0.3358 0.3134 0.2933 0.2309 0.1874 0.1557 0.1316 0.1129 0.0981 0.0860 0.0761 0.0678 0.0609

Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 21.4400 15.8850 12.8490 10.8300 9.3578 8.2251 7.3214 6.5815 5.9634 5.4391 4.9887 4.5976 4.2550 3.9525 3.6837
1.10 9.9827 7.4306 6.0317 5.0988 4.4171 3.8914 3.4710 3.1261 2.8375 2.5922 2.3811 2.1975 2.0364 1.8939
1.15 6.1214 4.5762 3.7270 3.1593 2.7435 2.4222 2.1647 1.9531 1.7757 1.6246 1.4944 1.3810 1.2813
1.20 4.1525 3.1170 2.5464 2.1642 1.8836 1.6664 1.4920 1.3483 1.2278 1.1249 1.0361 0.9587
1.25 2.9310 2.2085 1.8095 1.5416 1.3446 1.1918 1.0689 0.9676 0.8823 0.8095 0.7466
1.30 2.0665 1.5627 1.2839 1.0964 0.9582 0.8508 0.7643 0.6929 0.6327 0.5813
1.35 1.3673 1.0375 0.8546 0.7314 0.6404 0.5696 0.5125 0.4653 0.4254

Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 3.4434 3.2275 3.0325 2.8557 2.2894 1.8816 1.5768 1.3422 1.1573 1.0089 0.8877 0.7874 0.7034 0.6323
1.10 1.7672 1.6537 1.5516 1.4593 1.1654 0.9552 0.7989 0.6791 0.5849 0.5094 0.4479 0.3970 0.3545 0.3186
1.15 1.1931 1.1145 1.0440 0.9805 0.7796 0.6372 0.5318 0.4513 0.3882 0.3378 0.2968 0.2629 0.2346 0.2107
1.20 0.8906 0.8302 0.7763 0.7279 0.5760 0.4692 0.3907 0.3310 0.2844 0.2472 0.2170 0.1921 0.1714 0.1538
1.25 0.6916 0.6432 0.6002 0.5618 0.4421 0.3589 0.2981 0.2521 0.2163 0.1878 0.1647 0.1457 0.1299 0.1165
1.30 0.5367 0.4977 0.4634 0.4328 0.3386 0.2738 0.2268 0.1914 0.1640 0.1422 0.1246 0.1102 0.0981 0.0880
1.35 0.3913 0.3617 0.3358 0.3129 0.2431 0.1957 0.1617 0.1361 0.1164 0.1009 0.0883 0.0780 0.0694 0.0622

SEPED310017EN 109
 Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

Curves for initial heat rise = 0 %

Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 69.6380 51.5950 41.7340 35.1750 30.3940 26.7150 23.7800 21.3760 19.3690 17.6660 16.2030 14.9330 13.8200 12.8380 11.9650
1.10 33.9580 25.2760 20.5180 17.3440 15.0260 13.2370 11.8070 10.6340 9.6521 8.8176 8.0995 7.4750 6.9270 6.4425
1.15 22.0350 16.4730 13.4160 11.3720 9.8756 8.7189 7.7922 7.0303 6.3916 5.8479 5.3792 4.9710 4.6123
1.20 16.0520 12.0490 9.8435 8.3659 7.2814 6.4415 5.7674 5.2122 4.7460 4.3485 4.0053 3.7060
1.25 12.4460 9.3782 7.6840 6.5465 5.7100 5.0610 4.5392 4.1087 3.7467 3.4375 3.1703
1.30 10.0300 7.5843 6.2313 5.3211 4.6505 4.1294 3.7096 3.3629 3.0708 2.8210
1.35 8.2921 6.2917 5.1827 4.4353 3.8838 3.4544 3.1081 2.8215 2.5799
1.40 6.9790 5.3124 4.3868 3.7619 3.3000 2.9399 2.6491 2.4081
1.50 5.1152 3.9169 3.2491 2.7969 2.4617 2.1997
1.60 3.8403 2.9564 2.4625 2.1271
1.70 2.8932 2.2383

3 Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 11.1840 10.4830 9.8495 9.2753 7.4358 6.1115 5.1214 4.3594 3.7590 3.2768 2.8832 2.5574 2.2846 2.0537
1.10 6.0114 5.6254 5.2781 4.9642 3.9642 3.2494 2.7177 2.3099 1.9896 1.7328 1.5235 1.3506 1.2059 1.0836
1.15 4.2947 4.0117 3.7581 3.5295 2.8064 2.2936 1.9142 1.6245 1.3975 1.2159 1.0683 0.9464 0.8446 0.7586
1.20 3.4426 3.2091 3.0008 2.8138 2.2265 1.8138 1.5104 1.2795 1.0993 0.9555 0.8388 0.7426 0.6624 0.5946
1.25 2.9368 2.7311 2.5486 2.3855 1.8775 1.5240 1.2659 1.0704 0.9184 0.7974 0.6994 0.6187 0.5515 0.4949
1.30 2.6048 2.4157 2.2489 2.1007 1.6433 1.3288 1.1007 0.9289 0.7958 0.6901 0.6047 0.5346 0.4762 0.4271
1.35 2.3729 2.1935 2.0365 1.8978 1.4745 1.1871 0.9804 0.8257 0.7061 0.6116 0.5354 0.4730 0.4210 0.3774
1.40 2.2046 2.0301 1.8787 1.7459 1.3461 1.0785 0.8878 0.7459 0.6369 0.5509 0.4817 0.4252 0.3782 0.3388
1.50 1.9875 1.8112 1.6620 1.5337 1.1600 0.9190 0.7509 0.6276 0.5337 0.4603 0.4016 0.3538 0.3143 0.2812
1.60 1.8779 1.6825 1.5240 1.3920 1.0256 0.8008 0.6484 0.5386 0.4560 0.3920 0.3411 0.2998 0.2659 0.2376
1.70 1.8713 1.6215 1.4355 1.2893 0.9143 0.7007 0.5610 0.4625 0.3895 0.3335 0.2894 0.2538 0.2246 0.2004

110 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

Curves for initial heat rise = 100 %

Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 2.5249 1.4422 1.0000 0.7585 0.6064 0.5019 0.4258 0.3679 0.3226 0.2862 0.2563 0.2313 0.2102 0.1922 0.1766
1.10 1.624 1.000 0.720 0.559 0.454 0.381 0.3257 0.2835 0.2501 0.2229 0.2004 0.1816 0.1655 0.1518
1.15 1.000 0.645 0.477 0.377 0.310 0.2621 0.2260 0.1979 0.1754 0.1570 0.1417 0.1288 0.1177

Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.1630 0.1511 0.1405 0.1311 0.1020 0.0821 0.0677 0.0569 0.0486 0.0421 0.0368 0.0325 0.0289 0.0259
1.10 0.1398 0.1293 0.1201 0.1119 0.0867 0.0696 0.0573 0.0481 0.0410 0.0354 0.0310 0.0273 0.0243 0.0217
1.15 0.1082 0.0999 0.0926 0.0861 0.0664 0.0531 0.0436 0.0366 0.0312 0.0269 0.0235 0.0207 0.0184 0.0165

3
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 4.1639 2.3784 1.6492 1.2509 1.0000 0.8276 0.7021 0.6068 0.5320 0.4719 0.4226 0.3815 0.3467 0.3170 0.2913
1.10 2.9020 1.7875 1.2878 1.0000 0.8123 0.6802 0.5823 0.5068 0.4470 0.3984 0.3583 0.3246 0.2959 0.2713
1.15 2.0959 1.3521 1.0000 0.7901 0.6498 0.5493 0.4737 0.4148 0.3676 0.3291 0.2970 0.2699 0.2468
1.20 1.5014 1.0000 0.7541 0.6039 0.5017 0.4274 0.3708 0.3264 0.2905 0.2610 0.2364 0.2154
1.25 1.0000 0.6820 0.5222 0.4227 0.3541 0.3036 0.2648 0.2341 0.2092 0.1886 0.1713

Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.2688 0.2491 0.2317 0.2162 0.1682 0.1354 0.1117 0.0939 0.0802 0.0694 0.0607 0.0535 0.0476 0.0426
1.10 0.2499 0.2311 0.2146 0.2000 0.1550 0.1243 0.1023 0.0859 0.0733 0.0633 0.0554 0.0488 0.0434 0.0389
1.15 0.2268 0.2094 0.1941 0.1805 0.1393 0.1114 0.0915 0.0767 0.0653 0.0564 0.0492 0.0434 0.0386 0.0345
1.20 0.1974 0.1819 0.1682 0.1562 0.1199 0.0955 0.0783 0.0655 0.0557 0.0481 0.0419 0.0369 0.0328 0.0293
1.25 0.1565 0.1438 0.1327 0.1230 0.0938 0.0745 0.0609 0.0508 0.0432 0.0372 0.0324 0.0285 0.0253 0.0226

Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 5.9304 3.3874 2.3488 1.7816 1.4243 1.1788 1.0000 0.8642 0.7577 0.6721 0.6019 0.5434 0.4938 0.4515 0.4148
1.10 4.2662 2.6278 1.8931 1.4701 1.1942 1.0000 0.8560 0.7451 0.6571 0.5857 0.5267 0.4771 0.4350 0.3988
1.15 3.2252 2.0806 1.5388 1.2158 1.0000 0.8453 0.7289 0.6383 0.5657 0.5064 0.4570 0.4154 0.3797
1.20 2.4862 1.6559 1.2488 1.0000 0.8307 0.7077 0.6141 0.5405 0.4811 0.4323 0.3914 0.3567
1.25 1.9151 1.3061 1.0000 0.8095 0.6780 0.5814 0.5072 0.4484 0.4007 0.3612 0.3280
1.30 1.4393 1.0000 0.7750 0.6330 0.5339 0.4603 0.4035 0.3581 0.3211 0.2903
1.35 1.0000 0.7053 0.5521 0.4544 0.3855 0.3340 0.2940 0.2618 0.2355

Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.3829 0.3548 0.3300 0.3079 0.2396 0.1928 0.1590 0.1337 0.1142 0.0988 0.0864 0.0762 0.0678 0.0607
1.10 0.3673 0.3398 0.3155 0.2940 0.2278 0.1828 0.1505 0.1263 0.1078 0.0931 0.0814 0.0718 0.0638 0.0571
1.15 0.3490 0.3222 0.2986 0.2778 0.2143 0.1714 0.1408 0.1180 0.1005 0.0868 0.0758 0.0668 0.0593 0.0531
1.20 0.3269 0.3011 0.2786 0.2587 0.1985 0.1582 0.1296 0.1085 0.0923 0.0796 0.0694 0.0611 0.0543 0.0486
1.25 0.2997 0.2753 0.2541 0.2355 0.1796 0.1426 0.1165 0.0973 0.0827 0.0712 0.0621 0.0546 0.0485 0.0433
1.30 0.2643 0.2420 0.2228 0.2060 0.1561 0.1235 0.1006 0.0838 0.0711 0.0612 0.0533 0.0468 0.0415 0.0371
1.35 0.2135 0.1948 0.1788 0.1649 0.1240 0.0976 0.0793 0.0659 0.0558 0.0480 0.0417 0.0367 0.0325 0.0290

SEPED310017EN 111
 Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS

Curves for initial heat rise = 100 %

Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 19.2620 11.0020 7.6288 5.7866 4.6259 3.8286 3.2480 2.8069 2.4611 2.1831 1.9550 1.7648 1.6039 1.4663 1.3473
1.10 14.5120 8.9388 6.4398 5.0007 4.0622 3.4016 2.9118 2.5344 2.2351 1.9923 1.7915 1.6230 1.4797 1.3565
1.15 11.6100 7.4893 5.5392 4.3766 3.5996 3.0427 2.6238 2.2975 2.0364 1.8228 1.6451 1.4951 1.3669
1.20 9.6105 6.4010 4.8272 3.8656 3.2112 2.7355 2.3737 2.0892 1.8597 1.6709 1.5129 1.3788
1.25 8.1323 5.5465 4.2465 3.4375 2.8792 2.4688 2.1537 1.9041 1.7014 1.5337 1.3927
1.30 6.9855 4.8534 3.7614 3.0722 2.5911 2.2342 1.9582 1.7380 1.5583 1.4088
1.35 6.0646 4.2771 3.3484 2.7556 2.3380 2.0258 1.7828 1.5879 1.4280
1.40 5.3051 3.7883 2.9911 2.4776 2.1131 1.8388 1.6241 1.4511
1.50 4.1166 2.9979 2.3998 2.0090 1.7283 1.5149
1.60 3.2166 2.3778 1.9239 1.6242
1.70 2.4956 1.8670

3 Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 1.2436 1.1525 1.0718 1.0000 0.7783 0.6262 0.5165 0.4343 0.3709 0.3209 0.2806 0.2476 0.2202 0.1972
1.10 1.2495 1.1559 1.0733 1.0000 0.7750 0.6217 0.5118 0.4297 0.3666 0.3168 0.2768 0.2441 0.2170 0.1943
1.15 1.2562 1.1597 1.0750 1.0000 0.7713 0.6169 0.5066 0.4247 0.3618 0.3124 0.2727 0.2404 0.2136 0.1911
1.20 1.2638 1.1640 1.0768 1.0000 0.7673 0.6115 0.5010 0.4192 0.3567 0.3076 0.2683 0.2363 0.2099 0.1877
1.25 1.2725 1.1690 1.0790 1.0000 0.7628 0.6057 0.4949 0.4133 0.3511 0.3025 0.2636 0.2320 0.2059 0.1841
1.30 1.2826 1.1747 1.0814 1.0000 0.7578 0.5992 0.4882 0.4069 0.3451 0.2969 0.2585 0.2274 0.2017 0.1802
1.35 1.2945 1.1813 1.0842 1.0000 0.7522 0.5920 0.4808 0.3998 0.3386 0.2910 0.2531 0.2224 0.1971 0.1760
1.40 1.3085 1.1891 1.0874 1.0000 0.7459 0.5841 0.4728 0.3921 0.3315 0.2844 0.2471 0.2170 0.1922 0.1715
1.50 1.3463 1.2094 1.0958 1.0000 0.7306 0.5652 0.4539 0.3744 0.3152 0.2697 0.2337 0.2048 0.1811 0.1614
1.60 1.4070 1.2406 1.1082 1.0000 0.7102 0.5410 0.4303 0.3527 0.2955 0.2520 0.2178 0.1904 0.1681 0.1496
1.70 1.5237 1.2953 1.1286 1.0000 0.6816 0.5089 0.4000 0.3253 0.2711 0.2302 0.1983 0.1730 0.1524 0.1355

112 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS

Operation
This function is used to protect a transformer against overloads, based on the
measurement of the current taken.
IEC standard 60076-2 proposes 2 thermal models for evaluating the winding thermal
capacity used during an overload, depending on whether the transformer is dry-type
or immersed.
Taking account of harmonics
The equivalent current Ieq measured by the transformer thermal overload protection
is the highest of the phase rms currents (the rms current takes account of harmonic
numbers up to 13).
Taking account of 2 operating conditions
The choice between thermal sets 1 and 2 is made by the "switching of thermal
settings" logic input. This means you can have thermal set 1 for normal transformer
operation and thermal set 2 for unusual transformer operation.

Dry-type transformer
For dry-type transformers, the thermal model used in the Sepam relay conforms to
standard IEC 60076-12 (with 1 time constant).
3
Block diagram
Insulation class Switching Insulation
AN / AF class
DE81253

of thermal
settings

I1 rms
Ieq Dry-type transformer
+ Alarm
I2 rms Max θ > θ alarm
thermal model δθ
I3 rms +
Trip
θ > θ trip

Ambient θ sensor
θa

20 rC

Inhibition by
logic input or TC
Use of
temperature
sensor

Dry-type transformer thermal model

The thermal limit for dry-type transformers is determined by the thermal limit for
insulating components in order to avoid damaging them. The table below defines the
maximum permissible temperature and the winding temperature gradient according
to the insulation class:

Insulation class (°C) Gradient Δθn Maximum permissible winding

temperature θ max
105 (A) 75 °C (67 °F) 130 °C (266 °F)
120 (E) 90 °C (194 °F) 145 °C (293 °F)
130 (B) 100 °C (212 °F) 155 °C (311 °F)
155 (F) 125 °C (257 °F) 180 °C (356 °F)
180 (H) 150 °C (302 °F) 205 °C (401 °F)
200 170 °C (338 °F) 225 °C (437 °F)
220 190 °C (374 °F) 245 °C (473 °F)

The winding maximum permissible thermal capacity used equals:

θ max – θ
a
Where:
θ a : ambient temperature (rated value equals 20 °C or 68 °F)

Δθ n : temperature gradient at rated current lb

θ max : insulating component maximum permissible temperature according to the
insulation class

SEPED310017EN 113
 Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

The temperature build-up δθ in the dry-type transformer winding is calculated as

follows:
I eq q dt
Ieq ≥ 5 % Ib: δθ n = δθ n – 1 + Δθ n ⋅ ⎛ ---------⎞ – δθ n – 1 ⋅ ------
⎝ Ib ⎠ τ

dt
Ieq < 5 % Ib:δθ n = δθ n – 1 ⋅ ⎛ 1 – ------⎞
⎝ τ⎠
Where:
τ : dry-type transformer time constant
q : equals 1.6 for transformers with natural cooling (AN)
equals 2 for transformers with forced cooling (AF)

The protection trips when the temperature build-up δθ in the winding reaches
θ max – θ .
a

3 Evaluating the time constant

The thermal protection function protects the MV winding as well as the LV winding.
Therefore the time constant τ corresponds to the lowest value of the MV winding and
LV winding time constants.

The time constant is evaluated, for each winding, according to standard IEC 60076-
12 as follows:
C ⋅ ( Δθ n – θ e )
τ = ------------------------------------
-
Pr
Where:
Pr : total winding loss in Watts
C : winding thermal capacity in Watts min, given by the winding material:
b Aluminum: 15 times weight of Al conductor (kg) + 24.5 times weight of epoxy and
other insulating component (kg)
b Copper: 6.42 times weight of Cu conductor (kg) + 24.5 times weight of epoxy and
other insulating component (kg)
θ e : contribution of the core to the thermal capacity used:
b 5 °C (41 °F) for MV winding
b 25 °C (77 °F) for LV winding

114 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

Example of a class B dry-type transformer:

Regardless of the winding material, the LV winding has the lowest time constant.
The following graph gives the values of the time constant τ for different 20 kV / 410
V dry-type transformer power ratings:

80

DE81254
70

Time constant (in mn)

60
50
Cu
40
Alu
30
20

3
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Power (in kVA)

20 kV / 410 V dry-type transformer time constant.

Saving the thermal capacity used

On loss of the auxiliary power supply, the winding thermal capacity used is saved.

Operating information
The following information is available to the operator: θk – θ a
b the winding relative thermal capacity used E as a %: E k = 100 ⋅ ------------------
Δθ n
b the time before tripping in minutes (at constant current)

Accounting for ambient temperature

The characteristics of dry-type transformers are defined for an ambient temperature
of 20 °C (68 °F). When the Sepam is equipped with the temperature sensor module
option, the ambient temperature is measured by sensor no. 8 and added to the
winding temperature.

SEPED310017EN 115
 Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I1, I2, I3
Choice of transformer or thermal model
Setting range Dry-type transformer
Generic model(1)
Choice of transformer type
Setting range Natural ventilation (AN)
Forced ventilation (AF)
Insulation class
Setting range 105 (A)
120 (E)
130 (B)
155 (F)
180 (H)

3
200
220
Alarm set point ( θ alarm)
Setting range class 105: 95 °C to 130 °C (203 °F to 266 °F)
class 120: 110 °C to 145 °C (230 °F to 293 °F)
class 130: 120 °C to 155 °C (248 °F to 311 °F)
class 155: 145 °C to 180 °C (293 °F to 356 °F)
class 180: 170 °C to 205 °C (338 °F to 401 °F)
class 200: 190 °C to 225 °C (374 °F to 437 °F)
class 220: 210 °C to 245 °C (410 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Tripping set point ( θ trip)
Setting range class 105: 95 °C to 130 °C (203 °F to 266 °F)
class 120: 110 °C to 145 °C (230 °F to 293 °F)
class 130: 120 °C to 155 °C (248 °F to 311 °F)
class 155: 145 °C to 180 °C (293 °F to 356 °F)
class 180: 170 °C to 205 °C (338 °F to 401 °F)
class 200: 190 °C to 225 °C (374 °F to 437 °F)
class 220: 210 °C to 245 °C (410 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Transformer time constant ( τ )
Setting range 1 min to 600 min
Resolution 1 min
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range yes / no
Characteristic times
Operating time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Reset protection P49RMS_1_101
Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Time-delayed output P49RMS _1_3
Alarm P49RMS _1_10
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16
Hot state P49RMS _1_18
Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32
Zero speed P49RMS_1_38
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.

116 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
Code ANSI 49RMS

Immersed transformer
For immersed transformers, the thermal model used in the Sepam relay conforms to
standard IEC 60076-7 (with 2 time constants).
The thermal limit for immersed transformers is determined by the thermal limit for the
oil, to avoid the formation of bubbles that could damage the dielectric strength of the
oil.
Block diagram
Transformer
restricted τwdg τoil type
Change of
DE81255

thermal
settings

I1 rms
Ieq
+ Alarm
I2 rms Max Winding thermal model θ > θ alarm

3
δθ wdg +
I3 rms

θ oil Trip
θ > θ trip
20°C Oil thermal model

Use of
temperature Inhibition by
sensor logic input or TC
θ ambient

θ oil

Immersed transformer thermal model

The immersed transformer thermal model takes account of thermal exchanges
between the winding and the oil. To this end IEC standard 60076-7 proposes a model
for each of the transformer components:
b a thermal model with 2 time constants for the winding
b a thermal model with 1 time constant for the oil.

The winding thermal model transfer function is as follows:

k21 k21 -1
Ieq y
δθwdg
DE81256

Ieq −
∆ θ wdg
Ib 1+ p
k22

Where Δθenr : winding temperature gradient at current Ib

y : winding thermal capacity used exponent
κ 21 : thermal exchange coefficient between the winding and the oil
κ 22 : multiplying factor applied to the time constants
τ enr : winding time constant
τ huile : oil time constant

SEPED310017EN 117
 Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

IEC standard 60076-7 proposes, depending on the nature of the immersed

κ 22
transformer, the following values:
Transformer κ 21 Δθenr y τ enr τ huile
ONAN (distribution) 1 2 23 °C 1,6 4 min 180 min
ONAN (power) 2 2 26 °C 1,3 10 min 210 min
ONAF 2 2 26 °C 1,3 7 min 150 min
OF 1.3 1 22 °C 1,3 7 min 90 min
OD 1 1 29 °C 2 7 min 90 min
Note: For distribution ONAN and OD transformers, the winding thermal model only reacts with
the winding time constant.

When the winding and oil time constants are given by the immersed transformer
manufacturer, the user can enter them in place of the default values proposed by the
standard.
For transformers in which the oil flow can be restricted, exchanges between the
winding and the oil are worse, so the winding thermal capacity used values are

3
exceeded. In this case coefficient κ 21 takes the following values:
Transformer Restricted flow
OFF ON
ONAN (power) 2 3
ONAF 2 3
OF 1,3 1,45

Accounting for ambient temperature

The characteristics of immersed transformers are defined for an ambient
temperature of 20 °C (68 °F). When the Sepam is equipped with the temperature
sensor module option, the ambient temperature is measured by sensor no. 8 and
added to the oil temperature rise.

The oil thermal model transfer function is as follows:

x
Ieq
DE81257

1 δθ oil
∆ θho
1+R

Where Δθho : oil temperature gradient at current Ib

R : ratio between the on-load losses and the no-load losses
x : oil thermal capacity used exponent
κ 11 : multiplying factor applied to the oil time constant

118 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

IEC standard 60076-7 proposes, depending on the nature of the immersed

transformer, the following values:
Transformer κ 11 Δθho x R
ONAN (distribution) 1 55 °C 0,8 5
ONAN (power) 0,5 52 °C 0,8 6
ONAF 0,5 52 °C 0,8 6
OF 1 56 °C 1 6
OD 1 49 °C 1 6

Taking account of the oil temperature

When the Sepam is equipped with the temperature sensor module option, sensor no.
8 can be assigned to the oil temperature measurement. In this case the oil
temperature measurement is substituted for the oil thermal model. The measured oil
temperature θ oil is added to the winding temperature rise.

Saving the thermal capacity used

On loss of the auxiliary power supply, both the winding and oil thermal capacity used
are saved.
3
Operating information
The following information is available to the operator:
b the time before tripping in minutes (at constant current)
b the relative thermal capacity used E k of the transformer expressed as a %:
v when the oil temperature is estimated by a calculation:
θ k – θ ambiant
E k = 100 ⋅ --------------------------------------
Δθ enr + Δθ ho
v when the oil temperature is measured:
θ k – θ huile
E k = 100 ⋅ ----------------------------
Δθ enr

SEPED310017EN 119
 Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I1, I2, I3
Choice of transformer or
thermal model
Setting range Immersed transformer
ONAN (distribution)
ONAN (power)
ONAF
OD
OF
Generic model(1)
Alarm set point ( θ alarm)
Setting range Immersed transfo: 98 °C to 160
°C (208 °F

3
to 320 °F)
Dry-type transfo: 95 °C to 245
°C (203 °F
to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Tripping set point ( θ trip)
Setting range Immersed transfo: 98 °C to 160
°C (208 °F
to 320 °F)
Dry-type transfo: 95 °C to 245
°C (203 °F
to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Winding time constant ( τ enr )
Setting range 1 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 min
Oil time constant ( τ huile )
Setting range 5 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 min
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range yes / no
Accounting for oil temperature
Setting range yes / no
Restricted oil flow
Setting range on / off
Characteristic times
Operating time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Reset protection P49RMS_1_101 b
Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Time-delayed output P49RMS _1_3 b b
Alarm P49RMS _1_10 b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11 b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16 b
Hot state P49RMS _1_18 b
Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32 b
Zero speed P49RMS_1_38 b
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.

Glossary of transformer type abbreviations:

b AN: air-cooled transformer with natural ventilation
b AF: air-cooled transformer with forced ventilation
b ONAN: transformer immersed in mineral oil, cooled by natural air convection
b ONAF: transformer immersed in oil with forced circulation
b OD: transformer immersed in oil with forced circulation, directed into the windings
b OF: transformer immersed in oil with forced circulation

120 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

Operation
This function is used to protect the stator and the rotor of an asynchronous motor.

Block diagram
The stator thermal overload protection is provided by a thermal model with 2 time
constants (τ long and τ short).
The rotor excessive starting time thermal protection is provided by an adiabatic
thermal model.
T max I alarm
DE81258

Alarm
Ambient Correction by the fcorr Annunciation
temperature Exfcorr > I alarm2
ambient temperature P49RMS_1_10

τlong τshort τcool I trip

LRT
Stator thermal
capacity used
E
Exfcorr > I trip2
&
3
Is_therm
Id Id
Calculation Metal frame thermal M Tripping
Id > Is_therm ≥1
li of Ieq capacity used Annunciation
&
P49RMS_1_3

IL gn

W &
W>1
Rotor thermal
capacity used Inhibit
Closing
Annunciation
&
IL Start inhibit P49RMS_1_11
Tc
Th
g Zero rotor speed
“Inhibit thermal overload” TC g > 0.95
P49RMS_1_38
logic input “Inhibit thermal overload” ≥1 lnhibit thermal overload
P49RMS_1_32
“Authorize Hot state
emergency restart” logic input M > (Hot state set point)2
P49RMS_1_18
49 RMS
“on” Hot state set point
Protection inhibited
“Inhibit protection” ≥1
P49RMS_1_16
logic equation
P49RMS_1_113

SEPED310017EN 121
 Protection functions Motor thermal overload
ANSI code 49RMS

Blocking of tripping and closing inhibition

The protection tripping and inhibit closing outputs can be inhibited by:
b an "Inhibit thermal overload" latched logic input
b an "Authorize emergency restart" latched logic input
b an "Inhibit thermal overload" remote control order (TC).

Start inhibit
When the protection trips, circuit breaker closing is inhibited until the rotor thermal
capacity used allows another motor start.
This inhibit is grouped together with the "Starts per hour" protection function, and
signaled by the message "INHIBIT START".
The inhibit time before starting is authorized can be accessed from:
b the "Machine diagnosis" tab in the SFT2841 software
b the Sepam front panel.

"Hot state" set point

3 The thermal overload function provides a "hot state" data item used by the starts per
hour function (ANSI code 66). It is used to distinguish between cold starts and hot
starts. The number of consecutive starts per hour is stated by the motor
manufacturer.
Depending on the manufacturer, the previous load current defining hot state varies
between 0.6 Ib and Ib. Hence the "hot state" set point can be adjusted to suit the
motor characteristics.

Saving the thermal capacity used

On loss of the auxiliary power supply, the thermal capacity used of the rotor W, the
stator E and the metal frame M are saved and reused in their current state until the
relay is re-energized.

Operating information
The following information can be accessed from the "Machine diagnosis" tab in the
SFT2841 software and the Sepam front panel:
b the stator thermal capacity used
b the time before the stator protection trips (at constant current)
b the time before restarting is authorized.

122 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

Characteristics
Settings Inputs
Measurement origin Designation Syntax Equations
Setting range I1, I2, I3 Reset protection P49RMS_1_101 b
Choice of thermal model Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113 b
Setting range 2 Constant Outputs
Generic(1) Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Thermal model switching threshold Is_therm Time-delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b
Setting range 1 to 10 pu of Ib Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b
Resolution 0.1 pu of Ib Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b
Stator thermal settings Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b
Motor thermal capacity used time constant τ long Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b
Setting range 1 mn to 600 mn Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32 b
Resolution 1 mn Zero speed P49RMS_1_38 b
Stator thermal capacity used time constant τ short

3
Setting range 1 mn to 60 mn
Resolution 1 mn
Cooling time constant τ cool
Setting range 5 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 mn
Tripping current set point Itrip
Setting range 50 % to 173 % of Ib
Resolution 1 % of Ib
Alarm current set point Ialarm
Setting range 50 % to 173 % of Ib
Resolution 1 % of Ib
Thermal exchange coefficient between the α
stator and the motor
Setting range 0 to 1
Resolution 0.01
Hot state set point
Setting range 0.5 to 1 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range Yes / No
Maximum equipment temperature Tmax
(insulation class)
Setting range 70 °C to 250 °C or
158 °F to 482 °F
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Rotor thermal settings
Locked rotor amperes IL
Setting range 1 to 10 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Locked rotor torque LRT
Setting range 0.2 to 2 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Locked cold rotor limit time Tc
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Resolution 0.1 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Resolution 0.1 s
Characteristic times
Operating time ±2 % or ±1 s
accuracy
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.

SEPED310017EN 123
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

Help with parameter setting

The function parameters are set using the motor manufacturer data and the
SFT2841 software (49RMS tab in the protection functions).
1 Selection of the motor / generic thermal overload
protection function

DE81197
2 Switching threshold between the stator and rotor
thermal models (Is_therm)
3 Rotor thermal model parameters 1
4 Stator thermal model parameters
5 Calculated stator thermal model parameters 4 2

5
3

3
SFT2841 software: 49RMS protection parameter-setting screen for a motor application.

Parameter-setting procedure
1. Select the thermal overload protection function by choosing the
"2 Time constants" value from the "Thermal Model" drop-down list.
Note: The "Generic" value selects the generic thermal overload protection function (see
page 135 to set the parameters for this protection function).

2. Enter the rotor and stator parameters using the motor manufacturer data.
b Rotor parameters:
v Locked cold rotor limit time (Tc)
v Locked hot rotor limit time (Th)
v Locked rotor torque (LRT)
v Starting current (IL)
b Stator parameters:
v Heating time constant: τ long
v Cooling time constant: τ cool

3. Determine in graphic form the switching threshold between the stator and rotor
thermal models (Is_therm).
Depending on the manufacturer curves, there are 2 possible scenarios:
b If there is any discontinuity between the manufacturer curves (see example on
next page), choose Is_therm at the stator breaking point.
b If there is no discontinuity:
v Plot the locked cold rotor thermal model curve, between IL and Ib, using the
equation below in order to determine Is_therm:
W(I) = Tc x (IL / I)2
v Determine the value of Is_therm for which the rotor thermal model (adiabatic) no
longer corresponds to the manufacturer's locked cold rotor curve.

124 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

10000

DE81259
Motor running

1000

Permissible operating time [s]

Cold curve
Locked rotor

Tc
100 Hot curve

3
Th
10
IL
0 1 Itrip 2 3 4 5 6
I/Ib
Stator Rotor
Is_therm
Determination of Is_therm in the case of discontinuous manufacturer curves.

Itrip: permissible continuous current and tripping set point in pu of Ib

IL: starting current in pu of Ib
Tc: Locked cold rotor limit time
Th: Locked hot rotor limit time

4. Determine the following stator parameters:

b Tripping current set point Itrip
b Stator thermal capacity used time constant τ short
b Thermal exchange coefficient α

If these parameters are not available, proceed as follows to calculate them using
the SFT2841 software:
4.1. Press the "Use Genetic Algorithm" button which can be accessed from the
49RMS tab in the protection functions.

4.2. Enter 4 typical points found on the manufacturer's cold stator curve.

4.3. Press the "Use Genetic Algorithm" button: the SFT2841 software calculates all
3 parameters.

SEPED310017EN 125
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
Code ANSI 49RMS

Example of parameter setting no. 1: 3100 kW / 6.3 kV motor

We have the following manufacturer data:
Parameter Name Value Rotor / stator
insulation class F -
rated current Ib 320 A -
starting current IL 5.6 Ib rotor
rated torque Tn 19,884 Nm rotor
starting torque LRT 0.7 Tn rotor
motor time constant τ long 90 minutes stator
cooling constant τ cool 300 minutes stator
locked cold / hot rotor limit time Tc / Th 29 s / 16.5 s rotor
starting time 2.3 s -
number of consecutive 3 (2) -
cold (hot) starts

3
Setting the function parameters
1. Selection of "2 Time constants" from the "Thermal Model" drop-down list to select
the motor thermal overload protection function.

2. Set the rotor and stator model parameters using the manufacturer data:

Rotor parameter Name Value

Locked cold rotor limit time Tc 29 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th 16.5 s
Locked rotor torque LRT 0.7 pu rated torque
Starting current IL 5.6 Ib
Stator parameter Name Value
Alarm current set point Ialarm < Itrip
Heating time constant τ long 90 minutes
Cooling time constant τ cool 300 minutes

3. Determination of Is_therm switching threshold between the 2 models:

In this example there is a clear distinction between the rotor and stator manufacturer
curves.
Therefore the Is_therm switching threshold at the rotor curve breaking point is
selected.
Hence Is_therm = 2.8 Ib

10000
DE81260

6000

Cold curve
1500
1000
Ttrip in sec

400
250
Hot curve
100

10
1 1.4 1.8 2 2.4 2.8 3 4 5 6
l/lb

Stator Is_therm Rotor

126 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

4. Determination of the stator parameters:

For example on the cold stator curve (previous graphic) the following 4 points are
selected, spread between Ib and Is_therm:

I/Ib Ttrip
1.4 6000 s
1.8 1500 s
2.4 400 s
2.8 250 s

The SFT2841 software calculates the missing stator parameters on the basis of
these 4 points:

Calculated stator parameter Name Value

Tripping current set point Itrip 1.2 Ib
Stator heating time constant τ short 5.5 mn
Thermal exchange coefficient between stator and motor α

The function parameter setting is complete:

0.7
3
On the graphic below the manufacturer curves are bold lines, whereas the curves
generated from the configured model are fine lines.
The function protects the motor beyond its stated characteristics.
10000
DE81261

1000
Ttrip in sec

100

10
1 2 3 4 5 6
l/lb

Stator Rotor
Is_therm
Comparison of the manufacturer curves and the configured model.

SEPED310017EN 127
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

Example of parameter setting no. 2: 600 kW / 6 kV motor

We have the following manufacturer data:
Parameter Name Value Rotor / stator
insulation class F -
rated current Ib 69.9 A -
starting current IL 6 Ib rotor
rated torque Tn 392.2 kgm rotor
starting torque LRT 0.9 Tn rotor
motor time constant τ long 60 minutes stator
cooling constant τ cool 180 minutes stator
locked cold / hot rotor limit time Tc / Th 33.5 s / 25 s rotor
starting time 1.2 s -
number of consecutive 2 (1) -
cold (hot) starts

3
Setting the function parameters
1. Selection of the "2 Time constants" value from the "Thermal Model" drop-down list
to select the motor thermal overload protection function.

2. Set the rotor and stator parameters using the manufacturer data:

Rotor parameter Name Value

Locked cold rotor limit time Tc 33.5 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th 25 s
Locked rotor torque LRT 0.9 pu rated torque
Starting current IL 6 Ib
Stator parameter Name Value
Alarm current set point Ialarm < Itrip
Heating time constant τ long 60 minutes
Cooling time constant τ cool 180 minutes

3. Determination of Is_therm switching threshold between the 2 models.

DE81262

1000
Ttrip in sec

100

10
1 2 3 4 5 6
Is_therm l/lb
In this example the rotor and stator manufacturer curves (in bold lines) merge into
one another.
We therefore plot the rotor model curves (in fine lines) defined by:
b cold curve
2
W ( I ) = 33,5 ⋅ ( 6 ⁄ I )
b hot curve
2
W ( I ) = 25 ⋅ ( 6 ⁄ I )

We can see that the rotor model curve coincides with the manufacturer curve over
the whole current range I/Ib.
We therefore select the Is_therm switching threshold = 1.01 Ib.
The rotor model thus protects the motor over its whole operating range.

128 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS

4. Determination of the stator parameters:

The SFT2841 software calculates the following stator parameters:
Calculated stator parameter Name Value
Tripping current set point Itrip 1.01 Ib
Stator heating time constant τ short 60 Minutes
Thermal exchange coefficient between stator and motor α 1

In this example, the stator thermal overload protection is only used to define the
thermal state of the motor, in order to be able to:
b change the locked cold rotor limit time value to its corresponding hot value
b define the hot / cold thermal state of the motor.

The function parameter setting is complete.

SEPED310017EN 129
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models

θcu R1 θfe Stator thermal model

The stator thermal model takes account of thermal exchanges between the stator
DE81177

2 C1 C2 winding and the motor metal frames using 2 time constants.

rl eq R2

θa Having used α to designate the ratio R2/(R1+R2), the stator winding relative thermal
capacity used E transfer function is expressed as follows:
Stator thermal model.
( 1 – α) α
E ( p ) = --------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------
rIeq² : heat generated by the copper losses at ( 1 + pτ short ) ( 1 + pτ long )
equivalent current Ieq where 0 < α < 1.
C1 : stator thermal capacity The thermal model time response with two time constants is proportional to the
R1 : thermal resistance between the stator and the square of the current.
motor metal frame
C2 : motor thermal capacity
R2 : motor thermal resistance
θa : ambient temperature

3
θcu : stator winding temperature t t
⎛ – -------------------
-⎞ ⎛ – ----------------
-⎞
θfe : motor metal frame temperature τ τ
⎜ short⎟ ⎜ long⎟ 2
τ short = R1C1: stator winding time constant E (I eq,t) = ( 1 – α) ⋅ ⎜ 1 – e ⎟ +α⋅ ⎜1 – e ⎟ ⋅ I eq
τ long = R2C2 : motor metal frame time constant ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠

The stator thermal overload protection trips when E(Ieq,t) = K², K being the
permissible continuous current in pu of Ib.
For α = 0, there is no thermal exchange between the stator and the metal frame since
the motor thermal resistance R2 is zero. Thus the stator heats up with the lowest time
constant τ short.
Conversely for α = 1, the thermal exchange between the stator and the metal frame
is perfect, therefore the stator and the metal frame only make one, resulting in the
stator heating up with a time constant close to that of the metal frame τ long.
For 0 < α < 1, thermal management with 2 time constants makes it possible:
b to protect the stator winding correctly against strong overloads, since the resulting
time constant is close to the stator time constant
b for the motor to run at low overload as close as possible to the limits defined by the
manufacturer data, since the resulting time constant is close to that of the metal
frame.

Illustration of the influence of the α coefficient on a motor whose time constants are
as follows:
b stator winding: τ short = 4 mn
b metal frame: τ long = 60 mn.

Ttrip in sec
DE81263

100000

10000 Maximum thermal exchange α

0
0.4
1000
0.6
1

100

No thermal exchange

10
1 1.5 2 2.5 l/lb 3
Influence of the α coefficient on a motor.

130 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models

Stator thermal model (continued)

Equivalent current Ieq
The presence of a negative sequence component accelerates the motor temperature
build-up. The current negative sequence component is taken into account in the
protection function by the equation
2 Ii 2
I eq = ⎛ Id
-----⎞ + Ki ⋅ ⎛ -----⎞
⎝ Ib⎠ ⎝ Ib⎠

where Id is the current positive sequence component

Ii is the current negative sequence component
Ib is the motor rated current
Ki is the negative sequence component coefficient.

For an asynchronous motor, Ki is calculated using the following parameters:

b LRT: locked rotor torque in pu of the rated torque
b IL: starting current in pu of the rated current Ib
b N: rated speed in rpm.
The number of pairs of poles np is defined by the expression:
3
60 ⋅ fn
np = int ⎛ --------------------⎞
⎝ N ⎠

The rated slip gn is defined by the expression:

N ⋅ np
g n = 1 – ------------------
60 ⋅ fn
where fn is the network frequency in Hz.

The coefficient Ki is defined by the expression:

LRT
Ki = 2 ------------------ – 1
2
gn ⋅ IL

Accounting for ambient temperature

Asynchronous motors are designed to run at a maximum ambient temperature of
40 °C (104 °F). Where Sepam is equipped with the temperature sensor module
option (with sensor no. 8 assigned to measuring the ambient temperature), the stator
thermal capacity used is multiplied by the correction factor fcorr, from the time when
the ambient temperature is higher than 40 °C.
T max – 40
fcorr = ----------------------------------------------------
T max – T ambiant

where Tmax is the maximum temperature in the thermal class for the motor
insulating components defined in accordance with standard 60085.

Class 70 Y A E B F H 200 220 250

Tmax in °C 70 90 105 120 130 155 180 200 220 250
Tmax in °F 158 194 221 248 266 311 356 392 428 482

SEPED310017EN 131
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models

Stator thermal model (continued)

Metal frame thermal capacity used
Having used β to designate the ratio τ long
--------------------------------------------
τ long – τ short
the motor metal frame relative thermal capacity used M transfer function is
expressed as follows:
(1 – β) β
M ( p ) = --------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------
( 1 + pτ short ) ( 1 + pτ long )

where β > 1.

Example: Starting with a zero initial thermal capacity used and applying a current the
same as the rated current Ib, the stator and metal frame relative thermal capacity
used reach 100 %.

3 Initially, the metal frame thermal capacity used has a zero slope, until the heat
transfer is established between the stator and the metal frame.

1
0.9
DE81262

Thermal capacity used

0.8
0.7
0.6
Stator
0.5
Metal
0.4
frame
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 t(s)
0 5000 10000 15000 20000
Stator and metal frame thermal capacity used for a load current Ib.

The metal frame relative thermal capacity used is used to:

b adapt the rotor protection rotor limit time
b define the hot state of the motor.

Cooling time constant

When the current Ieq is less than 5 % of Ib, the motor is deemed to have stopped. In
this case it is the cooling time constant τ cool of the metal frame that is taken into
account to estimate stator cooling.

132 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models

Rs Xs Xr Rr
Rotor thermal model
For the rotor, guide IEEE C37.96-2000 on protection of asynchronous motors defines
DE81180

an adiabatic thermal model, dependent on the slip, which is based on the equivalent
Rm Xm Rr(1-g)/g Steinmetz diagram.

During the asynchronous motor starting phase, rotoric currents travel across the
rotor conductors to a depth that depends on the slip.
Steinmetz diagram.
Therefore the rotor inductance Xr and the rotor resistance Rr vary as a function of
the slip g as follows:
Rs: stator resistance Rr = Kr g + Ro
Xs: stator reactance Xr = Kx g + Xo
Rr: rotor resistance
Xr: rotor reactance Kr: coefficient taking account of the increase in the rotor resistance
Rm: magnetic loss Kx: coefficient taking account of the decrease in the rotor reactance
Xm: magnetizing reactance
g: slip

4
R1
3
DE81181

3.5

2.5
Kr
2
Kx
1.5
R0
1
0.5

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
g
Coefficients Kr and Kx as a function of the slip.

Assuming that the positive sequence rotor resistance Rr+ varies almost linearly
between Ro and R1:

R r+ = ( R 1 – R 0 ) ⋅ g + R 0

The proportion of negative sequence current can be high during the motor starting
phase. As a result the negative sequence rotor resistance Rr- is high in order to
evaluate the rotor thermal capacity used.
It is obtained by replacing the slip g with the negative slip sequence (2 - g).
Thus:
R r- = ( R 1 – R 0 ) ⋅ ( 2 – g ) + R 0

The thermal model used in the Sepam relay measures the active part of the positive
sequence impedance during the motor starting phase to evaluate the slip g.

Depending on the motor status, the positive and negative sequence rotor resistances
are as follows:

Motor status Rr+ Rr-

Stop (g=1) R1 R1
Rated speed (g ≈ 0) R0 2 R1 - R0

SEPED310017EN 133
 Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models

Rotor thermal model (continued)

The mechanical power developed by the motor equals the electrical power drawn in
the resistance Rr (1 - g) / g.
The torque Q equals:

Rr ( g ) ⋅ ( 1 – g )
----------------------------------------- ⋅ I 2 Rr ( g )
P P g L 2 ⋅ ---------------
Q = ---- = ------------- = -------------------------------------------------------- = I L
w 1–g 1–g g

Thus:
Q
R r ( g ) = ----- ⋅ g
IL2

When the motor has stopped, g = 1. We can therefore deduce that:

LRT

3
R 1 = ------------ (in pu of Zn)
IL 2

Where LRT: locked rotor torque in pu of the rated torque

IL: locked rotor current in pu of Ib

When the motor is at rated speed, the torque Q equals the rated torque Qn and the
current equals the rated current In, thus R0 = gn (in pu of Zn).
Where:
Un
Zn = -------------
3Ib
gn: rated slip

When the motor is at its rated speed of rotation, the ratio between the positive and
negative sequence resistances is:
R1 LRT
2 ------- – 1 = 2 --------------------- – 1
R0 gn ⋅ IL 2

During the starting phase the rotor thermal capacity used W is defined by the
following expression:
R r+ Id 2 R r- Ii 2 dt
W n = W n – 1 + ---------- ⎛ -----⎞ + --------- ⎛ -----⎞ ⋅ -------------
R 1 ⎝ I L⎠ R 1 ⎝ I L⎠ T(M)
Where T(M): locked rotor limit time depends on the thermal state of the motor M:
T(M) = Tc - (Tc - Th) x M, where 0 ≤M ≤1.
Tc: locked cold rotor limit time at the starting current IL
Th: locked hot rotor limit time at the starting current IL.

Example for a motor whose starting time is 5 s and the locked cold rotor limit time is
20 s.
b When the rotor is locked, the slip g = 1, as a result Rr+ = R1. Thus the thermal
capacity used is 5/20 = 25 %.
b When the slip g changes from 1 to 0 in 5 s, the rotor thermal capacity used is 17 %.

0.3
Rotor thermal capacity used (in pu)
DE81265

0.25

0.2
S=1
0.15
S#1
0.1

0.05

0
0 1 2 3 4 5

Starting time (in sec)

Comparison of the rotor thermal capacity used during normal starting with locked rotor.

134 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS

Protection of equipment against thermal Description

damage caused by overloads. This function is used to protect equipment (motors, transformers, generators) against
overloads, based on measurement of the current drawn.

Operation curve
The protection issues a trip order when the heat rise E, calculated according to the
measurement of an equivalent current Ieq, is greater than the set point Es.
The greatest permissible continuous current is
I = Ib Es
The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T.
b the calculated heat rise depends on the current drawn and the previous heat rise
b the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise
b the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 % rated heat rise.

101

3
2
⎛ leq
---------⎞
DE50808

10 0
t ⎝ lb ⎠
--- = ln ------------------------------
-
T ⎛ leq
2
---------⎞ – Es
10-1 ⎝ lb ⎠

10-2
2
10-3
⎛ leq
---------⎞ – 1
0 5 10 t ⎝ lb ⎠
--- = ln ------------------------------
-
T ⎛ leq
2
ln: natural logarithm. ---------⎞ – Es
⎝ lb ⎠

Alarm set point, tripping set point

Two set points are available for heat rise:
b Es1: alarm
b Es2: tripping.

"Hot state" set point

When the function is used to protect a motor, this fixed set point is designed for
detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function. The value of the fixed
set point is 50 %.

Heat rise and cooling time constants

E E
1 1
MT10419

MT10420

0,63
0,36
0 0
T1 t T2 t
Heat rise time constant. Cooling time constant.

For self-ventilated rotating machines, cooling is more effective when the machine is
running than when it is stopped. Running and stopping of the equipment are
calculated based on the value of the current:
b running if I > 0.1 Ib
b stopped if I < 0.1 Ib.

Two time constants may be set:

b T1: heat rise time constant: concerns equipment that is running
b T2: cooling time constant: concerns equipment that is stopped.

Taking into account harmonics

The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which
takes into account harmonics up to number 13.

SEPED310017EN 135
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS

Taking into account ambient temperature

Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40°C
(104°F). The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature
(Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor option with sensor 8 assigned to
ambient temperature metering ) to increase the calculated heat rise value when the
temperature measured exceeds 40°C (104°F).
Tmax – 40° C
Increase factor: fa = -----------------------------------------------------
Tmax – Tambiant
where T max is the equipment maximum temperature (according to insulation class)
T ambient is the measured temperature.
Table of insulation classes
Class Y A E B F H 200 220 250
Tmax 90 °C 105 °C 120 °C 130 °C 155 °C 180 °C 200 °C 220 °C 250 °C
Tmax 194 °F 221 °F 248 °F 266 °F 311 °F 356 °F 392 °F 428 °F 482 °F
Reference IEC 60085 (1984).

3 Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand

Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by
the machine manufacturer.
To fully comply with these experimental curves, additional parameters must be set:
b initial heat rise, Es0, is used to reduce the cold tripping time.
2
⎛ leq
---------⎞ – Es0
t ⎝ lb ⎠
modified cold curve: --- = ln ----------------------------------
- where ln: natural logarithm
T ⎛ leq
2
---------⎞ – Es
⎝ lb ⎠

b a second group of parameters (time constants and set points) is used to take into
account thermal withstand with locked rotors. This second set of parameters is taken
into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is.

Taking into account the negative sequence component

In the case of motors with coiled rotors, the presence of a negative sequence
component increases the heat rise in the motor. The negative sequence component
of the current is taken into account in the protection function by the equation.
2 2
leq = lph + K × li where Iph is the largest phase current
Ii is the negative sequence component of the current
K is a adjustable coefficient
K may have the following values: 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
For an asynchronous motor, K is determined as follows:
Cd 1
K = 2 × -------- × --------------------------2- – 1where Cn, Cd: rated torque and starting torque
Cn ld
g × ----- ⎞⎛ Ib, Id: base current and starting current
⎝ lb ⎠ g: rated slip

Learning of the cooling time constant T2

The time constant T2 may be learnt according to the temperatures measured in the
equipment by temperature sensors connected to the MET148-2 module number 1.
T2 is estimated:
b after a heating/cooling sequence:
v heating period detected by ES > 70 %
v followed by a shutdown detected by Ieq < 10 % of Ib
b when the machine temperature is measured by RTDs connected to MET148-2
module number 1:
v RTD 1, 2 or 3 assigned to motor/generator stator temperature measurement
v RTD 1, 3 or 5 assigned to transformer temperature measurement.
After each new heating/cooling sequence is detected, a new T2 value is estimated.
Following estimation, T2 can be used in two manners:
b automatically, in which case each new calculated value updates the T2 constant
used
b or manually by entering the value for the T2 parameter.
Measurement accuracy may be improved by using RTD 8 to measure the ambient
temperature.
Because the function has two operating modes, a time constant is estimated for each
mode.
For generator-transformer unit or motor-transformer unit applications, it is advised to
connect the rotating machine RTDs to MET148-2 module number 1 to take
advantage of T2 learning on the rotating machine rather than on the transformer.

136 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS

Start inhibit
The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor control device
until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting.
This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting.
The inhibition function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection
function and the indication START INHIBIT informs the user.

Saving the heat rise information

The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Inhibition of tripping
Tripping of the thermal overload protection may be inhibited by the logic input "Inhibit
thermal overload" when required by the process.

Use of two operating modes

3
The thermal overload protection function may be used to protect equipment with two
operating modes, for example:
b transformers with two ventilation modes, with or without forced ventilation
(ONAN / ONAF)
b two-speed motors.
The protection function comprises two groups of settings, and each group is suitable
for equipment protection in one of the two operating modes.
Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is done without losing the
heat rise information. It is controlled:
b either via a logic input, assigned to the "switching of thermal settings" function
b or when the phase current reaches an adjustable Is set point (to be used for
switching of thermal settings of a motor with locked rotor).
The base current of the equipment, used to calculate heat rise, also depends on the
operating mode:
b for logic input switching in mode 2, the base current Ib-mode 2, a specific thermal
overload protection setting, is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment
b in all other cases, the base current Ib, defined as a general Sepam parameter, is
used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment.

User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b learnt cooling time constant T2
b time before restart enabled (in case of inhibition of starting)
b time before tripping (with constant current).
See the section on measurement and machine operation assistance functions.

Block diagram
DE51636

SEPED310017EN 137
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS

Characteristics
Settings Inputs
Taking into account the negative sequence component K Designation Syntax Equations
Setting range 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9 Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b
Taking into account ambient temperature Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b
Setting range Yes / no Outputs
Using the learnt cooling time constant T2 Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Setting range Yes / no Delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b
Maximum equipment temperature Tmax (according to Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b
insulation class) Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b
Setting range 60 °C to 200 °C or 140 °F to 392 °F Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b
Resolution 1°C or 1°F Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b
Thermal mode 1 Inhibit thermal overload P49RMS_1_32 b
Alarm set point Es1
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %

3 Resolution
Tripping set point Es2
Setting range
1%

0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Initial heat rise set point Es0
Setting range 0 % to 100 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Heat rise time constant T1
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Cooling time constant T2
Setting range 5 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Thermal mode 2
Using thermal mode 2
Setting range Yes / no
Alarm set point Es1
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Tripping set point Es2
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Initial heat rise set point Es0
Setting range 0 % to 100 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Heat rise time constant T1
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Cooling time constant T2
Setting range 5 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Switching set point for thermal mode 2
Setting range 25 % to 800 % of Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Base current Ib - mode 2
Setting range 0.2 to 2.6 In or I’n
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1A
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-8).

138 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Example 1: motor For an overload of 2Ib, the value t/T1 = 0.0339 (2).
The following data are available: In order for Sepam to trip at point 1 (t = 70 s), T1 is equal to 2065 sec ≈ 34 min.
b time constants for on operation T1 and off operation With a setting of T1 = 34 min., the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state
T2: (point 2). In this case, it is equal to t/T1 = 0.3216 ⇒t = 665 sec, i.e. ≈ 11 min., which
v T1 = 25 min. is compatible with the motor thermal withstand when it is cold.
v T2 = 70 min. The negative sequence factor K is calculated using the equation defined on
b maximum steady state current: page 136.
Imax/Ib = 1.05. The parameters of the 2nd thermal overload relay do not need to be set.
They are not taken into account by default.
Setting of tripping set point Es2
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 % Example 3: motor
Note. If the motor draws a current of 1.05 Ib The following data are available:
continuously, the heat rise calculated by the thermal b motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold curves (see solid line curves
overload protection will reach 110 %. in Figure 2)
Setting of alarm set point Es1 b cooling time constant T2
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95). b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.1.

3
Knegative: 4.5 (usual value) The thermal overload parameters are determined in the same way as in the previous
The other thermal overload parameters do not need to example.
be set. They are not taken into account by default. Setting of tripping set point Es2
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 120 %
Example 2: motor
The following data are available: Setting of alarm set point Es1
b motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
curves (see solid line curves in Figure 1) The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after
b cooling time constant T2 100 seconds (point 1).
b maximum steady state current: With t/T1 = 0.069 (I/Ib = 2 and Es2 = 120 %):
Imax/Ib = 1.05. ⇒T1 = 100 sec / 0.069 = 1449 sec ≈ 24 min.
The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to:
Setting of tripping set point Es2
t/T1 = 0.3567 ⇒t = 24 min. x 0.3567 = 513 sec (point 2’).
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 %
This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 sec
Setting of alarm set point Es1:
(point 2).
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
If the time constant T1 is lowered, the thermal overload protection will trip earlier,
The manufacturer's hot/cold curves (1) may be used to
below point 2.
determine the heating time constant T1.
The risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case (see
The method consists of placing the Sepam hot/cold
Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U
curves below those of the motor.
= 0.9 Un).
The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering
Figure 1. Motor thermal withstand and thermal the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve.
overload tripping curves. In this example, the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 sec starting
from the cold state.
The following equation is used to obtain the Es0 value:
MT10860

motor cold curve

Sepam cold curve t necessary
2 ---------------------- 2
l processed T l processed
E s0 = ---------------------- –e 1 × ---------------------- – E s2
time before tripping/s

665
2 motor hot curve lb lb
Sepam hot curve where:
70 1 t necessary : tripping time necessary starting from a cold state.
I processed : equipment current.

(1) When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot/cold
curves, the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate.
(2) It is possible to use the charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve or the
1.05 2 I/Ib equation of the curve which is given on page 135.

SEPED310017EN 139
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

In numerical values, the following is obtained: Use of the additional setting group
400 s
------------------------ When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly, its thermal behavior is different
24 × 60 s
Es0 = 4 – e × 4 – ( 1.2 ) = 0.3035 ≈ ( 31 % ) from that with the rated load.
By setting Es0 = 31 %, point 2’ is moved downward to In such conditions, the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator. For
obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the high power motors, rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor.
motor thermal withstand when cold (see Figure 3). The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no
Note. A setting Es0 = 100 % therefore means that the longer valid.
hot and cold curves are the same. In order to protect the motor in this case, "excessive starting time" protection may be
used.
Figure 2. Hot/cold curves not compatible with the Nevertheless, motor manufacturers provide the thermal withstand curves when the
motor thermal withstand. rotor is locked, for different voltages at the time of starting.

Figure 4. Locked rotor thermal withstand.

Sepam cold curve
motor running locked rotor
MT10861

MT10863

513 motor cold curve

3
2’
time before tripping/s

400 2
motor hot curve
times / s

100 1
1 Sepam hot curve

3
starting at Un 2
starting at 0.9 Un
1.05 2 I/Ib
4 5 6
1.1 2 Is I/Ib

Figure 3. Hot/cold curves compatible with the 1 thermal withstand, motor running
motor thermal withstand via the setting of an initial 2 thermal withstand, motor stopped
heat rise Es0.
3 Sepam tripping curve

4 starting at 65 % Un
MT10862

adjusted Sepam
cold curve 5 starting at 80 % Un

motor cold curve 6 starting at 100 % Un

time before tripping/s

400
2
motor hot curve In order to take these curves into account, the 2nd thermal overload relay may be
used.
100 The time constant in this case is, in theory, shorter, however, it should be determined
1 Sepam hot curve in the same way as that of the 1st relay.
The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the
equivalent current Ieq exceeds the Is value (set point current).
starting at Un
starting at 0.9 Un Example 4. transformer with 2 ventilation modes
1.1 2 I/Ib The following data are available:
The rated current of a transformer with 2 ventilation modes is:
b Ib = 200 A without forced ventilation (ONAN mode), the main operating mode of
the transformer
b Ib = 240 A with forced ventilation (ONAF mode), a temporary operating mode, to
have 20 % more power available

Setting of the base current for ventilation operating mode 1: Ib = 200 A

(to be set in the Sepam general parameters).
Setting of the base current for ventilation operating mode 2: Ib2 = 240 A
(to be set among the specific thermal overload protection settings).
Switching of thermal settings via logic input, to be assigned to the "switching of
thermal settings" function and to be connected to the transformer ventilation control
unit.
The settings related to each ventilation operating mode (Es set points, time
constants, etc.) are to be determined according to the transformer characteristics
provided by the manufacturer.

140 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %

l/Ib 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
50 0.6931 0.6042 0.5331 0.4749 0.4265 0.3857 0.3508 0.3207 0.2945 0.2716 0.2513 0.2333 0.2173 0.2029 0.1900 0.1782 0.1676
55 0.7985 0.6909 0.6061 0.5376 0.4812 0.4339 0.3937 0.3592 0.3294 0.3033 0.2803 0.2600 0.2419 0.2257 0.2111 0.1980 0.1860
60 0.9163 0.7857 0.6849 0.6046 0.5390 0.4845 0.4386 0.3993 0.3655 0.3360 0.3102 0.2873 0.2671 0.2490 0.2327 0.2181 0.2048
65 1.0498 0.8905 0.7704 0.6763 0.6004 0.5379 0.4855 0.4411 0.4029 0.3698 0.3409 0.3155 0.2929 0.2728 0.2548 0.2386 0.2239
70 1.2040 1.0076 0.8640 0.7535 0.6657 0.5942 0.5348 0.4847 0.4418 0.4049 0.3727 0.3444 0.3194 0.2972 0.2774 0.2595 0.2434
75 1.3863 1.1403 0.9671 0.8373 0.7357 0.6539 0.5866 0.5302 0.4823 0.4412 0.4055 0.3742 0.3467 0.3222 0.3005 0.2809 0.2633
80 1.6094 1.2933 1.0822 0.9287 0.8109 0.7174 0.6413 0.5780 0.5245 0.4788 0.4394 0.4049 0.3747 0.3479 0.3241 0.3028 0.2836
85 1.8971 1.4739 1.2123 1.0292 0.8923 0.7853 0.6991 0.6281 0.5686 0.5180 0.4745 0.4366 0.4035 0.3743 0.3483 0.3251 0.3043
90 2.3026 1.6946 1.3618 1.1411 0.9808 0.8580 0.7605 0.6809 0.6147 0.5587 0.5108 0.4694 0.4332 0.4013 0.3731 0.3480 0.3254
95 1.9782 1.5377 1.2670 1.0780 0.9365 0.8258 0.7366 0.6630 0.6012 0.5486 0.5032 0.4638 0.4292 0.3986 0.3714 0.3470
100 2.3755 1.7513 1.4112 1.1856 1.0217 0.8958 0.7956 0.7138 0.6455 0.5878 0.5383 0.4953 0.4578 0.4247 0.3953 0.3691
105 3.0445 2.0232 1.5796 1.3063 1.1147 0.9710 0.8583 0.7673 0.6920 0.6286 0.5746 0.5279 0.4872 0.4515 0.4199 0.3917

3
110 2.3979 1.7824 1.4435 1.2174 1.0524 0.9252 0.8238 0.7406 0.6712 0.6122 0.5616 0.5176 0.4790 0.4450 0.4148
115 3.0040 2.0369 1.6025 1.3318 1.1409 0.9970 0.8837 0.7918 0.7156 0.6514 0.5964 0.5489 0.5074 0.4708 0.4384
120 2.3792 1.7918 1.4610 1.2381 1.0742 0.9474 0.8457 0.7621 0.6921 0.6325 0.5812 0.5365 0.4973 0.4626
125 2.9037 2.0254 1.6094 1.3457 1.1580 1.0154 0.9027 0.8109 0.7346 0.6700 0.6146 0.5666 0.5245 0.4874
130 2.3308 1.7838 1.4663 1.2493 1.0885 0.9632 0.8622 0.7789 0.7089 0.6491 0.5975 0.5525 0.5129
135 2.7726 1.9951 1.6035 1.3499 1.1672 1.0275 0.9163 0.8253 0.7494 0.6849 0.6295 0.5813 0.5390
140 2.2634 1.7626 1.4618 1.2528 1.0962 0.9734 0.8740 0.7916 0.7220 0.6625 0.6109 0.5658
145 2.6311 1.9518 1.5877 1.3463 1.1701 1.0341 0.9252 0.8356 0.7606 0.6966 0.6414 0.5934
150 3.2189 2.1855 1.7319 1.4495 1.2498 1.0986 0.9791 0.8817 0.8007 0.7320 0.6729 0.6217
155 2.4908 1.9003 1.5645 1.3364 1.1676 1.0361 0.9301 0.8424 0.7686 0.7055 0.6508
160 2.9327 2.1030 1.6946 1.4313 1.2417 1.0965 0.9808 0.8860 0.8066 0.7391 0.6809
165 2.3576 1.8441 1.5361 1.3218 1.1609 1.0343 0.9316 0.8461 0.7739 0.7118
170 2.6999 2.0200 1.6532 1.4088 1.2296 1.0908 0.9793 0.8873 0.8099 0.7438
175 3.2244 2.2336 1.7858 1.5041 1.3035 1.1507 1.0294 0.9302 0.8473 0.7768
180 2.5055 1.9388 1.6094 1.3832 1.2144 1.0822 0.9751 0.8861 0.8109
185 2.8802 2.1195 1.7272 1.4698 1.2825 1.1379 1.0220 0.9265 0.8463
190 3.4864 2.3401 1.8608 1.5647 1.3555 1.1970 1.0713 0.9687 0.8829
195 2.6237 2.0149 1.6695 1.4343 1.2597 1.1231 1.0126 0.9209
200 3.0210 2.1972 1.7866 1.5198 1.3266 1.1778 1.0586 0.9605

SEPED310017EN 141
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %

I/Ib 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
50 0.1579 0.1491 0.1410 0.1335 0.1090 0.0908 0.0768 0.0659 0.0572 0.0501 0.0442 0.0393 0.0352 0.0317 0.0288 0.0262 0.0239
55 0.1752 0.1653 0.1562 0.1479 0.1206 0.1004 0.0849 0.0727 0.0631 0.0552 0.0487 0.0434 0.0388 0.0350 0.0317 0.0288 0.0263
60 0.1927 0.1818 0.1717 0.1625 0.1324 0.1100 0.0929 0.0796 0.069 0.0604 0.0533 0.0474 0.0424 0.0382 0.0346 0.0315 0.0288
65 0.2106 0.1985 0.1875 0.1773 0.1442 0.1197 0.1011 0.0865 0.075 0.0656 0.0579 0.0515 0.0461 0.0415 0.0375 0.0342 0.0312
70 0.2288 0.2156 0.2035 0.1924 0.1562 0.1296 0.1093 0.0935 0.081 0.0708 0.0625 0.0555 0.0497 0.0447 0.0405 0.0368 0.0336
75 0.2474 0.2329 0.2197 0.2076 0.1684 0.1395 0.1176 0.1006 0.087 0.0761 0.0671 0.0596 0.0533 0.0480 0.0434 0.0395 0.0361
80 0.2662 0.2505 0.2362 0.2231 0.1807 0.1495 0.1260 0.1076 0.0931 0.0813 0.0717 0.0637 0.0570 0.0513 0.0464 0.0422 0.0385
85 0.2855 0.2685 0.2530 0.2389 0.1931 0.1597 0.1344 0.1148 0.0992 0.0867 0.0764 0.0678 0.0607 0.0546 0.0494 0.0449 0.0410
90 0.3051 0.2868 0.2701 0.2549 0.2057 0.1699 0.1429 0.1219 0.1054 0.092 0.0811 0.0720 0.0644 0.0579 0.0524 0.0476 0.0435
95 0.3251 0.3054 0.2875 0.2712 0.2185 0.1802 0.1514 0.1292 0.1116 0.0974 0.0858 0.0761 0.0681 0.0612 0.0554 0.0503 0.0459
100 0.3456 0.3244 0.3051 0.2877 0.2314 0.1907 0.1601 0.1365 0.1178 0.1028 0.0905 0.0803 0.0718 0.0645 0.0584 0.0530 0.0484
105 0.3664 0.3437 0.3231 0.3045 0.2445 0.2012 0.1688 0.1438 0.1241 0.1082 0.0952 0.0845 0.0755 0.0679 0.0614 0.0558 0.0509

3
110 0.3877 0.3634 0.3415 0.3216 0.2578 0.2119 0.1776 0.1512 0.1304 0.1136 0.1000 0.0887 0.0792 0.0712 0.0644 0.0585 0.0534
115 0.4095 0.3835 0.3602 0.3390 0.2713 0.2227 0.1865 0.1586 0.1367 0.1191 0.1048 0.0929 0.0830 0.0746 0.0674 0.0612 0.0559
120 0.4317 0.4041 0.3792 0.3567 0.2849 0.2336 0.1954 0.1661 0.1431 0.1246 0.1096 0.0972 0.0868 0.0780 0.0705 0.0640 0.0584
125 0.4545 0.4250 0.3986 0.3747 0.2988 0.2446 0.2045 0.1737 0.1495 0.1302 0.1144 0.1014 0.0905 0.0813 0.0735 0.0667 0.0609
130 0.4778 0.4465 0.4184 0.3930 0.3128 0.2558 0.2136 0.1813 0.156 0.1358 0.1193 0.1057 0.0943 0.0847 0.0766 0.0695 0.0634
135 0.5016 0.4683 0.4386 0.4117 0.3270 0.2671 0.2228 0.1890 0.1625 0.1414 0.1242 0.1100 0.0982 0.0881 0.0796 0.0723 0.0659
140 0.5260 0.4907 0.4591 0.4308 0.3414 0.2785 0.2321 0.1967 0.1691 0.147 0.1291 0.1143 0.1020 0.0916 0.0827 0.0751 0.0685
145 0.5511 0.5136 0.4802 0.4502 0.3561 0.2900 0.2414 0.2045 0.1757 0.1527 0.1340 0.1187 0.1058 0.0950 0.0858 0.0778 0.0710
150 0.5767 0.5370 0.5017 0.4700 0.3709 0.3017 0.2509 0.2124 0.1823 0.1584 0.1390 0.1230 0.1097 0.0984 0.0889 0.0806 0.0735
155 0.6031 0.5610 0.5236 0.4902 0.3860 0.3135 0.2604 0.2203 0.189 0.1641 0.1440 0.1274 0.1136 0.1019 0.0920 0.0834 0.0761
160 0.6302 0.5856 0.5461 0.5108 0.4013 0.3254 0.2701 0.2283 0.1957 0.1699 0.1490 0.1318 0.1174 0.1054 0.0951 0.0863 0.0786
165 0.6580 0.6108 0.5690 0.5319 0.4169 0.3375 0.2798 0.2363 0.2025 0.1757 0.1540 0.1362 0.1213 0.1088 0.0982 0.0891 0.0812
170 0.6866 0.6366 0.5925 0.5534 0.4327 0.3498 0.2897 0.2444 0.2094 0.1815 0.1591 0.1406 0.1253 0.1123 0.1013 0.0919 0.0838
175 0.7161 0.6631 0.6166 0.5754 0.4487 0.3621 0.2996 0.2526 0.2162 0.1874 0.1641 0.1451 0.1292 0.1158 0.1045 0.0947 0.0863
180 0.7464 0.6904 0.6413 0.5978 0.4651 0.3747 0.3096 0.2608 0.2231 0.1933 0.1693 0.1495 0.1331 0.1193 0.1076 0.0976 0.0889
185 0.7777 0.7184 0.6665 0.6208 0.4816 0.3874 0.3197 0.2691 0.2301 0.1993 0.1744 0.1540 0.1371 0.1229 0.1108 0.1004 0.0915
190 0.8100 0.7472 0.6925 0.6444 0.4985 0.4003 0.3300 0.2775 0.2371 0.2052 0.1796 0.1585 0.1411 0.1264 0.1140 0.1033 0.0941
195 0.8434 0.7769 0.7191 0.6685 0.5157 0.4133 0.3403 0.2860 0.2442 0.2113 0.1847 0.1631 0.1451 0.1300 0.1171 0.1062 0.0967
200 0.8780 0.8075 0.7465 0.6931 0.5331 0.4265 0.3508 0.2945 0.2513 0.2173 0.1900 0.1676 0.1491 0.1335 0.1203 0.1090 0.0993

142 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %

I/Ib 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
50 0.0219 0.0202 0.0167 0.0140 0.0119 0.0103 0.0089 0.0078 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0050 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
55 0.0242 0.0222 0.0183 0.0154 0.0131 0.0113 0.0098 0.0086 0.0076 0.0068 0.0061 0.0055 0.0035 0.0024 0.0018 0.0014
60 0.0264 0.0243 0.0200 0.0168 0.0143 0.0123 0.0107 0.0094 0.0083 0.0074 0.0067 0.0060 0.0038 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
65 0.0286 0.0263 0.0217 0.0182 0.0155 0.0134 0.0116 0.0102 0.0090 0.0081 0.0072 0.0065 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
70 0.0309 0.0284 0.0234 0.0196 0.0167 0.0144 0.0125 0.0110 0.0097 0.0087 0.0078 0.0070 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0018
75 0.0331 0.0305 0.0251 0.0211 0.0179 0.0154 0.0134 0.0118 0.0104 0.0093 0.0083 0.0075 0.0048 0.0033 0.0025 0.0019
80 0.0353 0.0325 0.0268 0.0225 0.0191 0.0165 0.0143 0.0126 0.0111 0.0099 0.0089 0.0080 0.0051 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
85 0.0376 0.0346 0.0285 0.0239 0.0203 0.0175 0.0152 0.0134 0.0118 0.0105 0.0095 0.0085 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
90 0.0398 0.0367 0.0302 0.0253 0.0215 0.0185 0.0161 0.0142 0.0125 0.0112 0.0100 0.0090 0.0058 0.0040 0.0029 0.0023
95 0.0421 0.0387 0.0319 0.0267 0.0227 0.0196 0.0170 0.0150 0.0132 0.0118 0.0106 0.0095 0.0061 0.0042 0.0031 0.0024
100 0.0444 0.0408 0.0336 0.0282 0.0240 0.0206 0.0179 0.0157 0.0139 0.0124 0.0111 0.0101 0.0064 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
105 0.0466 0.0429 0.0353 0.0296 0.0252 0.0217 0.0188 0.0165 0.0146 0.0130 0.0117 0.0106 0.0067 0.0047 0.0034 0.0026

3
110 0.0489 0.0450 0.0370 0.0310 0.0264 0.0227 0.0197 0.0173 0.0153 0.0137 0.0123 0.0111 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
115 0.0512 0.0471 0.0388 0.0325 0.0276 0.0237 0.0207 0.0181 0.0160 0.0143 0.0128 0.0116 0.0074 0.0051 0.0038 0.0029
120 0.0535 0.0492 0.0405 0.0339 0.0288 0.0248 0.0216 0.0189 0.0167 0.0149 0.0134 0.0121 0.0077 0.0053 0.0039 0.0030
125 0.0558 0.0513 0.0422 0.0353 0.0300 0.0258 0.0225 0.0197 0.0175 0.0156 0.0139 0.0126 0.0080 0.0056 0.0041 0.0031
130 0.0581 0.0534 0.0439 0.0368 0.0313 0.0269 0.0234 0.0205 0.0182 0.0162 0.0145 0.0131 0.0084 0.0058 0.0043 0.0033
135 0.0604 0.0555 0.0457 0.0382 0.0325 0.0279 0.0243 0.0213 0.0189 0.0168 0.0151 0.0136 0.0087 0.0060 0.0044 0.0034
140 0.0627 0.0576 0.0474 0.0397 0.0337 0.0290 0.0252 0.0221 0.0196 0.0174 0.0156 0.0141 0.0090 0.0062 0.0046 0.0035
145 0.0650 0.0598 0.0491 0.0411 0.0349 0.0300 0.0261 0.0229 0.0203 0.0181 0.0162 0.0146 0.0093 0.0065 0.0047 0.0036
150 0.0673 0.0619 0.0509 0.0426 0.0361 0.0311 0.0270 0.0237 0.0210 0.0187 0.0168 0.0151 0.0096 0.0067 0.0049 0.0038
155 0.0696 0.0640 0.0526 0.0440 0.0374 0.0321 0.0279 0.0245 0.0217 0.0193 0.0173 0.0156 0.0100 0.0069 0.0051 0.0039
160 0.0720 0.0661 0.0543 0.0455 0.0386 0.0332 0.0289 0.0253 0.0224 0.0200 0.0179 0.0161 0.0103 0.0071 0.0052 0.0040
165 0.0743 0.0683 0.0561 0.0469 0.0398 0.0343 0.0298 0.0261 0.0231 0.0206 0.0185 0.0166 0.0106 0.0074 0.0054 0.0041
170 0.0766 0.0704 0.0578 0.0484 0.0411 0.0353 0.0307 0.0269 0.0238 0.0212 0.0190 0.0171 0.0109 0.0076 0.0056 0.0043
175 0.0790 0.0726 0.0596 0.0498 0.0423 0.0364 0.0316 0.0277 0.0245 0.0218 0.0196 0.0177 0.0113 0.0078 0.0057 0.0044
180 0.0813 0.0747 0.0613 0.0513 0.0435 0.0374 0.0325 0.0285 0.0252 0.0225 0.0201 0.0182 0.0116 0.0080 0.0059 0.0045
185 0.0837 0.0769 0.0631 0.0528 0.0448 0.0385 0.0334 0.0293 0.0259 0.0231 0.0207 0.0187 0.0119 0.0083 0.0061 0.0046
190 0.0861 0.0790 0.0649 0.0542 0.0460 0.0395 0.0344 0.0301 0.0266 0.0237 0.0213 0.0192 0.0122 0.0085 0.0062 0.0048
195 0.0884 0.0812 0.0666 0.0557 0.0473 0.0406 0.0353 0.0309 0.0274 0.0244 0.0218 0.0197 0.0126 0.0087 0.0064 0.0049
200 0.0908 0.0834 0.0684 0.0572 0.0485 0.0417 0.0362 0.0317 0.0281 0.0250 0.0224 0.0202 0.0129 0.0089 0.0066 0.0050

SEPED310017EN 143
 Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Hot curves
I/Ib 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
105 0.6690 0.2719 0.1685 0.1206 0.0931 0.0752 0.0627 0.0535 0.0464 0.0408 0.0363 0.0326 0.0295 0.0268 0.0245 0.0226
110 3.7136 0.6466 0.3712 0.2578 0.1957 0.1566 0.1296 0.1100 0.0951 0.0834 0.0740 0.0662 0.0598 0.0544 0.0497 0.0457
115 1.2528 0.6257 0.4169 0.3102 0.2451 0.2013 0.1699 0.1462 0.1278 0.1131 0.1011 0.0911 0.0827 0.0755 0.0693
120 3.0445 0.9680 0.6061 0.4394 0.3423 0.2786 0.2336 0.2002 0.1744 0.1539 0.1372 0.1234 0.1118 0.1020 0.0935
125 1.4925 0.8398 0.5878 0.4499 0.3623 0.3017 0.2572 0.2231 0.1963 0.1747 0.1568 0.1419 0.1292 0.1183
130 2.6626 1.1451 0.7621 0.5705 0.4537 0.3747 0.3176 0.2744 0.2407 0.2136 0.1914 0.1728 0.1572 0.1438
135 1.5870 0.9734 0.7077 0.5543 0.4535 0.3819 0.3285 0.2871 0.2541 0.2271 0.2048 0.1860 0.1699
140 2.3979 1.2417 0.8668 0.6662 0.5390 0.4507 0.3857 0.3358 0.2963 0.2643 0.2378 0.2156 0.1967
145 1.6094 1.0561 0.7921 0.6325 0.5245 0.4463 0.3869 0.3403 0.3028 0.2719 0.2461 0.2243
150 2.1972 1.2897 0.9362 0.7357 0.6042 0.5108 0.4408 0.3864 0.3429 0.3073 0.2776 0.2526
155 3.8067 1.5950 1.1047 0.8508 0.6909 0.5798 0.4978 0.4347 0.3846 0.3439 0.3102 0.2817
160 2.0369 1.3074 0.9808 0.7857 0.6539 0.5583 0.4855 0.4282 0.3819 0.3438 0.3118
165 2.8478 1.5620 1.1304 0.8905 0.7340 0.6226 0.5390 0.4738 0.4215 0.3786 0.3427

3 170
175
180
1.9042
2.4288
3.5988
1.3063
1.5198
1.7918
1.0076
1.1403
1.2933
0.8210
0.9163
1.0217
0.6914
0.7652
0.8449
0.5955
0.6554
0.7191
0.5215
0.5717
0.6244
0.4626
0.5055
0.5504
0.4146
0.4520
0.4908
0.3747
0.4077
0.4418
185 2.1665 1.4739 1.1394 0.9316 0.7872 0.6802 0.5974 0.5312 0.4772
190 2.7726 1.6946 1.2730 1.0264 0.8602 0.7392 0.6466 0.5733 0.5138
195 4.5643 1.9782 1.4271 1.1312 0.9390 0.8019 0.6985 0.6173 0.5518
200 2.3755 1.6094 1.2483 1.0245 0.8688 0.7531 0.6633 0.5914

I/Ib 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
105 0.0209 0.0193 0.0180 0.0168 0.0131 0.0106 0.0087 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0047 0.0042 0.0037 0.0033 0.0030 0.0027 0.0025
110 0.0422 0.0391 0.0363 0.0339 0.0264 0.0212 0.0175 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0095 0.0084 0.0075 0.0067 0.0060 0.0055 0.0050
115 0.0639 0.0592 0.0550 0.0513 0.0398 0.0320 0.0264 0.0222 0.0189 0.0164 0.0143 0.0126 0.0112 0.0101 0.0091 0.0082 0.0075
120 0.0862 0.0797 0.0740 0.0690 0.0535 0.0429 0.0353 0.0297 0.0253 0.0219 0.0191 0.0169 0.0150 0.0134 0.0121 0.0110 0.0100
125 0.1089 0.1007 0.0934 0.0870 0.0673 0.0540 0.0444 0.0372 0.0317 0.0274 0.0240 0.0211 0.0188 0.0168 0.0151 0.0137 0.0125
130 0.1322 0.1221 0.1132 0.1054 0.0813 0.0651 0.0535 0.0449 0.0382 0.0330 0.0288 0.0254 0.0226 0.0202 0.0182 0.0165 0.0150
135 0.1560 0.1440 0.1334 0.1241 0.0956 0.0764 0.0627 0.0525 0.0447 0.0386 0.0337 0.0297 0.0264 0.0236 0.0213 0.0192 0.0175
140 0.1805 0.1664 0.1540 0.1431 0.1100 0.0878 0.0720 0.0603 0.0513 0.0443 0.0386 0.0340 0.0302 0.0270 0.0243 0.0220 0.0200
145 0.2055 0.1892 0.1750 0.1625 0.1246 0.0993 0.0813 0.0681 0.0579 0.0499 0.0435 0.0384 0.0341 0.0305 0.0274 0.0248 0.0226
150 0.2312 0.2127 0.1965 0.1823 0.1395 0.1110 0.0908 0.0759 0.0645 0.0556 0.0485 0.0427 0.0379 0.0339 0.0305 0.0276 0.0251
155 0.2575 0.2366 0.2185 0.2025 0.1546 0.1228 0.1004 0.0838 0.0712 0.0614 0.0535 0.0471 0.0418 0.0374 0.0336 0.0304 0.0277
160 0.2846 0.2612 0.2409 0.2231 0.1699 0.1347 0.1100 0.0918 0.0780 0.0671 0.0585 0.0515 0.0457 0.0408 0.0367 0.0332 0.0302
165 0.3124 0.2864 0.2639 0.2442 0.1855 0.1468 0.1197 0.0999 0.0847 0.0729 0.0635 0.0559 0.0496 0.0443 0.0398 0.0360 0.0328
170 0.3410 0.3122 0.2874 0.2657 0.2012 0.1591 0.1296 0.1080 0.0916 0.0788 0.0686 0.0603 0.0535 0.0478 0.0430 0.0389 0.0353
175 0.3705 0.3388 0.3115 0.2877 0.2173 0.1715 0.1395 0.1161 0.0984 0.0847 0.0737 0.0648 0.0574 0.0513 0.0461 0.0417 0.0379
180 0.4008 0.3660 0.3361 0.3102 0.2336 0.1840 0.1495 0.1244 0.1054 0.0906 0.0788 0.0692 0.0614 0.0548 0.0493 0.0446 0.0405
185 0.4321 0.3940 0.3614 0.3331 0.2502 0.1967 0.1597 0.1327 0.1123 0.0965 0.0839 0.0737 0.0653 0.0583 0.0524 0.0474 0.0431
190 0.4644 0.4229 0.3873 0.3567 0.2671 0.2096 0.1699 0.1411 0.1193 0.1025 0.0891 0.0782 0.0693 0.0619 0.0556 0.0503 0.0457
195 0.4978 0.4525 0.4140 0.3808 0.2842 0.2226 0.1802 0.1495 0.1264 0.1085 0.0943 0.0828 0.0733 0.0654 0.0588 0.0531 0.0483
200 0.5324 0.4831 0.4413 0.4055 0.3017 0.2358 0.1907 0.1581 0.1335 0.1145 0.0995 0.0873 0.0773 0.0690 0.0620 0.0560 0.0509

144 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves

Hot curves
I/Ib 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
105 0.0023 0.0021 0.0017 0.0014 0.0012 0.0010 0.0009 0.0008 0.0007 0.0006 0.0006 0.0005 0.0003 0.0002 0.0002 0.0001
110 0.0045 0.0042 0.0034 0.0029 0.0024 0.0021 0.0018 0.0016 0.0014 0.0013 0.0011 0.0010 0.0006 0.0004 0.0003 0.0003
115 0.0068 0.0063 0.0051 0.0043 0.0036 0.0031 0.0027 0.0024 0.0021 0.0019 0.0017 0.0015 0.0010 0.0007 0.0005 0.0004
120 0.0091 0.0084 0.0069 0.0057 0.0049 0.0042 0.0036 0.0032 0.0028 0.0025 0.0022 0.0020 0.0013 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
125 0.0114 0.0105 0.0086 0.0072 0.0061 0.0052 0.0045 0.0040 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
130 0.0137 0.0126 0.0103 0.0086 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0048 0.0042 0.0038 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
135 0.0160 0.0147 0.0120 0.0101 0.0085 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0049 0.0044 0.0039 0.0035 0.0023 0.0016 0.0011 0.0009
140 0.0183 0.0168 0.0138 0.0115 0.0097 0.0084 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0026 0.0018 0.0013 0.0010
145 0.0206 0.0189 0.0155 0.0129 0.0110 0.0094 0.0082 0.0072 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0046 0.0029 0.0020 0.0015 0.0011
150 0.0229 0.0211 0.0172 0.0144 0.0122 0.0105 0.0091 0.0080 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
155 0.0253 0.0232 0.0190 0.0158 0.0134 0.0115 0.0100 0.0088 0.0077 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0035 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
160 0.0276 0.0253 0.0207 0.0173 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0096 0.0085 0.0075 0.0067 0.0061 0.0039 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015

3
165 0.0299 0.0275 0.0225 0.0187 0.0159 0.0136 0.0118 0.0104 0.0092 0.0082 0.0073 0.0066 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
170 0.0323 0.0296 0.0242 0.0202 0.0171 0.0147 0.0128 0.0112 0.0099 0.0088 0.0079 0.0071 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0018
175 0.0346 0.0317 0.0260 0.0217 0.0183 0.0157 0.0137 0.0120 0.0106 0.0094 0.0084 0.0076 0.0048 0.0034 0.0025 0.0019
180 0.0370 0.0339 0.0277 0.0231 0.0196 0.0168 0.0146 0.0128 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
185 0.0393 0.0361 0.0295 0.0246 0.0208 0.0179 0.0155 0.0136 0.0120 0.0107 0.0096 0.0086 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
190 0.0417 0.0382 0.0313 0.0261 0.0221 0.0189 0.0164 0.0144 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
195 0.0441 0.0404 0.0330 0.0275 0.0233 0.0200 0.0173 0.0152 0.0134 0.0119 0.0107 0.0096 0.0061 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
200 0.0464 0.0426 0.0348 0.0290 0.0245 0.0211 0.0183 0.0160 0.0141 0.0126 0.0113 0.0102 0.0065 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025

SEPED310017EN 145
 Protection functions Breaker failure
ANSI code 50BF

Backup protection if the circuit breaker does Description

not trip. If a breaker fails to open following a tripping order (detected by the non-extinction of
the fault current), this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or
adjacent breakers.
The "breaker failure" protection function is activated by an O1 output tripping order
received from the overcurrent protection functions which trip the circuit breaker
(50/51, 50N/51N, 46, 67N, 67, 64REF). It checks for the disappearance of current
during the time interval specified by the time delay T. It may also take into account
the position of the circuit breaker, read on the logic inputs to determine the actual
opening of the breaker. Wiring a volt-free closed circuit breaker position contact on
the "breaker closed" equation editor input can ensure that the protection is effective
in the following situations:
b When 50BF is activated by protection function 50N/51N (set point Is0 < 0.2 In),
detection of the 50BF current set point can possibly not be operational.
b When trip circuit supervision (TCS) is used, the closed circuit breaker contact is
short-circuited. Logic input I101 is therefore no longer operational.

3
Automatic activation of this protection function requires the use of the circuit breaker
control function in the control logic. A specific input may also be used to activate the
protection by logic equation. That option is useful for adding special cases of
activation (e.g. tripping by an external protection unit).
The time-delayed output of the protection function should be assigned to a logic
output via the control matrix.
Starting and stopping of the time delay T counter are conditioned by the presence of
a current above the set point (I > Is).

Block diagram
activation by 50/51,
DE801275

50N/51N, 46, 67N, 67,

64REF

"breaker closed"
logic input delayed
output
"breaker closed"
logic equation or
Logipam
activation by pick-up
logic equation or signal
by Logipam

Setting: Not accounting for the circuit breaker position

Accounting for the circuit breaker position

146 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Breaker failure
ANSI code 50BF

Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 0.2 In to 2 In
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.1 A
Drop out/pick up ratio 87.5 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 3 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +15 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Taking into account circuit breaker position
Setting range With / without
Characteristic times
Overshoot time < 35 ms at 2 Is
Inputs
Designation
Protection reset
Syntax
P50BF_1_101
Equations
b
3
Start 50BF P50BF_1_107 b
Protection inhibition P50BF_1_113 b
Breaker closed P50BF_1_119 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50BF_1_1 b
Delayed output P50BF_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P50BF_1_16 b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Example of setting
Below is a case that may be used to determine the time-delay setting of the breaker
failure function:
b overcurrent protection setting: T = inst
b circuit breaker operating time: 60 ms
b auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker(s): 10 ms.
DE52249

The breaker failure function time delay is the sum of the following times:
b Sepam O1 output relay pick-up time = 10 ms
b circuit breaker opening time = 60 ms
b Breaker failure function overshoot time = 35 ms.
To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers, add a margin of approximately
20 ms.
The time delay is 125 ms minimum, set at 130 ms.

SEPED310017EN 147
 Protection functions Phase overcurrent
ANSI code 50/51

Protection against overcurrents and Operation

overloads. Protection against overcurrents or overloads:
b It is three-phase and includes a time delay, which is either definite or IDMT.
b Each of the 8 relays has 2 groups of settings. The setting group A or B can be
switched by a logic input or a remote control order depending on the parameter
setting.
b For better detection of faraway faults, protection can be confirmed by unit 1 of one
of the following protections:
v undervoltage
v negative sequence overvoltage.
b The custom curve, defined point by point, can be used with this protection.
b An adjustable timer hold delay, either definite or IDMT, allows coordination with
electromechanical relays and detection of reboot faults.
b The protection incorporates a harmonic 2 restraint which can be used to set the
protection Is set point close to the rated current of the device to be protected, for
example to avoid transformer inrush currents.

3
This harmonic 2 restraint, which can be selected by parameter setting, is active as
long as the current is less than half the minimum short-circuit current of the network
downstream of the device to be protected.

Tripping curve Timer hold

Definite time (DT) Definite time
Standard inverse time (SIT) Definite time
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT
Customized Definite time

Block diagram
Pick-up output and to logic discrimination
DE81270

I1
I2 I > Is
I3 T 0
&
Delayed
I<Isc min /2 & output

& Confirmation
(optional)
H2 restraint

148 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Phase overcurrent
ANSI code 50/51

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is set point
Setting range Definite time 0.05 In y Is y 24 In expressed in
amperes
IDMT 0.05 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in
amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.01 In
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.015 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)

3
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Confirmation
Setting range By undervoltage (unit 1)
By negative sequence overvoltage (unit 1)
None, no confirmation
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Harmonic 2 restraint
Setting range 5 to 50 %
Resolution 1%
Minimum short-circuit current Isc
Setting range In to 999 kA
Resolution de 1 to 9.99 0.01
de 10 to 99.9 0.1
de 100 to 999 1
Minimum interval 0.1A
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
confirmed instantaneous:
b inst. < 55 ms at 2 Is for Is u 0.3 In (typically 35 ms)
b inst. < 70 ms at 2 Is for Is < 0.3 In (typically 50 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P50/51_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P50/51_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50/51_x_1 b
Delayed output P50/51_x_3 b b
Drop out P50/51_x_4 b
Phase 1 fault P50/51_x_7 b
Phase 2 fault P50/51_x_8 b
Phase 3 fault P50/51_x_9 b
Protection inhibited P50/51_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4.
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types.

SEPED310017EN 149
 Protection functions Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G

Protection against earth faults. Description

Earth fault protection based on measured neutral, zero sequence or earth fault (tank
earth leakage protection) current:
b the protection function has a definite or IDMT time delay.
b each of the eight units has two groups of settings. Switching to setting group A
or B can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control order, depending on the
settings.
b The protection function includes a harmonic 2 restraint which can be set to provide
greater saturation stability of the CT phases when transformers are energized.
When the residual current measurement is done by adding up to 3 TC phases or by
an intermediate TC located in the common point of the 3 TC phases, the harmonic 2
restraint must be active with:
v Iso > 10 % of In TC, if the protection is time-dependant (DT),
v Iso > 5 % of IN TC, if the protection is IDMT.
b the customized curve, defined point by point, can be used with this protection
function.

3
b an adjustable timer hold, definite or IDMT, can be used for coordination with
electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults.
b each unit can be independently set to one of the two measurement channels I0 or
I'0 or to the sum of the phase currents on the main or additional channels. By mixing
the possibilities on the different units, it is possible to have:
v different dynamic set points
v different applications, e.g. zero sequence and tank earth leakage protection.

Tripping curve Timer hold curve

Definite time (DT) Definite time
Standard inverse time (SIT) Definite time
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT
EPATR-B Definite time
EPATR-C Definite time
Customized Definite time

Block diagram
pick-up signal
DE81271

Input I0 and to logic discrimination

delayed output

I0 > 15 A 15 A set point output

(EPATR curves only)

150 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I0Σ
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is0 setting
Definite time 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) expressed in amperes
setting range Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y 15 In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor
2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
+ ACE990
IDMT
setting range
0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A) expressed in amperes
Sum of CTs
With CSH sensor
0.01 In y Is0 y In (min. 0.1 A) 3
2 A rating 0.1 to 2 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 20 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
+ ACE990
EPATR CSH sensor 0.6 to 5 A
Setting range 20 A rating
Core balance CT 0.6 to 5 A
with ACE990
and 15 A y In0 y 50 A
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In0
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.005 In0/Is0) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
EPATR-B 0.5 to 1 s
EPATR-C 0.1 to 3 s
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Harmonic 2 restraint
Fixed threshold 17 % ±3 %
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (for T1 = 0)
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is0 (typically 25 ms)
Confirmed instantaneous:
b inst < 55 ms at 2 Is0 for Is u 0.3 In0 (typically 35 ms)
b inst < 70 ms at 2 Is0 for Is < 0.3 In0 (typically 50 ms)
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (for T1 = 0)
x: unit number. Inputs
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Designation Syntax Equations
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Protection reset P50N/51N_x_101 b
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Protection inhibition P50N/51N_x_113 b
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Outputs
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50N/51N_x_1 b
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32 Delayed output P50N/51N_x_3 b b
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 Drop out P50N/51N_x_4 b
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Protection inhibited P50N/51N_x_16 b
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4.
15 A set point output P50N/51N_x_56 b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and
IAC types.

SEPED310017EN 151
 Protection functions Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G

EPATR-B curves
EPATR-B tripping curves are defined from the following equations:
DE80213

85,386 T
b for Is0 y I0 y 6.4 A t = ---------------
- × -------
-
I0 0, ( 708 ) 0,8

140,213 T
b for 6.4 A y I0 y 200 A t = --------------------
- × --------
I0 0,975 0,8

b for I0 > 200 A t = T

EPATR-B standard curve (log scales)

Curve 1 : Is0 = 5 A and T = 1 s

Curve 2 : Is0 = 0.6 A and T = 0.5 s
Curve 3 : Is0 and T

EPATR-C curves
t
EPATR-C tripping curves are defined from the following equations:
DE80071

b for Is0 y I0 y 200 A 72 T

t = ----------- × -----------
I0 2 / 3 2,10

b for I0 > 200 A t = T

1
3
T
3
2
0,1
0,1 0,6 Is0 5 200 I0

EPATR-C standard curve (log scales)

Curve 1 : Is0 = 5 A and T = 3 s

Curve 2 : Is0 = 0.6 A and T = 0.1 s
Curve 3 : Is0 and T

152 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Voltage-restrained overcurrent
ANSI code 50V/51V

Generator protection against close Description

short-circuits. The voltage-restrained overcurrent protection function is used to protect generators.
The operation set point is adjusted according to the voltage to take into account
cases of faults close to the generator which cause voltage dips and short-circuit
current:
b the protection function is three-phase and has a definite or IDMT time delay
DE50746

b the customized curve, defined point by point, may be used with this protection
function
b an adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can be used for coordination with
electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults
b the set point is adjusted according to the lowest of the phase-to-phase voltages
measured. The adjusted set point I*s is defined by the following equation:

I*s = Is ⎝
U
----- × ⎛ 4 -------
- – 0.2⎞
⎠
3 Un

Tripping curve
Definite time (DT)
Standard inverse time (SIT)
Timer hold
Definite time
Definite time
3
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
Set point adjustment. RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT
Customized Definite time

Block diagram
DE81272

SEPED310017EN 153
 Protection functions Voltage-restrained overcurrent
ANSI code 50V/51V

Characteristics
Settings
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is set point
Setting range Definite time 0.5 In y Is y 24 In expressed in amperes
IDMT 0.5 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % (with min. reset variance of 0.015 In)
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit

3 Advanced settings
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT time (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
Inst. < 50 ms at 2 Is (confirmed instantaneous) (typically 35 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset time < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P50V/51V_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P50V/51V_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50V/51V_x_1 b
Delayed output P50V/51V_x_3 b b
Drop out P50V/51V_x_4 b
Phase 1 fault P50V/51V_x_7 b
Phase 2 fault P50V/51V_x_8 b
Phase 3 fault P50V/51V_x_9 b
Protection inhibited P50V/51V_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4.
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types.

154 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
ANSI code 59

Protection against phase-to-neutral or Operation

phase-to-phase overvoltages. Protection against overvoltages or check that there is sufficient voltage present to
authorize a source transfer:
b it is single-phase and operates on phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage
b it includes a time delay T with definite time
b when operating on phase-to-neutral voltage, it indicates the faulty phase in the
alarm associated with the fault.
Whether it operates on phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage depends on the
connection chosen for the voltage inputs.

Block diagram

3
DE51626

Connection conditions
Type of V1, V2, V3 (1) U21, U32 U21, U21 (1) V1 (1)
connection + V0 U32
Phase-to-neutral YES YES NO NO On V1 only
operation
Phase-to-phase YES YES YES On U21 NO
operation only
(1) With or without V0.

SEPED310017EN 155
 Protection functions Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
ANSI code 59

Characteristics
Settings
Voltage mode
Setting range Phase-to-phase voltage / Phase-to-neutral voltage
Us (or Vs) set point
Setting range 50 % to 150 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns < 208 V
50 % to 135 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns u 208 V
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±1 %
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
Setting range 97 % to 99 %
Accuracy 1%
Resolution 0,1 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s

3
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from 0.9 Us (Vs) to 1.1 Us (Vs)
(typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 40 ms from 0.9 Us (Vs) to 1.1 Us (Vs)
Reset time < 50 ms from 1.1 Us (Vs) to 0.9 Us (Vs)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P59_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P59_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P59_x_1 b
Delayed output P59_x_3 b b
Fault phase 1 (2) P59_x_7 b
Fault phase 2 (2) P59_x_8 b
Fault phase 3 (2) P59_x_9 b
Protection inhibited P59_x_16 b
Instantaneous output V1 or U21 P59_x_23 b
Instantaneous output V2 or U32 P59_x_24 b
Instantaneous output V3 or U13 P59_x_25 b
Delayed output V1 or U21 P59_x_26 b
Delayed output V2 or U32 P59_x_27 b
Delayed output V3 or U13 P59_x_28 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2)When the protection function is used for phase-to-neutral voltage.

156 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement
ANSI code 59N

Protection against insulation faults Description

Protection against insulation faults by measuring the residual voltage V0 or the
neutral point voltage Vnt for generators and motors.
The residual voltage is obtained by the vector sum of the phase voltages or by
measurements using delta connected VTs.
The neutral point voltage is measured by a VT inserted in the neutral point of the
generator or the motor.
The protection function includes a time delay T, either definite or IDMT (dependent
on the residual voltage V0) (see tripping curve equation on page 185).
It operates only when a residual or neutral point voltage is available, by connecting
V1V2V3, V0 or Vnt.

Block diagram
DE50785

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (V0)
Neutral-point voltage (Vnt)
Tripping curve
Setting range Definite time
IDMT (dependent on the residual voltage V0)
Vs0 set point
Definite time setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp (for residual voltage V0)
2 % Vntp to 80 % Vntp (for neutral point voltage Vnt)
IDMT setting range 2 % Unp to 10 % Unp (for residual voltage V0)
2 % Vntp to 10 % Vntp (for neutral point voltage Vnt)
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±2 % or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Time delay T (tripping time at 2 Vs0)
Definite time setting range 50 ms to 300 s
IDMT setting range 100 ms to 10 s
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 45 ms (typically 25 ms) at 2 Vs0
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Vs0
Reset time < 40 ms at 2 Vs0
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P59N_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P59N_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P59N_x_1 b
Delayed output P59N_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P59N_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 157
 Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF

Protection of three-phase windings against Description

phase-to-earth faults. The restricted earth fault protection function detects phase-to-earth faults on three-
phase windings with earthed neutral. This function protects generators and
I1 I2 I3
transformers.
DE80166

The protected zone is between the 3 phases CTs I1, I2, I3 and the neutral point
current measurement I0.
The vector associated with the current sensors determines the conventional direction
of connection.
P2 P1

DE80774
I0
S2 S1

Principle
Protection is activated if the following 3 conditions are met:
DE80791

120 %
Istab
b Id0 > Is0

3 Tripping zone
b Id0 > 1.2 × Istab
b Δ I0 > min ( Is0/4, I0min )

With:
b Id0: differential residual current
b Is0: adjustable trip set point of the protection function
b Istab: stabilization current
b ΔI0: variation of the neutral point current
b I0min: nominal current of the neutral point:
v I0min = 0.05 x In0 si In0 > 20 A
0.8 Is0 max. v I0min = 0.10 x In0 si In0 ≤20 A

Is0 setting range Differential residual current Id0

0.05 Is0 min. Id0 = I0 Σ – I0
Istab / In With:
b I0 : neutral point current
b I0 Σ : residuel current calculated using the sum of the 3 phase currents

Stabilization current Istab

Istab ( k ) = max ( It ( k ), α ⋅ Istab ( k – 1 ) )
With:
b k: present moment
b k-1: previous moment in the 64REF protective processing cycle
b α: time constant adaptation coefficient of the time memory to cover dips in the
through current It, when the CTs are saturated, on an external multi-phase fault
b It: through current

Through current It
The through current It provides the protection with discrimination and rendered
immunity in relation to external multi-phase faults.
It = max ( IR0, β ⋅ IR1 )
With:
b IR0 = I0 Σ + I0 ⁄ 2: residual component sensitive to single-phase faults
b IR1 = Id – Ii : component sensitive to multi-phase faults
b β : coefficient depending on the nature of the external fault:
v β = max ( 2, Id ⁄ Ib ) for two-phase/earth or three-phase/earth faults
v β = 0 for single-phase faults

Variation of the neutral point current ΔI0

The neutral point current variation is the difference in the absolute value between the
neutral point current before and after the fault has been detected.

158 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF

Block diagram
Ii βIR1
DE81273

βIR1 = β.( Id - Ii )
Id Stabilization Istab
current calculation
I0 input IR0
IR0 = I0Σ+I0 2
I0 input

Id0
Id0 > 1.2 Istab
Id0 =

Id0 > Is0 &

Tripping output 3
I0 variation ΔI0 ΔI0 > Min(Is0/4, I0 min)
calculation

Additional protection on multi-phase faults

When multi-phase/internal earth faults occur, the 64REF protection may experience
downgraded operation. The table below defines the usual additional protection for
protecting the installation in the event of multi-phase/internal earth faults.

Application Network diagram Additional

protections
Protection of an incomer on a: ANSI 50/51 at the
b Directly earthed, resistive or inductive primary
MV network (1000 V < MV < 50 kV)
b TN or TT type LV network (< 1000 V)

Protection of parallel incomers on a: ANSI 67

b HV distribution network
b Directly earthed, resistive or inductive
MV network
b TN or TT type LV network

Protection of a feeder on an HV(> 50 kV) ANSI 50/51N at the

distribution network neutral point

Protection of zero sequence generator on b ANSI 50/51 or

an MV network b ANSI 50N/51N

Generator protection, in which the neutral ANSI 50N/51N at the

is earthed across a low impedance neutral point
G

Machine-transformer unit protection, in ANSI 50N/51N at the

which the neutral is earthed across a low neutral point
G
impedance

SEPED310017EN 159
 Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF

Dimensioning current sensors

b The primary current of the neutral point current transformer must comply with the
following rule:
In0 u 0.1 x I1P, where I1P is the phase-to-earth short-circuit current.

b Neutral current transformer must be:

v type 5P20 with an accuracy burden VACT u Rw.in0²
v or defined by a knee-point voltage Vk u (RCT + Rw).20.in0.

b Phase current transformers must be:

I3P I1P
v type 5P, with an accuracy-limit factor FLP u max ⎛ 20, 1.6 --------, 2.4 --------
⎝ In In
and an accuracy burden VACT u Rw.in²
I3P I1P
v or defined by a knee-point voltage Vk u (RCT + Rw) max ⎛ 20, 1.6 --------, 2.4 -------- in.

3
⎝ In In
b Formula legend:
in: phase CT rated secondary current
in0: neutral point CT rated secondary current
RCT: phase CT or neutral CT internal resistance
Rw: resistance of the CT load and wiring
In: phase CT rated primary current
In0: neutral point CT rated primary current
I3P: three-phase short-circuit current
I1P: phase-to-earth short-circuit current

Characteristics
Settings
Is0
Setting range 0.05 In to 0.8 In for In u 20 A
0.1 In to 0.8 In for In < 20 A
Accuracy (1) 5%
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 % ±2 %
Characteristic times
Operation time < 55 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Overshoot time < 35 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Reset time < 45 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P64REF_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P64REF_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Protection output P64REF_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P64REF_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

160 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66

Protection of motors against mechanical Operation

stress caused by starts that are too close The number of starts is incremented if:
The current taken exceeds 5 % of the current Ib after circuit breaker closing (and
together.
the circuit breaker position is hard-wired on inputs I101 and I102).
The current taken exceeds 5 % of the current Ib after re-acceleration.

The number of starts over the period Tcons is limited by:

the permitted number of consecutive cold starts (Nc)
the permitted number of successive hot starts (Nh).

The "stop/start" time delay is used to impose a minimum stopping time between each
start.

The motor "hot state" data item is determined by the 49RMS motor thermal overload
protection. A "hot state" set point can also be configured using this protection
function (see page 122).
Note: When the 49RMS generic thermal overload protection is used, if ES0 is different from
0%, the ANSI 66 protection function may not work properly.
As the "hot state" set point is fixed at 50% in the ANSI 66 protection function, according
3
to ES0 setting value, the cold state for the 66 protection function may be reduced or not exist.
So the number of starts will be limited by the number of consecutive hot starts, with no impact
of number of consecutive cold starts setting.
When the motor curves imply to use ES0 setting to move the "cold curve", it is highly adviced
to use the thermal model based on two time constants, that avoid this setting difficulty.

Block diagram
Adjustable delay
DE81266

between stop/start &

I1 0 T
I2 Ix > 0.05 Ib
I3

Logic input Clear

motor
re-acceleration ≥1 &

T = 100 ms T = 100 ms
Motor
re-acceleration logic equation 0 T 0 T ≥1 Inhibit closing
≥1 &
Adjustable
& delay between
Closed circuit breaker consecutive starts &
& K1 ≥ Nc
position not read
0 Tcons
Closed circuit 0 T ≥1
breaker
T = 100 ms
Clear
Confirmation of counting by circuit breaker position & K2 ≥ Nh

"Hot state" P49RMS_1_18

Reset
≥1
counters
Clear

Logic input
Authorize emergency restart

Operating information
The following information is available to the operator:
the number of starts before inhibition
start inhibit time
(See machine operation help functions on page 51).

SEPED310017EN 161
 Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66

Characteristics
Settings
Delay between consecutive starts (Tcons)
Setting range 1 mn to 90 mn
Resolution 1 mn
Permitted number of consecutive cold starts (Nc)
Setting range 1 to 5
Resolution 1
Permitted number of consecutive hot starts (Nh)
Setting range 1 to (Nc -1)
Resolution 1
Delay between stop/start
Setting range 0 to 90 mn (0 no time delay)
Resolution 1 mn
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Reset protection P66_1_101 b
Motor re-acceleration P66_1_102 b

3 Inhibit protection
Outputs
Designation
P66_1_113

Syntax
b

Equations Matrix
Protection output P66_1_3 b b
Protection inhibited P66_1_16 b
Stop/start inhibit P66_1_29 b
Startup total reached P66_1_30 b
Consecutive startups reached P66_1_31 b

Help with parameter setting

Number of consecutive starts
Motor manufacturers state the permitted number of consecutive cold (Nc) and hot
(Nh) starts in the technical data.
Delay between consecutive starts
Consecutive starts are starts that are sufficiently close in relation to the rotor cooling
time constant.
The delay between consecutive starts (Tcons) must be set to the value of the rotor
cooling time constant:
τ = (Tc - Th) . LRT / gn
Where:
Tc: locked cold rotor limit time in seconds
Th: locked hot rotor limit time in seconds
LRT: locked rotor torque in pu
gn: rated slip in pu
Motor hot state set point
The motor thermal capacity used varies from 0 to Itrip2 (Itrip being the motor thermal
overload protection tripping current).
In order to be able to perform a hot start without tripping the thermal overload
protection, the motor hot state set point must be configured.
There are 2 different scenarios:
b The motor starting time (tstg) is close to the locked hot rotor limit time (Th).
This scenario corresponds to a motor on which the load's moment of inertia is high,
such as a fan. The hot state set point is configured as follows:
2 tdem
Schaud < Itrip – ---------------
Th
b The motor starting time (tstg) is short compared to the locked hot rotor limit time (Th).
The hot state set point is configured as follows:
tdem 2 tdem
Nc ⋅ ⎛ ---------------⎞ < Schaud < Itrip – ⎛ Nh ⋅ ---------------⎞
⎝ Tc ⎠ ⎝ Th ⎠
In this scenario, the ANSI 66 protection function is fully involved in limiting the number
of starts, because the thermal protection is well below its tripping current set point
(Itrip).

162 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66

Example 1: 2350 kW / 6 kV motor

Manufacturer data:
Locked cold rotor limit time Tc 13 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th 9s
Number of consecutive cold starts Nc 3
Number of consecutive hot starts Nh 2
Starting time tstg 4s
Rated speed N 2980 rpm
Locked rotor torque LRT 0.7 pu
Locked rotor current Il 6 pu
Continuous permissible current Itrip 1.2 pu

Calculating the rotor time constant

The rated slip is given by:
N ⋅ np
g n = 1 – ------------------

3
60 ⋅ fn
Where:
np: number of poles
fn: network frequency

The number of poles is given by:

60 ⋅ fn
np = int ⎛ --------------------⎞
⎝ N ⎠
hence np = int (60. 50 / 2980) = 1

Therefore:
2980
g n = 1 – ------------------ = 0,0067
60 ⋅ 50
The rotor constant is given by:
τ = (Tc - Th) . LRT / gn
Hence:
τ = (13 - 9) . 0.7 / 0.0067 = 420 s, or 7 mn

Calculating the hot state set point

The hot state set point is given by:

tdem 2 2 tdem
Nc ⋅ ⎛ ---------------⎞ < Schaud < Itrip – ⎛ Nh ⋅ ---------------⎞
⎝ Tc ⎠ ⎝ Th ⎠

Hence:
4 2 2 4
3 ⋅ ⎛ ------⎞ < Schaud < 1, 2 – ⎛ 2 ⋅ ---⎞
⎝ 13⎠ ⎝ 9⎠

Or 0.92 Ib < Shot 2 < 0.56 Ib which is impossible.

Therefore a more restrictive hot state set point is selected, allowing 1 hot start and 3
cold starts.
Hence:
4 2 2 4
3 ⋅ ⎛ ------⎞ < Schaud < 1, 2 – ⎛ 1 ⋅ ---⎞
⎝ 13⎠ ⎝ 9⎠

Or 92.30% < Shot² < 99.55 %

Or for the "hot state" set point: 0.96 Ib < Shot < 0.99 Ib

SEPED310017EN 163
 Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66

Example 2: 506 kW / 10 kV motor

Manufacturer data:
Locked cold rotor limit time Tc 60 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th 29 s
Number of consecutive cold starts Nc 2
Number of consecutive hot starts Nh 1
Starting time tstg 21 s
Rated speed N 993 rpm
Locked rotor torque LRT 0.6 pu
Locked rotor current Il 5.3 pu
Continuous permissible current Itrip 1.25 pu

Calculating the rotor time constant

The number of poles equals:
np = int (60. 50 / 993) = 3

3
We can therefore deduce the rated slip:
993 ⋅ 3
g n = 1 – ------------------- = 0,007
60 ⋅ 50

and the rotor cooling constant:

τ = (60 - 29) . 0.6 / 0.007 = 2657 s, or 44 mn
Calculating the hot state set point
The hot state set point is given by:
21 2 2 21
2 ⋅ ⎛ ------⎞ < Schaud < 1, 25 – ⎛ 1 ⋅ ------⎞
⎝ 60⎠ ⎝ 29⎠

Or 70 % < Shot² < 83.83 %

Or for the "hot state" set point: 0.83 Ib < Shot < 0.91 Ib

This setting allows 1 hot start and 3 cold starts.

164 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67

Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection,

with selective tripping according to fault

MT11128
current direction.

Description
This function comprises a phase overcurrent function
associated with direction detection and picks up if the
phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line
or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases
(or two of the three phases, depending on the settings).
b the protection function is three-phase and has a
DE50667
definite or IDMT time delay.
b each of the two units has two groups of settings.
Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by
a logic input or a remote control order, depending on
the settings.
b the customized curve, defined point by point, may be
3
used with this protection function.
b an adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can
be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays
and to detect restriking faults.
b the alarm linked to the protection function indicates Fault tripping in line zone with θ = 30°.
the faulty phase or phases.
Tripping direction
The direction of the current is determined according to
DE50668

the measurement of the phase in relation to a

polarization value. It is qualified as busbar direction or
line direction according to the following convention:
DE51557

The tripping zone is set for tripping in busbar zone or

tripping in line zone. Fault tripping in line zone with θ = 45°.
The reverse zone is the zone for which the protection
function does not trip. The detection of current in the
reverse zone is used for indication.
DE50669

Polarization value
The polarization value is the phase-to-phase value in
quadrature with the current for cosθ = 1 (90° connection
angle). A phase current vector plane is divided into two
half-planes that correspond to the line zone and busbar
zone. The characteristic angle θ is the angle of the
perpendicular to the boundary line between the 2 zones
and the polarization value.
Voltage memory
Should all the voltages disappear during a 3-phase Fault tripping in line zone with θ = 60°.
fault near the busbars, the voltage level may be
insufficient for the fault direction to be detected (< 1.5 % Tripping logic
Unp). The protection function therefore uses a voltage In certain cases, it is wise to select the "two out of three phases" tripping logic. Such
memory to reliably determine the direction. The fault cases may occur when two parallel transformers (Dy) must be protected. For a 2-
direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low phase fault on a transformer primary winding, there is a 2-1-1 current distribution at
and the current is above the Is set point. the secondary end. The highest current is in the expected zone (operation zone for
Closing on a pre-existing fault the faulty incomer, no operation zone for the fault-free incomer).
If the circuit breaker is closed when there is a pre- One of the lowest currents is at the edge of the zone. According to the line
existing 3-phase fault on the busbars, the voltage parameters, it may even be in the wrong zone.
memory is blank. As a result, the direction cannot be There is therefore a risk of tripping both incomers.
determined and the protection does not trip.
In such cases, a backup 50/51 protection function
should be used.

SEPED310017EN 165
 Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67

Block diagram
DE52315

phase 1
instantaneous
DE50849

DE80139

phase 2
instantaneous
phase 3
instantaneous
DE51628

DE52316

Tripping logic parameter setting:

Grouping of output data. 1 one out of three

2 two out of three

166 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67

Tripping curve Timer hold

Definite time (DT) Definite time
Standard inverse time (SIT) Definite time
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT

3
Customized Definite time

Characteristics
Settings
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range 30°, 45°, 60°
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Tripping curve
Setting range See list above
Is set point
Setting range definite time 0.1 In y Is y 24 In in amperes
IDMT 0.1 In y Is y 2.4 In in amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.01 In
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.015 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
For T u 100 ms IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Tripping logic
Setting range One out of three / two out of three
Timer hold T1
Setting range definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 75 ms at 2 Is (typically 65 ms)
Inst. < 90 ms at 2 Is (confirmed
instantaneous) (typically 75 ms)
Overshoot time < 45 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 55 ms at 2 Is (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P67_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P67_x_113 b
Outputs
x: unit number. Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67_x_1 b
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode Delayed output P67_x_3 b b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Drop out P67_x_4 b
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Instantaneous output (reverse P67_x_6 b
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 zone)
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86 Phase 1 fault P67_x_7 b
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57 Phase 2 fault P67_x_8 b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
Phase 3 fault P67_x_9 b
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Protection inhibited P67_x_16 b
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4. Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is P67_x_21 b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and 1 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_36 b
IAC types. 2 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_37 b

SEPED310017EN 167
 Protection functions Directional earth fault
ANSI code 67N/67NC

Earth fault protection, with selective tripping Description

according to fault current direction. To adapt to all types of applications and all earthing systems, the protection function
operates according to two different types of characteristics, i.e. a choice of:
b type 1: the protection function uses I0 vector projection.
This projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive, isolated or
compensated neutral systems.
b type 2: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude and operates like an
earth fault protection function with an added direction criterion.
This projection method is suitable for closed ring distribution networks with directly
earthed neutral.
b type 3: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude and complies with
Italian specification ENEL DK5600. It operates like an earth fault protection function
with an added angular direction criterion {Lim.1, Lim.2}.
This protection method is suitable for distribution networks in which the neutral
earthing system varies according to the operational mode.
Tripping direction

3
The direction of the residual current is qualified as busbar direction or line direction
according to the following convention:
DE51557

The tripping zone is set for tripping in busbar zone or tripping in line zone.
The reverse zone is the zone for which the protection function does not trip.
The detection of current in the reverse zone is used for indication.

168 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 1
ANSI code 67N/67NC

Earth fault protection for impedant or Description

compensated neutral systems. The function determines the projection of the residual current I0 on the characteristic
line, the position of which is determined by the setting of characteristic angle θ0 in
relation to the residual voltage. The projection value is compared to the Is0 set point.
This protection function is suitable for radial feeders in resistive, isolated or
compensated neutral systems.
DE50853

With compensated neutral systems, it is characterized by its capacity to detect very

brief, repetitive faults (recurrent faults). In the case of Petersen coils with no
additional resistance, fault detection under steady state conditions is not possible
due to the absence of active zero sequence current. The protection function uses the
transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping.
The θ0 = 0° setting is suitable for compensated or impedant neutral systems. When
this setting is selected, the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce the
protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault-free feeders.
The protection function operates with the residual current measured at one of the
relay I0 inputs (operation with sum of three currents impossible). The protection
function is inhibited for residual voltages below the Vs0 set point.
It implements a definite time (DT) delay.
The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end.
3
Each of the two units has two groups of settings. Switching to setting group A or B
can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control order, depending on the
settings.
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection
Memory
(characteristic angle θ0 ≠ 0°).
The detection of recurrent faults is controlled by the time delay T0mem which
extends the transient pick-up information, thereby enabling the operation of the
definite time delay even with faults that are rapidly extinguished (≈ 2 ms) and restrike
characteristic angle: periodically. Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is used, tripping
DE50455

θ0 = 0° is ensured due to fault detection during the transient fault appearance. Detection is
extended throughout the duration of the fault based on the criterion V0 u V0mem,
within the limit of T0mem. With this type of application, T0mem must be greater than
sector T (definite time delay).
V0

Is0 set point

tripping zone

Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection

(characteristic angle θ0 = 0°).

Block diagram
DE80140

SEPED310017EN 169
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 1
ANSI code 67N/67NC

Characteristics
Settings
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Is0 setting
Setting range 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) in amperes
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT with ACE990 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % (at ϕ0 = 180°)
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Time delay T (definite time (DT) tripping curve)
Setting range Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms

3
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Vs0 set point
Setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Sector
Setting range 86°, 83°, 76°
Accuracy with CCA634 ±2°
with CT + CSH30 ±3°
Memory time T0mem
Setting range 0; 0.05 to 300 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Memory voltage V0mem
Setting range 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp
Resolution 1%
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 55 ms at 2 Is0
Overshoot time < 45 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms (at T0mem = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P67N_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P67N_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67N_x_1 b
Delayed output P67N_x_3 b b
Drop-out P67N_x_4 b
Instantaneous output (reverse zone) P67N_x_6 b
Protection inhibited P67N_x_16 b
Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0 P67N_x_21 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Standard setting
The settings below are given for usual applications in the different earthing systems.
The shaded boxes represent default settings.
Isolated neutral Impedant neutral Compensated
neutral
Is0 setting Set according to Set according to Set according to
discrimination study discrimination study discrimination study
Characteristic angle θ0 90° 0° 0°
Time delay T Set according to Set according to Set according to
discrimination study discrimination study discrimination study
Direction Line Line Line
Vs0 set point 2 % of Uns 2 % of Uns 2 % of Uns
Sector N/A 86° 86°
Memory time T0mem 0 0 200 ms
Memory voltage 0 0 0
V0mem

170 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 2
ANSI code 67N/67NC

Earth fault protection for impedant or solidly Description

earthed systems. The protection function operates like an earth fault protection function with an added
direction criterion.
It is suitable for closed ring distribution networks with directly earthed neutral. It has
all the characteristics of an earth fault protection function (50N/51N) and can
DE80358

therefore be easily coordinated with that function.

The residual current is the current measured at one of the Sepam I0 inputs or
Tripping zone calculated using the sum of the phase currents (I), according to the parameter
setting.
V1 before fault The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end.
The protection function has a definite or IDMT time delay.
Each of the two units has two groups of settings. Switching to setting group A or B
V1 I0 can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control order, depending on the
settings.
The customized curve, defined point by point, may be used with this protection
function.

V0
An adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can be used for coordination with
electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults. 3
V2 V3 Tripping curve Timer hold
Definite time (DT) Definite time
Standard inverse time (SIT) Definite time
Example of phase 1 to earth fault - Measurement of the 3 phase Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
voltages. Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
DE80357

IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT

IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
Tripping zone IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
I0 IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT
Customized Definite time
Is0

V0

Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC - type 2 protection

function.

Block diagram
DE80141

SEPED310017EN 171
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 2
ANSI code 67N/67NC

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I0Σ
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is0 setting
Definite time 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
setting range in amperes
Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y 15 In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A

3 IDMT
CT
Core balance CT with ACE990
0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (mini 0.1 A)
setting range in amperes
Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 2 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 20 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT with ACE990 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In0
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.005 In0/Is0) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
Setting range definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Vs0 set point
Setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Timer hold T1
Setting range definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is0
(typically 25 ms)
Inst. < 55 ms at 2 Is0 (confirmed
instantaneous) (typically 35 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (for T1 = 0)
x: unit number. Inputs
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Designation Syntax Equations
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Protection reset P67N_x_101 b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Protection inhibition P67N_x_113 b
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Outputs
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86 Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67N_x_1 b
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
Delayed output P67N_x_3 b b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 Drop out P67N_x_4 b
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Instantaneous output (reverse zone) P67N_x_6 b
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4. Protection inhibited P67N_x_16 b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0 P67N_x_21 b
IAC types.

172 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 3
ANSI Code 67N/67NC

Type 3 operation
This protection operates like an earth fault protection function (ANSI 50N/51N) with
DE51173

an added angular direction criterion {Lim.1, Lim.2}.

It is suitable for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies
according to the operational mode.
The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end.
The residual current is the current measured at the Sepam I0 input.
It has a definite time delay (DT constant).
By choosing an Is0 set point of 0, the protection function behaves like a neutral
voltage displacement protection function (ANSI 59N).

Simplified schematic
DE80142

Definite time operation

Is0 corresponds to the operating set point expressed in amps, and T corresponds to
the protection operating delay.
t
DE50398

Is0 I0
Definite time protection principle.

SEPED310017EN 173
 Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 3
ANSI Code 67N/67NC

Type 3 characteristics
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I0Σ
Tripping zone start angle Lim.1
Setting 0° to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±3°
Tripping zone end angle Lim.2
Setting 0° to 359° (1)
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±3°
Tripping direction
Setting Line/busbar
Is0 set point
Setting (2) With CSH core balance CT 0.1 A to 30 A

3 (2 A rating)
With 1 A CT
With core balance CT +
0.005 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) (3)
ACE990 (range 1)
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Accuracy ±5%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio u 95%
Vs0 set point
Setting On sum of 3 Vs 2% Unp y Vs0 y 80% Unp
On external VT 0.6 % Unp y Vs0 y 80% Unp
Resolution 0.1% for Vs0 < 10%
1% for Vs0 u 10%
Accuracy ±5%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio u 95%
Time delay T
Setting instantaneous, 50 ms y T y 300 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Accuracy y 3% or ±20 ms at 2 Is0
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is0
instantaneous < 55 ms at 2 Is0
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Reset protection P67N_x_101 b
Inhibit protection P67N_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67N_x_1 b
Delayed output P67N_x_3 b b
Drop-out P67N_x_4 b
Instantaneous output (reverse zone) P67N_x_6 b
Protection inhibited P67N_x_16 b
Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0 P67N_x_21 b
(1) Tripping zone Lim.2-Lim.1 should be 10° or more.
(2) For Is0 = 0, the protection function behaves like a neutral voltage displacement protection
function (59N).
(3) In0 = k . n where n = the core balance CT ratio and k = coefficient to be determined according
to the wiring of the ACE990 (0.00578 y k y 0.04).

Standard tripping zone setting (line end)

The settings below are given for the usual applications in different types of neutral
earthing system.
The shaded boxes represent default settings.
Isolated Impedant Directly earthed
neutral neutral neutral
Lim.1 angle 190° 100° 100°
Lim.2 angle 350° 280° 280°

174 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79

Recloser with 1 to 4 cycles to clear Description

transients or semi-permanent faults on Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semi-
overhead lines. permanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the
breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation. Recloser
operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting.
Definition Initialization of the recloser
The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met:
Reclaim time b "switchgear control" function activated and recloser in service (not inhibited by the
The reclaim time is activated by a circuit breaker recloser inhibition logic input)
closing order given by the recloser. b circuit breaker closed
If no faults are detected before the end of the reclaim b the safety time is not running
time, the initial fault is b none of the recloser inhibition conditions is true (e.g. trip circuit fault, control fault,
considered to have been cleared. SF6 pressure drop).
Otherwise a new reclosing cycle is initiated.
The delay must be longer than the longest reclosing Recloser cycles
cycle activation condition. b case of a fault that is not cleared: following instantaneous or time-delayed tripping

3
by the protection unit, activation of the dead time associated with the first active
Safety time until ready cycle. At the end of the dead time, a closing order is given, which activates the
The safety time is activated by a manual circuit breaker reclaim time. If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay,
closing order. The recloser is inhibited for the duration a tripping order is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated. after all the
of the time. active cycles have been run, if the fault still persists, a final trip order is given, a
If a fault occurs during this time, no reclosing cycles are message appears on the display.
initiated and the circuit breaker remains permanently b case of a cleared fault: Following a reclosing order, if the fault does not appear
open. after the reclaim time has run out, the recloser reinitializes and a message appears
Dead time on the display (see example 1).
Cycle n dead time is launched by b closing on a fault.
breaking device tripping order If the circuit breaker closes on a fault, or if the fault appears before the end of the
given by the recloser during cycle n. safety time delay, the recloser is inhibited. A final trip message is issued.
The breaking device remains open throughout the time. Recloser inhibition conditions
At the end of the cycle n dead time, the n+1 cycle The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions:
begins, and the recloser orders the closing of the circuit b voluntary open or close order
breaker. b recloser put out of service
b receipt of a inhibition order on the logic input
b activation of the breaker failure, such as trip circuit fault, control fault, SF6 pressure
drop
b opening of the circuit breaker by a protection unit that does not run reclosing cycles
(e.g. frequency protection), by external tripping or by a function set up not to activate
reclosing cycles.
In such cases, a final trip message appears.
Extension of the dead time
If, during a reclosing cycle, reclosing of the circuit breaker is impossible because
breaker recharging is not finished (following a drop in auxiliary voltage, recharging
time is longer), the dead time may be extended up to the time at which the circuit
breaker is ready to carry out an "Open-Close-Open" cycle. The maximum time added
to the dead time is adjustable (Twait_max). If, at the end of the maximum waiting
time, the circuit breaker is still not ready, the recloser is inhibited (see example 5).

SEPED310017EN 175
 Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79

Characteristics
Settings
Number of cycles
Setting range 1 to 4
Activation of cycle 1
Protection 50/51 units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 50N/51N units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67N/67NC units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Logic equations output V_TRIPCB active/inactive
Activation of cycles 2, 3 and 4
Protection 50/51 units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 50N/51N units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67N/67NC units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Logic equations output V_TRIPCB active/inactive
Time delays

3 Reclaim time
Dead time Cycle 1
Cycle 2
0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 300 s
Cycle 3 0.1 to 300 s
Cycle 4 0.1 to 300 s
Safety time until ready 0 to 60 s
Maximum additional dead time 0.1 to 60 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection inhibition P79_1_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Recloser in service P79 _1_201 b b
Recloser ready P79 _1_202 b b
Cleared fault P79 _1_203 b b
Final trip P79 _1_204 b b
Closing by recloser P79 _1_205 b
Reclosing cycle 1 P79 _1_211 b b
Reclosing cycle 2 P79 _1_212 b b
Reclosing cycle 3 P79 _1_213 b b
Reclosing cycle 4 P79 _1_214 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

176 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79

Example 1. Fault cleared after the second cycle

DE50786

Example 2. Fault not cleared

DE50787

SEPED310017EN 177
 Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79

Example 3. Closing on a fault

DE50788

Example 4. No extension of dead time

DE50789

Example 5. Extension of dead time

DE50790

178 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Overfrequency
ANSI code 81H

Detection of abnormally high frequencies. Description

Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
power supply quality or protect a generator against overspeeds.
The frequency is calculated using voltage V1 or U21 when only one voltage is
connected, otherwise the positive sequence voltage is used to procure greater
stability. It is compared to the Fs set point.
The protection function is inhibited if the voltage used for calculations is under the
adjustable set point Vs.
The protection includes a definite time delay T.

Block diagram

DE50791

3
(1) Or U21, or 3.V1 > Vs if only one TP.
Characteristics
Settings
Fs set point
Setting range 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.01 Hz
Resolution 0.01
Pick up / drop out difference 0.25 Hz ± 0.015 Hz
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Vs set point
Setting range 20 % Un to 50 % Un
Accuracy (1) 2%
Resolution 1%
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 90 ms from Fs -0.5 Hz to Fs +0.5 Hz
Overshoot time < 50 ms from Fs -0.5 Hz to Fs +0.5 Hz
Reset time < 55 ms from Fs +0.5 Hz to Fs -0.5 Hz
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P81H_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P81H_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P81H_x_1 b
Delayed output P81H_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P81H_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.

SEPED310017EN 179
 Protection functions Underfrequency
ANSI code 81L

Detection of abnormally low frequency for Description

load shedding using a metric frequency Detection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
criterion. power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load
shedding.
The frequency is calculated using voltage V1 or U21 when only one voltage is
connected, otherwise the positive sequence voltage is used to procure greater
stability. It is compared to the Fs set point.
The protection function is inhibited if the voltage used for calculations is under the
adjustable set point Vs.
Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and
presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of
the frequency.
The protection includes a definite (DT) time delay T.

Block diagram

3
DE50861

(1) Or U21, or 3.V1 > Vs if only one TP.

Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U)
Fs set point
Setting range 40 to 51 Hz or 50 to 1 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.01 Hz
Resolution 0.01
Pick up / drop out difference 0.05 Hz ± 0.015 Hz
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Vs set point
Setting range 20 % Un to 90 % Un
Accuracy (1) 2%
Resolution 1%
Restraint on frequency variation
Setting With / without
dFs/dt set point 1 Hz/s to 15 Hz/s
Accuracy (1) ±1 Hz/s
Resolution ±1 Hz/s
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 90 ms from Fs +0.5 Hz to Fs -0.5 Hz
Overshoot time < 50 ms from Fs +0.5 Hz to Fs -0.5 Hz
Reset time < 55 ms from Fs -0.5 Hz to Fs +0.5 Hz
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P81L_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P81L_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P81L_x_1 b
Delayed output P81L_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P81L_x_16 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.

180 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R

Protection function based on the calculation Operation

of the frequency variation, used to rapidly The rate of change of frequency protection function is complementary to the under and
disconnect a source supplying a network or overfrequency protection functions in detecting network configurations that require
load shedding or disconnection.
to control load shedding.
The function is activated when the "rate of change of frequency" df/dt of the positive
sequence voltage is higher than a set point. It includes a definite (DT) time delay.

The protection function operates if:

b the positive sequence voltage is greater than 50 % of the rated phase-to-neutral
voltage
b the network frequency is between 42.2 Hz and 56.2 Hz for 50 Hz networks and
between 51.3 Hz and 65 Hz for 60 Hz networks.

Block diagram

3
de51554

Characteristics
Settings
dfs/dt set point
Setting range 0.1 to 10 Hz/s
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0,1 Hz
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 %
Temporisation
Setting range 0.15 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 at +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time Pick-up < 150 ms (typically 130 ms)
Overshoot time < 100 ms
Reset time < 100 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Protection reset P81R_x_101 b
Protection inhibition P81R_x_113 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P81R_x_1 b
Tripping output P81R_x_3 b b
Protection inhibited P81R_x_16 b
Invalid voltage P81R_x_42 b
Invalid frequency P81R_x_43 b
Positive df/dt P81R_x_44 b
Negative df/dt P81R_x_45 b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.

SEPED310017EN 181
 Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R

Disconnection application
This function is used on incomers of installations that include generators that can
operate in parallel with the distribution network.
The role of the function is to detect utility failures, i.e. operation of the generator as
an autonomous isolated system. If the power flow from the utility prior to autonomous
generator operation was not zero, the generator frequency changes.
The rate of change of frequency protection function detects autonomous generator
operation more rapidly than conventional frequency protection functions.

Other disturbances such as short-circuits, load fluctuations and switching may cause
changes of frequency. The low set point may be reached temporarily due to these
disturbances and a time delay is necessary. In order to maintain the advantage of the
speed of the rate of change of frequency protection in comparison to conventional
frequency protection functions, a second, higher set point with a short time delay may
be added.

3
The rate of change of frequency is actually not constant. Often, the rate of change of
frequency is at its highest at the beginning of the disturbance after which it
decreases. This extends the tripping time of frequency protection functions but does
not affect the tripping time of the rate of change of frequency protection function.
Low set point
b Follow the utility's instructions, if there are any.
b If there are no utility instructions, proceed as follows:
v if the maximum rate of change of frequency on the network under normal
conditions is known, dfs/dt should be set above it.
v if no information on the network is available, the low set point may be set according
to generator data.
A good approximation of the rate of change of frequency after a utility failure resulting
in a load variation ΔP is:
df ΔP × fn where Sn: rated power
------ = ------------------------------ fn: rated frequency
dt 2 × Sn × H
H: inertia constant
Typical value of the inertia constant (in MWs/MVA):
0.5 y H y 1.5 for diesel and low-power generators (y 2 MVA)
2 y H y 5 for gas turbines and medium-power generators (y 40 MVA)
J × Ω2 where J: moment of inertia
H = ------------------ Ω: machine speed
2 × Sn

Examples
Rated power 2 MVA 20 MVA
Inertia constant 0.5 MWs/MVA 2 MWs/MVA
Power variation 0.1 MVA 1 MVA
df/dt -2.5 Hz/s -0.6 Hz/s

Low set point delay setting

For good protection stability during short-circuits or transient disturbances, the
recommended time delay is 300 ms or more. If an automatic recloser is in service
upstream of the installation, the detection of autonomous generator operation and
the opening of the coupling circuit breaker must take place during the recloser
isolation time.
High set point
The second set point may be chosen so that the rate of change of frequency tripping
curve remains below the under and overfrequency protection curves.
If the frequency protection units are set to fn±0.5Hz and the low set point of the rate of
change of frequency is T, the high set point may be set to 0.5/T.
High set point delay setting
No particular recommendantions.
Setting recommendations when no other information is available
Generator power 2 to 10 MVA > 10 MVA
Settings
Low set point dfs/dt 0.5 Hz/s 0.2 Hz/s
T 500 ms 500 ms
High set point dfs/dt 2.5 Hz/s 1 Hz/s
T 150 ms 150 ms

182 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R

Operating precautions:
When the generator connects to the network, power oscillations may occur until the
generator becomes fully synchronized. The rate of change of frequency protection
function is sensitive to this phenomenon, so it is advisable to inhibit the protection
unit for a few seconds after circuit breaker closing.

Load shedding application

The rate of change of frequency protection function may also be used for load
shedding in combination with underfrequency protection. In such cases, it is used on
the installation busbars. Only negative frequency derivatives are to be used.

Two principles are available:

b acceleration of load shedding:
The rate of change of frequency protection functions controls load shedding. It acts
faster than underfrequency protection functions and the value measured (df/dt) is
directly proportional to the load to be shed

3
b load shedding inhibition:
This principle is included in underfrequency protection functions. It consists of
activating the frequency variation restraint and does not call for implementation of the
rate of change of frequency protection function.

SEPED310017EN 183
 Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Presentation of tripping curve operation and Definite time protection

settings for protection functions using: The tripping time is constant. The time delay is started when the set point is overrun.
b definite time t
b IDMT

MT10911
b timer hold.

Is I
Definite time protection principle.

IDMT protection

3
The operation time depends on the protected value (phase current, earth fault
current, etc.) in accordance with standards IEC 60255-3, BS 142 and
IEEE C-37112.
Operation is represented by a characteristic curve, e.g.:
b t = f(I) curve for the phase overcurrent function
b t = f(I0) curve for the earth fault function.
The rest of the document is based on t = f(I); the reasoning may be extended to other
variables I0, etc.
The curve is defined by:
b its type (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, etc.)
b current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve
b time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for I = 10 Is.
These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order: type, Is current,
time delay T.
Changing the time delay T setting by x % changes all of the operation times in the
curve by x %.
type 1
t
DE50666

type 1,2

1 1,2 10 20 I/Is
IDMT protection principle.

The tripping time for I/Is values less than 1.2 depends on
the type of curve selected.

Name of curve Type

Standard inverse time (SIT) 1, 2
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) 1, 2
Extremely inverse time (EIT) 1, 2
Ultra inverse time (UIT) 1, 2
RI curve 1
IEC inverse time SIT / A 1
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B 1
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C 1
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) 1
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) 1
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) 1
IAC inverse 1
IAC very inverse 1
IAC extremely inverse 1
b when the monitored value is more than 20 times the set point, the tripping time is
limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point.
b if the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam (40 In for the
phase current channels, 20 In0 for the residual current channels), the tripping time is
limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value (40 In or 20 In0).

184 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Current IDMT tripping curves

Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications:
b IEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT)
b IEEE curves (MI, VI, EI)
b commonly used curves (UIT, RI, IAC).
IEC curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
k α β
Standard inverse / A 0.14 0.02 2.97
k T Very inverse / B 13.5 1 1.50
t d ( I ) = -------------------- × ---
⎛ ---I-⎞ – 1 β
α
Long time inverse / B 120 1 13.33
⎝ I s⎠ Extremely inverse / C 80 2 0.808
Ultra inverse 315.2 2.5 1

RI curve
1 T
t d ( I ) = ----------------------------------------------------- × ------------------

3
Equation:
⎛ I ⎞ – 1 3.1706
0.339 – 0.236 ----
⎝ I s⎠

IEEE curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
A B p β
Moderately inverse 0.010 0.023 0.02 0.241
⎛ ⎞ Very inverse 3.922 0.098 2 0.138
⎜ A ⎟ T
t d ( I ) = ⎜ ---------------------- + B⎟ × --- Extremely inverse 5.64 0.0243 2 0.081
⎜⎛ I ⎞ p ⎟ β
⎝ ⎝ ---- –1
I ⎠ ⎠
s

IAC curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
A B C D E β
Inverse 0.208 0.863 0.800 -0.418 0.195 0.297
⎛ ⎞ Very inverse 0.090 0.795 0.100 -1.288 7.958 0.165
⎜ B D E ⎟ T Extremely inverse 0.004 0.638 0.620 1.787 0.246 0.092
t d ( I ) = ⎜A + ------------------- + ---------------------- + ----------------------⎟ x -----
⎜ I
⎛---- – C⎞ ⎛---- – C⎞ I 2
⎛---- – C⎞ ⎟ β
I 3
⎝ ⎝I ⎠ ⎝I ⎠ ⎝I ⎠ ⎠
s s s

Voltage IDMT tripping curves

Equation for ANSI 27 - Undervoltage Equation for ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
T
t d ( V ) = --------------------- T
V t d ( V ) = ----------------------
1 – ⎛ ------⎞ V⎞
⎝ V s⎠ ⎛ ------- –1
⎝V ⎠
s

SEPED310017EN 185
 Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Setting of IDMT tripping curves, time delay T or TMS factor

The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI
curves) may be set as follows:
DE51629

b time T, operating time at 10 x Is

b TMS factor, factor shown as T/β in the equations on the left.
13.5 T
Example: t ( I ) = --------------- × TMS where TMS = -------- .
I 1.5
----- – 1
Is
The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with
TMS = 1 or T = 1.5 s.

Example.

3
Timer hold
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for:
b detection of restriking faults (DT curve)
DE51630

b coordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve).

b Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.
Equation for IDMT timer hold curve
T1 T T
Equation: t ( I ) = ---------------------- × --- where --- = TMS .
r I ⎞2 β β
1 – -----⎛
⎝ Is⎠
T1 = timer hold setting (timer hold for I reset = 0 and TMS = 1)
T = tripping time delay setting (at 10 Is)
k
β = basic tripping curve value at -----------------
α
-.
10 – 1

Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.

DE50755

DE50754

Timer hold dependent on current I. Constant timer hold.

Customized tripping curve

Defined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool
(application menu), this curve may be used to solve all special cases involving
PE50157

protection coordination or installation renovation.

It offers between 2 and 30 points whose coordinates must be:
b increasing on the I/Is axis
b decreasing on the t axis.
The two end points define the curve asymptotes.
There must be at least one point on the horizontal coordinate 10 I/Is. It serves as a
reference point to set the function time delay by curve shifting.

Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software.

186 SEPED310017EN
Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Implementing IDMT curves: examples of Problem 2.

problems to be solved. Given the type of IDMT, the Is current setting and a point k (Ik, tk) on the operation
curve, determine the time delay setting T.
Problem 1. On the standard curve of the same type, read the operation time tsk that corresponds
Given the type of IDMT, determine the Is current and to the relative current Ik/Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the
time delay T settings. relative current I/Is = 10.
Theoretically, the Is current setting corresponds to the
maximum continuous current: it is generally the rated The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the
current of the protected equipment (cable, point k (Ik, tk) is:
transformer).
The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on ts

MT10215
the curve. This setting is determined taking into tk
account the constraints involved in discrimination with T = Ts10 × ---------
tsk
the upstream and downstream protection devices.
The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of
tk k
point A on the operation curve (IA, tA), e.g. the point

3
that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the
downstream protection device. tsk
Ts10

1 Ik/Is 10 I/Is
Another practical method:
the table below gives the values of K = ts/ts10 as a function of I/Is.
In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = tsk/Ts10
on the line for Ik/Is.
The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve
passes through point k (Ik, tk) is: T = tk/k.

Example
Data:
b type of time delay: standard inverse time (SIT)
b set point: Is
b a point k on the operation curve: k (3.5 Is; 4 s)
Question: What is the time delay T setting (operation time at 10 Is)?
Reading the table: SIT column, line I/Is = 3.5 therefore K = 1.858
Answer: The time delay setting is T = 4/1.858 = 2.15 s

SEPED310017EN 187
 Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Problem 3. Another practical method:

Given the Is current and time delay T settings for a type the table below gives the values of K = ts/Ts10 as a function of I/Is.
of time delay (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = tsA/Ts10
inverse), find the operation time for a current value IA. on the line for IA/Is, the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings
On the standard curve of the same type, read the is tA = K . T.
operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative Example
current IA/Is and the operation time Ts10 that Data:
corresponds to the relative current I/Is = 10. type of time delay: very inverse time (VIT)
The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and set point: Is
T settings is tA = tsA x T/Ts10. time delay T = 0.8 s.
ts Question: What is the operation time for the current IA = 6 Is?
Reading the table: VIT column, line I/Is = 6, therefore k = 1.8

Answer: The operation time for the current IA is t = 1.80 x 0.8 = 1.44 s.

tA

3
T
tsA
Ts10

1 IA/Is 10 I/Is
Table of K values
I/Is SIT VIT, LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI IAC I IAC VI IAC EI
and IEC/A and IEC/B and IEC/C (IEC/D) (IEC/E) (IEC/F)
1.0 ∞
(1)
∞ (1)
∞ (1)
— 3.062 ∞ ∞ ∞ 62.005 62.272 200.226
1.1 24.700 (1) 90.000 (1) 471.429 (1) — 2.534 22.461 136.228 330.606 19.033 45.678 122.172
1.2 12.901 45.000 225.000 545.905 2.216 11.777 65.390 157.946 9.413 34.628 82.899
1.5 5.788 18.000 79.200 179.548 1.736 5.336 23.479 55.791 3.891 17.539 36.687
2.0 3.376 9.000 33.000 67.691 1.427 3.152 10.199 23.421 2.524 7.932 16.178
2.5 2.548 6.000 18.857 35.490 1.290 2.402 6.133 13.512 2.056 4.676 9.566
3.0 2.121 4.500 12.375 21.608 1.212 2.016 4.270 8.970 1.792 3.249 6.541
3.5 1.858 3.600 8.800 14.382 1.161 1.777 3.242 6.465 1.617 2.509 4.872
4.0 1.676 3.000 6.600 10.169 1.126 1.613 2.610 4.924 1.491 2.076 3.839
4.5 1.543 2.571 5.143 7.513 1.101 1.492 2.191 3.903 1.396 1.800 3.146
5.0 1.441 2.250 4.125 5.742 1.081 1.399 1.898 3.190 1.321 1.610 2.653
5.5 1.359 2.000 3.385 4.507 1.065 1.325 1.686 2.671 1.261 1.473 2.288
6.0 1.292 1.800 2.829 3.616 1.053 1.264 1.526 2.281 1.211 1.370 2.007
6.5 1.236 1.636 2.400 2.954 1.042 1.213 1.402 1.981 1.170 1.289 1.786
7.0 1.188 1.500 2.063 2.450 1.033 1.170 1.305 1.744 1.135 1.224 1.607
7.5 1.146 1.385 1.792 2.060 1.026 1.132 1.228 1.555 1.105 1.171 1.460
8.0 1.110 1.286 1.571 1.751 1.019 1.099 1.164 1.400 1.078 1.126 1.337
8.5 1.078 1.200 1.390 1.504 1.013 1.070 1.112 1.273 1.055 1.087 1.233
9.0 1.049 1.125 1.238 1.303 1.008 1.044 1.068 1.166 1.035 1.054 1.144
9.5 1.023 1.059 1.109 1.137 1.004 1.021 1.031 1.077 1.016 1.026 1.067
10.0 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
10.5 0.979 0.947 0.906 0.885 0.996 0.981 0.973 0.934 0.985 0.977 0.941
11.0 0.959 0.900 0.825 0.787 0.993 0.963 0.950 0.877 0.972 0.957 0.888
11.5 0.941 0.857 0.754 0.704 0.990 0.947 0.929 0.828 0.960 0.939 0.841
12.0 0.925 0.818 0.692 0.633 0.988 0.932 0.912 0.784 0.949 0.922 0.799
12.5 0.910 0.783 0.638 0.572 0.985 0.918 0.896 0.746 0.938 0.907 0.761
13.0 0.895 0.750 0.589 0.518 0.983 0.905 0.882 0.712 0.929 0.893 0.727
13.5 0.882 0.720 0.546 0.471 0.981 0.893 0.870 0.682 0.920 0.880 0.695
14.0 0.870 0.692 0.508 0.430 0.979 0.882 0.858 0.655 0.912 0.868 0.667
14.5 0.858 0.667 0.473 0.394 0.977 0.871 0.849 0.631 0.905 0.857 0.641
15.0 0.847 0.643 0.442 0.362 0.976 0.861 0.840 0.609 0.898 0.846 0.616
15.5 0.836 0.621 0.414 0.334 0.974 0.852 0.831 0.589 0.891 0.837 0.594
16.0 0.827 0.600 0.388 0.308 0.973 0.843 0.824 0.571 0.885 0.828 0.573
16.5 0.817 0.581 0.365 0.285 0.971 0.834 0.817 0.555 0.879 0.819 0.554
17.0 0.808 0.563 0.344 0.265 0.970 0.826 0.811 0.540 0.874 0.811 0.536
17.5 0.800 0.545 0.324 0.246 0.969 0.819 0.806 0.527 0.869 0.804 0.519
18.0 0.792 0.529 0.307 0.229 0.968 0.812 0.801 0.514 0.864 0.797 0.504
18.5 0.784 0.514 0.290 0.214 0.967 0.805 0.796 0.503 0.860 0.790 0.489
19.0 0.777 0.500 0.275 0.200 0.966 0.798 0.792 0.492 0.855 0.784 0.475
19.5 0.770 0.486 0.261 0.188 0.965 0.792 0.788 0.482 0.851 0.778 0.463
20.0 0.763 0.474 0.248 0.176 0.964 0.786 0.784 0.473 0.848 0.772 0.450
(1) Values suitable only for IEC A, B and C curves.

188 SEPED310017EN
 Protection functions General
Tripping curves

Standard inverse time SIT curve Extremely inverse time EIT curve
Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve
RI curve
DE50869

DE50870

IEEE curves IAC curves

t (s) t (s)
10000,00 1 000,00
MT10206

MT10207

1000,00

100,00

VI
100,00

MI EI

VI
10,00

EI

10,00

1,00

1,00

I/Is
0,10 I/Is 0,10
1 10 100 1 10 100

SEPED310017EN 189
3

190 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Contents
functions

Description 192
Definition of symbols 193
Logic input / output assignment 194
Switchgear control 197
ANSI code 94/69 197
Latching / acknowledgement 203
TC / switchgear position discrepancy
Tripping 204
Disturbance-recording trigger 205
Switching of groups of settings 206
Logic discrimination 207
Principle 207
S60, T60, and G60 applications 210
M61 and C60 applications 211
S62, T62 and G62 applications 212
Example of setting: radial network
Example of setting: parallel incomers
214
216
4
Example of setting: closed ring network 218
Load shedding 222
Restart 223
Generator shutdown and tripping 225
Genset shutdown 226
De-excitation 227
Example 228
Automatic transfer 229
Automatic "one out of two" transfer 231
Operation 231
Implementation 235
Characteristics 238
Automatic "two out of three" transfer 239
Operation 239
Implementation 244
Characteristics 248
Triggering the Motor start report (MSR) 249
Activating / Deactivating the Data log function (DLG) 250
Change of phase rotation direction 251
Local indication 252
ANSI code 30 252
Local control 255
Control matrix 258
Logic equations 260
Self-tests and fail-safe position 264

SEPED310017EN 191
 Control and monitoring Description
functions

Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical
network operation:
b the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
b the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular
needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
v logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
v creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
v customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages

Operating principle
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3
phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input /
output module
v local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
v remote control orders (TC) received via the communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function

4 b utilization of the processing results:

v activation of output relays to control a device
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the communication link
- by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.

Wired logic inputs and outputs

The number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and
monitoring functions used.
PE80743

The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 60 base unit may be extended by adding
1 or 2 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays.
After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set,
the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation.
A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.

Maximum Sepam series 60 configuration with 2 MES120

modules: 28 inputs and 16 outputs.

GOOSE logic inputs and outputs

GOOSE logic inputs are used with the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
The GOOSE inputs are divided between the 2 GSE virtual modules with 16 logic inputs.
An example of implementing logic discrimination with GOOSE logic inputs is given on page 209.

192 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Definition of symbols
functions

This page gives the meaning of the symbols Pulse mode operation
used in the block diagrams illustrating the b "on" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle) each time a signal
different control and monitoring functions in appears
this chapter.

DE50681
Logic functions
b "OR"
DE50675

Equation: S = X + Y + Z.
b "off" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle)
b "AND" each time a signal disappears.
DE50676

DE50682

Equation: S = X x Y x Z.

b exclusive "XOR"
4
DE50677

Note: the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure.

S = 1 if one and only one input is set to 1
(S = 1 if X + Y + Z = 1). Bistable functions
Bistable functions may be used to store values.
b Complement
These functions may use the complement of one or
DE50683

more input values.

DE50678

Equation: S = X (S = 1 if X = 0).

Delay timers
Two types of delay timers:
b "on" delay timer: used to delay the appearance of a
signal by a time T

Equation: B = S + R x B.
DE50679

b "off" delay timer: used to delay the disappearance of

a signal by a time T.
DE50680

SEPED310017EN 193
 Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions

Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below.
The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for
the customization functions according to specific application needs:
b in the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a
LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display
b in the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables.

Logic output (Ox) assignment table

Functions S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60 Assignment
Tripping / contactor control b b b b b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b O2 by default
Closing b b b b b b b b O3 by default
Watchdog b b b b b b b b O5
Logic discrimination, blocking send 1 b b b b b b b b O102 by default
Logic discrimination, blocking send 2 b b b O103 by default
Genset shutdown b b Free
De-excitation b b Free
Load shedding b Free
AT, closing of NO circuit breaker b b b b b b Free
AT, closing of coupling b b b b b b Free
AT, opening of coupling b b b b b b Free

4 Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned.

Assignment table for logic inputs (Ix) common to all

applications
Functions S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60 Assignment
Closed circuit breaker b b b b b b b b I101
Open circuit breaker b b b b b b b b I102
Synchronization of Sepam internal clock via external b b b b b b b b I103
pulse
Switching of groups of settings A/B b b b b b b b b Free
External reset b b b b b b b b Free
Earthing switch closed b b b b b b b b Free
Earthing switch open b b b b b b b b Free
External trip 1 b b b b b b b b Free
External trip 2 b b b b b b b b Free
External trip 3 b b b b b b b b Free
End of charging position b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote control (Local) b b b b b b b b Free
SF6 pressure default b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b Free
Open order b b b b b b b b Free
Close order b b b b b b b b Free
Phase VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b Free
V0 VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b Free
External positive active energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External negative active energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External positive reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External negative reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
Racked out circuit breaker b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A closed b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A open b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B closed b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B open b b b b b b b b Free
Closing-coil monitoring b b b b b b b b Free
Phase rotation direction 123 b b b b b b b b Free
Phase rotation direction 132 b b b b b b b b Free
Data log activation b b b b b b b b Free

194 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions

Assignment table for logic inputs (Ix) by application

Functions S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60 Assignment
Inhibit recloser b b Free
Inhibit thermal overload b b b b b b b Free
Switching of thermal settings b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 1 b b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 2 b b b Free
Buchholz trip b b b b b Free
Thermostat trip b b b b b Free
Pressure trip b b b b b Free
Thermistor trip b b b b b Free
Buchholz alarm b b b b b Free
Thermostat alarm b b b b b Free
Pressure alarm b b b b b Free
Thermistor alarm b b b b b Free
Rotor speed measurement b b b I104
Rotor rotation detection b Free
Motor re-acceleration b Free
Load shedding request b Free
Inhibit undercurrent b Free
Trigger Motor start report Free
Authorize emergency restart Free
Priority genset shutdown b b Free

4
De-excitation b b Free
Close enable (ANSI 25) b b b b b b Free
Inhibit opposite-side remote control (local) b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) b b b b b b Free
Coupling open b b b b b b Free
Coupling closed b b b b b b Free
Opposite side open b b b b b b Free
Opposite side closed b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10) b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b Free
Coupling circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b Free
Coupling close order b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side voltage OK b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing of coupling b b b b b b Free
Automatic closing order b b b b b b Free

Assignment table for logic GOOSE inputs Gx (IEC 61850) by

application
Functions S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60 Assignment
Blocking reception 1 b b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 2 b b b Free
External trip 2 b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b Free
GOOSE reception fault b b b b b b b b Free
GOOSE reception indicator b b b b b b b b Free
Other use b b b b b b b b Free
ACE850 presence b b b b b b b b G516
Load shedding request b Free
Data log activation b b b b b b b b Free
Phase rotation direction 123 b b b b b b b b Free
Phase rotation direction 132 b b b b b b b b Free
Data log activation b b b b b b b b Free
Note: GOOSE IEC 61850 logic inputs/outputs can only be used with the ACE850TP or
ACE850FO communication interface, and only with Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80.

SEPED310017EN 195
 Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions

Standard logic input (Ix) assignment

The table below lists the logic input (Ix) assignments obtained with the SFT2841
configuration software by clicking on the "standard assignment" button.

Functions Standard Application

assignment
Closed circuit breaker I101 All
Open circuit breaker I102 All
Blocking reception 1 I103 All except M61 and C60
Blocking reception 2 I104 S62, T62 and G62
Close enable (ANSI 25) I104 All except M61 and C60
SF6 pressure default I105 All
Open order I106 All
Close order I107 All
Inhibit recloser I108 S60 and S62
Buchholz trip I108 T60, T62
Thermostat trip I109 T60, T62
Pressure trip I110 T60, T62
Thermistor trip I111 T60, T62
Buchholz alarm I112 T60, T62
Thermostat alarm I113 T60, T62
Pressure alarm I114 T60, T62
Selector set to Circuit Breaker (ANSI 10) I201 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62

4 Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10)

Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43)
Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43)
I202
I203
I204
S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Opposite side closed I205 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Opposite side open I206 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Opposite-side voltage OK I207 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Inhibit opposite side remote control (local) I208 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Automatic closing order I209 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Coupling open I210 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Coupling closed I211 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Inhibit closing of coupling I212 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Coupling close order I213 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62
Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) I214 S60, S62, T60, T62, G60, G62

Standard GOOSE logic input (Gx) assignment

The table below lists the GOOSE logic input (Gx) assignments obtained with the
SFT2841 configuration software by clicking on the "standard assignment" button.
Functions Standard assignment Application
Blocking reception 1 G401 All
Blocking reception 2 G402 S62, T62, G62
External trip 2 G403 All
Inhibit closing G404 All
Any of 31 GOOSE logic inputs can be selected, from G401 to G416 and G501 to
G515.

196 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69

Predefined circuit breaker or contactor Anti-pumping function

control function. To prevent simultaneous breaking device open and close orders and to give priority
to open orders, breaker device close orders are of the pulse type.

Switchgear control with lockout function (ANSI 86)

Operation The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be ensured by
The Switchgear control function can control the Sepam using the Switchgear control function, with latching of all the tripping
following types of breaking device: conditions (protection function outputs and logic inputs).
b circuit breakers with shunt trip or undervoltage coils Sepam performs:
b latching contactors with shunt trip coils b grouping of all the tripping conditions and breaking device control
b contactors with latched orders. b latching of the tripping order, with inhibition of closing, until the cause of tripping
disappears and is acknowledged by the user (see Latching / acknowledgement
This function comprises two parts: function)
b processing of internal switchgear control orders: b indication of the cause of tripping:
v open 1 , 2 , 3 v locally by LEDs (Trip and others) and by messages on the display
v close with or without synchro-check 6 , 7 , 8 v remotely by remote indications (see Indications function).
v inhibit closing 4 , 5
b execution of internal orders by control logic outputs
according to the type of device to be controlled. Closing with synchro-check 9
The Synchro-check function checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a
circuit breaker to ensure safe closing.
Processing of internal switchgear control orders It is put into service by parameter setting.
The Switchgear control function processes all breaking For it to operate, one of the “Close enable” logic outputs of an MCS025 remote
device closing and tripping conditions, based on: module must be connected to a Sepam logic input assigned to the Close enable

4
b protection functions (configured to trip the breaking function.
device) If it is necessary to close the circuit breaker without taking into account the
b breaking device status data synchronization conditions, this may be done by a logic equation or via the
b remote control via the communication link V_CLOSE_NOCTRL input.
b local control orders by logic input (Ix or Gx), or by
mimic-based UMI
b internal control orders created by logic equation Control of logic outputs
b specific predefined control functions for each Logic orders from the Switchgear control function are used to control the Sepam logic
application: outputs that control breaking device opening and closing.
v recloser Logic output control is set up to match the device to be controlled, i.e. a circuit
v genset shutdown, de-excitation breaker or contactor.
v load shedding
v synchro-check
v automatic transfer.
The function also inhibits breaking device closing,
according to the operating conditions.

SEPED310017EN 197
 Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69

Block diagram
Voluntary open orders:
b by logic input
DE81005

b by remote control
b by mimic-based HMI
Internal trip order
Internal trip orders: V_TRIPPED
b protection functions
b predefined control functions
b programmed functions
(logic equations)

External trip orders:

b by logic inputs Ix or Gx

Internal close inhibits: Internal close inhibit

b protection functions
V_CLOSE_INHIBITED
b predefined control functions
b programmed functions Control of
(logic equations) logic inputs

Internal close inhibit:

b by logic inputs Ix or Gx

Voluntary close orders:

b by logic inputs
b by remote control
b by mimic-based HMI
Synchro-check

4
Internal close orders:
b predefined control functions
Closing without Internal close order
b programmed functions
synchro-check V_CLOSED
(logic equations)

External close orders:

b by logic inputs

Switchgear closed

Control of logic outputs

Control of a circuit breaker or contactor with mechanical latching
The block diagram below represents the following parameter setting:
b type of switchgear = Circuit Breaker
b output O1 = trip
b output O2 = close inhibit
b output O3 = close.
DE51580

Control of a contactor without mechanical latching

The block diagram below represents the following parameter setting:
b type of switchgear = Contactor
b output O1 = open / close.
DE51581

198 SEPED310017EN
 Internal trip order
ANSI 12, 14, 21B, 27, 27D, 32P, V_TRIPPED
32Q, 37, 37P, 38/49T, 40, 46,
47, 48/51LR, 49RMS, 50/51,

4
50N/51N, 50V/51V, 59, 59N,
64REF, 67, 67N, 81H, 81L, 81R

equations

Tripping due to
protection TS233

Equations

Internal close inhibit

V_CLOSE_INHIBITED

Ready to close
(for ATS)
V_CLOSE_EN
Breaker
closed (I101) Internal close order
V_CLOSED

Synchro-check

equations Closing without

synchro-check

SEPED310017EN 199
x)
 Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69

Close enable by the Synchro-check function

Operation
The close request, made locally or remotely, is maintained by Sepam during the
close request delay and triggers the appearance of a "SYNC.IN PROCESS"
message. It is deactivated when a tripping order or circuit breaker inhibition order is
received and triggers the "STOP SYNC." message.

The closing order is given if the close enable is received before the close request
delay runs out. When this is the case, the message "SYNC. OK" is displayed.

If the close enable is not received, the message "SYNC. FAILURE" is displayed.
When possible and if the MCS025 remote module is connected by the CCA785 cord
to the Sepam to which the close request has been made, an additional message
indicates the type of synchronization failure:
b "SYNC. FAILED dU" for too high a voltage difference
b "SYNC. FAILED DF" for too high a frequency difference
b "SYNC. FAILED dPhi" for too high a phase difference.

An additional delay is used to confirm the close enable to guarantee that the closing
conditions last long enough.

Block diagram

4
DE52273

200 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69

Parameter setting
The Switchgear control function is set up and adapted to match the type of breaking
device to be controlled using the SFT2841 software.

"Control logic" tab

b activation of the Switchgear control function
PE50454

b choice of the type of breaking device to be controlled: circuit breaker (by default)
or contactor
b activation of the Synchro-check function, if necessary.

"Logic I/Os" tab

b assignment of the logic inputs required
b definition of logic output behavior.
By default, the following outputs are used:

Logic output Associated internal order Circuit breaker coil

O1 Trip Shunt trip coil
(V_TRIPPED)
O2 Close inhibit Undervoltage coil
(V_CLOSE_INHIBITED)
SFT2841: parameter setting of Switchgear control.
O3 Close Shunt trip coil
(V_CLOSED)

b the Trip order is always associated with output O1.

If output O1 is set up for pulse type operation, the pulse order duration may be set up
b the optional Close inhibit and Close orders may be assigned to any logic output.
4
PE80754

"Matrix" screen, "Logic" button

Modification of the default internal order assignment to outputs O2 and O3, if
necessary.

SFT2841: default parameter setting of the logic outputs

assigned to Switchgear control.

SEPED310017EN 201
 Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69

Characteristics
Settings
Switchgear control
Setting range On / Off
Type of device
Setting range Circuit breaker / Contactor
Tripping pulse duration (output O1)
Setting range 200 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Closing with synchro-check
Setting range On / Off
Close request time delay Tdf
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Synchro confirmation time delay Tcs
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations

4
Tripping, opening V_TRIPCB b
Inhibit closing V_INHIBECLOSE b
Closing V_CLOSECB b
Closing without synchro-check V_CLOSE_NOCTRL b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Tripping, opening V_TRIPPED b b
Inhibit closing V_CLOSE_INHIBITED b b
Closing V_CLOSED b b
Contactor control V_CONTACTOR b
Synchro-check on V_SYNC_ON b
Sychrochecked close request in process V_SYNC_INPROC b
Synchrochecked close request stop V_SYNC_STOP b
Synchrochecked close request successful V_SYNC_OK b
Synchrochecked close request failure V_NOSYNC b
Synchrochecked close request failure - V_NOSYNC_DU b
Voltage difference too high
Synchrochecked close request failure - V_NOSYNC_DF b
Frequency difference too high
Synchrochecked close request failure - V_NOSYNC_DPHI b
Phase difference too high
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC1 BO0 20, 21, 1 (OFF) CSWI1.Pos.ctlVal
TC2 BO1 20, 21, 1 (ON) CSWI1.Pos.ctlVal
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS233 BI334 2, 160, 68

202 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Latching / acknowledgement
functions

Operation
The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs (Ix) may be
latched individually.
Logic outputs may not be latched. Logic outputs set up as pulse-type outputs
maintain pulse-type operation even when they are linked to latched data.
Latched data are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
All latched data are acknowledged together, at the same time. Acknowledgement is
done:
b locally on the UMI using the key
b or remotely via a logic input, the SFT2841 software or via the communication link
b or by logic equation.
The remote indication TS5 remains present after latching operations until
acknowledgement has taken place.
The Latching/acknowledgement function associated with the Switchgear control
function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function.

Block diagram

Acknowledgement
by UMI Reset key
DE80557

V_KEY_RESET
Acknowledgement
by UMI Reset key

Reset by
4
remote control (TC3)
Inhibit remote
Reset requested
control
V_RESETORD
Reset by
SFT2841
External reset
by logic input
V-RESET

Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Inhibition of UMI Reset key V_INHIB_RESET_LOCAL b
Acknowledgement by logic equation V_RESET b

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS5 BI0 1, 160, 19 LLN0.LEDRs.stVal
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC3 BO2 20, 160, 19 LLN0.LEDRs.ctlVal

SEPED310017EN 203
 Control and monitoring TC / switchgear position
functions discrepancy
Tripping

TC / switchgear position discrepancy

Operation
This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received
and the actual position of the circuit breaker or contactor.
The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS3.

Block diagram

DE80243

Characteristics
4 Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
TC/ switchgear position discrepancy V_TC/CBDISCREP b

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC1 BO0 20, 21, 1 (OFF) CSWI1.Pos.ctlVal
TC2 BO1 20, 21, 1 (ON) CSWI1.Pos.ctlVal
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS3 BI18 - -

Tripping
Description
The information can be accessed via remote indication TS233.
It indicates whether a Sepam internal or external protection has tripped.

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TS Binary Input ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TS233 BI334 2, 160, 68 -

204 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Disturbance-recording trigger
functions

Operation
The recording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events,
dependent on the control matrix parameter setting or manual action:
b triggering by the grouping of all pick-up signals of the protection functions in
service
b triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions
b triggering by selected logic inputs
b triggering by selected Vx outputs (logic equations)
b manual triggering by a remote control order (TC20)
b manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool
b triggering by selected logic inputs (Gx) (if recording configured in SFT2841
software disturbance recording screen).

Disturbance recording may be:

b inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC18)
b validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC19).

Block diagram
Disturbance recording trigger
according to protection functions
DE81007

configured in matrix (delayed outputs)

4
Pickup

Disturbance recording trigger

by logic inputs Ix
Disturbance recording trigger
by selected logic inputs Gx
if configured by SFT2841
Disturbance recording trigger
by selected outputs
(logic equations)

Manual
disturbance
recording trigger Disturbance
recording
trigger
Inhibition of V_OPG_TRIGGED
disturbance
recording trigger

Validation of
disturbance
recording trigger
Disturbance
Manual
recording
disturbance
trigger inhibited
recording trigger
V_OPG_INHIBITED

Characteristics
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Disturbance recording function triggered V_OPG_TRIGGED b

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC18 BO3 - RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal
TC19 BO4 - RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal
TC20 BO5 - RDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlVal

SEPED310017EN 205
 Control and monitoring Switching of groups of settings
functions

Operation
There are two groups of settings, group A / group B, for the phase overcurrent, earth
fault, directional phase overcurrent and directional earth fault protection functions.
Switching from one group of settings to another makes it possible to adapt the
protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application (change
of earthing system, changeover to local power generation, ...). The switching of
settings is global and therefore applies to all the units of the protection functions
mentioned above.
The groups of settings switching mode is determined by parameter setting:
b switching according to the position of a logic input (0 = group A, 1 = group B)
b switching by remote control order (TC33, TC34)
b forced group A or group B.
DE50807 Block diagram

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC33 BO8 20, 160, 23 LLN0.SGCB
TC34 BO9 20, 160, 24 LLN0.SGCB

206 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle

Operation
This function considerably reduces the tripping time of the circuit breakers closest to
the source and may be used for logic discrimination in closed ring networks.
It applies to the phase 50/51, directional phase overcurrent 67, earth fault 50N/51N
and directional earth fault 67N overcurrent protections, definite time and IDMT.

Sepam series 60 discrimination logic comprises 2 discrimination groups.

Each group includes:
b logic thresholds: protection units that send blocking signals (BSIG) and that may
be prevented from tripping by the reception of blocking signals.
b time-based thresholds: protection units that may not be prevented from tripping by
blocking signals and that do not send blocking signals. They are used as backup for
the logic thresholds.

When a fault occurs:

b the logic thresholds detecting the fault send blocking signals
b the logic thresholds detecting the fault send a tripping order if they are not inhibited
by blocking signals
b the time-based (backup) thresholds detecting the fault send a tripping order.

The sending of blocking signals lasts as long as it takes to clear the fault. If Sepam
gives a tripping order, they are interrupted after a time delay that takes account of the
breaking device operating time and the protection unit reset time. This system
guarantees safety in downgraded operating situations (faulty wiring or switchgear).

Example: Radial distribution with use of time- Example: Radial distribution with use of logic discrimination
4
based discrimination
DE50623

DE50809

T: protection setting time. As an approximation for definite time T: protection setting time. As an approximation for definite time curves, this is assumed to be
curves, this is assumed to be equal to the protection tripping equal to the protection tripping time.
time.
When a fault appears, the protection units that detect it inhibit the upstream
The upstream protection units are typically delayed by protection units. The protection unit furthest downstream trips since it is not blocked
0.3 s to give the downstream protection units time to by another protection unit. The delays are to be set in accordance with the device to
trip. When there are many levels of discrimination, the be protected.
fault clearing time at the source is long. In this example, if the fault clearing time for the protection unit furthest downstream
In this example, if the fault clearing time for the protection is Xs = 0.2 s, the fault clearing time at the source is T = Xs - 0.1 s = 0.1 s.
unit furthest downstream is Xs = 0.2 s, the fault clearing
time at the source is T = Xs + 0.9 s = 1.1 s.

SEPED310017EN 207
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle

Operation with logic inputs/outputs (Ix/Ox)

The assignment of protection devices between logic thresholds and time-based
thresholds depends on the application and the logic input/output settings.
The first logic group is active if one of the following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 1 is assigned to a logic input (Ix) except for motors where this
input does not exist
b blocking send 1 is assigned to an output (O102 by default).
The second logic group, when present in the application, is active if one of the
following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 2 is assigned to a logic input (Ix)
b blocking send 2 is assigned to an output (O103 by default).

The SFT2841 software indicates the type of thresholds, logic or time-based,

according to the input/output settings.

Level "n+1" Sepam

DE80559

Send
BSIG1 BSIG2
Reception

4
Level "n" Sepam
Send BSIG1 output Send BSIG2 output
to other level "n" to other level "n"
Sepam Send Sepam

BSIG1 BSIG2
Reception

Logic discrimination using wired logic inputs and outputs (Ix and Ox)

The assignment of protection devices between the two discrimination groups is fixed
and cannot be modified. When logic discrimination is used, it is important to check
the concordance between the origin of the measurement and the logic discrimination
group to which the unit is assigned.
Pilot wire test
The pilot wires may be tested using the output relay test function in the SFT2841
software.

208 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle

Operation with GOOSE messages and logic inputs (Gx)

Equipped with the ACE850 interface, Sepam series 60 can be used for logic
discrimination with GOOSE logic inputs and the IEC 61850 protocol on Ethernet
TCP/IP.

The first logic group is active if one of the following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 1 is assigned to a GOOSE logic input (G401 by default), except
for Sepams used in motor applications where this input does not exist
b blocking send 1 is created by sending a GOOSE logic discrimination blocking
message over the Ethernet network.
The second logic group, when present in the application, is active if one of the
following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 2 is assigned to a GOOSE logic input (G402 by default)
b blocking send 2 is created by sending a GOOSE logic discrimination blocking
message over the Ethernet network.

Level "n+1" Sepam

DE80560

4
Reception
BSIG1 BSIG2
ACE850

Ethernet TCP/IP

Send BSIG1 output

ACE850
to other level "n" Sepam
BSIG1 BSIG2
Send Send BSIG2 output
to other level "n" Sepam

Level "n" Sepam

Logic discrimination using the IEC 61850 protocol and GOOSE logic inputs (Gx)

SEPED310017EN 209
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S60, T60, and G60 applications
Threshold assignment

Type of Unit number

protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4 1, 2 - 1, 2 -
50N/51N 3, 4 1, 2 - 1, 2 -

Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setti ng range
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP (1)

Blocking send 1 V_LOGDSC_BL1

(1) Only if switchgear control is not in service.

Block diagram
Logic thresholds
Blocking overcurrent
send 1 unit 1 inst.
BSIG1
unit 2 inst.
DE81008

earth fault

4
unit 1 inst.
unit 2 inst.
output O102 (1)
inhibit blocking send blocking send 1
if fault not cleared

Blocking overcurrent
reception 1 unit 1 delayed
unit 2 delayed
earth fault
unit 1 delayed
unit 2 delayed
Circuit Breaker closed (3)
blocking reception 1 (2)
(GOOSE
logic input Gx)
logic discrimination
blocking reception 1 trip
(logic input lx) V_LOGDSC_TRIP

Time-based thresholds
overcurrent
unit 3 delayed
unit 4 delayed
earth fault
unit 3 delayed
unit 4 delayed

(1) By default.
(2) If using the ACE850 communication interface and a GOOSE logic input (IEC 61850).
(3) Condition ignored (always = 1) if no input is assigned to Circuit Breaker closed.

210 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions M61 and C60 applications

Threshold assignment
Type of Unit number
protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4 1, 2 - - -
50N/51N 3, 4 1, 2 - - -
67N (1) 2 1 - - -
(1) For M61 application only.

Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP b (1)
Blocking send 1 V_LOGDSC_BL1 b
(1) Only if switchgear control is not in service.

Block diagram

4
DE81009

(1)

Is

(1)

(1)

(1) For M61 application only.

SEPED310017EN 211
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S62, T62 and G62 applications

Block diagram
Logic thresholds
Blocking overcurrent
DE81010

send 1 and 2 unit 1 inst.

unit 2 inst.
earth fault BSIG1
unit 1 inst.
unit 2 inst.
directional overcurrent
unit 1 inst. 0.8 Is
directional earth fault output O102 (1)
unit 1 inst. Is blocking send 1

directional overcurrent BSIG2

unit 2 inst. 0.8 Is
directional earth fault
unit 2 inst. Is

output O103 (1)

inhibit blocking send blocking send 2
if fault not cleared
Blocking overcurrent
reception 1 and 2 unit 1 delayed

4 unit 2 delayed
earth fault
unit 1 delayed
unit 2 delayed
directional earth fault
unit 1 delayed
directional overcurrent
unit 1 delayed

Circuit Breaker closed (3)

blocking reception 1 (2)

(GOOSE
logic input Gx)
blocking reception 1
(logic input Ix)

directional earth fault

unit 2 delayed
directional overcurrent logic discrimination
unit 2 delayed trip
(3)
V_LOGDSC_TRIP
Circuit Breaker closed

blocking reception 2 (2)

(GOOSE
logic input Gx)
blocking reception 2
(logic input Ix)

Time-based thresholds
overcurrent
unit 3 delayed
unit 4 delayed

earth fault
unit 3 delayed
unit 4 delayed

(1) By default.
(2) If using the ACE850 communication interface and a GOOSE logic input (IEC 61850).
(3) Condition ignored (always = 1) if no input is assigned to Circuit Breaker closed.

212 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S62, T62 and G62 applications

Threshold assignment
Type of Unit number
protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4 1, 2 - 1, 2 -
50N/51N 3, 4 1, 2 - 1, 2 -
67 (1) - 1 2 1 2
67N (1) - 1 2 1 2
(1) According to application.

Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP b (1)
Blocking send 1 V_LOGDSC_BL1 b
Blocking send 2 V_LOGDSC_BL2 b
(1) Only if switchgear control is not in service.

SEPED310017EN 213
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: radial network

When a fault occurs in a radial network, the fault current flows through the circuit
between the source and the location of the fault:
b the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered
b the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered
b only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip.
Example of setting
A 20 kV installation, supplied by a transformer, comprises the main busbars which in
turn supply a feeder to a motor substation and a long feeder to a distant MV/LV
transformer. The installation is earthed via a resistor at the incoming transformer
neutral point, which limits to the current to about 10 Amps.

BSIG1 order
DE81011

T60

BSIG1 order

4 S60 S62

Long
BSIG1 order cable

M61 M61 T60

Motor Motor

Motor substation

: detected fault direction according to the directional protections

direction of blocking signal orders

214 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: radial network

Protection settings
Based on a network coordination study, the installation relay settings are as follows:
b incomer: Sepam T60 (relay A)
v busbar fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocked by relays B and D
- blocking send 1 to high voltage relays
v backup thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.7 s (DT)
Time-based thresholds
b feeder to motor substation: Sepam S62 (relay B)
v busbar fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocked by relays C1 and C2
- blocking send 1 to relay A
v backup thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.4 s (DT)
Time-based thresholds
b motor feeders:
v motor 1: Sepam M61 (relay C1)
motor fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocking send 1 to relay B
v motor 2: Sepam M61 (relay C2)
4
motor fault thresholds
- 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
- 50/51 self-balancing differential scheme: T = 0 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1: blocking send 1 to relay B
b substation feeder: Sepam S62 (relay D)
v cable fault thresholds
50/51, 67N: T = 0.4 s (DT)
v these thresholds are set time-wise (0.4 s) in relation to Sepam T60 (0.1 s) (relay E)
v blocking send 1 to Sepam T60 (relay A)
b T60 transformer protection (relay E): settings which can be coordinated with the
secondary.

The logic input and output settings for all the relays concerned are:
b blocking reception 1 on I103
b blocking send 1 on O102

Parameter setting using GOOSE data

When using GOOSE logic inputs (IEC 61850), the input and output parameters are:
b blocking reception 1: Each Sepam should subscribe to the GOOSE blocking
message 1
gcbBasicGse (LD0/PTRC1/blklnd1) concerning it and then assign this blocking
GOOSE message to a GOOSE logic input (G401 by default for BSIG1).
b blocking send 1: Each Sepam should generate a GOOSE blocking message
called GOOSE Control Block standard which contains BSIG1
(gcbBasicGse (LD0/PTRC1/blklnd1)).

For more information, refer to the Sepam IEC 61850 communication user's manual,
reference SEPED306024EN.

SEPED310017EN 215
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: parallel incomers

Substations supplied by 2 (or more) parallel incomers may be protected using

Sepam S62, T62 or G62, by a combination of directional phase (67) and earth fault
(67N) protection functions, with the logic discrimination function.

Incomer 1 Incomer 2

DE81015
BSIG2 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG2

Busbar

BSIG1 BSIG1

Feeders

: detected fault direction according to the directional protections

direction of blocking signal orders

To avoid both incomers tripping when a fault occurs upstream from one incomer, the

4 incomer protection devices must operate as follows:

b protection function 67 of the faulty incomer detects the fault current in the line
direction, the protection tripping direction:
v sends a blocking signal to inhibit the phase overcurrent protection functions
(50/ 51) of both incomers
v and initiates tripping of the incomer circuit breaker
b protection function 67 of the fault-free incomer is insensitive to fault current in the
busbar direction.

Example of cabling
b Feeder Sepam: blocking send 1 blocks the Incomer Sepam 50/51 and
50N/51N functions.
By default, outputs O102 (blocking send 1) on the Feeder Sepams should be
connected to the I103 inputs (blocking reception 1) on both Incomer Sepams.
b Directional protection function 67 unit 2 on each Incomer Sepam should be set to
detect a fault on the line side. Thus the blocking send 2 output (by default O103)
which is connected to input I103 can be used to inhibit the 50/51, 50N and 51N
protection functions of both incomers so as to leave protection 67 unit 2 with the
responsibility for tripping the incomer, the only one affected by the fault upstream.

216 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: parallel incomers

Example of setting with IEC 61850 GOOSE data

Setting the GOOSE data parameters
The following operations are performed using SFT850 and SFT2841 software:
b In the event of a fault on the cables, Feeder Sepams should send a blocking input
order in the form of a GOOSE (blocking send 1= LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd1) from the
thresholds of units 1 and 2 of 50/51 or 50N/51N functions.
b Incomer Sepams should also send a blocking signal when the directional
protection functions detect a fault on the line. To do this, the thresholds of units 2 of
protection functions 67 and 67N set for a line fault, which send the blocking signal
(blocking send 2 = LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd2), can block the 50/51 and 50N/51N
protection functions of the opposite incomer and their own thresholds respectively.
b Both Incomer Sepams must subscribe to this GOOSE to receive the GOOSE
blocking send 1 data item issued by the feeders and also to the GOOSE blocking
send 2 data item issued by the opposite incomer and its own GOOSE.
b A logical OR between the GOOSE sent by the feeder and the GOOSE sent by the
opposite incomer is created by assigning the LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd1 and
LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd2 data items to the same GOOSE input (for example G401).
b This GOOSE input (G401) is assigned to the function BSIG1,receive,blocking
input of each Incomer Sepam using the SFT2841 software.
Protection settings
The protection settings are the same as for hard-wired cabling:
b When a fault occurs upstream of the incomer circuit breakers, the incomer
concerned is tripped by the delayed directional threshold of unit 2 of the 67 or 67N
protection functions.
b When a fault occurs on the busbars, no blocking input is sent and therefore the
50/51 or 50N/51N protection functions quickly send a tripping order.
4
The thresholds of units 3 and 4 set using time discrimination provide backup tripping.
b Units 1 of the 67 and 67N functions are not used.

SEPED310017EN 217
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
function Example of setting:
closed ring network

Closed ring network protection may be provided by Sepam S62 or T62, which include
the following functions:
b 2 units of directional phase (67) and earth fault (67N) protection functions:
v unit 2 to detect faults in the line direction
v unit 1 to detect faults in the busbar direction
b 2 discrimination groups:
v sending of 2 blocking signals, sent in the opposite direction of the detected faults.
For example, a Sepam which detects a fault on its line side sends a blocking signal
to the Sepam located upstream, i.e. on its busbar side.
v reception of 2 blocking signals, to block the directional protection relays according
to the detection direction.

DE81016

BSIG1 BSIG1
(I103) (I103)

4
BSIG1 (O102) BSIG1 (O102)

67/1 67/2 67/1 67/2

BSIG1 BSIG2 BSIG1 BSIG2
(I103) (O103) (I103) (O103)

BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1

(I103) (O102) (I103) (O102)

67/1 67/2 67/1 67/2

BSIG2 BSIG1
BSIG1 (I104) (O102 ) BSIG2
(O102) (I104)

: detected fault direction according to the directional protections

With the combination of directional protection functions and the logic discrimination
function, the faulty section may be isolated with a minimal delay by tripping of the
circuit breakers on either side of the fault.
Blocking signals are initiated by both protection functions 67 and 67N.
Priority is given to protection function 67: when protection functions 67 and 67N
detect faults in opposite directions at the same time, the blocking signal sent is
determined by the direction of the fault detected by protection function 67.
The instantaneous output of protection functions 67 and 67N, activated at 80% of the
Is threshold, is used to send blocking signals. This avoids uncertainty when the fault
current is close to the Is threshold.

218 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting:
closed ring network

Example of cabling
To simplify on-site cabling the following rules must be observed.
General rules
b The cabling for CTs and VTs is identical on all cubicles and conforms to the
connection diagrams in the Sepam documentation. This allows a predefined fault
detection direction to be associated with each directional protection function unit.
b The association of logic inputs and standard functions simplifies this
implementation and cabling is therefore identical on all Sepams on all substations.
For each substation
b The protection 67 unit 1 threshold is set for fault detection on the busbars, and the
unit 2 threshold for a fault on the line.
The settings can be identical (thresholds, time delay, angle).
b The delayed thresholds on both units are used to trip the circuit breaker associated
with the Sepam relay.
b The blocking send 2 (O103) outputs on the substation Sepams are connected to
the blocking reception 1 inputs (I103) on the opposite Sepam.
Between 2 substations
The blocking send 1 (O102) output on the substation Line feeder Sepam is
connected to the input (I104) on its Sepam which corresponds to the other end of the
line in the other substation.
Remarks
b In the event of a fault in the substation, a logic discrimination order can be hard-

4
wired on the blocking inputs (I103) of both Sepams in the ring so as to block the
directional 67 and 67N function units oriented towards the busbars.
In this case 2 separate contacts must be used to decouple the simultaneous blocking
send command from the protection function in the substation to both Ring feeder
Sepams.
b Particular care must be given to managing the polarity of commands between the
various substations in the ring.

SEPED310017EN 219
 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting:
closed ring network

Example of setting with IEC 61850 GOOSE

messages
Case of a ring consisting of 2 substations containing 2 S62 Ring feeder Sepams and
a User T60 transformer Sepam. This example is given with the directional phase
protection function (ANSI 67) but the same reasoning applies for the directional earth
fault protection function (ANSI 67N).
Source Source
substation substati

DE81017
A B C D E

67/1 67/1
F

67/2 67/2

BC DE

51 51

: detected fault direction according to the directional protections

4
Example of associated Ethernet network
Ethernet
DE81019

Source substation

A F
S60 S60

Substation 1

B C BC
S62 S62 T60

Substation 2

D E DE
S62 S62 T60

Protection settings
The protection settings are the same as for hard-wired cabling:
To simplify on-site cabling the following rules must be observed.
General rules
b The cabling for CTs and VTs is identical on all cubicles and conforms to the
connection diagrams in the Sepam documentation. This allows a predefined fault
detection direction to be associated with each directional protection function unit.
b The association of GOOSE inputs and standard functions simplifies the
implementation of GOOSE messages.
For each substation
b The protection 67 unit 1 threshold is set for fault detection on the busbars, and the
unit 2 protection threshold for a fault on the line.
The settings can be identical (thresholds, time delay, angle).
b The delayed thresholds on both units are used to trip the circuit breaker associated
with the Sepam relay.

220 SEPED310017EN
Control and Logic discrimination
monitoring functions Example of setting:
closed ring network

Setting the GOOSE data parameters

Publishing GOOSE messages
b Each S62 Ring feeder Sepam (B, C, D, E) publishes a GOOSE message
consisting of several data items, especially those concerning blocking inputs and
network connection tests:
v LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd1 created by the BSIG1 function (67, 67N unit 1) when there is
a fault on the busbars
v LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd2 created by the BSIG2 function (67, 67N unit 2) when there is
a fault on the line
v LDO.GSE_GGIO1.Test1 which can be activated using the SFT2841 software
connected to the Sepam in order to manually test the connection and parameter
settings of the Sepam relays subscribed to GOOSE messages for this Sepam.
In this example,
b the T60 Ring feeder (A and F) Sepams on the source substation do not publish
GOOSE messages
b User T60 Sepam publish a blocking input GOOSE message consisting of the
following 2 data items:
v LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd1 created by the BSIG1 function (50/51, 50N/51N)
v LDO.GSE_GGIO1.Test1 to test the Ethernet connection
Subscribing to GOOSE messages
Each S62 Ring feeder Sepam subscribes to GOOSE messages containing blocking
data items from the following Sepam relays:
b Sepam (T60) User
b Sepam (S62) Ring feeder from its substation
b Sepam (S62) Ring feeder from the substation at the other end of the line. 4
GOOSE data between Sepam relays in the closed ring
The table below contains all the information needed to create the GOOSE messages
exchanged between all Sepam relays in the closed ring.
In this example, LED 5 on the Sepam front face which is, depending on where it
comes from, assigned to G411, G412 or G413 in the SFT2841 matrix, allows the
user to check visually that the GOOSE message has been receiving during a manual
test.
Preparing GOOSE messages using the SFT850 software
Sepam A (S60) Sepam B (S62) Sepam BC (T60) Sepam C (S62) Sepam D (S62) Sepam DE (T60) Sepam E (S62) Sepam F (S60)
GOOSE BlkInd1(B) BlkInd1(BC) BlkInd1(C) BlkInd1(D) BlkInd1(DE) BlkInd1(E)
publication BlkInd2(B) BlkInd2(C) BlkInd2(D) BlkInd2(E)
Test1(B) Test1(BC) Test1(C) Test1(D) Test1(DE) Test1(E)
GOOSE BlkInd1(B) BlkInd1(BC) BlkInd1(BC) BlkInd1(DE) BlkInd1(DE) BlkInd1(E)
subscription BlkInd2(C) BlkInd2(B) BlkInd1(C) BlkInd2(D)
BlkInd1(D) BlkInd2(E)
Test1(BC) Test1(BC) Test1(DE) Test1(DE)
Test1(B) Test1(B) Test1(C)
Test1(C) Test1(D) Test1(E) Test1(D) Test1(E)
Association of GOOSE data items with GOOSE inputs (Gxxx) using the SFT850 software
G401 BlkInd1(B) BlkInd1(BC) BlkInd1(BC) BlkInd1(DE) BlkInd1(DE)
BlkInd2(C) BlkInd2(B) BlkInd2(E) BlkInd2(D)
G402 BlkInd1(D) BlkInd1(C)
G411 Test1(BC) Test1(BC) Test1(DE) Test1(DE)
G412 Test1(C) Test1(B) Test1(E) Test1(D)
G413 Test1(B) Test1(D) Test1(C) Test1(E)
Associating GOOSE inputs with Sepam logic functions using the SFT2841 software
G401 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1 BSIG1
G402 BSIG2 BSIG2 BSIG2 BSIG2
G411 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5
G412 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5
G413 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5 LED 5
BlkInd1 (C) = LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd1.stVal issued by the Sepam (C)
BlkInd2 (C) = LDO.PTRC1.BlkInd2.stVal issued by the Sepam (C)
Test1 (C) = LDO.GSE_GGIO1.Test1.stVal issued by the Sepam (C)

SEPED310017EN 221
 Control and monitoring Load shedding
functions

Operation
Motor load shedding is done to reduce the load on the electrical network so as to
keep the voltage within an acceptable range.
Load shedding may be triggered:
b by an order from outside Sepam in the presence of a logic input assigned for the
reception of load shedding orders. Orders may be delayed
b by a voltage dip detected by the delayed output of Sepam 27D protection unit 1
(typical setting 40% Un).
Load shedding triggers:
b tripping by the switchgear control function
b inhibition of closing as long as the load shedding order is maintained.
The load shedding order is maintained as long as one of the following three
conditions is present:
b external order via logic input (Ix or Gx)
b positive sequence voltage less than load shedding voltage detected by 27D unit 1
threshold
b insufficient positive sequence voltage for a restart order to be given and detected
by the delayed 27D unit 2 threshold. The time delay for the detection of correct
voltage recovery must be shorter than the load shedding delay (27D unit 1) in order
for the load shedding order to be maintained correctly. This unit is also used by the
restart function.
The function may be validated by the switchgear closed and not racked out
conditions.

4 Circuit breaker closed

Block diagram
DE80563

Racked out circuit breaker

Delay before
GOOSE logic input (Gx) load shedding
load shedding request

Logic input (lx)

load shedding request Load shedding
27D unit 1, delayed V_LOADSH_ORD
(load shedding threshold)
27D unit 2, delayed
(voltage correct)

Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Delay before load shedding
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Load shedding order V_LOADSH_ORD b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

222 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Restart
functions

Operation
With this function, motors can be automatically restarted after a shutdown triggered
by a voltage dip (load shedding).
The restart function is to be associated with the load shedding function It allows
staggered restarting of process motors, as long as the voltage dip that caused load
shedding was brief.
When tripping occurs due to a dip in the network supply voltage detected by 27D
protection unit 1, two situations are possible:
b the voltage dip lasts for a period longer than the maximum voltage dip duration:
tripping is final. External action is required for restart.
b the voltage dip lasts for a period shorter than the maximum dip duration: a restart
order is given. Delayed restart allows motor restart orders to be staggered to avoid
network overload.
The enabling of restart is detected after the delayed output of protection 27D unit 2
drops out. This threshold allows the return of voltage to be detected independently
with respect to the load shedding threshold. The typical setting is 50 % Un.
The restart order is given by the switchgear control function.

Block diagram
DE51608

Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Maximum voltage dip duration
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Restart delay
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

SEPED310017EN 223
 Control and monitoring Restart
functions

Example 1: Voltage dip with restart order

DE80241

Example 2: Voltage dip without restart order

DE80242

224 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions

Operation Generator separation

This function controls shutdown of the driving machine, This type of control function gives the following order:
tripping of the breaking device and interruption of the b a trip order to the generator coupling circuit breaker.
generator excitation supply in case of: The machine remains excited and the prime mover is not shut down.
b detection of an internal generator fault This mode is used to the isolate the machine from a network which no longer meets
b receipt of a genset shutdown order on a logic input or the coupling conditions (voltage, frequency, loss of power network).
via the communication link. The generator may continue to supply loads locally.

Sequential tripping
DE50636

This type of control function gives the following orders on after the other:
b a trip order to the generator coupling circuit breaker
b a delayed trip order to the excitation circuit breaker
b a delayed shutdown order to the prime mover.
This mode is reserved for certain machines.
Sepam enables these operating modes by combining:
b switchgear control for tripping of the generator coupling circuit breaker
b de-excitation function for tripping of the excitation circuit breaker
b genset shutdown function to order the shutdown of the prime mover.
Function output delays are used for sequential tripping.

Typical parameter setting for industrial network generators

Generator shutdown and tripping involve: Protection Circuit breaker Genset shutdown De-excitation
1 tripping of the circuit breaker connecting the functions tripping
machine to the network
2 tripping of the excitation circuit breaker
3 shutdown of the prime mover.
12
21B
27
b
b
b
4
The combination of these three orders determines four 32Q b b b
types of shutdown and tripping orders: 37P b
b total shutdown (simultaneous tripping) 40 b b b
b generator tripping 46 b
b generator separation 47 b
b sequential tripping. 49RMS b
50/51 b
50N/51N b b b
Total shutdown 50G/51G
This type of control function gives the following orders 50V/51V b
at the same time: 59 b
b a trip order to the generator coupling circuit breaker 59N b b b
b a trip order to the excitation circuit breaker 64REF b b b
b a shutdown order to the prime mover. 67 b b b
This mode is reserved for internal faults in generators
67N/NC b b b
and transformers of generator-transformer units.
81H b
81L b
Generator tripping 81R b
This type of control function gives the following orders:
b a trip order to the generator coupling circuit breaker
b a trip order to the excitation circuit breaker.
The prime mover is not shut down.
This mode is reserved for power network faults and
allows the generator to be quickly reconnected after the
fault is cleared.

SEPED310017EN 225
 Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions Genset shutdown

Operation Block diagram

This function, available in generator applications, is
used to shut down the genset:

DE81012
b mechanical shutdown by shutting down the prime
mover
b electrical shutdown by tripping the generator.
Genset shutdown may be initiated in the following
ways:
b by a external shutdown order
v remote control order if enabled
v logic input if set up
b by logic equation to take into account all specific
generator installation characteristics
b by delayed protection functions.

The protection functions concerned are those that

detect internal faults in generators or transformers of
generator-transformer units. They are divided into 2
groups: protection functions that contribute to
shutdown regardless of the circuit breaker position and
those whose contribution is dependent on the circuit
breaker position:
b protection functions unrelated to circuit breaker
position 12, 21B, 32Q, 40, 51V, 64REF, 67, 67N, 81L

4 b protection functions dependent on circuit breaker

position 50/51, 50N/51N, 59N. The delayed, unlatched
outputs of these protection units activate shutdown,
only if the circuit breaker is open.
Participation in the function is to be set individually in
the protection setting tabs of the SFT2841 software for
each protection unit that can take part in genset
shutdown. Characteristics
At the same time, the function gives a tripping order via Settings
switchgear control to disconnect the generator from the Activity
power network. It must be associated with a logic
output in the matrix to initiate genset shutdown.
Setting range On / Off
Selection of protection functions activating genset shutdown
Setting range per protection unit Enabled / disabled
Genset shutdown time delay
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Genset shutdown V_SHUTDOWN b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Genset shutdown V_SHUTDN_ORD b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC35 BO15 20, 21, 102 (ON) -
TC36 BO16 20, 21, 102 (OFF) -

226 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions De-excitation

Operation Block diagram

This function, available in generator applications, is
used to quickly cut off the power supply to an internal

DE81013
fault when the generator is disconnected from the
network:
b de-excitation of the generator
b electrical shutdown by tripping.
De-excitation may be initiated in the following ways:
b by an order
v remote control order if enabled
v logic input if set up
b by logic equation or to take into account all specific
generator installation characteristics
b by delayed protection functions.

The protection functions concerned are those that

detect internal faults in generators or transformers of
generator-transformer units. They are divided into 2
groups: protection functions that contribute to de-
excitation regardless of the circuit breaker position and
those whose contribution is dependent on the circuit
breaker position:
b protection functions unrelated to circuit breaker
position 12, 21B, 32Q, 40, 51V, 59, 64REF, 67, 67N,
81L
b protection functions dependent on circuit breaker
position 50/51, 50N/51N, 59N. The delayed, unlatched
4
outputs of these protection units trigger de-excitation
only if the circuit breaker is open.
Participation in the function is to be set individually in
the protection function setting tabs of the SFT2841
software for each protection unit that can take part in
de-excitation.
At the same time, the function gives a tripping order via
switchgear control to disconnect the generator from the
power network. It must be associated with a logic Characteristics
output in the control matrix to initiate the de-excitation
Settings
order.
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Selection of protection functions activating de-excitation
Setting range per protection unit Enabled / disabled
De-excitation time delay
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
De-excitation V_DE-EXCITATION b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
De-excitation V_DE-EXCIT_ORD b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

TS/TC equivalence for each protocol

Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC35 BO15 20, 21, 102 (ON) -
TC36 BO16 20, 21, 102 (OFF) -

SEPED310017EN 227
 Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions Example

Installation description
The electrical installation consists of busbars to which the following are connected:
b an incomer supplied by a 10 MVA transformer
b a 3.15 MVA power generator
DE80888

4 In normal operation, the generator and transformer are coupled to the busbars. The
generator provides backup power to the installation in the absence of the transformer
power supply. The installation is earthed by a neutral point coil connected to the
busbars. When the generator is not coupled to the network, its neutral is isolated.
When faults occur, the generator is over-excited for 3 seconds. Its fault current is
equal to 3 times its rated current. After the 3 seconds have elapsed, the fault current
drops to 0.5 times the rated current.
The generator is protected:
b against network electrical short-circuits by a phase overcurrent protection function
50/51 and a backup protection function 50V/51V
b against earth faults by an earth fault protection function 50N/51N when the
generator is coupled to the busbars and by a neutral voltage displacement protection
function when it is not coupled
b against overloads by a thermal overload protection function 49RMS
b against unbalance by a negative sequence / unbalance protection function 46
b against frequency variations by underfrequency and overfrequency protection
functions 81L and 81H
b against voltage variations by undervoltage and overvoltage protection functions 27
and 59
b against field loss by a protection function 40.

Setting of genset shutdown and de-excitation

The participation of these protection functions in circuit breaker tripping, genset
shutdown and de-excitation depends on the type of faults detected:
b circuit breaker tripping against network faults:
50/51, 50V/51V, 50N/51N, 49RMS, 46, 81L, 81H, 27, 59
b genset shutdown for prime mover faults and internal faults:
50/51, 59N, 40
b de-excitation for internal faults: 50/51, 59N, 40.
Shutdown is total and not sequential. The genset shutdown and de-excitation time
delays are zero.

228 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic transfer
functions

Description
The automatic transfer function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to
DE51498

another.
The function reduces busbar supply interruptions, thereby increasing the service
continuity of the network supplied by the busbars.

Automatic transfer performs:

b automatic transfer with interruption if there is a loss of voltage or a fault upstream
b manual transfer and return to normal operation without interruption, with or without
synchro-check
b control of the coupling circuit breaker (optional)
b selection of the normal operating mode
Automatic "one out of two" transfer. b the necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only 1 circuit
breaker out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed.

Automatic "one out of two" or "two out of three" transfer

The operation and implementation of the automatic transfer function depend on the
DE51622

type of substation:
b automatic "one out of two" transfer is suitable for dual-incomer substations without
coupling
b automatic "two out of three" transfer is suitable for dual-incomer substations with
coupling.
These two applications are described separately to make them easier to understand.

The automatic transfer function is symmetrical:

b hardware symmetry: dual-incomer substations, with 2 incoming circuit breakers,
4
and each incomer is protected by a Sepam series 60 unit
Automatic "two out of three" transfer with synchro-check b functional symmetry: automatic transfer is distributed between the two
managed by Sepam series 60.
Sepam series 60 units protecting the two incomers.
Each of the functions is therefore described from the viewpoint of one of the two
incomers, the other incomer being referred to as the "opposite side" incomer.

SEPED310017EN 229
 Control and monitoring Automatic transfer
functions

Equipment used
DE80889

Sepam protection relay

Each incomer is protected by a Sepam series 60 unit.
At least two MES120 modules need to be added to each Sepam.
The synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is performed by an optional MCS025 module
connected to one of the 2 Sepam units.

For busbars with motors, it is necessary to check the remanent voltage on the
busbars during automatic transfer using a Sepam B21.

Local control of automatic transfer

Local control of automatic transfer requires the following components:
b 1 "NO circuit breaker" selector (ANSI 10), 2 or 3-position selector which
designates the circuit breaker that remains open at the end of voluntary transfer
without interruption
B21 B21
b 1 optional "Manual / Auto" selector (ANSI 43)
v in Auto mode, automatic transfer is enabled
v in Manual mode, automatic transfer is disabled
Automatic "two out of three" transfer with synchro-check
v when this optional selector is not included, all the automatic transfer functions are
managed by Sepam.
enabled.
b 1, 2 or 3 optional "Local / Remote" selectors (one selector for the function or one
selector per circuit breaker)
v in Remote mode, automatic transfer on voltage loss is enabled and the other

4 functions are disabled

v in Local mode, automatic transfer on voltage loss is disabled and the other
functions are enabled
v when these optional selectors are not included, all the automatic transfer functions
are enabled.
b 2 or 3 optional pushbuttons with LEDs (one pushbutton per circuit breaker):
v "Breaker closing" pushbutton
v "Closing ready" LED.

230 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation

Definition
Automatic "one out of two" transfer is suitable for substations with busbars supplied
by two incomers with no coupling.
Automatic transfer comprises two functions:
b automatic transfer with busbar supply interruption
b voluntary return to normal without busbar supply interruption.
The 2 functions are described separately below.

Automatic transfer with supply interruption

DE51017

Description
The function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to the other, after the
detection of voltage loss or a fault upstream of the source.

Automatic source transfer takes place in two steps:

b tripping of the circuit breaker triggered by the detection of the loss of voltage or an
external trip order (trip order from upstream protection units): loss of busbar supply
b closing of the opposite side circuit breaker to resupply the busbars (when motors
are connected to the busbars, it is necessary to check for remanent voltage on the
busbars using the ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage function).
Compulsory transfer conditions
These conditions are always required to enable transfer:
b the incoming circuit breaker is closed

4
b no phase-to-phase fault detected by the incomer on the busbars or downstream
b no phase-to-earth fault detected by the incomer on the busbars or downstream
b voltage OK on the opposite incomer.
Optional transfer conditions
These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled:
b the "Auto / Manual" selector is in the Auto position
b the 2 "Local / Remote" selectors are in the Remote position
b the 2 incoming circuit breakers are racked in
b no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function (ANSI 60FL), to avoid transfer
on the loss of voltage transformers
b no inhibition of transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations.
Initialization of transfer
Three events may trigger automatic transfer:
b loss of voltage detected on the incomer by the Phase undervoltage function
(ANSI 27)
b or detection of a fault by the protection units upstream of the incomer, with
intertripping order on the "External tripping 1" logic input
b or V_TRANS_ON_FLT, initialization of transfer by logic equations.

SEPED310017EN 231
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation

Block diagram
DE51584

Closing of opposite side circuit breaker

The following conditions are required to order the closing of the opposite side circuit
breaker:
b the circuit breaker is open
b no opposite side circuit breaker inhibit close conditions
b no remanent voltage on the busbars (checking necessary when motors are
connected to the busbars).
The opposite side circuit breaker closing order is transmitted by a Sepam logic output
to a logic input of the opposite side Sepam.
It is taken into account by the Switchgear control function of the opposite side
Sepam.

Block diagram (Opposite side Sepam)

DE52254

232 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation

Voluntary return to normal without interruption

DE51017

Description
The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control
functions:
b closing of the open incoming circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check:
the two incoming circuit breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.
These two functions may also be used to transfer the busbar supply source without
any interruption.

Compulsory transfer conditions

These conditions are always required to enable transfer:
b the incoming circuit breaker is open
b the voltage is OK upstream of the incoming circuit breaker.

Optional transfer conditions

These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled:
b the "Auto / Manual" selector is in the Manual position
b the 2 "Local / Remote" selectors are in the Local position
b the 2 incomer circuit breakers are racked in
b no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function (ANSI 60FL), to avoid transfer

4
on the loss of voltage transformers
b no inhibition of transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations.

Initialization of the return to normal

b voluntary incoming circuit breaker close order.

Closing of the open circuit breaker

DE51509

Description
Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function, with or without
synchro-check.

The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the
user that the return to normal is possible.

Block diagram
DE52253

SEPED310017EN 233
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation

Opening of the normally open circuit breaker

DE51510

Description
This function controls the opening of the circuit breaker designated as being normally
open by the position of the "NO circuit breaker" selector, when the two incomer
circuit breakers are closed.
It guarantees, for all the automatic control sequences that put the two sources in
parallel, that at the end of the transfer, only one circuit breaker out of the two is
closed.
The open order is taken into account by the Switchgear control function.

Block diagram

DE51586

234 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation

Connection
DE51600

: optional wiring.

SEPED310017EN 235
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation

Parameter setting of predefined control functions

The Automatic transfer function is set up at the same time as the Switchgear control
PE80775

function in the "Control logic" tab of the SFT2841 software.

Switchgear control function

b activation of the Switchgear control function
b activation of the Synchro-check function if necessary.

Automatic transfer function

b activation of the Automatic transfer function and adjustment of associated
parameters:
v voltage return time Tr (typically 3 s)
v normal coupling position: no coupling.

SFT2841: parameter setting of predefined control logic. VT supervision function

The VT supervision (ANSI 60FL) is to be activated if necessary.

Protection function setting

Protection functions Use Setting information
Phase undervoltage (ANSI 27) Initialization of automatic Voltage set point: 60% Unp
Unit 1 transfer on detection of voltage Delay: 300 ms
loss.

4 Phase overcurrent
(ANSI 50/51)
Unit 1, instantaneous output
Detection of downstream
phase fault, to inhibit
automatic transfer.
To be set according to
discrimination study (the most
sensitive set point).
Earth fault (ANSI 50N/51N) Detection of downstream earth To be set according to
Unit 1, instantaneous output fault, to inhibit automatic discrimination study (the most
transfer. sensitive set point).
Phase overvoltage (ANSI 59) Detection of phase voltage Voltage set point: 90% Unp
Unit 1 upstream of the circuit Delay: 3 s
breaker.
To be assigned to a Sepam
logic output in the control
matrix.
Optional Use Setting information
protection functions
Remanent undervoltage Detection of no remanent Voltage set point: 30% Unp
(ANSI 27R) voltage on the busbars to Delay: 100 ms
Unit 1 which the motors are
connected.

236 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation

Logic input assignment

The logic inputs required for the AT function are to be assigned in the SFT2841
PE80755

"Logic I/Os" screen.

The "Standard assignments" button proposes an assignment of the main inputs
required for the AT function. The other inputs are to be assigned manually.

Logic output assignment in the control matrix

The assignment of the logic outputs required for the AT function takes place in 2
steps:
b declaration of the required logic outputs "Used", indicating the control mode of
each output, in the SFT2841 "Logic I/Os" screen
b assignment of each predefined output associated with the AT function to a Sepam
logic output in the SFT2841 "Control matrix" screen.

SFT2841: standard assignment of the inputs required for the The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows:
AT function.
"Protection" button Description Use
59 - 1 Delayed output of the Phase Indication for the opposite side
overvoltage function (ANSI 59) Sepam: the voltage is OK
Unit 1 upstream of the incoming
circuit breaker.
"Logic" button Description Use
NO circuit breaker closing Predefined output Automatic closing order of

4
V_CLOSE_NO_ORD opposite side circuit breaker.
of the AT function
Breaker closing ready Predefined output LED indication:
V_CLOSE_EN the return to normal conditions
of the AT function are met (neglecting the
synchro-check)

SEPED310017EN 237
 Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Characteristics

Setting
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Voltage return time
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Normal coupling position
Setting range No coupling / Normally open / Normally closed
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Transfer order on fault V_TRANS_ON_FLT b
Transfer off order V_TRANS_STOP b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Automatic transfer on V_TRANSF_ON b
Tripping by 2/3 or 1/2 logic V_2/3_TRIPPING b
Tripping by automatic transfer V_AT_TRIPPING b
NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD b
Breaker closing ready V_CLOSE_EN b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

238 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation

Definition
Automatic "two out of three" transfer is suitable for substations with busbars supplied
by two incomers and with coupling.
Automatic transfer comprises two functions:
b automatic transfer with busbar supply interruption
b voluntary return to normal without busbar supply interruption.
The 2 functions are described separately below.

Automatic transfer with supply interruption

DE51511

Description
The function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to the other, after the
detection of voltage loss or a fault upstream of the source.

Automatic transfer with normally open coupling. Automatic source transfer takes place in two steps:
b tripping of the circuit breaker triggered by the detection of the loss of voltage or an
external trip order (trip order from upstream protection units): loss of busbar supply
b closing of the normally open circuit breaker to resupply the busbars. According to
the parameter setting, the normally open circuit breaker may be one of the following:
v the coupling circuit breaker, when coupling is normally open
DE51514

v the opposite side circuit breaker, when coupling is normally closed.

When motors are connected to the busbars, it is necessary to check for remanent
voltage on the busbars using the Remanent undervoltage function (ANSI 27R).

4
Automatic transfer with normally closed coupling.
Compulsory transfer conditions
These conditions are always required to enable transfer:
b the incoming circuit breaker is closed
b according to the coupling setup:
v the opposite side circuit breaker is closed and the coupling circuit breaker is open,
when coupling is normally open (NO coupling)
v or the opposite side circuit breaker is open and the coupling circuit breaker is
closed, when coupling is normally closed (NC coupling)
b no phase-to-phase fault detected by the incomer on the busbars or downstream
b no phase-to-earth fault detected by the incomer on the busbars or downstream
b voltage OK on the opposite incomer.

Optional transfer conditions

These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled:
b the "Auto / Manual" selector is in the Auto position
b the 3 "Local / Remote" selectors are in the Remote position
b the 3 circuit breakers are racked in
b no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function (ANSI 60FL), to avoid transfer
on the loss of voltage transformers
b no inhibition of transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations.

Initialization of transfer
Three events may trigger automatic transfer:
b loss of voltage detected on the incomer by the Phase undervoltage function
(ANSI 27)
b or the detection of a fault by the protection units upstream of the incomer, with
intertripping order on the "External tripping 1" logic input
b or V_TRANS_ON_FLT, initialization of transfer by logic equations.

SEPED310017EN 239
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation

Block diagram
DE52289

Closing of the normally open circuit breaker

The following conditions are required to order the closing of the normally open circuit
breaker:
b the incoming circuit breaker is open
b no normally open circuit breaker inhibit close conditions
b no remanent voltage on the busbars (checking necessary when motors are
connected to the busbars.)
If the normally open circuit breaker is the opposite side circuit breaker:
the NO circuit breaker closing order is transmitted by a Sepam logic output to a logic
input of the opposite side Sepam where it is taken into account by the Switchgear
control function (see block diagram below).
If the normally open circuit breaker is the coupling circuit breaker:
the NO circuit breaker closing order is transmitted by a Sepam logic output to close
the circuit breaker directly, without any intermediary.

Block diagram (Opposite side Sepam)

DE52255

240 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation

Voluntary return to normal without interruption

DE51512

Description
The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control
functions:
b closing of the open circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check: the 3 circuit
Voluntary return to normal with normally closed coupling. breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.
These two functions may also be used to transfer the busbar supply source without
any interruption.

Compulsory transfer conditions

These conditions are always required to enable transfer:
DE51631

b the incoming circuit breaker is open

b the opposite side circuit breaker and the coupling circuit breaker are closed
b The voltage is OK upstream of the incoming circuit breaker. This voltage is
detected by function ANSI 59.
Voluntary return to normal with normally open coupling.

Optional transfer conditions

These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled:
b the "Auto / Manual" selector is in the Manual position
b the 3 "Local / Remote" selectors are in the Local position
b the 3 circuit breakers are racked in
b no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function (ANSI 60FL), to avoid transfer
on the loss of voltage transformers
b no inhibition of transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations.
4
Initialization of the return to normal
b voluntary incoming circuit breaker close order.

Closing of the open circuit breaker

DE51513

Description
Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function, with or without
synchro-check.

The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the
user that the return to normal is possible.

Block diagram
DE81014

U , delayed

SEPED310017EN 241
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation

Opening of the normally open circuit breaker

DE51529

Description
This function controls the opening of the circuit breaker designated as being normally
open by the position of the "NO circuit breaker" selector, when the three circuit
breakers are closed.
Normally closed coupling. It guarantees, for all the automatic control sequences that put the two sources in
parallel, that at the end of the transfer, only two circuit breakers out of the three are
closed.
The open order is taken into account by the Switchgear control function.

Normally open coupling. Block diagram

DE51589

242 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation

Coupling closing
Description
The voluntary closing of the coupling circuit breaker without interruption involves two
separate control functions:
b closing of the coupling circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check: the 3 circuit
breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.

Compulsory transfer conditions

These conditions are always required to enable transfer:
b the opposite side voltage is OK
b the 3 following conditions are not fulfilled simultaneously:
v the incoming circuit breaker is closed
v the opposite side circuit breaker is closed
v the coupling circuit breaker is the normally open circuit breaker (NO coupling).
Optional transfer conditions
These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled:
b the "Auto / Manual" selector is in the Manual position
b the 3 "Local / Remote" selectors are in the Local position
b the 3 circuit breakers are racked in
b no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function (ANSI 60FL), to avoid transfer

4
on the loss of voltage transformers
b no inhibition of transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations.

Initialization of coupling closing

Voluntary coupling circuit breaker close order.

Block diagram
DE52257

SEPED310017EN 243
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation

Connection for normally open coupling

DE51599

: optional wiring.

244 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation

Connection for normally closed coupling

DE51598

: optional wiring.

SEPED310017EN 245
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation

Parameter setting of predefined control functions

The Automatic transfer function is set up at the same time as the Switchgear control
PE80775

function in the "Control logic" tab of the SFT2841 software.

Switchgear control function

b activation of the Switchgear control function
b activation of the Synchro-check function if necessary.

Automatic transfer function

b activation of the Automatic transfer function and adjustment of associated
parameters:
v voltage return time Tr (typically 3 s)
v normal coupling position: normally open or normally closed, according to the
network operating mode.
SFT2841: parameter setting of predefined control logic.
VT supervision function
The VT supervision (ANSI 60FL) is to be activated if necessary.

Protection function setting

Protection functions Use Setting information
Phase undervoltage (ANSI 27) Initialization of automatic Voltage set point: 60% Unp

4
Unit 1 transfer on detection of voltage Delay: 300 ms
loss.
Phase overcurrent Detection of downstream To be set according to
(ANSI 50/51) phase fault, to inhibit discrimination study (the most
Unit 1, instantaneous output automatic transfer. sensitive set point).
Earth fault (ANSI 50N/51N) Detection of downstream earth To be set according to
Unit 1, instantaneous output fault, to inhibit automatic discrimination study (the most
transfer. sensitive set point).
Phase overvoltage (ANSI 59) Detection of phase voltage Voltage set point: 90% Unp
Unit 1 upstream of the circuit Delay: 3 s
breaker.
To be assigned to a Sepam
logic output in the control
matrix.
Optional Use Setting information
protection functions
Remanent undervoltage Detection of no remanent Voltage set point: 30% Unp
(ANSI 27R) voltage on the busbars to Delay: 100 ms
Unit 1 which the motors are
connected.

246 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation

Logic input assignment

The logic inputs required for the AT function are to be assigned in the SFT2841
PE80755

"Logic I/Os" screen.

The "Standard assignments" button proposes an assignment of the main inputs
required for the AT function. The other inputs are to be assigned manually.

Logic output assignment in the control matrix

The assignment of the logic outputs required for the AT function takes place in 2
steps:
b declaration of the required logic outputs "Used", indicating the control mode of
each output, in the SFT2841 "Logic I/Os" screen
b assignment of each predefined output associated with the AT function to a Sepam
logic output in the SFT2841 "Control matrix" screen.

SFT2841: standard assignment of the inputs required for the The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows:
AT function.
"Protection" button Description Use
59 - 1 Delayed output of the Phase Indication for the opposite side
overvoltage function (ANSI 59) Sepam: voltage OK upstream
Unit 1 of the incoming circuit breaker.
"Logic" button Description Use
NO circuit breaker closing Predefined output Automatic closing order of
V_CLOSE_NO_ORD normally open circuit breaker.

4
of the AT function
Coupling closing Predefined output Coupling circuit breaker close
V_TIE_CLOSING order.
of the AT function
Coupling tripping Predefined output Coupling circuit breaker open
V_TIE_OPENING order.
of the AT function
Breaker closing ready Predefined output LED indication: the return to
V_CLOSE_EN normal conditions are met.
of the AT function (neglecting the synchro-
check)
Coupling closing ready Predefined output LED indication: the coupling
V_TIE_CLOSE_EN close conditions are met.
of the AT function (neglecting the synchro-
check)

SEPED310017EN 247
 Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Characteristics

Setting
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Voltage return time
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Normal coupling position
Setting range No coupling / Normally open / Normally closed
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations
Transfer order on fault V_TRANS_ON_FLT b
Transfer off order V_TRANS_STOP b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Tripping by 2/3 or 1/2 logic V_2/3_TRIPPING b
Tripping by automatic transfer V_AT_TRIPPING b
NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD b
Breaker closing ready V_CLOSE_EN b
Coupling tripping V_TIE_OPENING b
Coupling closing ready V_TIE_CLOSE_EN b
Coupling closing V_TIE_CLOSING b
Coupling closing with synchro- V_TIESYNCFAIL b

4 check failed
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

248 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Triggering the Motor start report
functions (MSR)

Operation
This function is only found in motor applications. It is used to record values specific
to motors, during the starting phase.
While there is no recording in progress, recording can be triggered by:
b the "starting in progress" output of the 48/51LR protection function
b the V_MSR_START output from the logic equation editor
b the remote control order TC51
b the "Trigger MSR" logic input
b the "Trigger MSR" GOOSE logic input

Recording can be conditional upon the closed circuit breaker position.

Block diagram
DE81267

MSR on 0 T
TS128
Closed circuit
& MSR in progress
breaker position
V_MSR_TRIGGED

Starting in progress
4
P48/51LR_1_22

Trigger MSR
V_MSR_START
TC 51 / trigg. MSR
≥1
Inhibit TC &

Trigger MSR
Logic input Ixxx

Trigger MSR
GOOSE Gxxx

Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Trigger MSR V_MSR_START b

Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
MSR triggered V_MSR_TRIGGED b

SEPED310017EN 249
 Control and monitoring Activating / Deactivating the Data
functions log function (DLG)

Operation
This function is found in all applications.
Depending on the chosen parameter setting, activation and deactivating the log of
selected electrical values can be achieved by:
b Logic input or GOOSE type IEC 61850 logic input
b Logic equation editor
b remote control order
b SFT2841 software.

Block diagram
DLG activation logic input
DE81268 ≥1
DLG activation GOOSE input

DLG activation TC52 1 takes priority

& 1 TS143
Inhibit TC
0
DLG in progress
&
TC53 / DLG deactivation ≥1 V_DLG_ACTIVED

4 DLG activation by SFT2841

&
1 takes priority

0
DLG deactivation
by SFT2841
≥1
End of DLG log

DLG activation
V_DLG_START

Select DLG activation by

1
Logic equation
SFT2841
Remote control order
Logic or GOOSE input

Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
DLG activation V_DLG_START b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
DLG in progress V_DLG_ACTIVED b

250 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Change of phase rotation direction
functions

Operation
This function is found in all applications.
The change of phase rotation direction can be triggered by:
b logic input or GOOSE type IEC 61850 logic input
b remote control order (TC)
The phase rotation direction can be defined as:
b positive sequence (123)
b negative sequence (132)

Block diagram
Logic input Rotation direction 123 activated
Rotation direction 123
DE81269

≥1 V_PHASE_DIR
GOOSE input
Rotation direction 123
0 takes priority
Rotation direction 123 TC54 &
1
1 takes priority Phase rotation direction active
&
Inhibit TC V_PHASE_ACTIVE
1 0
&
0
&
Rotation direction 132 TC55
0
SFT2841 selection
1

4
1 Discrepancy in
rotation direction 123 the phase rotation
direction command
rotation direction 132
rotation direction by TC & T=2s TS239

rotation direction by logic or GOOSE input T 0

≥1
V_PHASE_DISC
Rotation direction 132 TC55 &
1 takes priority
& 0
Inhibit TC
1 Rotation direction 132 activated
1
V_PHASE_INV
0
&
Rotation direction 123 TC54

Logic input
Rotation direction 132 Logic & GOOSE inputs
Rotation direction 1xx not assigned
≥1
GOOSE input
rotation direction 132

Characteristics
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Matrix
Discrepancy in the phase rotation V_PHASE_DISC b
direction
Phase rotation direction 123 V_PHASE_DIR b
activated
Phase rotation direction 132 V_PHASE_INV b
activated
Phase rotation direction active V_PHASE_ACTIVE b

WARNING
WARNING: protection functions inhibited for 350 ms.
Form the time it receives the change phase rotation direction request, Sepam
cannot protect the electrical network for 350 ms.
This inhibition of protection functions can result in death or serious injury.

SEPED310017EN 251
 Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30

Operation
Events may be indicated locally on the front panel of Sepam by:
b appearance of a message on the display
b switching on of one of the 9 yellow LEDs.

Message type indication

Predefined messages
All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and
available in two language versions:
b in English, factory-set messages, not modifiable
b in the local language, according to the version delivered.
The language version is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting.
The messages are visible on the Sepam display and on the SFT2841 Alarms screen.
The number and type of predefined messages depend on the type of Sepam. The
table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages.

Functions English Local language

(e.g. French)
Control and monitoring ANSI code
External trip (1 to 3) EXT. TRIP (1 to 3) DECLT.EXT. (1 à 3)
Buchholz trip BUCHH/GAS TRIP BUCHH/GAZ DECLT
Buchholz alarm BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH ALARME

4
Thermostat trip THERMOST. TRIP THERMOST.DECLT.
Thermostat alarm THERMOST. ALARM THERMOT.ALARME
Pressure trip PRESSURE TRIP PRESSION DECLT
Pressure alarm PRESSURE ALARM PRESSION ALARME
Thermistor trip THERMISTOR TRIP THERMISTOR DECL.
Thermistor alarm THERMISTOR AL. THERMISTOR AL.
Control fault CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMMANDE
Load shedding LOAD SHEDDING DÉLESTAGE
Genset shutdown GENSET SHUTDOWN ARRÊT GROUPE
De-excitation DE-EXCITATION DÉSEXCITATION
Tripping order by automatic transfer AUTO TRANSFER AUTO TRANSFER
Phase rotation direction command ROTATION DISC CMD DISC CDE ROTATION
complementarity fault
Diagnosis ANSI code
SF6 fault SF6 LOW BAISSE SF6
MET148-2 No 1 RTD fault RTD’S FAULT MET1 (1) DEF SONDE MET1 (1)
MET148-2 No 2 RTD fault RTD’S FAULT MET2 (1) DEF. SONDE MET2 (1)
VT supervision 60FL Phase VT supervision VT FAULT DEFAUT TP
Residual VT supervision VT FAULT Vo DEFAUT TP Vo
CT supervision 60 Main CT supervision CT FAULT DEFAUT TC
Trip circuit supervision (TCS) fault or 74 TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECLT
mismatching of open/closed position contacts
Closing circuit fault CLOSE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT ENCLT
Cumulative breaking current monitoring ΣI²BREAKING >> ΣI² COUPES
Battery monitoring BATTERY LOW (1) PILE FAIBLE (1)
(1) RTD FAULT, BATTERY LOW messages: refer to the maintenance chapter.

252 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30

Functions English Local language

(e.g. French)
Protection ANSI code
Overspeed 12 OVERSPEED VITESSE >>
Underspeed 14 UNDERSPEED VITESSE <<
Underimpedance 21B UNDERIMPEDANCE IMPEDANCE <<
Synchro-check 25 Synchrochecked close request in SYNC.IN PROCESS SYNC. EN COURS
process
Synchrochecked close request SYNC. OK SYNC. REUSSIE
successful
Closing failed, SYNC. FAILURE ECHEC SYNC.
out-of-sync
Closing failed, SYNC. FAILED dU ECHEC SYNC. dU
out-of-sync, cause dU
Closing failed, SYNC. FAILED dPhi ECHEC SYNC. dPhi
out-of-sync, cause dPHI
Closing failed, SYNC. FAILED dF ECHEC SYNC. dF
out-of-sync, cause dF
Stop closing with STOP SYNC. STOP SYNC.
synchro-check
Coupling closing TIE SYNC. FAILED ECHEC COUPLAGE
with synchro-check failed
Undervoltage 27 UNDERVOLTAGE (1) TENSION << (1)
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE.PS TENSION Vd <<

4
Reverse rotation ROTATION - ROTATION -
Active overpower 32P OVER P P >>
Reactive overpower 32Q OVER Q Q >>
Phase undercurrent 37 UNDER CURRENT COURANT <<
Phase underpower 37P UNDER POWER P <<
Temperature monitoring 38/49T Alarm OVER TEMP. ALM T° ALARME
Tripping OVER TEMP. TRIP T° DECLT
Field loss 40 FIELD LOSS PERTE EXCITATION
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 UNBALANCE I DESEQUILIBRE I
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 UNBALANCE U DESEQUILIBRE U
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 48/51LR Excessive starting time LONG START DEMARRAGE LONG
Locked rotor in normal operation ROTOR BLOCKING BLOCAGE ROTOR
Locked rotor on start STRT LOCKED ROTR BLOC ROTOR DEM
Thermal overload 49RMS Alarm THERMAL ALARM ECHAUFT.ALARME
Tripping THERMAL TRIP ECHAUFT.DECLT.
Inhibit closing START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE
Breaker failure 50BF BREAKER FAILURE DEF. DISJONCT.
Phase overcurrent 50/51 PHASE FAULT (2) DEFAUT PHASE (2)
Earth fault 50N/51N EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V O/C V REST (2) DEF. PHASE RET. U (2)
Overvoltage 59 OVERVOLTAGE (1) TENSION >> (1)
Neutral voltage displacement 59N Vo FAULT DEFAUT Vo
Restricted earth fault 64REF RESTRIC. EARTH TERRE RESTREINTE
FAULT
Starts per hour 66 START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE
Directional phase overcurrent 67 DIR. PHASE FAULT (2) DEFAUT PHASE DIR. (2)
Directional earth fault 67N/67NC DIR. EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE DIR.
Recloser 79 Cycle x CYCLE (1 to 4) (3) CYCLE (1 à 4) (3)
Reclosing successful CLEARED FAULT DEFAUT ELIMINE
Permanent trip FINAL TRIP DECLT DEFINITIF
Overfrequency 81H OVER FREQ. FREQUENCE >>
Underfrequency 81L UNDER FREQ. FREQUENCE <<
Rate of change of frequency 81R ROCOF DERIV. FREQ
(1) With indication of the faulty phase, when used with phase-to-neutral voltage.
(2) With indication of the faulty phase.
(3) With indication of the protection unit that has initiated the cycle (phase fault, earth fault, ...).

SEPED310017EN 253
 Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30

Personalized user messages

100 additional messages may be created using the SFT2841 software to link a
message to a logic input or the result of a logic equation, for example, or to replace
a predefined message by a user message.
User message editor in SFT2841
The user message editor is included in the SFT2841 software and may be accessed
in connected or disconnected mode from the control matrix screen:
b display the "Event" tab on the screen: the user messages appear
b double-click on one of the messages displayed to activate the user message
editor.
User message editor functions
b creation and modification of user messages:
v in English and the local language
v by text input or importing of an existing bitmap file (*.bmp) or by point to point
drawing
b deletion of user messages
b assignment of predefined or user messages to an event defined in the control
matrix:
v from the control matrix screen, "Events" tab, double-click on the event to be linked
to a new message
v select the new predefined or user message from the messages presented
v "assign" it to the event.
The same message may be assigned to several events, with no limitations.

4 Message display in SFT2841

b The predefined messages are stored in Sepam’s memory and are displayed in
connected mode. In disconnected mode, the last messages stored in Sepam
connected mode are displayed.
b The user messages are saved with the other Sepam parameters and protection
settings and are displayed in connected and disconnected modes.

Message processing on the Sepam display

When an event occurs, the related message appears on the Sepam display.
The user presses the key to clear the message and enable normal consultation
of all the display.
The user must press the key to acknowledge latched events (e.g. protection
outputs).
The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history ( key), in which the
last 16 messages are stored. The last 250 messages may be consulted with the
SFT2841 software.
To delete the messages stored in the alarm history:
b display the alarm history on the display
b press the key.

LED indication
The 9 yellow LEDs on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following
events:
LED Event Name on label
on front panel
LED 1 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 1 I>51
LED 2 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 2 I>>51
LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 1 Io > 51N
LED 4 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 2 Io >> 51N
LED 5 Ext
LED 6
LED 7 Circuit breaker open (I102) 0 Off
LED 8 Circuit breaker closed (I101) I On
LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip

The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software:
b LEDs are assigned to events in the "LEDs" tab of the control matrix screen
b editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the general
characteristics screen.

254 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Local control
functions

Description
Switchgear may be controlled locally using Sepam series 60 units equipped with the
PE80330

mimic-based UMI.
The control functions available are:
b selection of the Sepam control mode
b viewing of device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local control of the opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam

Selection of the Sepam control mode

A key-switch on the front of the mimic-based UMI is used to select the
Sepam control mode. Three modes are available: Remote, Local or Test.

In Remote mode:
b remote control orders are taken into account
b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit breaker open
order.
Local control using the mimic-based UMI Remote mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_REMOTE = 1.

In Local mode:
b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit breaker open
order.
b local control orders are enabled.

4
Local mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_LOCAL = 1.

Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventive
maintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no time-tagged events are sent by the communication link.
Test mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_TEST = 1.

Mimic diagram and symbols

A mimic diagram or single-line diagram is a simplified diagram of an electrical
installation. It is made up of a fixed background on which symbols and
measurements are placed.
The mimic diagram editor integrated in the SFT2841 software may be used to
personalize and setup mimic diagrams.

The symbols making up the mimic-diagram constitute the interface between the
mimic-based UMI and the other Sepam control functions.
There are three types of symbols:
b fixed symbol: represents the electrotechnical devices that are neither animated or
controlled, e.g. a transformer
b animated symbol with one or two inputs: represents the electrotechnical devices
that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, but cannot be
controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for switch-disconnectors without remote control, for
example.
b controlled symbol with one or two inputs/outputs: represents the electrotechnical
devices that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, and can
be controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for circuit breakers, for example.
The symbol outputs are used to control the electrotechnical device:
v directly via the Sepam logic outputs
v by the switchgear control function
v by logic equation.

SEPED310017EN 255
 Control and monitoring Local control
functions

Symbol animation
Depending on the value of their inputs, symbols change. A graphic representation
corresponds to each state. Animation is carried out automatically by changing the
symbol each time the state changes.
The symbol inputs must be assigned directly to the Sepam inputs indicating the
position of the symbolized switchgear.

Animated symbols with one input

"Animated -1 input" and "Controlled -1 input/output" symbols are animated symbols
with one input. The value of the input determines the state of the symbol:
b input set to 0 = inactive
b input set to 1 = active
This type of symbol is used for simple presentation of information, for example the
racked out position of a circuit breaker.

Symbol inputs Symbol state Graphic representation

(example)
Input = 0 Inactive

Input = 1 Active

4 Animated symbols with two inputs

"Animated - 2 inputs" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols are animated
symbols with two inputs, one open and the other closed.
This is the most common situation in representing switchgear positions.
The symbol has three states, i.e. three graphic representations: open, closed and
unknown.
The latter is obtained when the inputs are not matched, in which case it is impossible
to determine the position of the switchgear.

Symbol inputs Symbol state Graphic representation

(example)
Input 1 (open) = 1 Open
Input 2 (closed) = 0

Input 1 (open) = 0 Closed

Input 2 (closed) = 1

Input 1 (open) = 0 Unknown

Input 2 (closed) = 0
Input 1 (open) = 1 Unknown
Input 2 (closed) = 1

Local control using a symbol

"Controlled - 1 input/output" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols are used to
control the switchgear corresponding to the symbol via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.

Control symbols with two outputs

"Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols have two control outputs for opening and
closing of the symbolized device.
An order on the mimic-based UMI sends a 300 ms pulse on the controlled output.

Control symbols with one output

"Controlled - 1 input/output" symbols have one control output. The output remains in
the last state to which it was ordered.
A new order results in a change in the output state.

Inhibition of orders
"Controlled - 1 input/output" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols have two
inhibition inputs that, when set to 1, block opening and closing orders. This makes it
possible to create interlocking systems or other order-disabling systems that are
taken into account by the UMI.

256 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Local control
functions

Symbol inputs/outputs
Depending on the desired operation of the mimic-based UMI, Sepam variables must
be assigned to the inputs of animated symbols and the inputs/outputs of controlled
symbols.

Sepam variables assigned to symbol inputs

Sepam variables Name Use
Logic inputs Ixxx Symbol animation directly based on device positions
Outputs of predefined Switchgear control V_CLOSE_INHIBITED Circuit-breaker operation disabled
functions V_CLOSE_BLOCKED
Position of key on the front V_MIMIC_LOCAL, b Representation of key position
panel of Sepam V_MIMIC_REMOTE, b Operation disabled depending on the control mode
V_MIMIC_TEST
Logic equations V_MIMIC_IN_1 to V_MIMIC_IN_16 b Representation of Sepam internal status conditions
b Cases where operation is disabled

Sepam variables to be assigned to symbol outputs

Sepam variables Name Use
Logic outputs Oxxx Direct control of devices
Inputs of predefined functions Switchgear control V_MIMIC_CLOSE_CB Circuit-breaker control using the switchgear-control
V_MIMIC_OPEN_CB function via the mimic-based UMI
Logic equations V_MIMIC_OUT1 to Order processing by logic functions: interlocking, order
V_MIMIC_OUT16 sequence, etc.

Block diagram
The block diagrams below present the functions ensured by the controlled symbols,
4
based on two examples.
Voluntary user control orders (selection of the device to be controlled in the mimic
diagram and action on a control key) are represented in the block diagrams by the
following icons:
: open order
: close order

Local control using symbols with two outputs

PE50416

DE51591

SFT2841: example of the logic input / output assignment of a

symbol with two outputs.

Local control using a symbol with one output

PE50415

DE51592

SFT2841: example of the logic input / output assignment of a

symbol with one output.

SEPED310017EN 257
 Control and monitoring Control matrix
functions

Description
The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and LEDs
to data produced by the protection functions, control logic and logic inputs.
Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected.
The matrix may also be used to display the alarms associated with the data.
It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined functions.
The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the
SFT2841 software tool.

Control matrix inputs

"Protection" button Meaning Comments
All application protection functions Protection tripping output and additional
outputs when applicable
"Inputs" button
Logic inputs I101 to I114 According to configuration If first MES120 module is configured
Logic inputs I201 to I214 According to configuration If second MES120 module is configured
"Equations" button Meaning Comments
V1 to V20 Logic equation editor outputs
"Logic" button Meaning Comments
Switchgear control
Closing Closing by switchgear control function By default on O3. Only available if switchgear
control is in circuit breaker mode

4
Tripping Tripping by switchgear control function Forced on O1, if switchgear control is in circuit
breaker mode
Inhibit closing Inhibition by switchgear control function By default on O2. Only available if switchgear
control is in circuit breaker mode
Contactor control Contactor control Forced on O1, if switchgear control is in circuit
breaker mode
Pick-up Logic OR of the instantaneous output of all
protection units with the exception of
protection units 38/49T, 48/51LR, 49RMS,
66.
Drop-out A protection unit time delay counter has not
yet gone back to 0.
Logic discrimination
Logic discrimination trip Tripping order sent by logic discrimination Only when logic discrimination function is used
function without switchgear control function
Blocking send 1 Sending of blocking signal to next Sepam By default on O102.
in logic discrimination chain 1
Blocking send 2 Sending of blocking signal to next Sepam By default on O103
in logic discrimination chain 2
Motor/generator control
Load shedding Sending of a load shedding order Motor application
Genset shutdown Sending of a prime mover shutdown order Generator application
De-excitation Sending of a de-excitation order Generator application
Recloser
Recloser in service The recloser is in service
Reclosing successful The recloser has successfuly reclosed Pulse type output
Permanent trip The circuit breaker is permanently open Pulse type output
after the reclosing cycles
Recloser ready The recloser is ready to operate
Recloser cycle 1 Cycle 1 in progress
Recloser cycle 2 Cycle 2 in progress
Recloser cycle 3 Cycle 3 in progress
Recloser cycle 4 Cycle 4 in progress
Closing by recloser A closing order is given by the recloser
"GOOSE" button Meaning Comments
Logic inputs G401 to G416 and G501 to G516 According to configuration Only with ACE850 configured

258 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Control matrix
functions

"Logic" button Meaning Comments

Diagnosis
TCS fault Trip circuit fault
CCS fault Closing circuit fault
TC / breaker position discrepancy Discrepancy between the last state ordered by the
remote monitoring and control system and the position
of the circuit breaker
Breaker monitoring A circuit breaker or contactor open or close order
has not been executed
Reverse phase rotation Reverse voltage rotation due to a wiring error
Additional-phase reverse rotation Reverse rotation of additional phase voltages due to a
wiring error
Disturbance recording inhibited Disturbance recording inhibited
Cumulative breaking current monitoring Overshooting of the cumulative breaking current set
point
Low battery fault Battery low or absent
MET148-2 No 1 fault Hardware problem on an MET 148-2 module
MET148-2 No 2 fault (module 1 or 2) or on an RTD
Watchdog Monitoring of Sepam operation Always on O5 if used
CT supervision
CT fault I current input CT fault
VT supervision
VT fault, phase channel V voltage input phase VT fault
VT fault, residual channel V0 voltage input residual VT fault
Synchro-check
Closing with synchro-check Circuit breaker close request with synchro-check by the
ANSI 25 function has been initiated
Switchgear control with synchro-check
function
4
Closing with synchro-check completed Breaker closing with synchro-check by the ANSI 25 Switchgear control with synchro-check
function successful function
Closing failed, out-of-sync Synchronism conditions too short to enable breaker Switchgear control with synchro-check
closing function
Closing failed, out-of-sync, cause dU Breaker closing inhibited because sources are out-of- Switchgear control with synchro-check
sync due to an excessive voltage difference function
Closing failed, out-of-sync, cause dPHI Breaker closing inhibited because sources are out-of- Switchgear control with synchro-check
sync due to an excessive phase difference function
Closing failed, out-of-sync, cause dF Breaker closing inhibited because sources are out-of- Switchgear control with synchro-check
sync due to an excessive frequency difference function
Stop closing with synchro-check A synchrochecked circuit breaker close request has Switchgear control with synchro-check
been interrupted function
Automatic transfer
Coupling closing with synchro-check failed The coupling close request initiated by automatic
transfer has failed because the sources are out-of-sync
Tripping by automatic transfer Breaker tripping initiated by automatic transfer (tripping
is performed by the switchgear control function)
Tripping by 2/3 or 1/2 logic Breaker tripping initiated by 2/3 or 1/2 logic (tripping is
performed by the switchgear control function)
NO circuit breaker closing Normally open circuit breaker close order for automatic
transfer function
Breaker closing ready Indication that breaker closing is possible to return to
normal operation
Coupling closing Coupling closing order for automatic transfer function
Coupling closing ready Indication that coupling closing is possible to return to
normal operation
Coupling tripping Coupling tripping order for automatic transfer function

SEPED310017EN 259
 Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions

Adaptation of the predefined control and Use

monitoring functions by the addition of This function may be used to configure simple logic functions by combining data
received from the protection functions, logic inputs, remote control orders or the
simple logic functions.
mimic-based UMI.
GOOSE logic inputs (Gx) available with the IEC 61850 protocol are not managed.
By using logic operators (AND, OR, XOR, NOT) and timers, new processing
operations and indications may be added to the existing ones.
The logic functions produce outputs that may be used:
b in the matrix to control output relays, switch on a LED or display new messages
b in the protection functions to create, for example, new inhibit or reset conditions
b in the main predefined control and monitoring functions to complete processing
operations or add new cases of tripping or genset shutdown, for example
b for mimic diagram animation.
DE81018

Logic function configuration

Logic functions are entered in text format in the SFT2841 equation editor. Each line
includes a logic operation, the result of which is assigned to a variable.
PE50460

Example:
V1 = P5051_2_3 OR I102.
The variable V1 is assigned the result of the logic OR operation involving the value
from protection function 50/51 and logic input I102.
The variables may be used for other operations or as outputs to produce actions in
the control matrix, protection functions or predefined control and monitoring
functions.
A program is a series of lines executed sequentially every 14 ms.
A data input assistance tool provides quick access to each of the equation editor
operators and variables.

Description of operations
Operators
SFT2841: logic equation editor. b =: assignment of a result
V2 = VL3 //V2 is assigned the value of VL3
b NOT: logic inversion
PE50461

VL1 = NOT VL2 // VL1 is assigned the opposite logic state of VL2
b OR: logic OR
V1 = VL3 OR I103 // V1 is assigned state 1 if VL3 or I03 are in state 1
b AND: logic AND
VV3 = VL2 AND VV1 // VV3 is assigned state 1 if VL2 and VV3 are in state 1
b XOR: exclusive OR
V3 = VL1 XOR VL2 // V3 is assigned state 1 if only one of the variables VL1 or VL2
is in state 1.
This is equivalent to V3 = (V1 AND (NOT V2)) OR (V2 AND (NOT V1))
b //: commentary
The characters on the right are not processed
b (,): the operations may be grouped between brackets to indicate the order in which
they are carried out
V1 = (VL3 OR VL2) AND I213.
SFT2841: data input assistance tool.

260 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions

Functions
b x = SR(y, z): bistable with priority to Set
x is set to 1 when y is equal to 1
x is set to 0 when z is equal to 1 (and y is equal to 0)
otherwise x is not changed.
V1 = SR(I104, I105) // I104 sets V1 to 1, I105 sets V1 to 0
b LATCH(x, y, …): latching of variables x, y, ...
The variables are maintained constantly at 1 after being initially set. They are reset
to 0 when Sepam is reset (reset button, external input or remote control order).
The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that
the user wishes to latch.
It applies to the entire program, whatever the position of LATCH in the program. For
easier reading, it is advisable to put it at the start of the program.
LATCH(V1, VL2, VV3) // V1, VL2 and VV3 are latched, ie. once they are set to 1,
only a Sepam reset can set them back to 0
b x = TON(y, t): "on" delay timer
The variable x goes to 1 t ms after variable y goes to 1.
DE50621

V1 = TON(I102.2000) // used to filter input I102 which must be present for

// 2 s to be taken into account in V1

x = TON(y, t).

b x = TOF(y, t): "off" delay timer.

The variable x goes to 0 t ms after variable y goes to 0).
4
DE50622

VL2 = TOF(VL1, 100) // VL2 stays at 1 for 100 ms after VL1

// goes back to 0
b x = PULSE(s, i, n): time-tagger
x = TOF(y, t). Used to generate n periodic pulses, separated by an interval i as of the starting time s
s is expressed in hours:minutes:seconds
i is expressed in hours:minutes:seconds
n is a whole number (n = -1: repeated until the end of the day).
V1 = PULSE (8:30:00, 1:0:0.4) will generate 4 pulses at 1-hour intervals
at 8 h 30, 9 h 30, 10 h 30 and 11 h 30. This will be repeated every 24 hours.
The pulses last for a 14 ms cycle. V1 is assigned the value of 1 during the cycle.
If necessary, V1 may be extended using the TOF, SR or LATCH functions.
Timer values
A timer editor is used to give a name and value to each timer. The name may then
be used in the TON and TOF functions. The timer value may therefore be adjusted
PE50160

without changing the program content.

V1 = TON (VL1, start) // start set to 200 ms in the timer editor.
Maximum number of functions
The number of time delays (TON, TOF) and time-taggers (PULSE) is globalized and
may not be more than 16.
There is no limitation for the SR and LATCH functions.

SFT2841: timer editor. Description of variables

b input variables: they come from the protection functions, logic inputs or predefined
control functions. They may only appear on the right of the = sign
b output variables: they are produced by the equation editor to generate actions in
the matrix, protection functions or predefined control functions
b local variables: they are intended for intermediary calculations and are not
available outside the logic equation editor.

SEPED310017EN 261
 Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions

Input variables
Type Syntax Example, meaning
Logic inputs Ixxx I101: input 1 of MES120 No 1 module
I212: input 12 of MES120 No 2 module
Protection function outputs Pnnnn_x_y P50/51_2_1: Protection 50/51, unit 2, delayed output.
nnnn: ANSI code The protection function output data numbers are given in the
x: unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the
y: data data input assistance tool.
Remote control orders TC1 to TC64 Pulse type value (duration of one 14 ms cycle) of remote control
orders received
Predefined control function outputs V_TRIPPED Tripping order present at switchgear control function output
V_CLOSE_INHIBITED Inhibit closing order present at switchgear control function output
V_CLOSED Closing order present at switchgear control function output
Phase rotation direction management functions output V_PHASE_DIR The phase rotation direction 123 command is active
V_PHASE_INV The phase rotation direction 132 command is active
V_PHASE_DISC The phase rotation direction commands are not complementary
after more than 2 s
Mimic-based UMI outputs V_MIMIC_OUT_1 to Variables that may be assigned to the mimic diagram symbol
V_MIMIC_OUT_16 outputs and that change values when control orders are
transmitted from the mimic-based UMI
V_MIMIC_LOCAL Position of the key on the mimic-based UMI
V_MIMIC_TEST,
V_MIMIC_REMOTE
Output variables
Type Syntax Example, meaning

4 Outputs to matrix
Protection function inputs
V1 to V20
Pnnnn_x_y
nnn: ANSI code
They may initiate LEDs, logic outputs or messages in the matrix.
P50N/51N_6_113: Protection 50N/51N, unit 6, inhibit order.
The protection function output data numbers are given in the
x: unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the
y: data data input assistance tool.
Predefined control function inputs V_TRIPCB Tripping of circuit breaker (contactor) by the switchgear control
function. Used to adapt tripping and recloser activation conditions.
V_INHIBCLOSE Inhibition of circuit breaker (contactor) closing by the switchgear
control function. Used to add circuit breaker (contactor) inhibit
closing conditions.
V_CLOSECB Closing of circuit breaker (contactor) by the switchgear control
function. Used to generate a circuit breaker (contactor) close order
based on a particular condition.
V_SHUTDOWN Shutdown of genset prime mover. Used to adapt cases of genset
shutdown
V_DE_EXCITATION Generator de-excitation
Used to adapt cases requiring generator de-excitation
V_FLAGREC Data saved in disturbance recording.
Used to save a specific logic state in addition to those already
present in disturbance recording.
V_RESET Sepam reset
V_CLEAR Clearing of alarms present
V_INHIBIT_RESET_LOCAL Inhibition of Sepam reset by UMI Reset key.
V_CLOSE_NOCTRL Breaking device closing enabled without synchro-check.
Used to adapt the Switchgear control function
V_TRANS_ON_FLT Automatic transfer order on fault.
Used to adapt automatic transfer
V_TRANS_STOP Stopping automatic transfer
Used to adapt automatic transfer
V_DLG_START Data log function activation
V_MSR_START Start an MSR
Local variables, constants
Type Syntax Example, meaning
Local variables stored VL1 to VL31 The values of these variables are saved in the event of an auxiliary
power outage and are restored when Sepam starts again.
Local variables not stored VV1 to VV31 The values of these variables are not saved in the event of an
auxiliary power outage. They are assigned the value of 0 when
Sepam starts.
Constants K_1, K_0 Value not modifiable
K_1: always 1
K_0: always 0

262 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions

Processing in the event of auxiliary power outage

All the variables, with the exception of the variables VVx, are saved in the event of a
Sepam auxiliary power outage. The states of the variables are restored when the
power is recovered, allowing the states produced by LATCH, SR or PULSE type
memory operators to be saved.
Special cases
b brackets must be used in expressions that comprise different OR, AND, XOR or
NOT operators:
v V1 = VL1 AND I12 OR P27/27S_1_1. // expression incorrect
v V1 = (VL1 AND I12) OR P27/27S_1_1. // expression correct
v V1 = VL1 OR I12 OR P27/27S_1_1. // expression correct
b protection input/output variables (Pnnn_x_y) may not be used in the LATCH
function
b function parameters may not be expressions:
v VL3 = TON ((V1 AND V3), 300) // expression incorrect
v VL4 = V1 AND V3
v VL3 = TON (VL4, 300) // correct.
Use limit
The number of operators and functions (OR, AND, XOR, NOT, =, TON, TOF, SR,
PULSE is limited to 200.

Examples of applications

4
b latching of recloser permanent trip signal
By default, this signal is of the pulse type at the recloser output. If required by
operating conditions, it may be latched as follows:
LATCH (V1) // V1 may be latched
V1 = P79_1_204 // recloser "permanent trip" output.
V1 may then control a LED or output relay in the matrix.
b latching of a LED without latching the protection function
Certain operating conditions call for the latching of indications on the front panel of
Sepam, without latching of the tripping output O1.
LATCH (V1, V2) // V1 and V2 may be latched
V1 = P50/51_1_1 OR P50/51_3_1 // tripping, units 1 and 3 of protection 50/51
V2 = P50/51_2_1 OR P50/51_4_1 // tripping, units 2 and 4 of protection 50/51
V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel LEDs.
b circuit breaker tripping if input I113 is present for more than 300 ms
V_TRIPCB = TON (I113, 300).
b live line work (example 1)
If work is underway with power on (indicated by input I205), the relay behavior is to
be changed as follows:
1 – circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous output of protection 50/51 unit 1 or
50N/51N unit 1 AND if input I205 is present:
V_TRIPCB = (P50/51_1_1 OR P50N/51N_1_1) AND I205
2 – Inhibit recloser:
P79_1_113 = I205
b live line work (example 2)
The user wishes to inhibit protection functions 50N/51N and 46 by an input I204:
P50N/51N_1_113 = I204
P46_1_113 = I204
b validation of a 50N/51N protection function by logic input I210
A 50N/51N protection function with a very low threshold must only initiate tripping of
the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input. The input comes from a relay which
gives a very accurate measurement of the neutral point current:
V_TRIPCB = P50N/51N_1_3 AND I210
b inhibition of circuit breaker closing if thermal alarm thresholds are overrun
The temperature protection function 38/49T supplies 16 alarm bits. If one of the first
three bits is activated (1 state), the user wishes to inhibit circuit breaker closing
V_INHIBCLOSE = P38/49T_1_10 OR P38/49T_2_10 OR P38/49T_3_10
b remote control order to inhibit protection 50/51 unit 1
VL1=SR(TC63,TC64) // TC63 set inhibition, TC64 reset inhibition
P50/51_1_113 = VL1 // VL1 is stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage.

SEPED310017EN 263
 Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Presentation
The reliability of a device is the property that allows its users to have well-placed
confidence in the service it delivers.
For a Sepam protection relay, operational reliability consists of ensuring the safety
and availability of the installation. This means avoiding the following 2 situations:
b Nuisance tripping of the protection
Continuity of the electrical power supply is as vital for a manufacturer as it is for an
electricity distribution company. Nuisance tripping caused by the protection can
result in considerable financial losses. This situation affects the availability of the
installation.
b Failure of the protection to trip
The consequences of a fault that is not eliminated can be catastrophic. For safety of
operation, the protection relay must detect faults in the power supply as quickly as
possible, using discrimination. This situation affects the safety of the installation.

Self-tests and monitoring functions

On initialization and cyclically during operation, Sepam runs a series of self-tests.
These self-tests are designed to detect any failure in its internal and external circuits
so as to ensure Sepam's reliability. These failures are classified into 2 categories,
major failures and minor failures:
b A major failure reaches the hardware resources used by the protection functions

4 (program memory and analog input for example).

This type of failure risks resulting in failure to trip on a fault or nuisance tripping. In
this case, Sepam must go into the fail-safe position as quickly as possible.
b A minor failure affects Sepam's peripheral functions (display, communication
except for ACE969-2 and ACE850).
This type of failure does not prevent Sepam from protecting the installation and
providing continuity of service. Sepam then operates in downgraded mode.
The classification of failures into 2 categories improves both safety and availability of
the installation.

The possibility of a Sepam major failure must be taken into account when selecting
the trip command type to maximize availability or safety of the installation (see
"Selecting the trip command" page 267).

In addition to the self-tests, the user can activate monitoring functions to improve the
installation monitoring:
b VT supervision (ANSI code 60FL)
b CT supervision (ANSI code 60)
b Trip circuit and closing circuit supervision (ANSI code 74).

264 SEPED310017EN
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Self-tests
The self-tests are run when Sepam is initialized and/or during its operation.

List of self-tests which place Sepam in the fail-safe position

Failures which have caused this are deemed to be major ones.
Function Test type Execution period
Power supply
Power supply presence During operation
CPU
Embedded software During operation
Processor On initialization and during operation
RAM memories On initialization and during operation
Program memory
Checksum On initialization and during operation
Parameter memory
Checksum On initialization
Analog inputs
Acquisition consistency During operation
Infinite gain During operation
Logic outputs
Relay driver On initialization and during operation

4
Connection
CCA630, CCA634, On initialization and during operation
CCA671
MES120 On initialization and during operation
E Connector (phase voltage On initialization and during operation
inputs, residual voltage and
current inputs)

List of self-tests which do not place Sepam in the fail-safe

position
Failures which have caused this are deemed to be minor ones.
Function Test type Execution period
UMI
Module presence On initialization and during operation
Memory On initialization
Software During operation
Analog output
Module presence On initialization and during operation
Temperature inputs
Module presence On initialization and during operation
Battery voltage
Minimum value During operation
check

SEPED310017EN 265
 Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Fail-safe position
When Sepam is in working order, it runs self-tests continuously. Detection of a major
failure places Sepam in the fail-safe position.

State of Sepam in the fail-safe position

b All the output relays are forced to the idle state
b All protection functions are inhibited
b The watchdog output indicates failure (output in the idle state)
b A red LED on the Sepam front panel is on and a diagnostic message appears on
the Sepam display unit (see "Local indication" page 252).

How Sepam deals with failures

b Minor failure: Sepam switches to downgraded operation.
The failure is indicated on the Sepam display unit and also by the communication.
DE80251

Relay output Sepam continues to protect the installation.

b Major failure: Sepam switches to the fail-safe position and attempts a restart
during which it again runs its self-tests. There are 2 possible scenarios:
v The internal failure is still present. It is a permanent failure. Intervention on Sepam
is required. Only removing the cause of the failure, followed by de-energizing and
Watchdog then energizing Sepam, will allow the unit to exit the fail-safe position.
Permanent internal failure. v The internal failure is no longer present. It is a transient failure. Sepam restarts so
that it can continue to protect the installation. Sepam has been in the fail-safe

4 position for 5 to 7 s.
DE80252

Relay output

Watchdog
5 to 7 seconds
Transient internal failure.

Limiting the number of transient failure detections

Relay output Each time a transient internal failure appears, Sepam increments an internal counter.
DE80253

The fifth time the failure occurs, Sepam is placed in the fail-safe position. De-
energizing Sepam reinitializes the failure counter. This mechanism can be used to
Watchdog avoid keeping a Sepam running that is subject to repeated transient failures.
Counter 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5
Sepam
de-energized
Repeated transient internal failures.

266 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Selecting the trip command and examples of

use
An analysis of the operational reliability of the whole installation should determine
whether availability or safety of this installation should be prioritized if Sepam is in the
fail-safe position. This information is used to determine the choice of trip command
as outlined in the table below.

NOTICE Selecting the trip command

RISK OF UNPROTECTED INSTALLATION Diagram Control Event Trip Advantage Disadvantage
Always connect the watchdog output to a 1 Shunt trip breaker Sepam failure or No Availability of Installation not
monitoring device when the selected trip or mechanical loss of the the installation protected until
command does not result in the installation latching contactor auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention (1)
tripping when Sepam fails.
2 Breaker with Sepam failure or Yes Safety of the Installation not
Failure to follow these instructions can result undervoltage trip loss of the installation available until
in equipment damage. coil (fail-safe) auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention

3 Breaker with Sepam failure No Availability of Installation not

undervoltage trip the installation protected until
coil (not fail-safe) remedial
intervention (1)
Loss of auxiliary Yes
power supply
Safety of the Installation not
installation available until
remedial
4
intervention
4 Contactor without Sepam failure or Yes Safety of the Installation not
coil latching loss of the installation available until
(permanent order) auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention
(1) It is essential to use the watchdog, see the warning notice opposite.

Example of use with shunt trip coil (diagram 1)

DE80254

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open

8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5

11
Closing O3 10

Setting the Sepam

N/O Shunt output parameters:
closing trip O1: N/O
coil coil O2: N/C
O3: N/O

SEPED310017EN 267
 Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Example of use with undervoltage trip coil with fail-safe

condition (diagram 2)
DE80255

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open

8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5

11
Closing O3 10

=0
Undervoltage Setting the Sepam output parameters:
trip O1: N/C

4
N/O
closing coil O2: N/C
coil O3: N/O

Example of use with undervoltage trip coil without fail-safe

condition (diagram 3)
DE80256

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open

8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5

11
Closing O3 10

=0
Setting the Sepam output parameters:
Undervoltage O1: N/O
N/O
trip O2: N/C
closing coil
coil O3: N/O

268 SEPED310017EN
 Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions

Example of use with contactor under permanent order

command (diagram 4)
DE80258

Breaker closed Breaker open

5 1 H 4 H
O1 4 2 I101 5 I102

Closing Trip

Contactor

18 H 17 H
13 13
(1) (1)
I107 I106
Shunt
trip coil

Setting the Sepam output parameters

O1: N/O
4
(1) Standard assignments, can be modified.

Using the watchdog

The watchdog is extremely important in the monitoring system, as it indicates to the
user that the Sepam protection functions are working correctly. When Sepam detects
an internal failure, an LED flashes automatically on the Sepam front panel regardless
of whether the watchdog output is connected correctly. If the watchdog output is not
correctly connected to the system, this LED is the only way of knowing that Sepam
has failed. We therefore strongly recommend connecting the watchdog output at the
highest level of the installation so that an effective alarm is generated when
necessary. For example, an audible alarm or flashing alarm lamp can be used to
warn the operator.

Watchdog output No failure detected Failure detected

status
Watchdog output The protection b The protection functions are not working.
connected correctly functions are b Sepam is in the fail-safe position.
to the control in working order b The Sepam alarm LED flashes.
system b The watchdog output activates a system
alarm.
b The operator is warned that he needs to
intervene.
Watchdog output The protection b The protection functions are not working.
not connected functions are b Sepam is in the fail-safe position.
in working order b The Sepam alarm LED flashes.
b The need of maintenance is detected only
if an operator controls the front panel of the
digital relay.

SEPED310017EN 269
4

270 SEPED310017EN
Modbus Communication Contents

Presentation 272
Managing the Modbus protocol 273
Configuring the communication interfaces 274
Serial line communication 274
Ethernet communication 276
Commissioning and diagnosis 280
Serial line communication 280
Ethernet communication 282
Data addresses and coding 287
Addresses in direct-access mode 289
Time-setting and synchronization 308
Time-tagged events 310
Transferring records 312
Access to remote settings 315
Customized table 317
Security 318
Reading Sepam identification 319
Appendix 1. Modbus protocol 320
Appendix 2. Function settings 325

SEPED310017EN 271
 Modbus communication Presentation

General
Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other
device with a master Modbus communication channel.
Sepam is always a slave station.

Sepam series 60 is equipped with:

b 1 port C1 (COM1) to connect the serial communication interfaces,
b 1 port F to connect the Ethernet communication interfaces.

The interfaces to connect Sepam to a single serial network are the following:
b ACE949-2, for connection to a 2-wire RS 485 network
b ACE959, for connection to a 4-wire RS 485 network
b ACE937, for connection to a fiber-optic star network

The interfaces to connect Sepam to 2 serial networks are the following:

b ACE969TP-2, for connection to:
v one 2-wire RS 485 Modbus S-LAN supervision communication network
v one 2-wire RS 485 E-LAN engineering communication network
b ACE969FO-2, for connection to:
v one fiber-optic Modbus S-LAN supervision communication network
v one 2-wire RS 485 E-LAN engineering communication network

The interfaces to connect Sepam to an Ethernet network are the following:

b ACE850TP for copper electrical connection to the network
b ACE850FO for optical connection to the network.

Accessing Sepam data

Data available
Modbus communication provides access to many different functions, including:

5
b reading of metering and diagnosis information
b reading of status conditions and remote indications
b transfer of time-tagged events
b transfer of files such as disturbance recordings and tripping contexts and, for
Sepam series 60, out-of-sync contexts, motor start reports, motor start trends and
data logs
b viewing of protection settings
b reading of Sepam configuration and identification
b remote control of the analog output
b time-setting and synchronization.
The actual list depends on the application, the type of Sepam and the enabled
functions.

Modbus communication also offers a number of additional functions (when enabled):

b transmission of remote controls
b modification of protection settings.
A password may be set up to protect access to these two functions.

Access modes
Depending on the data, two access modes are used:
b direct access - the data may be accessed directly in a single read or write
operation
b indirect access - access requires a number of read and write operations, using a
protocol that is specific to the data accessed.

Customized table
With Sepam, it is possible to set up for each Modbus port a customized sub-group of
data for quick reading of the most significant information on the user application.

Compatibility with Sepam 2000

Even though Sepam series 60 offers many additional functions, it remains
compatible with Sepam 2000 addresses and formats for most information.

272 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Managing the Modbus protocol

Protocol operation
Modbus is used to exchange information between a master and one or more slave
units, identified by a number. It implements request-reply dialog, where requests are
always initiated by the master. Modbus exists in ASCII and binary (RTU mode)
formats.

Data is exchanged in the form of 16-bit words (also called registers) or simply bits.
Each piece of information (bit or register) has a 16-bit address.

A detailed description of the protocol is provided in the appendix. It may also be found
at www.modbus.org.

Modbus functions
The Modbus protocol used by Sepam series 60 is a compatible sub-group of the RTU
Modbus protocol.
The functions listed below are handled by Sepam series 60:
b basic functions (data access):
v function 1: reading of n output or internal bits
v function 2: reading of n input bits
v function 3: reading of n output or internal words
v function 4: reading of n input words
v function 5: writing of 1 bit
v function 6: writing of 1 word
v function 7: high-speed reading of 8 bits
v function 15: writing of n bits
v function 16: writing of n words.
b communication-management functions:
v function 8: Modbus diagnosis
v function 11: reading of Modbus event counter

5
v function 43: sub-function 14: reading of identification.
b enhanced functions:
v function 102: secure access.

The following exception codes are supported:

b 1: unknown function code
b 2: incorrect address
b 3: incorrect data
b 4: not ready (cannot process request)
b 7: not acknowledged (remote reading and setting in particular).

Multi-master operation
Serial line Modbus operation
When Sepam units are connected via a gateway to a multiple-access network
(Ethernet, Modbus+, etc.), a number of masters may address the same unit via the
serial communication port.
The serial line Modbus protocol cannot manage this type of architecture. The
network designer is responsible for avoiding collisions.
b For direct-access data, in general, no particular precautions must be taken.
b For indirect-access data, Sepam provides two exchange zones, making possible
2 simultaneous, independent accesses by 2 different masters.

Modbus over TCP/IP operation

The ACE850 accepts up to 8 simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections.
Sepam accepts the Unit-Id 255 or any value in the range 1-247.
If several clients are accessing indirect-access data, they must make proper use of
the two exchange zones provided. No access synchronization is provided by Sepam
units.

Performance
The typical response time (time between the end of request reception and sending
the reply) is less than 10 milliseconds for 90% of exchanges.
It may occasionally be longer, but not exceed 150 ms.
In indirect mode, the time needed between the request (or an acknowledgment) and
the availability of the corresponding data is linked to the Sepam low-priority cycle
time and may vary from a few dozen to several hundred milliseconds.

SEPED310017EN 273
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Serial line communication

Access to configuration parameters

PE80776

The Sepam communication interfaces must be configured using SFT2841 software.

The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication
configuration window in the SFT2841 software.
To access this window:
b open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841
b check the COM1 box
b click on the relevant button : the Communication configuration window
appears
b select the type of interface used: ACE949/ACE959/ACE937, ACE969TP or
ACE969FO
b select the Modbus communication protocol.

The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface

selected: ACE949/ACE959/ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO. The table below
SFT2841: Sepam configuration screen.
specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface
chosen.

Parameters to be configured ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO

ACE959
ACE937
Physical layer parameters b b b
Fiber-optic parameters b
Advanced Modbus parameters b b b
E-LAN parameters b b

Configuring the physical layer of the Modbus

PE50561

port
Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format:

5 b 1 start bit
b 8 data bits
b 1 stop bit
b parity according to parameter setting.
The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1.
If a configuration with parity has been selected, each character will contain 11 bits:
1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit.
If a no parity configuration has been selected, each character will contain 10 bits:
1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit.

The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are as
follows:
b slave number (Sepam address)
b transmission speed
b parity check type.
Parameters Authorized values Default value
Sepam address 1 to 247 1
Speed 4800, 9600, 19200 19200 bps
or 38400 bps
Parity No parity, even Even
SFT2841: communication configuration window for ACE949. or odd

Configuring the ACE969FO-2 fiber-optic port

The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO-2 fiber-optic port is
completed with the following 2 parameters:
b link idle state: light-on or light-off
b echo mode: with or without.

Fiber-optic parameters Authorized values Default value

Link idle state Light Off or Light On Light Off
Echo mode Yes (fiber-optic ring) No
or No (fiber-optic star)

Note: in echo mode, the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the
slave's reply. The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo. Otherwise, it is impossible
to create a Modbus fiber-optic ring.

274 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Serial line communication

Configuring Modbus advanced parameters

PE50559

With Sepam series 60, remote controls and remote settings can be protected by a
password.
Advanced parameters can be used to configure the security function by:
b activating the function
b entering the password for the remote controls
b entering the password for the remote settings.

Advanced parameters Authorized values Default value

Security function On/Off Off
Remote controls password 4-digit code 0000
Remote settings password 4-digit code 0000

Modbus Advanced parameters window.

Configuring the physical layer of the

PE50560

ACE969-2 E-LAN port

The E-LAN port on the ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 communication interfaces is
a 2-wire RS 485 port.
The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E-LAN port are:
b Sepam address
b transmission speed
b parity check type.
The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1.
If a configuration with parity has been selected, each character will contain 11 bits:
1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit.
If a no parity configuration has been selected, each character will contain 10 bits:
1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit. 5
Parameters Authorized values Default value
Sepam address 1 to 247 1
Speed 4800, 9600, 19200 38400 bps
or 38400 bps
Parity No parity, even Odd
or odd

Configuration tips
Communication configuration window for ACE969FO. b The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the
communication network.
b You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration
parameters before connecting to the communication network.
b Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb
Sepam but will reset the communication port.

SEPED310017EN 275
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Ethernet communication

Access to configuration parameters

The Sepam communication interfaces must be configured using SFT2841 software.
The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication
PE80776

configuration window in the SFT2841 software.

To access this window:
b open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841
b select the Ethernet communication port
b click on the relevant button : the Communication configuration window
appears
b select the type of interface used: ACE850TP or ACE850FO.

Configuring an ACE850 involves:

b configuring the standard Ethernet parameters (mandatory)
b configuring one or more of the following sets of advanced optional parameters:
v SNMP: Ethernet network management
v SNTP: time synchronization
SFT2841: Sepam configuration screen. v IP filtering: access control
v RSTP: Ethernet ring management
v User accounts: access control.

Ethernet and TCP/IP configuration

Before configuring the ACE850, obtain a unique static IP address, subnet mask, and
PE80395

default gateway address from the network administrator. See the section on
IP address and parameter guidelines, page 279.
Parameters Description Authorized values
Frame format Used to select the format for data sent over
Ethernet II, 802.3, Auto
an Ethernet connection. Default: Ethernet II
Media type Used to define the physical Ethernet ACE850TP
connection. b 10T/100Tx Auto
b 10BaseT-HD

5 b 10BaseT-FD
b 100BaseTX-HD
b 100BaseTX-FD
Default: 10T/100Tx Auto
ACE850FO
b 100BaseFX-HD
b 100BaseFX-FD
Default: 100BaseFX-FD
IP address Used to enter the static IP address of the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
ACE850. Default: 169.254.0.10
Subnet mask Used to enter the subnet mask of your 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
network. Default: 255.255.0.0
Default gateway Used to enter the default gateway (router) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
IP address used for wide area network Default: 0.0.0.0
(WAN) communications.
SFT2841 : Ethernet and TCP/IP communication configuration Allow CID file to This option is irrelevant when only Modbus Default: not checked
screen. override IP communication is used.
parameters
Keep alive Timeout value used to test for session 1 to 60 seconds
disconnection. Default: 30 seconds
FTP session Timeout value used to force disconnection 30 to 900 seconds
inactivity timeout of an inactive FTP session Default: 30 seconds

Duplicate IP address detection

The ACE850 IP address must be unique in the network. If it is not unique, the Status
LED repeats a four blink-pause pattern and a new IP address must be assigned to
the ACE850 or to the conflicting device.

276 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Ethernet communication

SNMP configuration
The ACE850 supports SNMP V1, allowing a network administrator to remotely
access it with an SNMP manager and view the network status and diagnostics in
PE80396

the MIB2 format (only a subset of MIB2 is implemented).

Additionally, the ACE850 may be configured to send SNMP traps in the following
cases:
b ACE850 start/restart
b Link up
b Link down
b Authentication failure.

Parameters Description Authorized values

System Name This parameter is the same as the Sepam Not modifiable from this
label. screen.
System Contact Name of the administrative contact String (< 16 characters)
Default: empty string
SFT2841: SNMP configuration. System Location Location of the Sepam/ACE850 String (< 16 characters)
Default: empty string
Read-only SNMP community that has read-only String (< 16 characters)
Community Name access to the MIB. Acts as a password. Default: "public"
Read-write SNMP community that has read-write String (< 16 characters)
Community Name access to the MIB. Acts as a password. Default: "private"
Enable traps Checking this check box enables SNMP to Default: "not checked"
send traps.
Traps SNMP community that is used with traps. String (< 16 characters)
Community Name Default: "public"
Manager 1 IP IP address of the SNMP manager to which 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
address traps are sent. Default: 0.0.0.0
Manager 2 IP IP address of a second SNMP manager to 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
address which traps are sent. Default: 0.0.0.0

SNTP configuration
SNTP is a time synchronization protocol that can be used to synchronize the
5
Sepam. SNTP is used in mode 3-4 (unicast mode).
PE80397

b If SNTP is used, the synchronization source for Sepam must be defined as

Ethernet.
b If SNTP is not used, the Sepam synchronization must be ensured by other
means (Modbus frames, synchronization tops).

Parameters Description Authorized values

Enable SNTP Enables the time and date of the Sepam to Default: not enabled
be set by the Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP) server.
Time Zone Offset Determines the difference between local UTC-12 to UTC+14
time and Coordinated Universal Time Default: UTC
(UTC) (same as GMT).
Enable Daylight Enables the use of Daylight Saving Time Default: not enabled
Saving Time (Summer time).
SFT2841: SNTP configuration. DST offset Difference between standard time and + 30 or + 60 minutes
Daylight Saving Time. Default: + 60 minutes
DST starts If enabled, DST starts on the selected Default: last Sunday of
date. March
DST ends If enabled, DST ends on the selected date. Default: last Sunday of
October
Primary Server IP The IP address of the SNTP server the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Address ACE850 contacts to get the time Default: 0.0.0.0
message.
Secondary Server The IP address of another SNTP server 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
IP Address the ACE850 contacts in case the primary Default: 0.0.0.0
server is down.
Poll Interval Controls how often the ACE850 contacts 1 to 300 minutes
the SNTP server for the correct time. Default: 60 minutes

SEPED310017EN 277
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Ethernet communication

IP filtering configuration
The IP filtering function allows the administrator to specify which Modbus/TCP
clients and which IEC 61850 clients have access to the ACE850 services.
PE80398

Note: if IP filtering is enabled, access is forbidden to any client not in the filtered list.

Parameters Description Authorized values

Enable filtering Check this box to activate filtering based Default: not enabled
on IP addresses.
IP address The IP address of a client for which 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
filtering options are defined. Default: 0.0.0.0
IEC 61850 Check this box to grant IEC 61850 access Default: not checked
to the given IP address.
Modbus Check this box to grant Modbus/TCP Default: not checked
access to the given IP address.

SFT2841: IP filtering configuration.

RSTP configuration
The RSTP protocol enables the use of redundant Ethernet architectures such as
rings.
PE80399

It must be enabled each time the ACE850 is included in a loop. It may be disabled
in other cases.
Changing the default settings is normally not required and should be performed with
extreme care as it could jeopardize the stability of the Ethernet network.
If in doubt, it is always possible to revert to the default values using the Default
settings button.

5 Parameters
Enable RSTP
Description
Check this box to activate the use of the
RSTP protocol.
Authorized values
Default: enabled

RSTP bridge priority Priority of the RSTP bridge. The bridge 0 - 61440, by steps of 4096
with the lowest priority becomes root. Default: 61440
Hello time Amount of time between the transmission 1 to 10 seconds
of configuration messages Default: 2 seconds
SFT2841: RSTP configuration. Forward delay time Time value to control how fast a port 4 to 30 seconds
changes its spanning state when moving Default: 21 seconds
towards the forwarding state
Max age time Valid duration of configuration message 6 to 40 seconds
once sent by the root bridge Default: 40 seconds
Max transmit count Maximum BPDUs that can be transmitted 3 to 100
by the Port Transmit state machine in any Default: 32
Hello time. This value limits the maximum
transmission rate.
RSTP cost style RSTP (32 bits) or STP (16 bits) cost style Default: RSTP
selection
Note: RSTP parameters must verify the following relationships:
b 2 x (Forward_delay_time - 1 second) u Max_age_time
b Max_age_time u 2 x (Hello_time + 1 second).

278 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Configuring the communication
interfaces
Ethernet communication

User accounts configuration

ACE850 users are assigned usernames and passwords used to gain access to the
FTP or WEB servers. Each user belongs to a group which determines the user’s
PE80400

access rights:
b Administrator: read-write access to the FTP server, access to the WEB server
b Operator: read-only access to the FTP server, access to the WEB server
b Guest: no access to the FTP server, access to the WEB server

Up to 4 user accounts can be defined.

Parameters Description Authorized values

User control enable Check this box to enable the configuration Default: enabled
of users account. Currently, the ACE850
will not operate if this box is not checked.
Ensure that this box is always checked.
User n Check this box to create this user account. Default: user 1 enabled
Uncheck it to delete the account (only the Users 2 to 4 disabled
last account in the list can be deleted).
SFT2841: User accounts configuration. Name User name String (1 to 8 characters)
Password User password String (4 to 8 characters)
Group Group to which the user belongs Administrator, Operator,
Guest

The following account is always created by default as user 1:

b Name: Admin
b Password: ACE850
b Group: Administrator

IP address and parameter guidelines

IP addresses
Several configuration parameters are IP addresses. These addresses must follow 5
precise rules which are enforced by SFT2841 and ACE850. These rules are:
b Every IP address is made of 4 fields separated by dots: x . y . z . t
b Each field is a decimal value coded on 8 bits (range [0..255]).
b The first field (x) must be in the range [1..224] but must not be 127.
b Intermediate fields can cover the full range [0..255].
b The last field must not be 0 (range [0..255]).

IP subnet mask
The IP subnet mask is also made of 4 dot separated fields:
b The binary representation of the subnet mask is made of a set of 8 to 30
contiguous ones in the most significant part, followed by a set of contiguous zeroes
(255.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252).
b For a class A IP address (x y 126), the number of ones in the subnet mask must
be at least 8 (255.y.z.t).
b For a class B IP address (128 y x y 191), the number of ones in the subnet mask
must be at least 16 (255.255.z.t).
b For a class C IP address (192 y x y 223), the number of ones in the subnet mask
must be at least 24 (255.255.255.t).
b The subnet part of the device IP address, obtained when applying the subnet
mask, must not be 0.

IP default gateway
b An IP address of 0.0.0.0 means no gateway.
b If a gateway is defined, it must belong to the same subnet as the device.

SEPED310017EN 279
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Serial line communication

Installing the communication network

Preliminary study
According to the installation characteristics and constraints, a technical study must
first determine the communication network requirements, including:
b the type of medium (electrical or fiber optic)
b the number of Sepam units per network
b the transmission speed
b the ACE interfaces configuration
b the Sepam parameter settings.

Sepam operating instructions

Communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the
Installation chapter of this manual.

Preliminary checks
Perform the following:
b check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam
base unit
b check the ACE Modbus communication port connection
b check the complete configuration of the ACE
b for the ACE969, check the auxiliary power supply connection.

Checking the operation of the ACE interface

PE80777

You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly:
b the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE
b the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam:
v on the Diagnosis screen
v on the Communication configuration screens.

5 Link activity LED for ACE949-2, ACE959 and ACE937

The link activity LED for ACE949-2, ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when
Sepam transmission or reception is active.

Indicator LEDs on the ACE969

b green "on" LED: ACE969 energized
b red "key" LED: ACE969 interface status:
v LED off: ACE969 configured and communication operational
SFT2841: Sepam series 60 diagnosis screen. v LED flashing: ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured
v LED on: ACE969 error
b S-LAN and E-LAN Tx/Rx LEDs:
v Tx flashing: Sepam transmitting
v Rx flashing: Sepam receiving
v Tx and Rx off: RS 485 communication is idle
v Tx or Rx LED on while the RS485 communication network is idle: the idle state
voltage of the RS485 network is incorrect.

Diagnosis using SFT2841 software

PE80417

Sepam diagnosis screen

When connected to Sepam, the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the
general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular.
The Sepam diagnosis screen displays Sepam status information. You can get
detailed status information about each communication channel using buttons on the
screen.
Sepam communication diagnosis
The operator is provided with the following information to assist with identifying and
resolving communication problems:
b name of the protocol configured
b Modbus interface version number
SFT2841: Communication diagnosis. b number of valid frames received (CPT9)
b number of invalid (mistaken) frames received (CPT2).

280 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Serial line communication

Link activity LED Modbus diagnosis counters

The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by Counter definition
variations in the signal on the Modbus network. When Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters. These are:
the supervisor communicates with Sepam (during b CPT1: Number of valid frames received, whether the slave is involved or not
transmission or reception), these LEDs flash. b CPT2: Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error (frames with
After wiring, check the information given by the link more than 255 bytes, frames received with at least one parity, overrun, framing or
activity LEDs when the supervisor operates. line-break error)
Note: flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from b CPT3: Number of exception responses generated (even if not transmitted, due to
Sepam; it does not mean that the exchanges are valid. receipt of a broadcast request)
b CPT4: Number of frames specifically addressed to the station (excluding
broadcasting)
Functional test b CPT5: Number of valid broadcast frames received
If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link: b CPT6: Not significant
b run read/write cycles in the test zone b CPT7: Not significant
b use Modbus diagnosis function 8 (sub-code 0, echo b CPT8: Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical
mode). error (parity, overrun, framing or line break)
The Modbus frames below, transmitted or received by b CPT9: Number of valid requests received and correctly executed.
a supervisor, are an example of a test performed when
Counter reset
communication is implemented.
The counters are reset to 0:
Test zone b when they reach the maximum value FFFFh (65535)
Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B b when they are reset by a Modbus command (function 8)
Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 b when Sepam auxiliary power is lost
Write Transmission 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727 b when communication parameters are modified.
Reception 01 10 0C00 0001 0299 Using the counters
Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0001 B75A Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communications problems.
Reception 01 03 02 1234 B539 They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions (Modbus protocol functions
Function 8 - Modbus diagnosis, echo mode 8 and 11).
The CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841
Transmission 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C
("Sepam Diagnosis" screen).
Reception 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C
An incorrect speed (or parity) increments CPT2.
Even in echo mode, Sepam recalculates and checks
the CRC sent by the master:
Non-reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9.
5
b if the CRC received is valid, Sepam replies Operating anomalies
b if the CRC received is invalid, Sepam does not reply.
It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one.
Make sure that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking
the activity on the RS 232 - RS 485 converter or the fiber-optic converter if there is
one, and on the ACE module.
RS 485 network
b check the wiring on each ACE module
b check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module
b check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam
base unit
b check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at both
ends of the RS 485 network
b check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP-2
b check that the ACE909-2 or ACE919 converter used is connected, powered and
set up correctly.
Fiber-optic network
b check the connections on the ACE module
b check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam
base unit
b check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO-2
b check that the converter or fiber-optic star used is correctly connected, powered
and configured
b for a fiber-optic ring, check that the Modbus master can correctly handle the echo
of its requests.
In all cases
b check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841
b check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on SFT2841
("Sepam Diagnosis" screen).

SEPED310017EN 281
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Ethernet communication

Installing the Ethernet network

Preliminary study
According to the installation characteristics and constraints, a technical study must
first determine the Ethernet network requirements, including:
b the network topology
b the various subnets (if any) and their interconnections
b the IP addressing scheme

Sepam operating instructions

Communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the
instructions of the Installation chapter of this manual and with the instruction sheet
delivered with each ACE850 communication interface (reference BBV35290).

Preliminary checks
Perform the following actions:
b check the CCA614 cord connection between the ACE850 interface and the
Sepam base unit
b check the connection of the ACE850 to the Ethernet network
b check the auxiliary power supply connection
b check the complete configuration of the ACE850.

Checking the operation of the ACE850

interface
You can use the following to check that an ACE850 interface is operating correctly:
b the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE850
b the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam
b the Web pages embedded inside the ACE850.

5 Basic diagnostics
Diagnosis using indicator LEDs on the ACE850
DE80432

ACE850FO 1 1 On/fault indicator. This indicator has the following states:

2 b Off: the ACE850 interface is not powered
3 b steady red: the ACE850 is initializing or is faulty
4 b blinking red: the ACE850 is unable to establish communication with the Sepam
5 base unit, or the ACE850 is not properly configured
6
b steady green: the ACE850 is operating correctly
Sepam P2 P1
F C 100 100
S80 S40 BASE- FX BASE- FX
Tx Rx Tx Rx b fast blinking green: indicates a transient state which occurs at startup when IEC
61850 communication is also used
b steady green and blinking red: communication with the base unit has been lost.
This can indicate a normal situation due to a restart of the Sepam after parameters
have been downloaded. The ACE850 automatically resumes normal operation in a
ACE850 communication interface. few seconds.
This status can also indicate an error condition, in which case, ACE850 restarts
automatically within 15 seconds and try to re-establish connection.

2 Status indicator. This indicator has the following states:

b Off: the Ethernet communication is not started
b steady green: the Ethernet communication is correctly operating
b three blinks pattern: no logical Ethernet link
b four blinks pattern: duplicate IP address
b six blinks pattern: invalid IP configuration.

3 and 5 Speed indicators. These indicators have the following states:

b Off: the corresponding physical link is down or the port speed is 10Mbps
b On: the corresponding port operates at 100Mbps.

4 and 6 Link/Activity indicators. These indicators have the following states:

b Off: the corresponding physical link is not established
b On: the corresponding physical link is established
b blinking: the indicator blinks with the activity on the link.

282 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Ethernet communication

Diagnosis using SFT2841 software

When connected to Sepam, the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general
Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular.
PE80777

Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen on which buttons
can be used to obtain detailed status information on each communication channel.
The Sepam diagnosis screen can be used to check that the Sepam base unit and the
ACE850 interface are correctly connected:

PE80405

PE80406
Diagnosis screen detail: Diagnosis screen detail:
ACE850 not or improperly connected. ACE850 connected properly.

SFT2841: Sepam diagnosis screen.

The Ethernet diagnosis screen can be used to check:

b the ACE850 module status. The ACE850 status is OK if the ACE850 validates its
PE80402

configuration.
b the communication ports status
b the current ACE850 IP address. If the current IP address is different from the one
configured, this could mean that the configured address is not valid, unless the
IEC 61850 protocol is also being used.
PE80645

SFT2841: Ethernet diagnosis screen. 5

Advanced diagnostics using the embedded Web server
The advanced diagnostics feature is only available when it is possible to establish an
Ethernet connection with the ACE850. If not, the basic diagnostics must be used to
solve the problems.
Accessing the ACE850 Web server
1. Start your web browser (Internet explorer 6.0 or higher, Mozilla Firefox for
example).
PE80403

2. In the address text box, type the address of the ACE850 (169.254.0.10 is the
default), then press Enter.
3. In the login window, type your username and password (default is Admin,
ACE850).
4. From the left side menu, choose the language for the current session.
5. From the menu, click Diagnostics to access the diagnostics menu.
Diagnostics Web pages
There are two general diagnostics pages dealing with Ethernet operation:
b Ethernet global statistics
b Ethernet port statistics
There is also a set of protocol dedicated diagnostic pages:
b Modbus statistics
ACE850 home page. b IEC 61850 statistics (not covered in this manual)
b SNMP statistics
b SNTP statistics
b RSTP statistics
Diagnostic pages are automatically refreshed every 5 seconds (approximately).

SEPED310017EN 283
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Ethernet communication

Ethernet TCP/IP statistics

Item Description
Mac address Unique Ethernet hardware address of the ACE850
PE80404

Frame type Value of the frame type configured with SFT2841

TCP/IP parameters Parameter values configured with SFT2841
Frames received Total number of received Ethernet frames, regardless of port or
protocol
Frames transmitted Total number of transmitted Ethernet frames, regardless of port or
protocol
Reset Counters button Button to reset the Ethernet counters
ACE850 Ethernet TCP/IP statistics.
Ethernet port statistics
Item Description
Port P1/P2 buttons Selection of the port of which statistics are displayed
PE80407

Frames transmitted OK A counter that increments each time a frame is successfully

transmitted.
Collisions A counter that increments each time a frame is retransmitted due to
collision detection.
Excessive collisions A counter that increments each time a frame cannot be sent
because it has reached the maximum collision status based on the
Truncated Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm.
Carrier sense errors A counter that increments each time there is a collision because
carrier sense is disabled.
ACE850 Ethernet port statistics. Internal MAC Tx errors A counter that increments for every transmission error that is not
caused by late, excessive, or carrier sense collisions.
Link speed Actual link speed
Frames received OK A counter that increments each time a frame is successfully
received.
Alignment errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has an FCS
error and does not end on an 8-bit frame boundary.
CRC errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has a CRC

5
or an alignment error.
FCS errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has a FCS or
an alignment error.
Late collisions A counter that increments each time a collision occurs after the slot
time (512 bits starting at the preamble).
Reset counters button Button to reset the port counters

284 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Ethernet communication

Modbus/TCP server statistics

Item Description
Port status Modbus port status
PE80408

Opened TCP connections Number of Modbus clients currently connected

Received messages Total number of Modbus requests
Transmitted messages Total number of Modbus responses
Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters
Note: the Web interface uses one Modbus connection to operate.

ACE850 Modbus/TCP server statistics.

Modbus/TCP connections statistics
Item Description
Index Connection number
PPE80409

Remote IP IP address of the Modbus client

Remote port TCP port number on the client side
Local port TCP port number on the server side
Transmitted messages Number of Modbus requests for this connection
Received messages Number of Modbus normal responses for this connection
Sent errors Number of Modbus exception responses for this connection
Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters

ACE850 Modbus/TCP connections statistics.

SNMP statistics
Item
SNMP agent status
Description
Status of the SNMP agent 5
PE80410

Bad Community usages Number of requests with invalid community

Received messages Total number of SNMP requests
Transmitted messages Total number of SNMP responses
Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters

ACE850 SNMP statistics.

SEPED310017EN 285
 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Ethernet communication

SNTP statistics
Item Description
SNTP Client status Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841
PE80411

Active SNTP server IP address Address of the server currently answering SNTP requests
(0.0.0.0 if no server answer)
Poll interval Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841
Round trip delay Total time for SNMP request and response messages
Local offset Difference between SNTP time and ACE time
Daylight saving time Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841
Last Successful Time Last time the ACE850 successfully contacted the SNTP server
Synchronization (UTC) (UTC time)
Device Date and Time (UTC) Current time and date of the ACE850 (UTC time)
Device Date and Time (local) Current time and date of the ACE850 (local time)

ACE850 SNTP statistics.

RSTP bridge statistics

Item Description
Bridge status RSTP status of the bridge
PE80412

Bridge ID Bridge vector (Bridge priority/Bridge Mac address)

Designated Root ID Bridge vector of the RSTP root bridge
Designated Root Port Identifier of the root port (priority/number)
Rootpath cost Path cost to the root
Total topology changes Topology change counter (as defined by 802.1D-2004)
Configured hello time Value of the configured hello time

5 Learned hello time

Configured forward delay
Learned forward delay
Operational value for hello time
Reminder of the configured forward delay
Operational value for forward delay
Configured max age Value of the configured max age
Learned max age Operational value for max age

ACE850 RSTP bridge statistics.

RSTP port statistics

Item Description
Port P1 / P2 buttons Selection of the port of which statistics are displayed
PE80413

Status RSTP status for the selected port

Role RSTP role for the selected port
Priority Port priority
Port path cost Port contribution to root path cost
Designated port ID Identifier of the link partner port (priority/number)
Received RSTs Number of RST BPDUs received (RSTP)
Transmitted RSTs Number of RST BPDUs sent (RSTP)
Received configure Number of Configuration BPDUs received (STP)
Transmitted configure Number of Configuration BPDUs sent (STP)
Received TCNs Number of Topology change BPDUs received (STP)
Transmitted TCNs Number of Topology change BPDUs sent (STP)

ACE850 RSTP port statistics.

286 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Data addresses and coding

Presentation
Word addresses
All Sepam information accessible via Modbus communication is organized in 16-bit
words. Each word is identified by its address coded on 16 bits, i.e. from 0 to 65535
(FFFFh).
However, to remain compatible with older equipment, the essential information has
addresses coded from 0 to 9999 (270Fh).
In the following pages of this document, all addresses are expressed in hexadecimal
(xxxxh).
Data which is similar from the control-monitoring application and the coding
viewpoint is grouped in adjacent address zones.

Bit addresses
Some information is also available in bit form. The bit address is derived from the
word address, where:
bit address = (word address x 16) + bit rank (0 to 15).
Example: word 0C00 bit 0 = C000, word 0C00 bit 14 = C00E.

Non-defined addresses
Only the addresses defined in this document should be used.
If other addresses are used, Sepam may return an exception message or data that
is not significant.

Direct-access data
This data is permanently identified by its Modbus address. It may be accessed by a
single read or write operation, addressing a part of or the entire zone in question.

Indirect-access data
In this case, the Modbus addresses indicated make up an exchange zone occupied
by different data, depending on the context. At least two operations are required for
each exchange. The necessary protocol is indicated for each zone.
5
Data coding
Except where mentioned in the text, Sepam data is coded in one of the formats
below:
32-bit formats b 32S: 32-bit signed 2's complement value
For these data, the most-significant word is sent first. b 32NS: 32-bit non-signed value
Saturation b 16S: 16-bit signed 2's complement value
In all formats, if a datum overruns the maximum b 16NS: 16-bit non-signed value
permissible value for the related format, the value read b 16O: 16-bit signed value, coded with a shift of 8000h (-32768 is coded 0, 0 is coded
for the datum is the maximum permissible value for the 8000h, 32767 is coded FFFFh)
format. b B: bit or set of bits
The maximum value can also indicate a non-calculable b IEC: time coding format using four words as per IEC 60870-5-4:
value. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word 1 reserved year (0 to 99)
Word 2 0 0 0 0 month (1 to 12) 0 0 0 day (1 to 31)
Word 3 0 0 0 hour (0 to 23) 0 0 minute (0 to 59)
Word 4 millisecond (0 to 59999)
Bits set to 0 correspond to format fields not used by Sepam. They are always read as 0 and are
not taken into account during writing.
The reserved field is read as 0 and may receive different values during writing.

b ASCII: character string in ASCII code, the number of characters is indicated. When
ASCII strings do not completely fill the field, zero bytes are added. The order of
characters in Modbus words is the following:
v character n in the LSB position
v character n+1 in the MSB position
b MMmm: coding of a version number on 16 bits (major index in the MSB position,
minor index in LSB position)

For 16 and 32 bits values, the following letter may follow the format code:
b A: an out of range or not computable value is indicated by 7FFFh (16-bit) or
00007FFFh (32-bit)
b B: an out of range or not computable value is indicated by 7FFFFFFFh (32-bit)

SEPED310017EN 287
 Modbus communication Data addresses and coding

List of address zones

Starting Ending Access Access
address address mode type
Time management and Sepam (compatible with Sepam 2000)
Synchronization zone 0002 0005 direct word
Identification zone 0006 000F direct word
Event table (first table compatible with Sepam 2000)
First table 0040 0060 indirect word
Second table 0070 0090 indirect word
Application management
Application zone 0180 01BF direct word
Metering and diagnosis
32-bit metering and diagnosis 0200 02B1 direct word
16-bit metering and diagnosis 0300 0339 direct word
Directories
Disturbance recordings 0400 044F direct word
Tripping context 0480 0497 direct word
Out-of-sync context 0500 0507 direct word
Data log (DLG) 0600 067C direct word
Motor start report (MSR) 0680 06FC direct word
Motor start trend (MST) 0700 077C direct word
Test
Test zone 0C00 0C0F direct word / bit
Status conditions and controls (compatible with Sepam 2000)
Logic/GOOSE inputs and logic equations 0C10 0C19 direct word / bit
Logic outputs 0C20 0C23 direct word / bit
Analog-output control 0C30 0C30 direct word
Remote-control orders 0C84 0C8B direct word / bit

NOTICE Remote indications 0C8F 0C9E direct word / bit

5
First access zone to settings
RISK OF DATA CORRUPTION Read settings 2000 207C indirect word
When using an ACE850 communication interface Read request 2080 2080 indirect word
with IEC 61850 communication enabled, do not Remote setting 2100 217A indirect word
use the following address zones for Modbus/TCP First zone for recording-data transfer
(see the list address zone table): Selection 2200 2203 indirect word
b first access zone to settings Read 2300 237C indirect word
b first zone for recording-data transfer Customized table
Failure to follow these instructions can result Data table 2600 267C direct word
in equipment damage. Configuration table 2680 26FC direct word
Second access zone to settings (compatible with Sepam 2000)
Read settings D000 D07C indirect word
Read request D080 D080 indirect word
Remote setting D100 D17A indirect word
Second zone for recording-data transfer (compatible with Sepam 2000)
Selection D200 D203 indirect word
Read D300 D37C indirect word
Metering and miscellaneous for Sepam 2000 compatibility
Disturb. rec. identification zone D204 D210 direct word
Measurements x 1 FA00 FA2F direct word
Measurements x 10 FB00 FB24 direct word
Compact zone FB80 FB8F direct word
Configuration zone FC00 FC03 direct word

288 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Presentation
For each zone, the following data is provided:
b each Modbus address for the zone
b the Modbus function codes available for reading
b the Modbus function codes available for writing
b data formats, values and units
b whether the data can be included in a customized table ("config").
The indicated addresses are always word addresses. For bit access, the bit address
must be used (see above).

Synchronization zone
The synchronization zone is a data structure containing the absolute data and time
used by Sepam to time-tag its various recordings (events, disturbance recording,
etc.).
Synchronization zone Address Read Write Format Config.
Absolute time (year) 0002 3 16 IEC -
Absolute time (month + day) 0003 3 16 IEC -
Absolute time (hours + minutes) 0004 3 16 IEC -
The zone should be written in a single block containing Absolute time (milliseconds) 0005 3 16 IEC -
4 words, using function 16 (write word).
Identification zone
The identification zone contains system information pertaining to the identification
of the Sepam equipment.
Synchronization zone Address Read Write Value/ Config.
Format
Manufacturer identification 0006 3 - 0100 -
Equipment identification 0007 3 - 0 -
Marking + equipment type 0008 3 - 1300 -
Modbus version
Application technical level
version
0009
000A
000B
3
3
3
-
-
-
MMmm
1 to n
MMmm
-
-
-
5
Sepam check-word 000C 3 - idem 0C8F -
Summary zone 000D 3 - 0 (not mngd) -
Command 000E 3 16 0 (not mngd) -
Extension address 000F 3 - 180 -

This zone is provided to ensure compatibility with existing equipment. A more

complete description is available starting at address 0180 in the application zone or
using the identification read function.

SEPED310017EN 289
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Application zone
The application zone contains a set of information on the contents of Sepam. Some
of the information is reserved.
Application zone Address Read Write Format Config.
Reserved 0180 3 - - -
Reserved 0181 3 - - -
Reserved 0182 3 - - -
Application abbreviation 0183/0185 3 - ASCII 6c -
Application name 0186/018F 3 - ASCII 20c -
Sepam marking 0190/0199 3 - ASCII 20c -
Application version 019A/019C 3 - ASCII 6c -
Local-language name 019D/01A6 3 - ASCII 12c -
Technical level 01A7 3 - 16NS -
UV number 01A8 3 - 16NS -
Reserved 01A9 3 - - -
Reserved 01AA 3 - - -
Reserved 01AB 3 - - -
Reserved 01AC 3 - - -
Reserved 01AD 3 - - -
Reserved 01AE 3 - - -
Local-language version 01AF 3 - MMmm -
English-language version 01B0 3 - MMmm -
Boot version 01B1 3 - MMmm -
Base version 01B2 3 - MMmm -
Communication version 01B3 3 - MMmm -
DSM-module version 01B4/01B6 3 - ASCII 6c -
MET148-2 n° 1 module version 01B7/01B9 3 - ASCII 6c -
MET148-2 n° 2 module version 01BA/01BC 3 - ASCII 6c -
MSA141 module version 01BD/01BF 3 - ASCII 6c -

5
Reserved 01C0/01C2 3 - ASCII 6c -
Mimic-based UMI version 01C3/01C5 3 - ASCII 6c -
MCS025 module version 01C6/01C8 3 - ASCII 6c -
ACE969 COM1 module version 01C9/01CB 3 - ASCII 6c -
ACE969 COM2 module version 01CC/01CE 3 - ASCII 6c -
ACE850 module version 01CF/01D1 3 - ASCII 6c -

290 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

32-bit metering and diagnosis zone

This zone contains all Sepam metering and diagnosis information, coded on 32 bits.
Zone size exceeds the capacity of a frame, i.e. at least two requests are required to
read it in full. Depending on the application and the parameter settings, some
information is not significant.
32-bit metering and diagnosis Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
zone
Phase current I1 0200/0201 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Phase current I2 0202/0203 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Phase current I3 0204/0205 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Residual current I0Σ 0206/0207 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Residual current I0 0208/0209 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Demand current Im1 020A/020B 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Demand current Im2 020C/020D 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Demand current Im3 020E/020F 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Peak demand current IM1 0210/0211 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Peak demand current IM2 0212/0213 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Peak demand current IM3 0214/0215 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Phase-to-phase voltage U21 0216/0217 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Phase-to-phase voltage U32 0218/0219 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Phase-to-phase voltage U13 021A/021B 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1 021C/021D 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V2 021E/021F 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V3 0220/0221 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Residual voltage V0 0222/0223 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Positive sequence voltage Vd 0224/0225 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Negative-sequence voltage Vi 0226/0227 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Frequency f 0228/0229 3, 4 - 32NSA 0.01 Hz yes
Active power P 022A/022B 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kW yes

5
Reactive power Q 022C/022D 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kvar yes
Apparent power S 022E/022F 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kVA yes
Power factor cos ϕ 0230/0231 3, 4 - 32SA 0.01 yes
Peak demand active power PM 0232/0233 3, 4 - 32S 0.1 kW yes
Peak demand reactive power QM 0234/0235 3, 4 - 32S 0.1 kvar yes
Active power P phase 1 0236/0237 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kW yes
Active power P phase 2 0238/0239 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kW yes
Active power P phase 3 023A/023B 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kW yes
Reactive power Q phase 1 023C/023D 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kvar yes
Reactive power Q phase 2 023E/023F 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kvar yes
Reactive power Q phase 3 0240/0241 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kvar yes
Apparent power S phase 1 0242/0243 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kVA yes
Apparent power S phase 2 0244/0245 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kVA yes
Apparent power S phase 3 0246/0247 3, 4 - 32SB 0.1 kVA yes
Positive active energy Ea+ 0248/0249 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kWh yes
Negative active energy Ea- 024A/024B 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kWh yes
Positive reactive energy Er+ 024C/024D 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kvarh yes
Negative reactive energy Er- 024E/024F 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kvarh yes
Ext. positive active energy Ea+ 0250/0251 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kWh yes
Ext. negative active energy Ea- 0252/0253 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kWh yes
Ext. positive reactive energy Er+ 0254/0255 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kvarh yes
Ext. negative reactive energy Er- 0256/0257 3, 4 - 32NS 100 kvarh yes
Neutral-point voltage Vnt 0258/0259 3, 4 - 32NS 1V yes
Reserved 025A/025F 3, 4 - - - yes

SEPED310017EN 291
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

32-bit metering and diagnosis zone (cont.)

32-bit metering and diagnosis Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
zone
Reserved 0260/0267 3, 4 - - - yes
Number of operations 0268/0269 3, 4 - 32NS 1 yes
Tripping current phase 1 Itrip1 026A/026B 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Tripping current phase 2 Itrip2 026C/026D 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Tripping current phase 3 Itrip3 026E/026F 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Tripping current calculated I0 Itrip0 0270/0271 3, 4 - 32NS 0.1 A yes
Reserved 0272/027B 3, 4 - - - yes
Number of operations 027C/027D 3, 4 - 32NS 1 yes
Reserved 027E/027F 3, 4 - - - yes
Reserved 0280/0289 3, 4 - - - yes
Impedance Zd 028A/028B 3, 4 - 32NSB 1 mΩ yes
Impedance Z21 028C/028D 3, 4 - 32NSB 1 mΩ yes
Impedance Z32 028E/028F 3, 4 - 32NSB 1 mΩ yes
Impedance Z13 0290/0291 3, 4 - 32NSB 1 mΩ yes
Reserved 0292/029F 3, 4 - - - yes
Reserved 02A0/02A5 3, 4 - - - yes
Voltage difference dU 02A6/02A7 3, 4 - 32NSB 0,1 % of yes
(synchro-check) Uns Sync1
Frequency difference df 02A8/02A9 3, 4 - 32NSA 0.001 Hz yes
(synchro-check)
Phase difference dPhi 02AA/02AB 3, 4 - 32NSA 0.1° yes
(synchro-check)
Capacitor capacitance C1 02AC/02AD 3, 4 - 32NSB 0.1 μF yes
(or C21)
Capacitor capacitance C2 02AE/02AF 3, 4 - 32NSB 0.1 μF yes
(or C32)
Capacitor capacitance C3 02B0/02B1 3, 4 - 32NSB 0.1 μF yes
(or C13)

5 Effective rotation direction

Reserved
02B2/02B3

02B4/02FF
3, 4

-
- 32NSB 0=123 ou yes
1=132

292 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

16-bit metering and diagnosis zone

This zone contains all Sepam metering and diagnosis information, coded on 16 bits.
Depending on the application and the parameter settings, some information is not
significant.
16-bit metering and diagnosis zone Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Temperature 1 MET148-2 n° 1 0300 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 2 MET148-2 n° 1 0301 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 3 MET148-2 n° 1 0302 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 4 MET148-2 n° 1 0303 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 5 MET148-2 n° 1 0304 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 6 MET148-2 n° 1 0305 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 7 MET148-2 n° 1 0306 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 8 MET148-2 n° 1 0307 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 1 MET148-2 n° 2 0308 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 2 MET148-2 n° 2 0309 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 3 MET148-2 n° 2 030A 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 4 MET148-2 n° 2 030B 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 5 MET148-2 n° 2 030C 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 6 MET148-2 n° 2 030D 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 7 MET148-2 n° 2 030E 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Temperature 8 MET148-2 n° 2 030F 3, 4 - 16SA 1°C yes
Total harmonic distortion Uthd 0310 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1% yes
Total harmonic distortion Ithd 0311 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1% yes
Angle ϕ0Σ 0312 3, 4 - 16NSA 1° yes
Reserved 0313 3, 4 - - - yes
Angle ϕ0 0314 3, 4 - 16NSA 1° yes
Reserved 0315 3, 4 - - - yes
Angle ϕ1 0316 3, 4 - 16NSA 1° yes
Angle ϕ2 0317 3, 4 - 16NSA 1° yes

5
Angle ϕ3 0318 3, 4 - 16NSA 1° yes
Negative sequence / unbalance 0319 3, 4 - 16NS % Ib yes
Reserved 031A 3, 4 - - - yes
Machine rotation speed 031B 3, 4 - 16NS rpm yes
Thermal capacity used 031C 3, 4 - 16NS % yes
Running hours counter 031D 3, 4 - 16NS 1 hr yes
Time before tripping 031E 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min yes
Time before closing 031F 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min yes
Starting time / overload 0320 3, 4 - 16NS 0.01 s yes
Start inhibit time 0321 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min yes
Number of starts allowed 0322 3, 4 - 16NS 1 yes
Learnt cooling time constant T2 (49 RMS) 0323 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min yes
thermal rate 1
Learnt cooling time constant T2 (49 RMS) 0324 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min yes
thermal rate 2
Total cumulative breaking current 0325 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Cumulative breaking current (0 < I < 2 In) 0326 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Cum. breaking current (2 In < I < 5 In) 0327 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Cum. breaking current (5 In < I< 10 In) 0328 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Cum. breaking current (10 In < I < 40 In) 0329 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Cumulative breaking current (I > 40 In) 032A 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
Initial value of cumulative breaking 032B 3, 4 - 16NS 1(kA)² yes
current
Starting/overload current 032C 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Operating time 032D 3, 4 - 16NS 1 ms yes
Charging time 032E 3, 4 - 16NSA 1s yes
Number of racking out operations 032F 3, 4 - 16NS 1 yes
Reserved 0330 3, 4 - - - yes
Number of trips on phase current 0331 3, 4 - 16NS 1 yes
Number of trips on earth-fault current 0332 3, 4 - 16NS 1 yes
Reserved 0333/0339 3, 4 - - - yes

SEPED310017EN 293
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Directory zones
These zones indicate the recordings available in Sepam for the given data category.
They have a similar structure.

Disturbance-recording directory
Disturbance-recording directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Size of set-up files 0400 3 - 16NS bytes -
Size of data files 0401/0402 3 - 32NS bytes -
Number of records available 0403 3 - 16NS 1 -
Date of record 1 (most recent) 0404/0407 3 - IEC - -
Date of record 2 0408/040B 3 - IEC - -
... ... ... ...
Date of record 20 (oldest) 044C/044F 3 - IEC - -

Tripping-context directory
Context directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Context size 0480 3 - 16NS bytes -
Not used 0481/0482 3 - - - -
Number of records available 0483 3 - 16NS 1 -
Date of record 1 (most recent) 0484/0487 3 - IEC - -
Date of record 2 0488/048B 3 - IEC - -
... ... ... ...
Date of record 5 (least recent) 0494/0497 3 - IEC - -

Out-of-sync context directory

Context directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Context size 0500 3 - 16NS bytes -
Not used 0501/0502 3 - - - -
Number of records available 0503 3 - 16NS 1 -

5
Date of record 0504 3 - IEC - -

Data log (DLG) directory

Context directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Number of files available 0600 3 - 16NS 1 -
Size of configuration file for all files 0601 3 - 16NS bytes -
Size of data file 1 (most recent) 0602/0603 3 - 32NS bytes -
Size of data file 2 0604/0605 3 - 32NS bytes -
... ... ... ...
Size of data file 20 (oldest) 0628/0629 3 - 32NS bytes -
Date of file 1 (most recent) 062A/062D 3 - IEC - -
Date of file 2 062E/0631 3 - IEC - -
... ... ... ...
Date of file 20 (oldest) 0676/0679 3 - IEC - -
Not used 067A/067C 3 - - - -

294 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Directory zones (cont.)

Motor start report (MSR) directory
Context directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Number of files available 0680 3 - 16NS 1 -
Size of configuration file for all files 0681 3 - 16NS bytes -
Size of data file 1 (most recent) 0682/0683 3 - 32NS bytes -
Size of data file 2 0684/0685 3 - 32NS bytes -
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Size of data file 20 (oldest) 06A8/06A9 3 - 32NS bytes -
Date of file 1 (most recent) 06AA/06AD 3 - IEC - -
Date of file 2 06AE/06B1 3 - IEC - -
... ... ... ... ... ...
Date of file 20 (oldest) 06F6/06F9 3 - IEC - -
Not used 06FA/06FC 3 - - - -

Motor start trend (MST) directory

Context directory Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Number of files available 0700 3 - 16NS 1 -
Size of configuration file for all files 0701 3 - 16NS bytes -
Size of all files 0702/0703 3 - 32NS bytes -
Not used 0704/0729 3 - - - -
Date of file 1 (most recent) 072A/072D 3 - IEC - -
Date of file 2 072E/0731 3 - IEC - -
... ... ... ...
Date of file 20 (oldest) 0776/0779 3 - IEC - -
Not used 077A/077C 3 - - - -

Test zone
The test zone is a 16-word zone that may be accessed via the communication link
by all functions, in both read and write modes, to facilitate communication testing at
5
the time of commissioning or to test the link.
These words are set to zero when Sepam starts.
Test zone Address Bit addresses Read Write Config.
Test word 1 0C00 C000/C00F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 -
Test word 2 0C01 C010/C01F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 -
... ... ... ... ...
Test word 16 0C0F C0F0/C0FF 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 -

SEPED310017EN 295
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Status-condition and control zones

Logic input / logic equation / GOOSE inputs zone
Input / equation zone Address Bit addresses Read Write Format Config.
Logic inputs 0C10 C100/C10F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
I101 to I114 (MES120 n° 1)
Logic inputs 0C11 C110/C11F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
I201 to I214 (MES120 n° 2)
Reserved 0C12 C120/C12F - - - yes
Logic equation bits 0C13 C130/C13F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
(1st word)
Logic equation bits 0C14 C140/C14F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
(2nd word)
Logic equation bits 0C15 C150/C15F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
(3rd word)
Logic equation bits 0C16 C160/C16F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
(4th word)
GOOSE inputs 0C17 C170/C18F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
G401 to G416 (1st word)
GOOSE inputs 0C18 C180/C18F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
G501 to G516 (2nd word)
States of GOOSE emissions 0C19 C191/C193 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
tests

Bits of logic inputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - Ix14 Ix13 Ix12 Ix11 Ix10 Ix09 Ix08 Ix07 Ix06 Ix05 Ix04 Ix03 Ix02 Ix01

Logic equation bits

1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word
0C13 0C14 0C15 0C16

5
Bit 00 V1 V17 V_TRIP_STP3 V_MIMIC_IN_9
Bit 01 V2 V18 V_TRIP_STP4 V_MIMIC_IN_10
Bit 02 V3 V19 V_CLOSE_STP1 V_MIMIC_IN_11
Bit 03 V4 V20 V_CLOSE_STP2 V_MIMIC_IN_12
Bit 04 V5 V_INHIBCLOSE V_CLOSE_STP3 V_MIMIC_IN_13
Bit 05 V6 V_FLAGREC V_CLOSE_STP4 V_MIMIC_IN_14
Bit 06 V7 V_TRIPCB V_TRANS_ON_FLT V_MIMIC_IN_15
Bit 07 V8 V_CLOSECB V_TRANS_STOP V_MIMIC_IN_16
Bit 08 V9 V_RESET V_MIMIC_IN_1 V_TRANS_V_EN
Bit 09 V10 V_CLEAR V_MIMIC_IN_2 V_MSR_START
Bit 10 V11 V_INHIBIT_RESET_LOCAL V_MIMIC_IN_3 V_DLG_START
Bit 11 V12 V_SHUTDOWN V_MIMIC_IN_4 Reserved
Bit 12 V13 V_DE-EXCITATION V_MIMIC_IN_5 Reserved
Bit 13 V14 V_CLOSE_NOCTRL V_MIMIC_IN_6 Reserved
Bit 14 V15 V_TRIP_STP1 V_MIMIC_IN_7 Reserved
Bit 15 V16 V_TRIP_STP2 V_MIMIC_IN_8 Reserved

GOOSE input bits and status bits of GOOSE emission tests

GOOSE Inputs Status bits of GOOSE emission tests
1st word 2nd word OC19
0C17 0C18
Bit 00 G401 G501 GOOSE test n°1
Bit 01 G402 G502 GOOSE test n°2
Bit 02 G403 G503 GOOSE test n°3
Bit 03 G404 G504 GOOSE test n°4
Bit 04 G405 G505 Reserved
Bit 05 G406 G506 Reserved
Bit 06 G407 G507 Reserved
Bit 07 G408 G508 Reserved
Bit 08 G409 G509 Reserved
Bit 09 G410 G510 Reserved
Bit 10 G411 G511 Reserved
Bit 11 G412 G512 Reserved
Bit 12 G413 G513 Reserved
Bit 13 G414 G514 Reserved
Bit 14 G415 G515 Reserved
Bit 15 G416 G516 Reserved

296 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Logic-output zone
This zone indicates the status of the logic outputs and the LEDs on the front panel.
Logic-output zone Address Bit addresses Read Write Format Config.
Logic outputs 0C20 C200/C10F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
O1 to O3 and O5 (base)
Logic outputs 0C21 C210/C21F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
O101 to O106 (MES120 n° 1)
Logic outputs 0C22 C220/C22F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
O201 to O206 (MES120 n° 2)
Reserved 0C23 C230/C23F - - - yes
LED status 0C24 C240/C24F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes

Bits of logic outputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - - - - - - - O5 - O3 O2 O1

Bits of LEDs
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - - L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LD
LD: red "Sepam unavailable" LED.

Analog-output control zone

Analog-output zone Address Read Write Format Config.
MSA141 0C30 3 6, 16 16S/16NS (1) -
(1) As per MSA141 parameter settings (option).
Remote control of the analog output
The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set
up for remote control via the Modbus communication
link.
The usable range of the numerical value transmitted is
defined by the "min. value" and "max. value" settings of
the analog output (SFT2841). 5

SEPED310017EN 297
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Remote-control zone
Remote-control zone Address Bit addresses Read Write Format Config.
STC1 to STC16 0C84 C840/C84F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
STC17 to STC32 0C85 C850/C85F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
STC33 to STC48 0C86 C860/C86F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
STC49 to STC64 0C87 C870/C87F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
TC1 to TC16 0C88 C880/C88F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
TC17 to TC32 0C89 C890/C89F 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
TC33 to TC48 0C8A C8A0/C8AF 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -
TC49 to TC64 0C8B C8B0/C8BF 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 15, 16 B -

Use of remote-control orders

64 bits of pulse-type remote-control orders (TC) are available on Sepam series 60.
According to the configuration chosen, the TC can be executed in either of the
following modes:
b direct mode
b confirmed SBO (Select Before Operate) mode

Remote-control orders in direct mode

The remote-control order is executed when it is written in the remote-control word.
The program logic resets it to zero after the remote-control order is acknowledged.

Remote-control orders (TC) in confirmed SBO mode

Remote-control orders involve two steps:
b selection by the master of the order to be sent by writing the bit in the STC word
and checking of the selection by rereading the word
b execution of the order to be sent by writing the bit in the TC word.
The remote-control order is executed if the bit in the STC word and the bit in the
associated TC word are set. The program logic resets the STC and TC bits to zero

5 after the remote-control order is acknowledged.

Deselection of the STC bit takes place:
b if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word
b if the master selects (write bit) a bit other than the one already selected
b if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not match the selection. In this
The choice between direct mode or confirmed SBO
case, no remote-control order is executed.
mode for remote control orders is made in the Sepam b if the related order is not given within 30 seconds.
General characteristics configuration screen. This is a
global parameter that applies to:
Inhibiting predefined remote-control orders
b COM1 Sepam communication port,
Predefined processing of remote-control orders may be inhibited, except for the
b Ethernet communication port.
tripping remote-control order TC1 which may be activated at any time:
b by choosing Local or Test control mode via the key-switch on Sepam relays with
mimic-based UMIs
b by assigning a logic input to the "Inhibit remote control" function.
The parameter setting of the logic input may be done in two modes:
b inhibition if the input is set to 1
b inhibition if the input is set to 0 (negative input).

Security
It is possible to protect the remote-control zone against writing, see the section on
security.

298 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Remote-control zone (cont'd)

Pulse-type remote-control orders are pre-assigned to protection, control and
metering functions.
The assignment of the remote-control orders is given in the tables below.
Depending on the applications and functions in operation, certain remote-control
orders may not be applicable and will produce no effect.
If the switchgear function is enabled (or running), the following remote-control orders
are acknowledged:
b device tripping and closing
b recloser enabling and disabling.
The corresponding value for Sepam 2000 is indicated. This value corresponds to the
address, not the role (roles are not static in Sepam 2000).
Word 0C88: TC1 to TC16 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TC1 Trip / open KTC33
Bit 01: TC2 Closing KTC34
Bit 02: TC3 Sepam reset KTC35
Bit 03: TC4 Peak demand current reset KTC36
Bit 04: TC5 Peak demand power reset KTC37
Bit 05: TC6 Reserved KTC38
Bit 06: TC7 Reserved KTC39
Bit 07: TC8 Enable recloser KTC40
Bit 08: TC9 Disable recloser KTC41
Bit 09: TC10 Free KTC42
Bit 10: TC11 Free KTC43
Bit 11: TC12 Free KTC44
Bit 12: TC13 Free KTC45
Bit 13: TC14 Free KTC46
Bit 14: TC15 Free KTC47
Bit 15: TC16 Free KTC48

5
Word 0C89: TC17 to TC32 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TC17 Reserved KTC49
Bit 01: TC18 Inhibit disturbance-recording triggering (OPG) KTC50
Bit 02: TC19 Confirm disturbance-recording triggering (OPG) KTC51
Bit 03: TC20 Manual disturbance-recording triggering (OPG) KTC52
Bit 04: TC21 Free KTC53
to
Bit 12: TC29 Free KTC61
Bit 13: TC30 Inhibit thermal protection KTC62
Bit 14: TC31 Confirm thermal protection KTC63
Bit 15: TC32 Reset undercurrent protection KTC64
Word 0C8A: TC33 to TC48 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TC33 Switching to setting group A -
Bit 01: TC34 Switching to setting group B -
Bit 02: TC35 Priority group shutdown -
Bit 03: TC36 Cancel priority group shutdown
Bit 04: TC37 Enable synchro-check -
Bit 05: TC38 Disable synchro-check -
Bit 06: TC39 Enable voltage check -
Bit 07: TC40 Disable voltage check -
Bit 08: TC41 Reserved -
Bit 09: TC42 Reserved -
Bit 10: TC43 Reserved -
Bit 11: TC44 Reserved -
Bit 12: TC45 Reserved -
Bit 13: TC46 Reserved -
Bit 14: TC47 Reserved -
Bit 15: TC48 Reserved -

SEPED310017EN 299
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Zone télécommandes (cont.)

Word 0C8B: TC49 to TC64 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TC49 Inhibit TS8 (Inductive) and TS9 (Capacitive) -
Bit 01: TC50 Confirm TS8 (Inductive) and TS9 (Capacitive) -
Bit 02: TC51 Trigger Motor start report -
Bit 03: TC52 Trigger data log -
Bit 04: TC53 Stop data log (Circular mode) -
Bit 05: TC54 123 phase rotation direction -
Bit 06: TC55 132 phase rotation direction -
Bit 07: TC56 Free -
to
Bit 15: TC64 Free -

300 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Remote-indications zone
Remote-indications Address Bit addresses Read Write Format Config.
zone
Sepam check-word 0C8F C8F0/C8FF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS1-TS16 0C90 C900/C90F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS17-TS32 0C91 C910/C91F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS33-TS48 0C92 C920/C92F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS49-TS64 0C93 C930/C93F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS65-TS80 0C94 C940/C94F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS81-TS96 0C95 C950/C95F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS97-TS112 0C96 C960/C96F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS113-TS128 0C97 C970/C97F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS129-TS144 0C98 C980/C98F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS145-TS160 0C99 C990/C99F 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS161-TS176 0C9A C9A0/C9AF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS177-TS192 0C9B C9B0/C9BF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS193-TS208 0C9C C9C0/C9CF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS209-TS224 0C9D C9D0/C9DF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes
TS225-TS240 0C9E C9E0/C9EF 1, 2, 3, 4 - B yes

The check work comprises a set of information on Sepam status.

The "high-speed reading" function (function 7) is used to access the most-significant
byte in the check word (bits 15 to 8).
Word 0C8F: Sepam check-word Notes
Bit 00 Reserved
Bit 01 Modbus Security function enabled (1)

Bit 02 Reserved
Bit 03 Sepam in “data loss” status in 2nd event zone (1) (2)

Bit 04 Event in 2nd event zone (1)

Bit 05 Setting group A in service (2)

Bit 06
Bit 07
Setting group B in service
Sepam time not correct
(2)

(2)

(2)
5
Bit 08 Sepam partial fault
Bit 09 Sepam major fault
Bit 10 Sepam in parameter setting mode (2)

Bit 11 Remote setting inhibited

Bit 12 Inductive network (1)/capacitive (0)
Bit 13 Sepam not synchronous (2)

Bit 14 Sepam in “data loss” status in 1st event zone (1) (2)

Bit 15 Event in 1st event zone (1)

(1) This information is specific to each communication port.

(2) Status changes of bits 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14 trigger sending of a time-tagged event (see the
section on time-tagged events).

Remote-indication bits (TS) are pre-assigned to protection, control and metering functions.
The tables below present each remote-indication bit. Depending on the applications and
functions in operation, certain remote-indication bits may not be applicable.
The corresponding value for Sepam 2000 is indicated. This value corresponds to the
address, not the meaning (meanings are not static in Sepam 2000).
Word 0C90: TS1 to TS16 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TS1 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision KTS1
Bit 01: TS2 Control fault KTS2
Bit 02: TS3 TC / position discrepancy KTS3
Bit 03: TS4 External tripping 1 KTS4
Bit 04: TS5 Sepam not reset after fault KTS5
Bit 05: TS6 External tripping 2 KTS6
Bit 06: TS7 External tripping 3 KTS7
Bit 07: TS8 Cos ϕ inductive (1) KTS8
Bit 08: TS9 Cos ϕ capacitive (1) KTS9
Bit 09: TS10 Closed position KTS10
Bit 10: TS11 Device racked out KTS11
Bit 11: TS12 SF6 alarm KTS12
Bit 12: TS13 Earthing switch closed KTS13
Bit 13: TS14 Remote-control enabled KTS14
Bit 14: TS15 Overcurrent protection (summary) KTS15
Bit 15: TS16 Free KTS16
(1) TC49 can be used to inhibit this TS.

SEPED310017EN 301
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Word 0C91: TS17 to TS32 Sepam 2000

Bit 00: TS17 Free KTS17
to
Bit 14: TS31 Free KTS31
Bit 15: TS32 Send blocking signal 1 KTS32
Word 0C92: TS33 to TS48 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TS33 Free KTS33
to
Bit 15: TS48 Free KTS48
Word 0C93: TS49 to TS64 Sepam 2000
Bit 00: TS49 A new disturbance recording is available KTS49
(TS maintained for 28 ms)
Bit 01: TS50 Disturbance recording inhibited KTS50
Bit 02: TS51 Remote setting inhibited KTS51
Bit 03: TS52 Free KTS52
to
Bit 15: TS64 Free KTS64
Word 0C94: TS65 to TS80
Bit 00: TS65 Protection 50/51 unit 1
Bit 01: TS66 Protection 50/51 unit 2
Bit 02: TS67 Protection 50/51 unit 3
Bit 03: TS68 Protection 50/51 unit 4
Bit 04: TS69 Reserved
Bit 05: TS70 Reserved
Bit 06: TS71 Reserved
Bit 07: TS72 Reserved
Bit 08: TS73 Protection 50N/51N unit 1
Bit 09: TS74 Protection 50N/51N unit 2
Bit 10: TS75 Protection 50N/51N unit 3
Bit 11: TS76 Protection 50N/51N unit 4

5
Bit 12: TS77 Reserved
Bit 13: TS78 Reserved
Bit 14: TS79 Reserved
Bit 15: TS80 Reserved
Word 0C95: TS81 to TS96
Bit 00: TS81 Protection 27 unit 1
Bit 01: TS82 Protection 27 unit 2
Bit 02: TS83 Reserved
Bit 03: TS84 Reserved
Bit 04: TS85 Protection 27D unit 1
Bit 05: TS86 Protection 27D unit 2
Bit 06: TS87 Protection 27R unit 1
Bit 07: TS88 Protection 27R unit 2
Bit 08: TS89 Protection 59 unit 1
Bit 09: TS90 Protection 59 unit 2
Bit 10: TS91 Reserved
Bit 11: TS92 Reserved
Bit 12: TS93 Protection 59N unit 1
Bit 13: TS94 Protection 59N unit 2
Bit 14: TS95 Protection 51V unit 1
Bit 15: TS96 Reserved
Word 0C96: TS97 to TS112
Bit 00: TS97 Protection 67 unit 1
Bit 01: TS98 Protection 67 unit 2
Bit 02: TS99 Protection 67N unit 1
Bit 03: TS100 Protection 67N unit 2
Bit 04: TS101 Protection 46 unit 1
Bit 05: TS102 Protection 46 unit 2
Bit 06: TS103 Protection 47 unit 1
Bit 07: TS104 Protection 47 unit 2
Bit 08: TS105 Protection 32P unit 1
Bit 09: TS106 Protection 32P unit 2
Bit 10: TS107 Protection 32Q
Bit 11: TS108 Protection 37
Bit 12: TS109 Protection 37P unit 1
Bit 13: TS110 Protection 37P unit 2
Bit 14: TS111 Protection 40
Bit 15: TS112 Protection 50BF

302 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Word 0C97: TS113 to TS128

Bit 00: TS113 Protection 49RMS – alarm set point
Bit 01: TS114 Protection 49RMS – tripping set point
Bit 02: TS115 Protection 48/51LR (locked rotor)
Bit 03: TS116 Protection 48/51LR (locked rotor at start-up)
Bit 04: TS117 Protection 48/51LR (excessive starting time)
Bit 05: TS118 Protection 66
Bit 06: TS119 Protection 21B
Bit 07: TS120 Reserved
Bit 08: TS121 Reserved
Bit 09: TS122 Reserved
Bit 10: TS123 Reserved
Bit 11: TS124 Protection 64REF unit 1
Bit 12: TS125 Protection 64REF unit 2
Bit 13: TS126 Reserved
Bit 14: TS127 Reserved
Bit 15: TS128 An MSR is currently being recorded
Word 0C98: TS129 to TS144
Bit 00: TS129 Protection 81H unit 1
Bit 01: TS130 Protection 81H unit 2
Bit 02: TS131 Protection 81L unit 1
Bit 03: TS132 Protection 81L unit 2
Bit 04: TS133 Protection 81L unit 3
Bit 05: TS134 Protection 81L unit 4
Bit 06: TS135 Protection 81R unit 1
Bit 07: TS136 Protection 81R unit 2
Bit 08: TS137 Protection 12 unit 1
Bit 09: TS138 Protection 12 unit 2
Bit 10: TS139 Protection 14 unit 1
Bit 11: TS140 Protection 14 unit 2
Bit 12: TS141
Bit 13: TS142
Bit 14: TS143
Reserved
Reserved
A data log is in progress
5
Bit 15: TS144 A new Data log file is available
(TS maintained for 28 ms)
Word 0C99: TS145 to TS160
Bit 00: TS145 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 1 MET148 n° 1
Bit 01: TS146 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 1 MET148 n° 1
Bit 02: TS147 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 2 MET148 n° 1
Bit 03: TS148 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 2 MET148 n° 1
Bit 04: TS149 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 3 MET148 n° 1
Bit 05: TS150 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 3 MET148 n° 1
Bit 06: TS151 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 4 MET148 n° 1
Bit 07: TS152 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 4 MET148 n° 1
Bit 08: TS153 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 5 MET148 n° 1
Bit 09: TS154 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 5 MET148 n° 1
Bit 10: TS155 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 6 MET148 n° 1
Bit 11: TS156 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 6 MET148 n° 1
Bit 12: TS157 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 7 MET148 n° 1
Bit 13: TS158 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 7 MET148 n° 1
Bit 14: TS159 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 8 MET148 n° 1
Bit 15: TS160 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 8 MET148 n° 1
Word 0C9A: TS161 to TS176
Bit 00: TS161 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 1 MET148 n° 2
Bit 01: TS162 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 1 MET148 n° 2
Bit 02: TS163 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 2 MET148 n° 2
Bit 03: TS164 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 2 MET148 n° 2
Bit 04: TS165 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 3 MET148 n° 2
Bit 05: TS166 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 3 MET148 n° 2
Bit 06: TS167 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 4 MET148 n° 2
Bit 07: TS168 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 4 MET148 n° 2
Bit 08: TS169 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 5 MET148 n° 2
Bit 09: TS170 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 5 MET148 n° 2
Bit 10: TS171 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 6 MET148 n° 2
Bit 11: TS172 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 6 MET148 n° 2
Bit 12: TS173 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 7 MET148 n° 2
Bit 13: TS174 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 7 MET148 n° 2
Bit 14: TS175 Protection 38/49T alarm sensor 8 MET148 n° 2
Bit 15: TS176 Protection 38/49T tripping sensor 8 MET148 n° 2

SEPED310017EN 303
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Word 0C9B: TS177 to TS192

Bit 00: TS177 Reserved
Bit 01: TS178 Reserved
Bit 02: TS179 Reserved
Bit 03: TS180 Reserved
Bit 04: TS181 Reserved
Bit 05: TS182 Reserved
Bit 06: TS183 Reserved
Bit 07: TS184 Reserved
Bit 08: TS185 Thermistor alarm
Bit 09: TS186 Thermistor tripping
Bit 10: TS187 Buchholz alarm
Bit 11: TS188 Buchholz tripping
Bit 12: TS189 Thermostat alarm
Bit 13: TS190 Thermostat tripping
Bit 14: TS191 Pressure alarm
Bit 15: TS192 Pressure tripping
Word 0C9C: TS193 to TS208
Bit 00: TS193 MET148-1 module sensor fault
Bit 01: TS194 MET148-2 module sensor fault
Bit 02: TS195 Inhibit thermal protection tripping
Bit 03: TS196 Main-phase reverse rotation
Bit 04: TS197 Reserved
Bit 05: TS198 Send blocking signal 2
Bit 06: TS199 Recloser: On
Bit 07: TS200 Recloser: ready
Bit 08: TS201 Recloser: final trip
Bit 09: TS202 Recloser: reclosing successful
Bit 10: TS203 Recloser: cycle 1 in progress
Bit 11: TS204 Recloser: cycle 2 in progress

5
Bit 12: TS205 Recloser: cycle 3 in progress
Bit 13: TS206 Recloser: cycle 4 in progress
Bit 14: TS207 Recloser: closing by recloser
Bit 15: TS208 Test mode
Word 0C9D: TS209 to TS224
Bit 00: TS209 Phase CT fault
Bit 01: TS210 Phase VT fault
Bit 02: TS211 Residual VT fault
Bit 03: TS212 Reserved
Bit 04: TS213 Reserved
Bit 05: TS214 Reserved
Bit 06: TS215 Load shedding
Bit 07: TS216 Restart
Bit 08: TS217 Min. V_aux
Bit 09: TS218 Max. V_aux
Bit 10: TS219 Battery low or absent
Bit 11: TS220 Request for synchro-checked closing
Bit 12: TS221 dU synchronization failure
Bit 13: TS222 dPhi synchronization failure
Bit 14: TS223 dF synchronization failure
Bit 15: TS224 Synchronization stop
Word 0C9E: TS225 to TS240
Bit 00: TS225 Synchronization failure
Bit 01: TS226 Synchronization succesful
Bit 02: TS227 Reserved
Bit 03: TS228 Reserved
Bit 04: TS229 Reserved
Bit 05: TS230 Reserved
Bit 06: TS231 Reserved
Bit 07: TS232 Reserved
Bit 08: TS233 Tripping
Bit 09: TS234 Closing coil monitoring
Bit 10: TS235 Cumulative breaking current monitoring
Bit 11: TS236 Coupling closing order
Bit 12: TS237 Coupling synchronization failure
Bit 13: TS238 Tripping by automatic transfer (AT)
Bit 14: TS239 Discrepancy in the phase rotation direction
Bit 15: TS240 Ethernet communication fault

304 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Zones for Sepam 2000 compatibility

Disturb. rec. identification zone
This zone exists exclusively for address and format compatibility with Sepam 2000.
When compatibility is not required, use the directory zone (address 400).
Disturb. rec. identification zone Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Reserved D204 3 - - - -
Reserved D205 3 - - - -
Size of set-up files D206 3 - 16NS bytes -
If data files are larger than 64 Kbytes, the number of Size of data files D207 3 - 16NS bytes -
records is forced to zero. Only the last two records are Number of records available D208 3 - 16NS 1 -
provided. Date of record 1 (most recent) D209/D20C 3 - IEC -
Date of record 2 D20D/D210 3 - IEC -

Configuration zone
This zone exists exclusively for address and format compatibility with Sepam 2000.
It is static and does not depend on the real configuration of the Sepam series 60
relay.
Configuration zone Address Read Write Value Config.
Not used FC00 3 - 0 -
Sepam series 60 FC01 3 - 1300 h -
Not managed FC02 3 - 0 -
Not managed FC03 3 - 0 -

SEPED310017EN 305
 Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Metering zone x 1
Metering zone x 1 Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Phase current I1 FA00 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
Phase current I2 FA01 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
Phase current I3 FA02 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
Residual current Peak demand current IM1 FA03 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
On Sepam 2000, measured and calculated residual Peak demand current IM2 FA04 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
currents are exclusive, i.e. they have the same Modbus Peak demand current IM3 FA05 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
address. On Sepam series 60, the two values may both Phase-to-phase voltage U21 FA06 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
exist: the compatible address is used for the calculated Phase-to-phase voltage U32 FA07 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
value and the new address is used for the measured Phase-to-phase voltage U13 FA08 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
value. Frequency f FA09 3, 4 - 16NSA 0.01 Hz yes
Number of starts / Inhibit time Active power P FA0A 3, 4 - 16O 1 kW yes
On Sepam 2000, these two values are exclusive and Reactive power Q FA0B 3, 4 - 16O 1 kvar yes
use the same Modbus address. They are differentiated Power factor cos ϕ FA0C 3, 4 - 16O 0.01 yes
by the sign. On Sepam series 60, the two values may Peak demand active power PM FA0D 3, 4 - 16NS 1 kW yes
both exist, the compatible address is used for the Peak demand reactive power QM FA0E 3, 4 - 16NS 1 kvar yes
number of starts and the new address is used for the Residual current I0Σ FA0F 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
inhibit time. T1: temperature 1 MET n° 1 FA10 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T2: temperature 2 MET n° 1 FA11 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T3: temperature 3 MET n° 1 FA12 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T4: temperature 4 MET n° 1 FA13 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T5: temperature 5 MET n° 1 FA14 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T6: temperature 6 MET n° 1 FA15 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T7: temperature 7 MET n° 1 FA16 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T8: temperature 8 MET n° 1 FA17 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T9: temperature 1 MET n° 2 FA18 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T10: temperature 2 MET n° 2 FA19 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T11: temperature 3 MET n° 2 FA1A 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes
T12: temperature 4 MET n° 2 FA1B 3, 4 - 16O 1°C yes

5
Thermal capacity used FA1C 3, 4 - 16NS % yes
Number of starts FA1D 3, 4 - 16NS 1 yes
Reserved FA1E 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA1F 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA20 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA21 3, 4 - - - -
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1 FA22 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V2 FA23 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V3 FA24 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
Residual voltage V0 FA25 3, 4 - 16NS 1V yes
Residual current I0 FA26 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A yes
Reserved FA27 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA28 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA29 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA2A 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA2B 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA2C 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA2D 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FA2E 3, 4 - - - -
Inhibit time FA2F 3, 4 - 16NS 1 min. yes

306 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Addresses in direct-access mode

Metering zone x 10
Metering zone x 10 Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Phase current I1 FB00 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Phase current I2 FB01 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Phase current I3 FB02 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Residual current Peak demand current IM1 FB03 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
On Sepam 2000, measured and calculated residual Peak demand current IM2 FB04 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
currents are exclusive, i.e. they have the same Modbus Peak demand current IM3 FB05 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
address. On Sepam series 60, the two values may both Phase-to-phase voltage U21 FB06 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
exist: the compatible address is used for the calculated Phase-to-phase voltage U32 FB07 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
value and the new address is used for the measured Phase-to-phase voltage U13 FB08 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
value. Frequency f FB09 3, 4 - 16NSA 0.1 Hz yes
Active power P FB0A 3, 4 - 16O 10 kW yes
Reactive power Q FB0B 3, 4 - 16O 10 kvar yes
Power factor cos ϕ FB0C 3, 4 - 16O 0.01 yes
Peak demand active power PM FB0D 3, 4 - 16NS 10 kW yes
Peak demand reactive power QM FB0E 3, 4 - 16NS 10 kvar yes
Residual current I0Σ FB0F 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Last tripping current Itrip1 FB10 3, 4 - 16NS 10 A yes
Last tripping current Itrip2 FB11 3, 4 - 16NS 10 A yes
Last tripping current Itrip3 FB12 3, 4 - 16NS 10 A yes
Last tripping current Itrip0 FB13 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Reserved FB14 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB15 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB16 3, 4 - - - -
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1 FB17 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V2 FB18 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
Phase-to-neutral voltage V3 FB19 3, 4 - 16NS 10 V yes
Reserved FB1A 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB1B 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved
Residual voltage V0
FB1C
FB1D
3, 4
3, 4
-
-
-
16NS
-
10 V
-
yes 5
Reserved FB1E 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB1F 3, 4 - - -
Reserved FB20 3, 4 - - -
Reserved FB21 3, 4 - - -
Reserved FB22 3, 4 - - -
Residual current I0 FB23 3, 4 - 16NS 1A yes
Reserved FB24 3, 4 - - - -

Compact zone
Compact zone Address Read Write Format Unit Config.
Phase current I1 (x 1) FB80 3, 4 - 16NS 0.1 A -
Phase-to-phase voltage U21 (x 1) FB81 3, 4 - 16NS 1V -
Active power P (x 1) FB82 3, 4 - 16O 1 kW -
Reactive power Q (x 1) FB83 3, 4 - 16O 1 kvar -
Sepam check-word (copy) FB84 3, 4 - B - -
TS1-TS16 FB85 3, 4 - B - -
TS17-TS32 FB86 3, 4 - B - -
TS33-TS48 FB87 3, 4 - B - -
TS49-TS64 FB88 3, 4 - B - -
Logic inputs I101 to I114 FB89 3, 4 - B - -
Logic inputs I201 to I214 FB8A 3, 4 - B - -
Reserved FB8B 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB8C 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB8D 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB8E 3, 4 - - - -
Reserved FB8F 3, 4 - - - -

SEPED310017EN 307
 Modbus communication Time-setting and synchronization

Presentation
Sepam manages the date and time internally. If auxiliary power is lost, the date and
time function continues to operate, on the condition that a charged battery was
PE50581

installed.
The Sepam internal time function is used in particular to date alarms and other
records.
Sepam time can be viewed:
with SFT2841, "Sepam diagnosis" screen
on the Sepam display
by a Modbus read of the synchronization zone.
Sepam also supplies in the check-word the indication "Sepam time not correct" if it
is necessary to reset the time (often the case when the battery is low or absent). This
information can also be viewed with SFT2841, on the "Sepam diagnosis" screen.
SFT2841: date and time on the "Sepam diagnosis" screen.
Time setting
When Sepam is energized, the time is automatically set using the clock powered by
the backup battery, if the battery is charged.
When necessary, it is possible to set the time on the Sepam using:
SFT2841 ("Sepam diagnosis" screen)
Sepam User Machine Interface
Serial Modbus communication (COM1)
Modbus/TCP or SNTP (Ethernet)
Modbus time is set by writing, in a single block, the new value for the date and time
in the synchronization zone (time frame).

Synchronization
Remote monitoring To ensure long-term time stability or to coordinate a number of devices, it is possible
and control to synchronize Sepam relays.
DE81020

A number of synchronization sources are accepted:

5 none (synchronization inhibited)

a pulse to logic input I103 (minimum duration: 15 ms)
Modbus communication on COM1
Ethernet (Modbus or SNTP)
The source is selected using the SFT2841 software, on the "General characteristics"
screen.
Sepam series 20
Non-synchronous status is indicated in the check-word. This information can also be
viewed with SFT2841, on the "Sepam diagnosis" screen.
When Sepam is synchronized, time setting is authorized only by sources that are
compatible with the synchronization.

Time setting Synchronization source

Sepam series 40
None COM1 Ethernet I103
Local
Via COM1
Via Ethernet

Sepam series 60
Synchronization by the Modbus communication link
The time frame is used for both time setting and synchronization of Sepam. In this
case, it must be regularly sent at brief intervals (between 10 and 60 seconds) to
maintain synchronous time.
It is generally broadcast (slave number = 0).
The Sepam internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received.
Synchronization is maintained if the reset amplitude is less than 100 milliseconds.
Sepam series 80
If the reset amplitude is higher for 3 consecutive frames or if a single frame is
received with a reset amplitude higher than 4 seconds then Sepam will switch to
loss of synchronism status.
With synchronization via the Modbus network, accuracy depends on the master and
its control over frame transmission time on the communication network. Sepam is
Synchronization of the Sepam clock by the communication
synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame.
network. Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time.
Sepam then switches to a transitional non-synchronous status.
In synchronous status, non-reception of a time frame for over 200 seconds results in
the loss of synchronization.

308 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Time-setting and synchronization

Remote monitoring Pulse synchronization

and control Sepam can be synchronized externally by sending a periodic pulse (synchronization
DE81021

pulse) to logic input I103 (the MES120 module is required).

Clock The pulse is used to reset the Sepam internal clock. Synchronization is carried out
on the rising edge of the logic input.
Sepam adapts to synchronization periods from 10 to 60 seconds, in 10-second
steps. The shorter the period, the more accurate the time setting.
When energized (or following a loss of synchronization), Sepam is in "non-
synchronous" mode. The resetting process (switching of Sepam to "synchronous"
Synchronization mode) is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam current time
link
Sepam series 20 and the nearest ten-second period. This measurement is taken when the pulse is
received following time setting. Resetting is authorized if the difference is less than
or equal to 4 seconds. In this case, Sepam shifts to "synchronous" mode.
Subsequently (after switching to "synchronous" mode), the resetting process is
based on the measurement of a difference (between Sepam current time and the
nearest ten second period when the pulse is received), which is adapted to match
the pulse period.
Sepam series 40 The pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized,
based on the first two pulses received. The pulse must be operational before
Sepam is energized.
Synchronization operates only after Sepam has been time-set, i.e. after the
"incorrect time" end event.

Any time changes greater than ± 4 seconds are made by sending a new time frame.
Sepam series 60 The switch from summer time to winter time (and back) is made in this way as well.
There is a temporary loss of synchronization when the time is changed.
Synchronization is lost if:
b the difference in synchronization between the closest 10-second period and pulse
reception is greater than the synchronization error for two consecutive pulses
b the pulse is not received for a period longer than 200 seconds.

Sepam series 80
Synchronization-pulse characteristics
Electrical characteristics
5
They are identical to those for MES120 module inputs.
Time characteristics
Period: 10 to 60 seconds, in 10-second steps
State 1 minimum duration: 100 ms
External synchronization of the Sepam clock by sending a State 0 minimum duration: 100 ms
synchronization pulse to a logic input.
Synchronization clock
The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment, a
"synchronization clock " to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse.
Schneider Electric has tested the following products:
Gorgy Timing, part no. RT3000, equipped with the M540 module

SEPED310017EN 309
 Modbus communication Time-tagged events

Presentation
The time-tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes (events)
so that they can be accurately organized over time.
Time-tagging is systematic and concerns:
b logic inputs
b remote indications
b certain information pertaining to Sepam equipment (see Sepam check-word).
Events may be used by a remote monitoring and control system for data logging and
histories, for example.
The remote monitoring and control system provides a chronological display of the
time-tagged data.

Description
Time-tagging
Event time-tagging uses the Sepam internal clock. When an event is detected, it is
tagged with the current Sepam time.
Time-tagging accuracy depends essentially on how well the Sepam internal clock is
synchronized (see the section on time setting and synchronization).

Inhibition in Test mode

Test mode may be used to temporarily stop the transmission of all time-tagged
events when remote operation of the installation is not to be disturbed by
maintenance operations carried out on the electrical equipment. This mode may be
accessed via mimic-based UMIs by turning the key-switch.

When Sepam enters Test mode, it:

b transmits remote-indication TS208 "Test mode" with a value of 1

5
b interrupts the transmission of all time-tagged events.
When Sepam leaves Test mode, it transmits remote-indication TS208 "Test mode"
with a value of 0.
Time-tagged events can be transmitted again. Status changes that take place in Test
mode are permanently lost.

Event queues
Sepam has four internal storage queues (two per communication port) with a
capacity of 64 events. Each queue is independent.
If one queue is full (63 events already recorded), a "data loss" event is generated in
the 64th position and the queue no longer receives event data. The other queues are
not affected and continue to receive any new detected events.
When a queue in "data loss" status is completely emptied, a "data loss" end event is
generated and the queue then receives any detected events.

For each event queue of a Modbus port, the check-work contains certain information:
b presence of an event: indicates that there is at least one event that has not been
read in the corresponding queue
b data loss: indicates that the queue is in "data loss" status (full).

Initialization
Each time Sepam is initialized (energized), events are generated in the following
order:
b "data loss"
b "not synchronous"
b end of "data loss".
The "time not correct" event may also appear if there is no battery.
The function is initialized with the current values of the remote indication and logic
input status without creating any events related to those data. After the initialization
phase, event detection is activated.

310 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Time-tagged events

Reading of events
Two Modbus tables are used to read the corresponding queues of events, in groups
of four maximum, using a specific protocol to make sure no events are lost, even if
communication problems occur.
Event tables Addr. table 1 Addr. table 2 Read Write Config.
Exchange word 0040 0070 3 6, 16 -
Event 1 0041/0048 0071/0078 3 - -
Event 2 0049/0050 0079/0080 3 - -
Reading must address only the exchange word, or the Event 3 0051/0058 0081/0088 3 - -
entire table. Event 4 0059/0060 0089/0090 3 - -

Exchange word
It is used to check event reading. It consists of the elements below.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Exchange number 0…255 Event number 0…4

The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized and is

incremented for each transfer of a new set of events. When it reaches its maximum
value (FFh), it automatically goes back to zero.
Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering.
The event number indicates the number of significant events are truly present in the
table. The remainder of the table is less significant.

Event table acknowledgment

Following correct reception of the set of events, the master must acknowledge the
exchange by writing an exchange word with:
b "Exchange number" field: number of the last exchange carried out
b "Event number" field: set to zero.
The acknowledged events are then cleared from the Sepam queue. If there are other
events, they are made available in the table and the exchange number is
incremented.
As long as an exchange is not acknowledged, the table remains as is and it is
5
possible to read it again.
If acknowledgment is incorrect (incorrect value for the exchange word), it is not taken
into account and the table remains as is.

Clearing an event queue

Writing a value "xxFFh" in the exchange word (any exchange number, event
number = FFh) reinitializes the corresponding event queue (all stored events not yet
transmitted are deleted).

Description of event coding

An event is coded in 8 words with the following structure:
Word Information Coding
1 Type of event 0800 h
2 Event address Bit address (see inputs, TS, check-word)
3 Reserved 0
4 Event direction 0: falling edge
1: rising edge
5 to 8 Event time IEC

SEPED310017EN 311
 Modbus communication Transferring records

Presentation
Sepam records different types of data:
b disturbance recording
b tripping contexts
b out-of-sync context
b data log
b motor start report
b motor start trend
The list of available records may be read in the corresponding directory zones.
Two Modbus transfer zones per port recover records using a specific protocol
ensuring correct transfer, even if communication problems occur.

Transfer
Transfer is carried out in the same manner for all types of records. Given the volume
of data, it is transferred in blocks that are compatible in size with Modbus frames.
To make a transfer, the master:
b determines the list of available records by reading the directory zone
b selects the desired record
b waits until it is available and recovers the first block of data, using the exchange
word to ensure correct synchronization
b acknowledges block transfer
b repeats reading and acknowledgment until all the blocks have been received
b reads the directory zone again to check that the record was not overwritten during
transfer.
A record may be transferred as many times as desired, until it is overwritten by a new
record. If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being transferred, the
oldest record is overwritten.
Selection of a new record while a transfer is in progress interrupts the transfer.

Transfer zones
5 Each transfer zone comprises a zone for record selection and a zone reading record
data.

Selection zone
Record transfer is initiated by writing the record identifier to this zone.
Selection Addr. zone 1 Addr. zone 2 Read Write Config.
Word 1 2200 D200 3 16 -
Word 2 2201 D201 3 16 -
Word 3 2202 D202 3 16 -
The zone should be written in a single block containing Word 4 2203 D203 3 16 -
4 words, using function 16 (write word).
Sepam capacity for simultaneous transfers is limited. If Record identifier
Sepam cannot handle the request, a type 07 exception The records to be transferred are identified by their date as indicated in the directory
reply is sent. In this case, a new request must be made zone, with an indicator in the most-significant byte of word 1:
later. 0: disturbance recording
1: tripping contexts
2: out-of-sync context.
3: data log
4: motor start report
5: motor start trend.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word 1 Type of record
Word 2 Date of record
Word 3 (IEC)
Word 4

312 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Transferring records

Data read zone

Record data are made available in this zone.
Data reading Addr. zone 1 Addr. zone 2 Read Write Config.
Exchange word 2300 D300 3 6, 16 -
Data word 1 2301 D301 3 - -
Data word 2 2302 D302 3 - -
... ... ... 3 - -
The record transfer is reset if more than 2 seconds Data word 124 237C D37C 3 - -
elapse between consecutive data read operations.
Reading must always begin at the beginning of the zone (exchange word). The data
bytes not included in the significant information (see the section on the exchange
word) do not contain significant values.
Exchange word
It is used to check data reading. It consists of the elements below.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Exchange number 0…255 Number of usable bytes 0…248

The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized and is

incremented for each transfer of a new block of data. When it reaches its maximum
value (FFh), it automatically goes back to zero.
Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering.
The number of bytes indicates the usable size of the data zone. It is initialized to zero
after an energizing operation and varies between 0 and 248 (F8h).
The exchange word may also have the following values:
b 0000h: no "read request" has yet been made. This is especially the case when
Sepam is energized. The other data words are not significant.
b FFFFh: the "read request" has been processed, but the results are not yet
available in the read zone. It is necessary to read again later.
b xxFEh: the transfer has been cancelled or the record number is not known.
Reading acknowledgment

5
Following correct reception of the block of data, the master must acknowledge
reading by writing an exchange word with:
b "Exchange number" field: number of the last exchange carried out
b "Number of bytes" field: set to zero.
If transfer of the record is not finished, the exchange word is reset to FFFFh while the
next block of data is prepared, otherwise the exchange word is not modified.
As long as a read has not been acknowledged, the zone remains as is and it is
possible to read it again.
If acknowledgment is incorrect (incorrect value for the exchange word), it is not taken
into account and the zone remains as is.
Note: It is not necessary to acknowledge tripping contexts or out-of-sync contexts which are
contained in a single block.

Data coding
Disturbance recording
Each record comprises two files as defined by the COMTRADE standard:
b configuration file (.CFG)
b data file (.DAT) in binary mode.
Because the configuration and data files are transferred together, a block may
contain the end of the configuration file and the beginning of the data file of a record.
It is up to the remote monitoring and control system to reconstruct the files in
accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files
indicated in the directory zone.

SEPED310017EN 313
 Modbus communication Transferring records

Tripping contexts
Word Information Format Unit
00 (exchange word)
01 to 04 Context date IEC -
05/06 Tripping current phase 1 Itrip1 32NS 0.1 A
07/08 Tripping current phase 2 Itrip2 32NS 0.1 A
09/0A Tripping current phase 3 Itrip3 32NS 0.1 A
0B/0C Residual current I0Σ 32NS 0.1 A
0D/0E Residual current I0 32NS 0.1 A
0F/10 Negative-sequence current Ii 32NS 0.1 A
11/12 Phase-to-phase voltage U21 32NS 1V
13/14 Phase-to-phase voltage U32 32NS 1V
15/16 Phase-to-phase voltage U13 32NS 1V
17/18 Phase-to-neutral voltage V1 32NS 1V
19/1A Phase-to-neutral voltage V2 32NS 1V
1B/1C Phase-to-neutral voltage V3 32NS 1V
1D/1E Residual voltage V0 32NS 1V
1F/20 Positive sequence voltage Vd 32NS 1V
21/22 Negative-sequence voltage Vi 32NS 1V
23/24 Frequency f 32NS 0.01 Hz
25/26 Active power P 32S 1 kW
27/28 Reactive power Q 32S 1 kvar
29/2A Apparent power S 32S 1 kVA
2B/4A Reserved - -
4B/4C Neutral point voltage Vnt 32NS 1V
4D/5C Reserved - -
5D/5E Phase rotation direction 32NS 0 = 123
1 = 132

Out-of-sync context

5 Word
00
01 to 04
Information
(exchange word)
Context date
Format

IEC
Unit

-
05/06 Voltage difference dU 32NS 0,1 % de Uns
Sync1
07 Frequency difference df 16NS 0.001 Hz
08 Phase difference dϕ 16NS 0.1°

314 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Presentation
Access to Sepam settings via Modbus communication allows the user to remotely:
b read settings remotely (remote reading)
b modify settings remotely (remote setting), if it has been authorized.
Two Modbus zones per port offer access to the settings, using a specific protocol.

Accessible functions
Remote reading of settings concerns:
b all protection and similar functions
b the main Sepam general parameters.
Remote setting concerns exclusively the protection and similar functions.

Inhibiting remote setting

It is possible to inhibit the remote-setting function using a configuration parameter
Inhibition of remote setting also concerns accessible via SFT2841. In the default set-up (factory settings), the remote-setting
the SFT2841 connected to Modbus function is inhibited.
communication ports. When remote setting
Security
is inhibited, only the SFT2841 locally connected to
It is possible to protect the remote-setting zone against writing, see the section on
Sepam can modify settings and parameters.
security.

Operating principle
Remote setting reading
For remote setting reading, the master:
b selects the function whose settings are requested (write in the request zone)
b waits until it is available and recovers the setting values, using the exchange word
to ensure correct synchronization (read the setting read zone).

Remote setting

5
For remote setting, the master:
NOTICE b selects the function whose settings are to be modified remotely and provides the
HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION list of new settings (write in the remote-setting zone)
b The device must only be configured and set by b waits until processing is finished and recovers the accepted setting values, using
qualified personnel, using the results of the the exchange word to ensure correct synchronization (read the setting read zone)
installation protection system study. b checks that the settings have been accepted and processes any refusals.
b During commissioning of the installation and It is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned, even if some of
after any modification, check that the Sepam them have not changed.
configuration and protection function settings are
consistent with the results of this study. Setting access zones
Failure to follow these instructions can result
Each setting-access zone includes a zone to select the function whose settings are
in equipment damage
requested, a zone to read the settings of the selected function and a zone to write
the settings.

Selection zone for setting requests

A setting read is initiated by writing the function identifier to this zone.
Setting request Addr. zone 1 Addr. zone 2 Read Write Config.
Function identifier 2080 D080 3 6, 16 -

Function identification
Each function is identified by a function code, with a unit number (protection) or a
subcode (other functions). A list of the function codes is provided in the appendices,
no other values are valid.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function code Unit number or subcode

Exception replies
In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies
(not acknowledged) if another remote reading (or remote setting) request is being
processed.

SEPED310017EN 315
 Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Setting read zone

Setting values are made available in this zone.
Writing settings Addr. zone 1 Addr. zone 2 Read Write Config.
Function reference 2000 D000 3 - -
Setting 1 2001/2002 D001/D002 3 - -
Setting 2 2003/2004 D003/D004 3 - -
... ... ... 3 - -
Setting 62 207B/207C D07B/D07C 3 - -
Reading must always begin at the beginning of the zone (exchange word). The
length of the exchange may concern:
b the exchange word only (validity test)
b the maximum size of the zone (125 words)
b the usable size of the zone (determined by the function being addressed).
Exchange word
It is used to check the reading of the settings and can have the following values:
b xxyy: where
v function code xx is not 00 or FFh
v unit number or subcode yy is not FFh.
The requested settings are available in the words below. The word is a copy of the
request. The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made.
b FFFFh: the request has been processed, but the results are not yet available. It is
necessary to read again later. The other words are not significant.
b xxFFh: where the function code xx is not 00 or FFh. The read request for the
settings of the designated function is not valid. The function (or the unit) does not
exist for this Sepam.
b 0000h: no "request frame" has yet been formulated. This is especially the case
when Sepam is energized. The other words are not significant.
Settings
All settings are 32 bits in length (two Modbus words). They are specific to each
function and are described in the appendices.

5 Remote-setting zone
The new setting values are written in this zone.
Read settings Addr. zone 1 Addr. zone 2 Read Write Config.
Function identifier 2100 D100 3 16 -
Setting 1 2101/2102 D101/D102 3 16 -
Setting 2 2103/2004 D103/D104 3 16 -
... ... ... 3 16 -
Setting 61 2179/217A D179/D17A 3 16 -

Writing must always begin at the beginning of the zone.

Function identifier
It is identical to that used to read the settings.
Settings
All settings are 32 bits in length (two Modbus words). They are specific to each
function and are described in the appendices.
Exception reply
In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send type 07 exception replies (not
acknowledged) if:
b another remote reading or setting request is being processed
b the remote setting function is inhibited
b Sepam is being set locally (SFT2841 or UMI).
Check on setting acceptance
After processing the remote-setting zone, Sepam updates the read zone with the
current function settings. In this case, the exchange word may also have another
value:
b FFFEh meaning that the settings have been refused. Certain values are incorrect
and are replaced by 7FFFFFFFh in the read zone.

316 SEPED310017EN
 Modbus communication Customized table

Presentation
To reduce the number of Modbus exchanges required by the master to collect the
most frequently used information (and the bandwidth used on the network), a
customized table can be set up on each communication port of Sepam series 60.
This table is defined via Modbus, using a configuration table.

Use
Configuration table
Configuration table Address Read Write Config.
Identifier 2680 3 16 -
Address datum 1 2681 3 16 -
Address datum 2 2682 3 16 -
... ... 3 16 -
Address datum 124 26FC 3 16 -

Writing the configuration table

This function is used to configure the data table. The first word in the configuration
DE50742

table is used as the configuration identifier. It is copied as is in the first word of the
data table. The identifier can have any value, except 0. If the identifier is set to 0,
table configuration is cancelled.
The identifier enables masters to generate a number of typical configurations and to
check which is active. It is also the means to check that no other master has modified
the active configuration. This requires concerted management between the masters.
Each other word in the table contains the Modbus address of the datum that should
be set up in the corresponding spot in the data table (0 if the position is not used).
Only certain Modbus addresses can be set up in these tables. The valid addresses
are indicated in this document by "yes" in the "Config." column in the descriptions.
It is possible to write the table in part or in whole from any address. When 125 words
are used (the maximum size of the data table), at least two writings are required to

5
fill the configuration table because the maximum size of a Modbus write is 123 words.
Reading the configuration table
This function is used to read and check the configuration of the data table. Each
address word can have one of the following values:
b 0000: position not used
b FFFFh: invalid address
b Address: address correctly configured.
It is possible to read the zone in part or in whole from any address.
Example: by writing 0C8F to 268C, the result at 260C is a copy
of the contents at address 0C8F (check-word).

Data table
Data table Address Read Write Config.
Identifier 2600 3 - -
Datum 1 2601 3 - -
Datum 2 2602 3 - -
Caution: configuration takes place one Modbus word ... ... 3 - -
after the other. For a 32-bit value, it is necessary to Datum 124 267C 3 - -
provide the two successive addresses of the value.
(This characteristic may be used to switch the order of Reading the data table
words if there is a compatibility problem with the 32-bit This function is used to read the data set up at the corresponding position.
format. It is also possible to use only the least- The validity of the datum is indicated in the configuration table.
It is possible to read the table in part or in whole from any address.
significant part of the 32-bit values if the range is
sufficient for the given application.) Exception replies
Sepam sends a Modbus type 07 exception reply (not acknowledged) if the data table
has not been set up. This may occur in the following cases:
b the table was never set up
b the table was set up, but one or more addresses are incorrect
The configuration table can be read again to identify the addresses in question;
b the configuration was cancelled (the identifier was set to 0)
b the configuration was lost (Sepam de-energized). In this case, it must be reloaded.

SEPED310017EN 317
 Modbus communication Security

Presentation
With Sepam, it is possible to protect remote controls and remote settings using a
password.
Password protection of remote control and settings must be activated in the
SFT2841 software.
Two different passwords are required:
b one password for the remote controls
b one password for the remote settings
thus offering differentiated access.
The ON/OFF status of the security function is given by bit 01 of the Sepam check-
word.

Examples Implementation
Secure writing using function 16 (write word) of value The security function uses an extension of the Modbus protocol that encapsulates
9999h to Modbus address ABCDh on slave 3. the standard remote-control and remote-setting frames in a special frame.

Request frames Request frames

The request frame is made of the following components.
03 Slave Field Size (bytes)
66 Security function code Slave number 1
00 Version 102 (66h) 1 Security function code
0000 Reserved 00 1 Security version
1234 Password 0000 2 Reserved
10 Write-word function code xxxx 2 Password (BCD coding)
ABCD Address Standard function code 1
0001 Number of words to be written Standard frame data Encapsulated standard frame
02 Number of bytes ... n
9999 Value to be written CRC16 2
xxxx CRC16

5
The standard function codes that can be used in the request are the codes accepted
Normal reply frames for writing to the corresponding addresses, i.e. 6 and 16 for words and 5 and 15 for
03 Slave bits.
66 Security function code
The security function does not affect reading.
00 Version
The indicated password is the one created with SFT2841, for the given zone. It is a
16-bit BCD code (e.g. the entered password is 1234, the value in the Modbus field is
10 Write-word function code
1234h).
0001 Number of words written
xxxx CRC16 Reply frames
The standard reply frame is also encapsulated, with a reduced header.
Exception frames Field Size (bytes)
Write-word function exception: it is not possible to Slave number 1
write to the given address. 102 (66h) 1 Security function code
00 1 Security version
03 Slave Standard function code 1
66 Security function code Standard reply Encapsulated standard reply
00 Version ... n
90 Write-word exception (10 + 80) CRC16 2
02 Incorrect address
xxxx CRC16 Exception replies
Security-function (access control) exceptions
Security exception: incorrect password
When the security function is enabled on Sepam, request 102 must be used to
03 Slave
access Sepam's protected data.
E6 Security exception (66 + 80) If a non-secure request is used, a standard exception reply 02 (incorrect data
80 Access refused addresses) is sent to indicate that the requested data cannot be accessed.
xxxx CRC16 When request 102 is used, a security-function exception reply 80 can be sent to
indicate access refused in the following two cases:
b Incorrect security level (the level asked for in the request is not 00)
b Incorrect password
Standard-function (encapsulated) exceptions
When access control has been negotiated successfully, the reply to request 102 can
encapsulate a standard exception reply, as described for replies associated with
Modbus standard function codes.

318 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Reading Sepam identification

Presentation
The "Read Device Identification" function provides standardized access to the
information required to clearly identify a device.
The description is made up of a set of objects (ASCII character strings).
Sepam series 60 accepts the "read identification" function (conformity level 02).
For a complete description of the function, refer to www.modbus.org. The
description below covers a subset of the function, adapted to Sepam series 60.

Implementation
Request frame
The request frame is made of the following components.
Field Size (bytes)
Slave number 1
43 (2Bh) 1 Generic access function code
14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification
01 or 02 1 Type of read
00 1 Object number
CRC16 2

The type of read is used to select a simplified (01) or a standard (02) description.

Sepam series 60 identification Reply frame

The objects making up the Sepam series 60 The reply frame is made of the following components:
identification are listed below.
Number Type Value Field Size (bytes)
0: VendorName "Merlin Gerin" or Slave number 1
"Schneider Electric" 43 (2Bh) 1 Generic access function code
1: ProductCode Application EAN13 code 14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification

5
2: MajorMinorRevision Application version number 01 or 02 1 Type of read
(Vx.yy) 02 1 Conformity level
3: VendorURL "www.schneider-electric.com" 00 1 Continuation-frame flag (none for Sepam)
4: ProductName "Sepam series 60" 00 1 Reserved
5: ModelName Application name n 1 Number of objects (according to read type)
(e.g. "M61 Motor") 0bj1 1 Number of first object
6: UserAppName Sepam marking lg1 1 Length first object
The simplified description includes only objects 0 to 2. txt1 lg1 ASCII string of first object
..... ...
objn 1 Number nth object
lgn 1 Length nth object
txtn Ign ASCII string of nth object
CRC16 2

Exception frame
If an error occurs during request processing, a special exception frame is sent.
Field Size (bytes)
Slave number 1
171 (ABh) 1 Generic access exception (2Bh + 80h)
14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification
01 1 Type of error
CRC16 2

SEPED310017EN 319
 Modbus communication Appendix 1. Modbus protocol

Introduction
This appendix describes the Modbus protocol and the functions required for Modbus
communication with Sepam. It is not intended to present the entire protocol.

Master Presentation
Exchanges
DE81022

The Modbus protocol exchanges information using a request-reply mechanism

between a master and a slave.
Request An exchange is always initiated (request sent) by the master. The only action on
the part of a slave is to reply to requests received.
Where the communication network permits, several slaves units can be connected
to a single master. A request contains the slave address (a unique number) to identify
Reply
the recipient. Non-addressed slaves disregard the requests received.

Modbus Protocol Data Unit

Every Modbus request or response frame includes a Modbus PDU (protocol data
unit) made up of 2 fields.
Function code Data
Slave Sepam series 60 Sepam series 80
Modbus is a master-slave network.
b function code (1 byte): indicates the type of request (1 to 127)
b data (0 to n bytes): depends on the function code, see below.
If there is no error, the function codes in the reply and in the request are identical.

Modbus data types

Modbus uses 2 types of data: bits and 16-bit words (also called registers).
Each element of data is identified by a 16-bit address.
The most-significant byte in 16-bit words is always sent first, for both data and
addresses.

5 Serial line Modbus

This description is limited to the Modbus protocol using a serial link in binary mode
(RTU mode).

Frames
All the frames exchanged have the same structure, made up of 3 parts.
Slave address Modbus PDU Check (CRC16)

b Slave address (1 byte): from 1 to 247 (0 for broadcasting)

b Modbus PDU: as previously described
b Check (2 bytes): CRC16 used to check frame integrity.
The slave addresses in the reply and in the request are identical.
The maximum size of a frame is 256 bytes (255 for Sepam).

Synchronization of exchanges
DE80330

Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3.5 characters is
considered as the beginning of a new frame. A minimum silence of 3.5 characters
must always be observed between two frames.
A slave disregards all frames:
b received with a physical error for 1 or more characters (format error, parity error,
etc.)
b with an incorrect CRC16 result
b for which it is not the recipient.

Broadcasting
The master can also address all slaves using the conventional address 0. This type
of exchange is called broadcasting.
Slaves do not respond to broadcast messages. As a result, only messages that do
not require the transmission of data by the slaves can be broadcast.
The broadcasting technique.

320 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 1. Modbus protocol

Modbus over TCP/IP

Requests and replies are exchanged as TCP/IP messages over a TCP connection.
The slave address is therefore its IP address.

Frames
The application layer part of a Modbus/TCP frame is made up of 2 fields:
MBAP Header Modbus PDU

b MBAP (Modbus Application) Header (7 bytes): identifies the frame

b Modbus PDU: as previously described.

Modbus Application header

It contains the following fields:

Field Length Description Request Response

Transaction 2 bytes Identification of a Initialized by the Copied by the
identifier Modbus request/ client server from the
response transaction received request
Protocol identifier 2 bytes 0 = Modbus protocol Initialized by the Copied by the
client server from the
received request
Length 2 bytes Number of following Initialized by the Initialized by the
bytes (including unit client server
identifier)
Unit identifier 1 byte In case of gateways, Initialized by the Copied by the
identifies a remote slave client server from the
device connected on a received request
serial line. Should be 255
in other cases.

SEPED310017EN 321
 Modbus communication Appendix 1. Modbus protocol

Modbus protocol data units

Types of functions
The Modbus protocol provides read and write functions as well as network-
management and diagnostics functions.

Read N bits functions (1 and 2)

Request
1 or 2 Address of first bit to be read Number of bits N to be read
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

Reply
1 or 2 Number of bytes read Data
1 byte 1 byte (N + 7)/8 bytes

byte 1 byte 2 Function code

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b 1 for internal or output bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 b 2 for input bits.
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 Data
B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 F E D C The first bit sent is the LSB in the first byte and the subsequent bits follow in that
Example: coding of the data field for reading 13 bits, starting at
order. Any excess bits in the last byte are set to 0.
address 104h, with two reply bytes (the vertical numbers
indicate the Modbus address of the bit in the corresponding Read N words functions (3 and 4)
position in the reply). Request
3 or 4 Address of first word to be read Number of words N to be read
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

Reply
3 or 4 Number of bytes read Data
1 byte 1 byte 2N bytes

5 Function code
b 3 for internal or output words
b 4 for input words.
Data
Words are sent in the order of increasing addresses.

Write bit function (5)

Request
5 Bit address Bit value 0: bit set to 0 0
FFh: bit set to 1
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte

Reply
It is identical to the request.

Write word function (6)

Request
6 Word address Word value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

Reply
It is identical to the request.

Write N consecutive bits function (15)

Request
0Fh Address of 1st bit Number of bits Number of bytes Data
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte (N + 7)/8 bytes

Data
Bits are coded similar to the Read bits function.
Reply
0Fh Address of 1st bit written Number of bits written
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

322 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 1. Modbus protocol

Write N consecutive words function (16)

Request
10h Address of 1st word Number of words Number of bytes Data
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2N bytes

Data
Words are sent in the order of increasing addresses.
Reply
10h Address of 1st word written Number of words written
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

High-speed reading of 8 bits function (7)

Request
7
1 byte

Reply
7 Status byte
1 byte 1 byte

For Sepam, the status byte is the most-significant byte in the Sepam check-word
(address 0C8Fh), i.e. the bits C8F8h to C8FFh.

Diagnosis function (8)

Request
8 Subcode Data
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

Reply
8 Subcode Data
1 byte

Subcodes for function 8

2 bytes 2 bytes
5
Sub- Use Request Reply
code Datum Datum
0000h Echo mode Any Datum received
000Ah Reset counters CPT1 to CPT9 0000 0000
000Bh Read CPT1 (frames without errors) 0000 CPT1
000Ch Read CPT2 (frames with errors) 0000 CPT2
000Dh Read CPT3 (exception replies) 0000 CPT3
000Eh Read CPT4 (frames sent to station) 0000 CPT4
000Fh Read CPT5 (frames broadcast) 0000 CPT5
0010h Read CPT6 (not managed by Sepam) 0000 CPT6
0011h Read CPT7 (not managed by Sepam) 0000 CPT7
0012h Read CPT8 (frames with physical errors) 0000 CPT8

Read event counter function (11)

For Sepam, the event counter is CPT9 (number of correct requests received and
correctly executed).
Request
0Bh
1 byte

Reply
0Bh 0000 Counter CPT9
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes

Exception replies
Each time a slave station receives a frame without errors that it cannot process, it
sends an exception reply with the elements below.
Request function code + 80h Type of exception
1 byte 1 byte

Type of exception Meaning

01 Unknown function code
02 Incorrect address
03 Incorrect datum
04 Device not ready
07 Negative acknowledgment

SEPED310017EN 323
 Modbus communication Appendix 1. Modbus protocol

Calculation of the CRC16 Example of calculation in the C language

The function uses two parameters:
The CRC16 is calculated by the station sending the
b unsigned char *puchMsg: points to the frame for CRC calculation
frame. On reception, the CRC16 is recalculated and
b unsigned short usDataLen: number of bytes in the frame.
compared to the received value. If the two values are
The function returns the CRC as an unsigned short type. All possible CRC values
not the same, the frame is rejected.
are listed in two tables indexed according to the value of the successive bytes in the
The CRC16 uses two bytes. Contrary to the general
frame. One table contains the 256 possible values for the most-significant byte in the
Modbus rule, the least-significant byte is sent first. It is
CRC and the other table contains the 256 possible values for the least-significant
the product of the polynomial division of the frame by
byte in the CRC.
the generating polynomial X16 + X15 + X2 + 1.
A number of methods may be used to calculate it. The Note: the result is ready to be inserted in the frame, the order of the bytes has already been
reversed.
table method is often used because it is very effective.
The program below, written in the C language, is an
example of this method.

unsigned short CRC16(puchMsg, usDataLen)

unsigned char *puchMsg ; /* message to calculate CRC upon */
unsigned short usDataLen ; /* quantity of bytes in message */
{
unsigned char uchCRCHi = 0xFF ; /* high byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned char uchCRCLo = 0xFF ; /* low byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned uIndex ; /* will index into CRC lookup table */
while (usDataLen––) { /* pass through message buffer */
uIndex = uchCRCHi ^ *puchMsgg++ ; /* calculate the CRC */
uchCRCHi = uchCRCLo ^ auchCRCHi[uIndex] ;
uchCRCLo = auchCRCLo[uIndex] ;
}
return (uchCRCHi << 8 | uchCRCLo) ;
}

/* Table of CRC values for high–order byte */

5
static unsigned char auchCRCHi[] = {
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40 } ;

/* Table of CRC values for low–order byte */

static char auchCRCLo[] = {
0x00, 0xC0, 0xC1, 0x01, 0xC3, 0x03, 0x02, 0xC2, 0xC6, 0x06, 0x07, 0xC7, 0x05, 0xC5, 0xC4, 0x04,
0xCC, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0xCD, 0x0F, 0xCF, 0xCE, 0x0E, 0x0A, 0xCA, 0xCB, 0x0B, 0xC9, 0x09, 0x08, 0xC8,
0xD8, 0x18, 0x19, 0xD9, 0x1B, 0xDB, 0xDA, 0x1A, 0x1E, 0xDE, 0xDF, 0x1F, 0xDD, 0x1D, 0x1C, 0xDC,
0x14, 0xD4, 0xD5, 0x15, 0xD7, 0x17, 0x16, 0xD6, 0xD2, 0x12, 0x13, 0xD3, 0x11, 0xD1, 0xD0, 0x10,
0xF0, 0x30, 0x31, 0xF1, 0x33, 0xF3, 0xF2, 0x32, 0x36, 0xF6, 0xF7, 0x37, 0xF5, 0x35, 0x34, 0xF4,
0x3C, 0xFC, 0xFD, 0x3D, 0xFF, 0x3F, 0x3E, 0xFE, 0xFA, 0x3A, 0x3B, 0xFB, 0x39, 0xF9, 0xF8, 0x38,
0x28, 0xE8, 0xE9, 0x29, 0xEB, 0x2B, 0x2A, 0xEA, 0xEE, 0x2E, 0x2F, 0xEF, 0x2D, 0xED, 0xEC, 0x2C,
0xE4, 0x24, 0x25, 0xE5, 0x27, 0xE7, 0xE6, 0x26, 0x22, 0xE2, 0xE3, 0x23, 0xE1, 0x21, 0x20, 0xE0,
0xA0, 0x60, 0x61, 0xA1, 0x63, 0xA3, 0xA2, 0x62, 0x66, 0xA6, 0xA7, 0x67, 0xA5, 0x65, 0x64, 0xA4,
0x6C, 0xAC, 0xAD, 0x6D, 0xAF, 0x6F, 0x6E, 0xAE, 0xAA, 0x6A, 0x6B, 0xAB, 0x69, 0xA9, 0xA8, 0x68,
0x78, 0xB8, 0xB9, 0x79, 0xBB, 0x7B, 0x7A, 0xBA, 0xBE, 0x7E, 0x7F, 0xBF, 0x7D, 0xBD, 0xBC, 0x7C,
0xB4, 0x74, 0x75, 0xB5, 0x77, 0xB7, 0xB6, 0x76, 0x72, 0xB2, 0xB3, 0x73, 0xB1, 0x71, 0x70, 0xB0,
0x50, 0x90, 0x91, 0x51, 0x93, 0x53, 0x52, 0x92, 0x96, 0x56, 0x57, 0x97, 0x55, 0x95, 0x94, 0x54,
0x9C, 0x5C, 0x5D, 0x9D, 0x5F, 0x9F, 0x9E, 0x5E, 0x5A, 0x9A, 0x9B, 0x5B, 0x99, 0x59, 0x58, 0x98,
0x88, 0x48, 0x49, 0x89, 0x4B, 0x8B, 0x8A, 0x4A, 0x4E, 0x8E, 0x8F, 0x4F, 0x8D, 0x4D, 0x4C, 0x8C,
0x44, 0x84, 0x85, 0x45, 0x87, 0x47, 0x46, 0x86, 0x82, 0x42, 0x43, 0x83, 0x41, 0x81, 0x80, 0x40 } ;

324 EPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

Setting coding
Data format
All the settings are transmitted in 32-bit signed 2's complement integer format.

Coding of tripping and timer hold curves

The numbers correspond to the setting columns in the lists of settings.
1 Tripping curves
0 = definite time
1 = inverse 9 = IEC very inverse / B
2 = long time inverse 10 = IEC extremely inverse / C
3 = very inverse 11 = IEEE moderately inverse
4 = extremely inverse 12 = IEEE very inverse
5 = ultra inverse 13 = IEEE extremely inverse
6 = RI 14 = IAC inverse
7 = IEC inverse / A 15 = IAC very inverse
8 = IEC long time inverse / B 16 = IAC extr. inverse
24 = Customized curve
25 = EPATR-B
26 = EPATR-C
2 Tripping curves
0 = definite time 11 = IEEE moderately inverse
7 = IEC inverse / A 12 = IEEE very inverse
8 = IEC long time inverse / B 13 = IEEE extremely inverse
9 = IEC very inverse / B 17 = Specific Schneider curve
10 = IEC extremely inverse / C 20 = RI²
3 Timer hold curves
0 = definite time
1 = IDMT

Common protection settings

All protection functions have the following settings at the head of the table.
Setting Data Format/Unit
5
1 Latching 0: no
1: yes
2 Program logic see below
3 Activity 0: Off
1: On
4 Measurement origin see below

Details on program-logic field

Bit 31 30 .... 4 3 2 1 0
DES AGR CDC

CDC = 1: the protection function takes part in circuit-breaker/contactor control

= 0: the protection function does not take part
AGR = 1: the protection function takes part in genset shutdown
(generator application)
= 0: the protection function does not take part
DES = 1: the protection function takes part in de-excitation
(generator application)
= 0: the protection function does not take part
When a common protection setting is not applicable to a particular protection
function, it is signaled "reserved" in the table for the function.

Measurement origin
A few special cases of coding for the measurement-origin field, for the ANSI 50N/51
N, ANSI 67N/67NC and ANSI 59N protection functions, are indicated in the table
below:

Value 50N/51N 67N/67NC 59N

0 I0Σ I0Σ V0
1 I0 I0 Vnt

SEPED310017EN 325
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

Protection settings
They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes.

ANSI 12 - Overspeed
Function number: 72xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Set point %
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 14 - Underspeed
Function number: 77xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Set point %
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 21B - Underimpedance

Function number: 7401
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Zs set point mΩ
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 25 – Synchro-check

5 Function number: 1801

1
Setting Data
Reserved
Format/Unit

2 Reserved
3 Activity 0: off
1: on
4 dUs set point % Vnp sync1 or % Unp sync1
5 dFs set point 0.01 Hz
6 dPhis set point °
7 Us high set point % Vnp sync1 or % Unp sync1
8 Us low set point % Vnp sync1 or % Unp sync1
9 Operating modes 1: Dead1 AND Live2
(no-voltage conditions for which coupling is allowed) 2: Live1 AND Dead2
3: Dead1 XOR Dead2
4: Dead1 OR Dead2
5: Dead1 AND Dead2
10 Lead time 10 ms
11 Use of voltage check for coupling authorization 0: no
1: yes

326 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 27 - Undervoltage
Function number: 32xx
Unit 1: xx = 01 to unit 4: xx = 04
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Tripping curve 0: definite
19: IDMT
27: customized
6 Voltage mode 0: phase-to-neutral
1: phase-to-phase
7 Us set point % Unp
8 Tripping time delay DT: 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT: See note below
Customized: range = 1 (TMS = 1)
9 DT of 1st point on the curve 10 ms
10 U/Un of 1st point on the curve %
11 DT of 2nd point on the curve 10 ms
12 U/Un of 2nd point on the curve %
13 DT of 3rd point on the curve N/A
14 U/Un of 3rd point on the curve N/A
...
29 DT of 11th point on the curve N/A
30 U/Un of of 11th point on the curve N/A

Note setting 8
b For a setting mode with 10 I/IS: the range varies from 0.05 s to 300 s.
b For a setting in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode, the range depends on the
selected curve and varies as follows:
v inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
v very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
v long time inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
v extremely inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
v IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
5
v IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
v IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
v IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
v IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
v IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4
Notes settings 9 to 30
The customized curve is unique and only concerns unit 1. However, to retain
consistency with the Sepam software architecture, the same frame format is used for
all units. Unused points are set to (-1, -1). This is the case for the points for unit 2 and
above. It is also the case for additional points for unit 1. For example, if the curve is
defined by 6 points, the last 5 are set to (-1, -1). There is no "Number of points" setting
in the frame.
For each useful point, the value of T must be greater than or equal to that of the
previous point. The first point must be 0 (rising or falling operations are allowed).
The value of U/Un for the last useful point must be greater than all the other values
of U/Un.

ANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage

Function number: 38xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Vds set point % Unp
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage

Function number: 35xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Us set point % Unp
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

SEPED310017EN 327
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower

Function number: 53xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Access 0: reverse power
1: overpower
6 Ps set point 100 W
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower

Function number: 5401
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Access 0: reverse power
1: overpower
6 Qs set point 100 var
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent

Function number: 2201
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Is set point % Ib
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower

Function number: 55xx

5 Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02

Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Access 0: drawn
1: supplied
6 Ps set point 100 W
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring

Function number: 46xx
Unit 1: xx = 01 to unit 16: xx = 10h
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Ts1 alarm set point °C
6 Ts2 alarm set point °C

ANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)

Function number: 7001
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Xa resistance 1 mΩ
6 Xb resistance 1 mΩ
7 Xc resistance 1 mΩ
8 Tripping time delay circle 1 10 ms
9 Tripping time delay circle Xd 10 ms

328 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance

Function number: 45xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Tripping curve 2
6 Is set point % Ib
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms
8 K setting 1 to 100

ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage

Function number: 40xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Vis set point % Unp
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting time

Function number: 4401
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Is set point % Ib
6 ST excessive starting time 10 ms
7 LT locked rotor time 10 ms
8 LTS locked on start time 10 ms

ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload

5
Function number: 4301
Thermal overload
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Negative sequence factor (K) 0: none (0) 1: low (2.25)
2: medium (4.5) 3: high (9)
6 Is set point (shift group 1/group 2) % Ib
7 Ambient temperature taken into account 0: no
1: yes
8 Maximum equipment temperature °C
9 Additional settings taken into account (group 2) 0: no
1: yes
10 Learnt cooling time constant (T2 learnt) taken into 0: no
account 1: yes
11 Group 1 - thermal alarm set point %
12 Group 1 - thermal tripping set point %
13 Group 1 - heating time constant
14 Group 1 - cooling time constant min.
15 Group 1 - initial heat rise %
16 Group 2 - thermal alarm set point %
17 Group 2 - thermal tripping set point %
18 Group 2 - heating time constant min.
19 Group 2 - cooling time constant min.
20 Group 2 - initial heat rise %
21 Group 2 - base current for group 2 0.1 A
22 49RMS cable - admissible current 0.1 A
49RMS capacitor - tripping current 0.1 A
23 Associated time constant min.
24 Current setting 0.1 A
25 Alarm current 0.1 A
26 Type of thermal model 0: generic
Note: b thermal overload for machines: parameters 1 to 21
b thermal overload for cables: parameters 1 to 4 and 22 to 23
b thermal overload for capacitors: parameters 1 to 4 and 22 to 25

SEPED310017EN 329
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload (cont.)

Function number: 4301
Motor thermal overload
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Latching 0: no, 1: yes
2 Circuit breaker control 0: no, 1: yes
3 Activity 0: off
1: on
4 Ialarm = current alarm set point %
5 Itrip = current tripping set point %
6 Tlong = motor heating time constant min.

7 Tshort = stator heating time constant min.

8 Tcool = cooling time constant min.

9 Alpha = rotor/stator exchange coefficient %
10 IL = locked rotor current %
11 LRT = locked rotor torque %
12 Idem = starting current set point %
13 Ambient T taken into account by sensor 8 0: no, 1: yes
14 Tmax = max. stator temperature constant °C
15 Tc = locked rotor cold limit time seconds
16 Th = locked rotor hot limit time seconds
17 Sh = Heat rise set point for hot state bit %
... Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Type of thermal model (1) 1: Motor
(1) This setting is always at 1 for the motor thermal overload model.

Transformer thermal overload

Setting Data Format/Unit

5
1 Latching 0: no, 1: yes
2 Circuit breaker control 0: no, 1: yes
3 Activity 0: off
1: on
4 Measurement origin 0: primary
1: secondary
5 Type of transformer 0: AN dry-type
1: AF dry-type
2: distribution ONAN immersed
3: High and medium power
ONAN immersed
4: ONAF
5: OF
6: OD
6 Insulation class (1) b Dry-type transformer: 105,
120, 130, 135, 180, 200 or
220°
b Immersed transformer:
0 (not significant)
Unit = °
7 Alarm temperature (group 1) (2) b Dry-type transformer:
Class 105: 95 to 130°
Class 120: 110 to 145°
Class 130: 120 to 155°
Class 180: 170 to 205°
Class 200: 190 to 225°
Class 220: 210 to 245°
b Immersed transformer:
98 to 160 °
Unit = °
8 Tripping temperature (group 1) Same as alarm temperature
9 Alarm temperature (group 2) (2) Same as group 1
10 Tripping temperature (group 2) Same as group 1
11 Transformer time constant 1 to 600
Unit = minutes
(1) This setting only applies to dry-type transformers. Value 0 12 Oil time constant (3) 5 to 600
accepted for an immersed transformer. Unit = minutes
(2) Alarm temperature must be less than the tripping 13 Ambient T taken into account by sensor 8 0: no, 1: yes
temperature.
14 Oil T taken into account by sensor 8 (3) 0: no, 1: yes
(3) This parameter only applies to immersed transformers.
Value 0 accepted for a dry-type transformer. 15 Additional settings taken into account 0: no, 1: yes
(4) This setting is always at 1 for the transformer thermal (group 2) (3)
overload model. 16 Restricted oil flow 0: no, 1: yes
17 ... 25 Reserved
26 Type of thermal model (4) 2: Transformer

330 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure

Function number: 9801
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Common settings
2 Reserved
3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Use of breaker closed input 0: no
1: yes
6 Is set point 0.1 A
7 Time 10 ms

ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent

Function number: 01xx
Unit 1: xx = 01 to unit 4: xx = 04
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Confirmation 0 = none
1 = neg. seq. overvoltage
2 = undervoltage
6 Group A - tripping curve 1
7 Group A - Is set point 0.1 A
8 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
9 Group A - timer hold curve 3
10 Group A - timer hold 10 ms
11 Group B - tripping curve 1
12 Group B - Is set point 0.1 A
13 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
14 Group B - timer hold curve 3
15 Group B - timer hold 10 ms
16
17
Group A - harmonic 2 restraint
Group A - Isc min
0: active, 1: inactive
0.1 A 5
18 Group B - harmonic 2 restraint 0: active, 1: inactive
19 Group B - Isc min 0.1 A
20 H2 restraint set point (1) %
(1) Parameter common to all groups and all units.
ANSI 50N/51N - Earth fault
Function number: 06xx
Unit 1: xx = 01 to unit 4: xx = 04
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Group A - tripping curve 1
6 Group A - Is0 set point 0.1 A
7 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
8 Group A - timer hold curve 3
9 Group A - timer hold 10 ms
10 Group A - H2 restraint 0: yes
1: no
11 Group B - tripping curve 1
12 Group B - Is0 set point 0.1 A
13 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
14 Group B - timer hold curve 3
15 Group B - timer hold 10 ms
16 Group B - H2 restraint 0: yes
1: no

ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained phase overcurrent

Function number: 1901
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Tripping curve 1
6 Is set point 0.1 A
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms
8 Timer hold curve 3
9 Timer hold 10 ms

SEPED310017EN 331
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 59 - Overvoltage
Function number: 28xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Voltage mode 0: phase-to-neutral
1: phase-to-phase
6 Us set point % Unp
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement

Function number: 39xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Tripping curve 0: definite
18: IDMT
6 Vs0 set point % Unp
7 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 64 REF - Restricted earth fault differential

Function number: 64xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Is0 set point 0.1 A

ANSI 66 - Starts per hour

Function number: 4201

5 1
2
Setting Data
Common settings
Reserved
Format/Unit

3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Period of time Hours
6 Total number of starts 1
7 Number of consecutive hot starts 1
8 Number of consecutive cold starts 1
9 Delay between stop/start min.
10 Delay between consecutive starts min.

ANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent

Function number: 52xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Group A - direction 0: line 1: busbar
6 Group A - characteristic angle 3: 30° 4: 45° 5: 60°
7 Group A - tripping logic 0: 1/3 1: 2/3
8 Group A - tripping curve 1
9 Group A - Is set point 0.1 A
10 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
11 Group A - timer hold curve 3
12 Group A - timer hold 10 ms
13 Group B - direction 0: line 1: busbar
14 Group B - characteristic angle 3: 30° 4: 45° 5: 60°
15 Group B - tripping logic 0: 1/3 1: 2/3
16 Group B - tripping curve 1
17 Group B - Is set point 0.1 A
18 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
19 Group B - timer hold curve 3
20 Group B - timer hold 10 ms

332 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault

Function number: 50xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Access 0: projection (type 1)
1: directional (type 2)
2: directional with adjustable
sector (type 3)
6 Group A - direction 0: line 1: busbar
7 Group A - types 1 and 2: characteristic angle 0: -45° 1: 0° 2: 15°
3: 30° 4: 45° 5: 60°
6: 90°
Group A - type 3: limiting angle 1 0° to 359°
8 Group A - type 1: sector 2: sector 76° 3: sector 83°
4: sector 86°
Group A - type 3: limiting angle 2 0° to 359°
9 Group A - tripping curve 1
10 Group A – Is0 set point 0.1 A
11 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
12 Group A - types 1 and 2: Vs0 set point % Unp
Group A - type 3: Vs0 set point 0.1% Unp
13 Group A - timer hold curve 3
14 Group A - timer hold 10 ms
15 Group A - memory time 10 ms
16 Group A - memory voltage % Unp
17 Group B - direction 0: line 1: busbar
18 Group B - types 1 and 2: characteristic angle Same as group A
Group B - type 3: limiting angle 1 0° to 359°
19 Group B - type 1: sector Same as group A
Group B - type 3: limiting angle 2 0° to 359°
20 Group B - tripping curve 1

5
21 Group B - Is0 set point 0.1 A
22 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
23 Group B - types 1 and 2: Vs0 set point % Unp
Group B - type 3: Vs0 set point 0.1% Unp
24 Group B - timer hold curve 3
25 Group B - timer hold 10 ms
26 Group B - memory time 10 ms
27 Group B - memory voltage % Unp

ANSI 81H - Overfrequency

Function number: 57xx
Unit 1: xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Fs set point (1) 0.1 Hz
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms
7 Reserved
8 Vs set point % Unp
9 Fs set point 0.01 Hz
(1) Setting 5 is reserved for future compatibility with firmware versions higher than version 8xx.

ANSI 81L - Underfrequency

Function number: 56xx
Unit 1: xx = 01 to unit 4: xx = 04
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 to 4 Common settings
5 Fs set point(1) 0.1 Hz
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms
7 Restraint 0: no
1: yes
8 Vs set point % Unp
9 Inhibition set point for frequency variation Hz/s
10 Fs set point 0.01 Hz
(1) Setting 5 is reserved for future compatibility with firmware versions higher than version 8xx.

SEPED310017EN 333
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 81R – Rate of change of frequency

Function number: 58xx
Unit: 1 xx = 01, unit 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Latching 0: no
1: yes
2 Switchgear control 0: no
1: yes
3 Activity 0: off
1: on
4 Reserved
5 dfs/dt set point 0.01 Hz/s
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

Other function settings

ANSI 60 - CT supervision
Function number: 2601
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Action on 21G, 46, 40, 51N, 32P, 37P, 32Q, and 0: none
64REF protections 1: inhibition
6 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 60FL - VT supervision

Function number: 2701
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Reserved
2 Reserved

5 3
4
5
Common settings
Reserved
Use breaker-position or voltage-presence criterion 0: circuit breaker
1: voltage
6 Check loss of 3 V/2 U 0: no
1: yes
7 Test current 0: no
1: yes
8 Use Vi, Ii criterion 0: no
1: yes
9 Action on 21G, 27, 27D, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 47, 0: none
51V, 59, 59N protections 1: inhibition
10 Action on 67 protection 0: non directional
1: inhibition
11 Action on 67N protection 0: non directional
1: inhibition
12 Vi tripping set point %
13 Ii tripping set point %
14 3 V/ 2 U loss time 10 ms
15 Vi, Ii criterion time 10 ms

334 SEPED310017EN
Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

ANSI 79 - Recloser
Function number: 1701
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Common settings
4 Reserved
5 Number of cycles 1 to 4
6 Reclaim time 10 ms
7 Safety time until ready 10 ms
8 Maximum additional dead time 0: no
1: yes
9 Maximum wait time 10 ms
10 Cycle 1 activation mode see below
11 Cycle 2, 3, 4 activation mode see below
12 Cycle 1 dead time 10 ms
13 Cycle 2 dead time 10 ms
14 Cycle 3 dead time 10 ms
15 Cycle 4 dead time 10 ms

Cycle activation mode

The activation mode of each cycle is coded as follows:
Bit Activation by (if bit set to 1) / Non activation by (if bit set to 0)
0 Instantaneous protection 50/51 unit 1
1 Delayed protection 50/51 unit 1
2 Instantaneous protection 50/51 unit 2
3 Delayed protection 50/51 unit 2
4 Instantaneous protection 50/51 unit 3
5 Delayed protection 50/51 unit 3
6 Instantaneous protection 50/51 unit 4
7 Delayed protection 50/51 unit 4

5
8 Instantaneous protection 50N/51N unit 1
9 Delayed protection 50N/51N unit 1
10 Instantaneous protection 50N/51N unit 2
11 Delayed protection 50N/51N unit 2
12 Instantaneous protection 50N/51N unit 3
13 Delayed protection 50N/51N unit 3
14 Instantaneous protection 50N/51N unit 4
15 Delayed protection 50N/51N unit 4
16 Instantaneous protection 67N unit 1
17 Delayed protection 67N unit 1
18 Instantaneous protection 67N unit 2
19 Delayed protection 67N unit 2
20 Instantaneous protection 67 unit 1
21 Delayed protection 67 unit 1
22 Instantaneous protection 67 unit 2
23 Delayed protection 67 unit 2
24 Instantaneous V_DECL logic equation

SEPED310017EN 335
 Modbus communication Appendix 2. Function settings

General parameters
These settings are read accessible only.
Function number: D002
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Working language 1: English 2: other
2 Rated frequency 50, 60 (Hz) 2: group B
3 Active group of settings 1: group A
3: selection by logic input
4: selection by remote control
4 Demand-value integration period 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes
5 Type of cubicle 1: incomer 2: feeder
6 Active-energy increment 100 to 5000000 (W)
7 Reactive-energy increment 100 to 5000000 (var)
8 Phase-rotation direction 1: direction 123 2: direction 132
9 Temperature unit 1: °C 2: °F
10 Remote-setting authorization 1: no 2: yes
11 Time synchronization mode 1: COM1 port 3: input I103
5: none 6: Ethernet port
12 Remote-control mode 1: SBO mode 2: direct mode
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Rated auxiliary voltage 24 to 250 (V DC)
16 Aux. voltage alarm low set point % rated Vaux, min. 20 V
17 Aux. voltage alarm high set point % rated Vaux, max. 275 V
18 Logic inputs ignored on loss of Vaux 1: inactive 2: active
19 Base current Ib 0.2 to 1.3 In (A)
20 Rated current In 1 to 15 kA
21 Number of phase CTs 1: 2 CTs 2: 3 CTs
22 Phase CT rating 1: 1 A 2: 5 A 3: LPCT
23 Rated residual current In0 10 to 150000 (0.1 A)
24 Residual current measurement mode 1: CSH 2 A 3: CSH 20 A
4: 1 A CT 6: 5 A CT

5 8: ACE990 range 1
9: ACE990 range 2
11: not measured
25 Reserved
26 Rated primary voltage Unp 0 A<In≤6.25 kA: 220 V ≤ Unp ≤ 250 kV
6.25 kA<In≤15 kA: 220V≤ Unp ≤ 20 kV
27 Rated secondary voltage Uns 90 to 230 (V)
28 VT wiring 1: 3 V, 2: 2 U, 3: 1 U, 4: 1 V
29 Residual voltage mode 1: none 2: Σ3V
3: VT Uns/ 3 4: VT Uns/3
30 Neutral-point residual voltage measurement 1: none 2: present
31 Neutral-point rated voltage Unp 220 to 250000 (V)
32 Neutral-point rated voltage Uns 57 V to 133 V
33-48 Reserved

Application-specific parameters
These settings are read accessible only.
Function number: D003
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Transformer presence 1: no
2: yes
2 Voltage winding 1 Un1 220 to 250000 V
3 Voltage winding 2 Un2 220 to 440000 V
4 Power S 100 to 999000 kVA
5 Vector shift 0 to 11
6 Rated motor speed 100 to 3000 rpm (1)
100 to 3600 rpm (2)
7 Number of pulses per rotation 1 to 1800
8 Zero speed threshold 5 to 20%
15 Rated power kW
16 Synchronous reactance of d axis 0,1 %
17 Transient reactance of d axis 0,1 %
18 Synchronous reactance of q axis 0,1 %
19 Moment of inertia for turbine + generator or Kg.m 2
motor + load
(1) For a frequency of 50 Hz.
(2) For a frequency of 60 Hz.

336 SEPED310017EN
Installation Contents

Safety instructions 338

Precautions 339
Equipment identification 340 1
List of Sepam series 60 references 342
Base unit 344
Dimensions 344
Mounting 345
Connection 346
Connection of Sepam C60 348
Connection of phase current inputs 349
Connection of residual current inputs 350
Connection of low voltage residual current inputs 352
Connection of low voltage current inputs for restricted earth protec-
tion (ANSI 64REF) 354
Connection of low voltage phase voltage inputs 356
Functions available according to connected voltage inputs 357
1 A/5 A current transformers 358
LPCT type current sensors 361
CSH120 and CSH200
Core balance CTs 364
CSH30 interposing ring CT 366
ACE990 Core balance CT interface 368
Voltage transformers 370
MES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 input / 6 output modules 371
Presentation 371
Installation 372
Optional remote modules 374

6
Selection guide 374
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module 376
MSA141 Analog output module 378
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module 380
MCS025 Synchro-check module 382
Communication accessory selection guide 386
Connection of communication interfaces 387
Connection cords 387
Characteristics of communication networks 388
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface 389
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface 390
ACE937 fiber optic interface 391
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces 392
Description 394
Connection 395
ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces 398
Description 400
Connection 401
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter 404
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters 406
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server 408

SEPED310017EN 337
 Installation Safety instructions

This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely
before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment. Carefully
read and follow the safety instructions described below.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC, BURNS OR
EXPLOSION
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits
are live until they have been completely de-energized, tested and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of
power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment, carefully
inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the
equipment.
b The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling,
installation, and operation. Neglecting fundamental installation requirements
can lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other
property.
b Handling this product requires relevant expertise in the field of protection of
electrical networks. Only competent people who have this expertise are
allowed to configure and set up this product.
b Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on any equipment in
which the relay is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the relay.
High voltage testing can damage electronic components contained in the
Sepam unit.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

338 SEPED310017EN
Installation Precautions

We recommend that you follow the Transport, handling and storage

instructions given in this document for quick,
1
Sepam in its original packaging
correct installation of your Sepam unit: Transport:
b Equipment identification Sepam can be shipped to any destination by all usual means of transport without
b Assembly taking any additional precautions.
b Connection of inputs, current, voltage and Handling:
Sepam can be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being
sensors dropped by a person standing at floor-level.
b Connection of power supply
Storage:
b Checking prior to commissioning Sepam can be stored in its original packaging, in an appropriate location for several
years:
b Temperature between -25°C and +70°C (between -13°F and +158°F)
b Humidity y 90%.
Periodic, yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is
recommended.
Energize the Sepam for 1 hour:
b every 5 years for a storage temperature < 30 ° C (86 ° F)
b every 3 years for a storage temperature u 30 ° C (86 ° F)
b every 2 years for a storage temperature u 50 ° C (122 ° F)
Once Sepam has been unpacked, it should be energized as soon as possible.
Sepam installed in a cubicle
Transport:
Sepam can be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary
conditions used for cubicles. Storage conditions should be taken into consideration
for a long period of transport.
Handling:
Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle, check its condition by visual inspection and
energizing.
Storage:
Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible. Sepam, like all electronic
units, should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month. Sepam
should be energized as quickly as possible. If this is not possible, the cubicle
reheating system should be activated.

Environment of the installed Sepam

Operation in a damp environment
The temperature/relative humidity factors must be compatible with the unit’s
6
environmental withstand characteristics.
If the use conditions are outside the normal zone, special arrangements should be
made before commissioning, such as air conditioning of the premises.
Operation in a polluted atmosphere
A contaminated industrial atmosphere (such as the presence of chlorine, hydrofluoric
acid, sulfur, solvents, etc.) can cause corrosion of the electronic components, in
which case environmental control arrangements should be made (such as
pressurized premises with filtered air, etc.) before commissioning.
The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the
IEC 60068-2-60 and EIA 364-65A (See "Environmental Characteristic", page 17).

SEPED310017EN 339
 Installation Equipment identification

Identification of the base unit

Each Sepam is delivered in a separate package containing:
b 1 Sepam series 60 base unit, with its memory cartridge and the connector
A tightened
b 8 spring clips
b 1 terminal block identification label
b 2 keys (mimic-based UMI only)
b 1 Quick Start and a certificate of compliance
The other optional accessories such as modules, current input connectors and cords
are delivered in separate packages.
To identify a Sepam, inspect the 3 labels which are visible when the door on the front
panel is opened:
b label with base unit hardware reference, stuck on the back of the door on the front
panel:

Serial n°
DE80841

Reference n° 59836 11500002

Series 60/advanced UMI/24-250V
Série 60/IHM avancée/24-250V

Commercial SEP363
name

Final testing: 59836 11500002

Test PASS: 12/14/2011
date and Operator: C99
operator code

b 2 labels stuck on the cartridge:

11490004
DE80796

Memory cartridge series 60 & 80

Cartouche mémoire série 60 & 80

11490004

Cartridge hardware reference.

S60

6
59787
DE80797

S60
60
59846 60

5978759846

Reference of software loaded in the cartridge:

b application
b working language.

340 SEPED310017EN
Installation Equipment identification

Identification of accessories
The accessories such as optional modules, current or voltage connectors and
connection cords come in separate packages, identified by labels.

b Example of MSA141 module identification label:

1

DE80209

SEPED310017EN 341
 Installation List of Sepam series 60 references

Reference Description
59608 DSM303, remote advanced UMI module

59629 CCA634 connector for 1 A/5 A CT + I0 current sensors

59630 CCA630 connector for 1 A/5 A CT current sensors

59634 CSH30 interposing ring CT for I0 input

59635 CSH120 residual current sensor, diameter 120 mm (4.75 in)
59636 CSH200 residual current sensor, diameter 200 mm (7.87 in)

59638 ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server with PRI voltage surge arrester
59639 AMT852 lead sealing accessory

59641 MET148-2 8-temperature sensor module

59642 ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface
59643 ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface
59644 ACE937 fiber-optic interface

59647 MSA141 1 analog output module

59648 ACE909-2 RS 485/RS 232 converter
59649 ACE919 AC RS 485/RS 485 interface (AC power supply)
59650 ACE919 DC RS 485/RS 485 interface (DC power supply)

59658 ACE850TP RJ45 Ethernet multi-protocol interface

(IEC 61850, Modbus TCP/IP)
59659 ACE850FO fiber-optic Ethernet multi-protocol interface
(IEC 61850, Modbus TCP/IP)
59660 CCA770 remote module connection cord, L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
59661 CCA772 remote module connection cord, L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
59662 CCA774 remote module connection cord, L = 4 m (13.1 ft)
59663 CCA612 communication interface connection cord (except ACE850),
L = 3 m (9.8 ft)
59664 CCA783 PC RS 232 port connection cord
59665 CCA785 MCS025 module connection cord
59666 CCA613 LPCT test plug
59667 ACE917 LPCT injection adapter
59668 CCA620 20-pin screw type connector
59669 CCA622 20-pin ring lug connector

6 59670
59671
59672
AMT840 MCS025 mounting plate
CCA784 PC USB port connection cord
ACE990 core balance CT interface for I0 input

59676 Kit 2640 2 sets of spare connectors for MES114

59679 SFT2841 CD-ROM with SFT2841 without CCA783 or CCA784 cord

59699 ATM820 blanking plate

342 SEPED310017EN
Installation List of Sepam series 60 references

Reference Designation
59702 CCA671 connector for LPCT current sensors
59706
59707
AMT880 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 mounting plate
MMS020 memory cartridge 1
59712 MCS025 synchro-check module

59715 MES120 14 input + 6 output module / 24-250 V DC

59716 MES120G 14 input + 6 output module / 220-250 V DC

59722 MES120H 14 input + 6 output module / 110-125 V DC

59723 ACE969TP-2(1) 2-wire RS 485 multi-protocol interface
(Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)
59724 ACE969FO-2(1) fiber-optic multi-protocol interface
(Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)

59726 CD SFT850 CD-ROM with IEC 61850 configuration software

59751 CCA614 ACE850 communication interface connection cord,

L = 3 m (9.8 ft)
59754 TCP/IP firmware option (mandatory for using ACE850 multi-protocol
communication interfaces with Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and
Sepam series 80).

59787 Substation application type S60

59789 Substation application type S62
59790 Transformer application type T60
59791 Transformer application type T62
59792 Motor application type M61
59793 Generator application type G60
59794 Generator application type G62
59795 Capacitor application type C60

59835 SEP060, base unit without UMI, 24-250 V DC power supply

59836 SEP363, base unit with advanced UMI, 24-250 V DC power supply
59837 SEP666 base unit with mimic-based UMI, 24-250 V DC power supply

59846 Operation language English/French

6
59847 Operation language English/Spanish

TCSEAK0100 Ethernet configuration kit for ECI850

(1) Reference 59720 ACE969TP cancelled and replaced by 59723, reference 59721 ACE969FO
cancelled and replaced by 59724.

SEPED310017EN 343
 Installation Base unit
Dimensions

Dimensions
mm
mm in
DE80070

DE0073
in

1.57

8.74
9.49 7.87

10.4
1.57
Front view of Sepam.

1.57 7.28
Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 in) to 6 mm (0.23 in) thick.

Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.

mm 249
in mm 9.8
DE80071

DE80798

in

185
7.95 7.28
112
64,2 4.41
2.53

25,5
1
9.84

6
264
10.4
Cut out. Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 in) to 6 mm (0.23 in) thick.

CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove
any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in injury.

Assembly with AMT880 mounting plate

mm mm
in in
DE80072

DE80799

0.25 1.57

1.57 214
8.43
7.95 1.57 9.69 141
5.55
1.57
9.84 1.57
0.90

12 Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
0.39
Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.11 in) thick.
12.8
AMT880 mounting plate.

344 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
Mounting

Spring clip mounting direction Base unit flush-mounting

The direction in which the spring clips are mounted Sepam is mounted on the mounting frame by 8 spring clips.
depends on the thickness of the mounting frame.
The top clips are mounted in the opposite direction to
the bottom clips.
The mounting surface must be flat and stiff to guarantee tightness.
1
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
0.16 in
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
DE80101

0.06 in
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DE80800

0.06 in 0.16 in

1 Fixing points
2 Spring clips
DE50727

CLIC !
3 Setting
4 Positioning
5 Locking
6
6
6 Unlocking

Installing the terminal block identification label

A sticker showing the rear panel of Sepam and terminal assignments is supplied with
DE80802

each base unit to facilitate the installation and connection of Sepam and the MES120
input/output modules.
You may stick it in the location of your choice, e.g. on the side of an MES120 module
or on the right-hand side panel of Sepam.

Terminal block identification label

SEPED310017EN 345
 Installation Base unit
Connection

1
2
Base unit.
8 fixing points for 4 spring clips.
Rear panel description
3 Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
4 Green LED: Sepam on.
5 Gasket.
A 20-pin connector for:
b 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply

DE80803
b 4 relay outputs.
B1 Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs

C1 Communication port

D1 Remote module connection port

E 20-pin connector for:

b 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs
b 1 residual current I0 input
F Communication port 2 for ACE850 communication
interfaces only

H1 Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module.

H2 Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module.

t Functional earth.

Connection characteristics
6 Connector Type Reference Wiring
A , E Screw-type CCA620 b Wiring without fittings:
v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 20-12)
or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.5 to 1 mm² (u AWG 20-16)
v Stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v Recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
v Tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v Stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
6.35 mm (0.25 in) ring lugs CCA622 b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (0.25 in) (1/4")
b Wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.23 in)
b Use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b Maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal
b Tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm (8.85 lb-in)
B1 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lugs CCA630 or CCA634, for b Wire with cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.23 in)
b Use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b Tightening torque: 1.2 N.m (11 lb-in)
RJ45 connector CCA671, for connection of Integrated with LPCT sensor
3 LPCT sensors
C1 White RJ45 connector CCA612

D1 Black RJ45 connector CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)

CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft)
CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
F Blue RJ45 connector CCA614

Ring lug Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding

DE51845

b Flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm² (> AWG 8)

Functional earth b Maximum length: 500 mm (19.68 in)

346 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
DE81025
Connection

Note: See connection characteristics page 346

NOTICE DANGER
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
NUISANCE TRIPPING
If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or
is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are
Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
NEVER work alone.
6
no longer active and all the Sepam output relays Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
are dropped out. Check that this operating mode Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
with your installation. is off.
Failure to follow these instructions can result Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional
in equipment damage and unwanted earth.
shutdown of the electrical installation. Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
RISK OF DESTRUCTION OF THE SEPAM
Do not invert the connectors A and E .

Failure to follow these instructions can result

in equipment damage.

SEPED310017EN 347
 Installation Base unit
Connection of Sepam C60
DE81029

CSH30
(Sepam - CSH30 link less
than 2 meters long)
1 A CT : 2 turns
5 A CT : 4 turns

Functional
earth

Connector Type Reference Wiring

B1 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lugs CCA630 or CCA634, for connection wire with cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
of 1 A or 5 A CTs stripped length: 6 mm (0.236 in)
use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires

6
tightening torque: 1.2 N.m (11 lb-in)
RJ45 connector CCA671, for connection of Integrated with LPCT sensor
3 LPCT sensors
Ring lug Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
DE51845

flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm² (> AWG 8)

Functional earth maximum length: 500 mm (19.68 in)
Connection characteristics of connectors A , E , C1 , D1 : see page 346

348 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
Connection of phase current inputs

Variant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)

CCA630/
Description
Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
1
DE80825

CCA634 The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.

Parameters
Sensor type 5 A CT or 1 A CT
Number of CTs I1, I2, I3
Rated current (In) 1 A to 15 kA

Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs

Description
CCA630/ Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
DE80088

CCA634 Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions based
on phase current.
The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that I0 = 0.
This connection diagram does not allow the measurement of the residual current.

Paramètres
Sensor type 5 A CT or 1 A CT
Number of CTs I1, I3
Rated current (In) 1 A to 15 kA

Variant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors

Description
Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA671
DE80826

connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are

connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position.
Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.

Parameters
Sensor type LPCT 6
Number of CTs I1, I2, I3
Rated current (In) 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter In must be set twice:
b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool
b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA671 connector

SEPED310017EN 349
 Installation Base unit
Connection of residual current inputs

Variant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currents

Description
CCA630/ Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and
DE80825

CCA634 I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.

See current input connection diagrams.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
Sum of 3 Is In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 40 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)

Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT (standard connection)
Description
Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral
DE80827

systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
2 A rating CSH In0 = 2 A 0.1 to 40 A
20 A rating CSH In0 = 20 A 0.2 to 400 A

Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634

Description
Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs
DE80828

Terminal 7: 1 A CT
Terminal 8: 5 A CT

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)

6
5 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
DE80829

350 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
Connection of residual current inputs

Variant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT

Description
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to 1
DE81066

measure residual current:

b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH
primary
b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH
primary.

Paramètres
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
1 A CT: 2 turns
5 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
5 A CT: 4 turns
DE81067

1 A CT: 2 turns
5 A CT: 4 turns

Variant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of
DE80102

6
1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.
This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the
installation.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
ACE990 - range 1 In0 = Ik.n(1) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
(0.00578 y k y 0.04)
ACE990 - range 2 In0 = Ik.n(1) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
(0.0578 y k y 0.26316)
(1) n = number of core balance CT turns
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam

Variant 6: neutral point current measurement for the restricted earth protection (ANSI 64REF) and for a
network where the neutral is not distributed
Description
The residual current is measured by taking the sum of the 3 phase currents using the
DE80984

CT whose secondary current is 1 A or 5 A.

The neutral point current is measured using the CT whose secondary current is 1 A
or 5 A:
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT

Parameters
Secondary current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0 (0.1 A minimum)
5 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0 (0.1 A minimum)

SEPED310017EN 351
 Installation Base unit
Connection of low voltage residual
current inputs

Variant 1: residual current measurement by CTs on the neutral earthing link (with or without CSH30
interposing ring CT)
Description
Residual current is measured with a 1 A or 5 A CT on the neutral point.
These connection diagrams are incompatible with those for the ANSI 64REF
function.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = neutral point CT In 0.01 to 20 In0
5 A CT In0 = neutral point CT In 0.01 to 20 In0
DE80867

DE80868

DE81064
N PE N

1 A CT: 2 turns
5 A CT: 4 turns
Connection on TN-S network. Connection on TT network. Connection with CSH30.

Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT on the neutral earthing
link
Description

6 Residual current is measured with a core balance CT on the neutral point. Core
balance CTs are recommended for measuring very low fault currents provided that
the earth fault current remains below 2 kA. Above this value it is advisable to use the
standard variant 1.
These connection diagrams are incompatible with those for the ANSI 64REF
function.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
2 A rating CSH In0 = 2 A 0.1 to 40 A
20 A rating CSH In0 = 20 A 0.2 to 400 A
DE80869

DE80870

N PE N

Connection on TN-S network. Connection on TT network.

352 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
Connection of low voltage residual
current inputs

Variant 3: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by
CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT
Description
Measurement by core balance CT is recommended for measuring very low fault
1
DE80871

currents.
This connection diagram is incompatible with the ANSI 64REF function.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
2 A rating CSH In0 = 2 A 0.1 to 40 A
N
20 A rating CSH In0 = 20 A 0.2 to 400 A

Connection on TN-S and TT networks.

Variant 4: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by
1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT
N Description
The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents.
DE81065

The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to

measure residual current:
b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through
CSH primary
b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through
CSH primary.
According to the connection between the neutral point and earth, this connection
diagram is incompatible with the ANSI 64REF function.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0
5 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0
1 A CT: 2 turns
5 A CT: 4 turns
Connection on TN-S and TT networks.
6
Variant 5: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by
1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634 connector
N Description
The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents.
DE80995

Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs.

b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT
According to the connection between the neutral point and earth, this connection
diagram is incompatible with the ANSI 64REF function.

Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
1 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0

Connection on TN-S and TT networks. 5 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0

SEPED310017EN 353
 Installation Base unit
Connection of low voltage current
inputs for restricted earth protection
(ANSI 64REF)
Description
These 3 diagrams correspond to the connections as found in the various low voltage
DE80878

diagrams where the neutral is distributed.

They are used to work out the residual current (taking the sum of the 3 phase
currents) and the transformer neutral point current for operation of the restricted
earth protection function (ANSI 64 REF).
The residual current is measured by taking the sum of the 3 phase currents using the
N CT whose secondary current is 1 A or 5 A.
The neutral point current is measured using the CT whose secondary current is 1 A
or 5 A:
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT

Parameters

Secondary current Rated residual current Measuring range

1 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0
5 A CT In0 = phase CT primary current In 0.01 to 20 In0
Connection on TT network.
DE80876

DE80877

N PE PEN

6 Connection on TN-S network. Connection on TN-C network.

354 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Base unit
Connection of voltage inputs

Phase voltage input connection variants

1
Variant 1: measurement of Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U)
3 phase-to-neutral voltages
(3 V, standard connection)
DE80833

DE80834

Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.
the calculation of residual voltage, V0Σ.

Variant 3: measurement of Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V)

1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U)
DE80835

DE80836

This variant does not allow the calculation of residual This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.
voltage.

Residual voltage input connection variants

Variant 5: measurement of Variant 6: measurement of residual voltage Vnt
residual voltage V0 in generator neutral point
DE80837

DE80838

SEPED310017EN 355
 Installation Base unit
Connection of low voltage phase
voltage inputs

Variant 1: TN-S and TN-C networks Variant 2: TT and IT networks

DE80982

DE80983
N N

When a ground fault occurs on a TN-S or TN-C When a ground fault occurs on a TT or IT network, the neutral potential is affected:
network, the neutral potential is not affected: the neutral the neutral cannot act as a reference for the VTs, phase-to-phase voltages must be
can act as a reference for the VTs. used on both phases.

356 SEPED310017EN
Installation Base unit
Functions available according to
connected voltage inputs

The availability of certain protection and metering functions depend on the phase and
residual voltages measured by Sepam.

The table below gives the voltage input connection variants for which for each
protection and metering function dependent on measured voltages is available.
1
Example:
The directional overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual
voltage V0 as a polarization value.
It is therefore operational in the following cases:
b measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and calculation of
V0Σ (3 V + V0Σ, variant 1)
b measurement of residual voltage V0 (variant 5).
The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are
available regardless of the voltages measured.

Phase voltages measured 3 V + V0Σ 2U 1U 1V

(connection variant) (var. 1) (var. 2) (var. 3) (var. 4)
Residual voltage measured – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt
(connection variant) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6)
Protection functions dependent on voltages measured
Directional phase overcurrent 67 b b b b b b
Directional earth fault 67N/67NC b b b b b b
Directional active overpower 32P b b b b b b
Directional reactive active overpower 32Q b b b b b b
Directional active underpower 37P b b b b b b
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 b b b b b b
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V b b b b b b
Underimpedance 21B b b b b b b
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D b b b b b b
Remanent undervoltage 27R b b b b b b b b b b b b
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 b b b b b b b b b b b b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 b b b b b b b b b b b b
Neutral voltage displacement 59N b b b b b b b b b
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 b b b b b b b
Overfrequency 81H b b b b b b b b b b b b
Underfrequency 81L b b b b b b b b b b b b
Rate of change of frequency 81R b b b b b b
Measurements dependent on voltages measured
Phase-to-phase voltage U21, U32, U13
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3
b
b
b
b
b
b
b b
b
b U21 U21 U21
V1 V1 V1 6
Residual voltage V0 b b b b b b
Neutral point voltage Vnt b b b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd / b b b b b b
negative sequence voltage Vi
Frequency b b b b b b b b b b b b
Active / reactive / apparent power: P, Q, S b b b b b b b b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b b b b b b b b
Active / reactive / apparent power per phase: b (1) b (1) b (1) b (1) P1/ P1/ P1/
P1/P2/P3, Q1/Q2/Q3, S1/S2/S3 Q1/S1 Q1/S1 Q1/S1
Power factor b b b b b b b b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) b b b b b b b b b
Total harmonic distortion, voltage Uthd b b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement ϕ0 b b b b b b
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 b b b b b b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b b b b b b
b Function available
(1) If all 3 phase currents are measured.

SEPED310017EN 357
 Installation 1 A/5 A current transformers

Function
Sepam may be connected to any standard 1 A or 5 A current transformer.
Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary
058731N

058733N

currents from 50 A to 2500 A.

Consult us for more information.

Sizing of current transformers

Current transformers are sized so as not to be saturated by the current values they
are required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).

ARJA1. ARJP3. Overcurrent protection functions

b with DT tripping curve:
the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the setting
b with IDMT tripping curve:
the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the highest working value on
the curve.
Practical solution when there is no information on the settings
Rated secondary Accuracy Accuracy CT secondary Wiring
current (in) burden class resistance RCT resistance Rf
1A 2.5 VA 5P 20 <3Ω < 0.075 Ω
5A 7.5 VA 5P 20 < 0.2 Ω < 0.075 Ω

Restricted earth fault differential protection (ANSI 64REF)

b The primary current of the neutral point current transformer must comply with the
following rule:
In0 u 0.1 x I1P, where I1P is the phase-to-earth short-circuit current.

b Neutral current transformer must be:

v type 5P20 with an accuracy burden VACT u Rw.in0²
v or defined by a knee-point voltage Vk u (RCT + Rw).20.in0.

b Phase current transformers must be:

I3P I1P
v type 5P, with an accuracy-limit factor FLP u max ⎛ 20, 1.6 --------, 2.4 --------⎞

6
⎝ In In ⎠
and an accuracy burden VACT u Rw.in²
I3P I1P
v or defined by a knee-point voltage Vk u (RCT + Rw) max ⎛ 20, 1.6 --------, 2.4 -------- in.
⎝ In In
b Formula legend:
in: phase CT rated secondary current
in0: neutral point CT rated secondary current
RCT: phase CT or neutral CT internal resistance
Rw: resistance of the CT load and wiring
In: phase CT rated primary current
In0: neutral point CT rated primary current
I3P: three-phase short-circuit current
I1P: phase-to-earth short-circuit current

358 SEPED310017EN
 Installation 1 A/5 A current transformers

CCA630/CCA634 connector
1
Function
The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
DE80051

connector on the rear panel of Sepam:

b The CCA630 connector is used to connect three phase current transformers to
Sepam.
b The CCA634 connector is used to connect three phase current transformers
and one residual current transformer to Sepam.
The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through
primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or
5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents.
The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does
not open the CT secondary circuit.

CCA634 DANGER
DE80059

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS

b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b To disconnect the Sepam unit current inputs, unplug the CCA630 or
CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and
CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary
circuits.
b Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

SEPED310017EN 359
 Installation 1 A/5 A Current transformers

Connecting and assembling the CCA630 connector

1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can
MT10490

be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced

after wiring.
2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is
supplied with the CCA630.
3. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm²
(AWG 16-10).
4. Close the side shields.
5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ).
. 6. Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam.

Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connector

1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can
DE80068

DE80069

be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced

after wiring.
2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is
used to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture
opposite).
3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the
CT secondary.
4. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm²
(AWG 16-10).
The wires only exit from the base.
5. Close the side shields.
6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit.
7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector
(principle similar to that of the MES module).
8. Tighten the mounting screw.
Bridging of terminals Bridging of terminals
1, 2, 3 and 9 1, 2 and 3

6 NOTICE
HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION
Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and
residual current input I0 on connector E
(terminals 14 and 15) simultaneously.
Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634
on connector B1 will disturb input I0 on
connector E.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in equipment damage.

360 SEPED310017EN
 Installation LPCT type current sensors

Function
1
Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors,
which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard.
PE50031

The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2,
CLP3, TLP130, TLP160 and TLP190.

CLP1 LPCT sensor

CCA670/CCA671 connector
Function
The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear
DE51674

panel of Sepam.
The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and
causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position.
The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose,
the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs:
b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.

Description
1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors.
2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase current
value.
3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 In values per
6
position).
4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or
via CCA613).

Rating of CCA670/CCA671 connectors

The CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary
current In measured by the LPCT sensors. In is the current value that corresponds
to the rated secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for In are (in A): 25,
50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
The selected In value should be:
b entered as a Sepam general setting
b configured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
NOTICE Operating mode:
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the "LPCT settings" zone; the
b Set the microswitches for the CCA670/ shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1, L2, L3.
CCA671 connector before commissioning the 2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to "1" (2 In
device. values per microswitch).
b Check that only one microswitch is in position 1 b The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected
for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no microswitch rated current In is printed on the connector
is in the center position. b Leave the 7 other microswitches set to "0".
b Check that the microswitch settings on all 3
3. Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block
blocks are identical.
and close the shield.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in equipment damage.

SEPED310017EN 361
 Installation LPCT type current sensors
Test accessories

Accessory connection principle

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

1 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which
DE51675

is plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector.

2 Sepam protection unit.
3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of
rated current:
b CCA670: lateral plugs for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs for Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
4 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped
with a 3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670/
CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D).
5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard
injection box.
6 Standard injection box.

362 SEPED310017EN
 Installation LPCT type current sensors
Test accessories

ACE917 injection adapter

mm
in
Function
The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection 1
box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors.
DE80322

The ACE917 adapter is inserted between:

b The standard injection box
b The LPCT test plug:
v integrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector
2.76
v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory.
The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter:
b Power supply cord
b 3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on
10.2
CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.
6.69

Characteristics
Power supply 115/230 V AC
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0.25 A rating
(0.2 x 0.79 in)

CCA613 remote test plug

Function
The CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a
3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/
CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.

Dimensions
mm mm
in in
DE80045

DE81270

Lock

67,5
2.66
Cable
67,5
2.66
6
6

44
1.73
13 50
0.51 1.97
80
3.15
Front view with cover lifted. Right side view.

CAUTION mm
in
DE80047

HAZARD OF CUTS
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove
any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in injury.
69
2.72

46
1.81
Cut-out.

SEPED310017EN 363
 Installation CSH120 and CSH200
Core balance CTs

Function
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct
residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter.
PE50032

Due to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
Note:
b The CSH280 core balance CT available in the Motorpact offer is compatible with Sepam.
b You must use an interface ACE990 with a core balance CT other than a CSH120, a CSH200
or a CSH280, even if this core balance CT has the same transformation ratio than a CSH120,
CSH200 or CSH280.

Characteristics
CSH120 CSH200
Inner diameter 120 mm (4.7 in) 196 mm (7.72 in)
Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)

CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs. Accuracy 1 CT ±5% at 20°C (68°F)
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C
(-13°F to +158°F)
2 CTs in parallel - ±10%
Transformation ratio 1/470
Maximum permissible current 1 CT 20 kA - 1 s
2 CTs in parallel - 6 kA - 1 s
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)

Dimensions
6 mm (0.236 in) 5 mm (0.197 in)
DE80249

Dimensions A B D E F H J K L
CSH120 120 164 44 190 80 40 166 65 35
(in) (4.75) (6.46) (1.73) (7.48) (3.15) (1.57) (6.54) (2.56) (1.38)
CSH200 196 256 46 274 120 60 254 104 37
(in) (7.72) (10.1) (1.81) (10.8) (4.72) (2.36) (10) (4.09) (1.46)

364 SEPED310017EN
 Installation CSH120 and CSH200
Core balance CTs

DANGER Assembly

DE51678
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Group the MV cable (or cables) in the
ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this
middle of the core balance CT.
Use non-conductive binding to hold the
1
equipment. Such work should be performed only cables.
after reading this entire set of instructions and Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage
checking the technical characteristics of the cable shielding earthing cables
device. through the core balance.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment

E40465

E40466
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Only CSH120, CSH200 and CSH280 core
balance CTs can be used for direct residual
current measurement. Other residual current Assembly on MV cables. Assembly on mounting
plate.
sensors require the use of an intermediate
device, CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634.
b Install the core balance CTs on insulated
cables.
b Cables with a rated voltage of more than
1000 V must also have an earthed shielding.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.

NOTICE Connection
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
core balance CTs to earth.
Connection to Sepam series 60
This connection is made in Sepam.
To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding).
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in equipment damage. Connection to Sepam series 80
b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
6
b Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
DE80231

b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)

b Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam
b Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.
The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 Ω
(i.e. 20 m maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft).

Connecting 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel

It is possible to connect 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel if the cables will not fit through a
DE80206

single CT, by following the instructions below:

b Fit one CT per set of cables.
b Make sure the wiring polarity is correct.
The maximum permissible current at the primary is limited to 6 kA - 1 s for all cables.

SEPED310017EN 365
 Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT

Function
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is
measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
E40468

E44717

Characteristics
Weight 0.12 kg (0.265 lb)
Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
interposing ring CT. CSH30 interposing ring CT. In vertical or horizontal position

Dimensions
mm
in
DE80023

0.18 0.16

1.18
1.97 0.63
0.2
3.23
0.18

0.315
2.36 1.14

366 SEPED310017EN
 Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT

Connection
The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number
of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT:
b 5 A rating - 4 turns
1
b 1 A rating - 2 turns

Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit

PE50033

PE50034
1. Plug into the connector. 1. Plug into the connector.
2. Insert the transformer secondary wire 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire
through the CSH30 interposing ring CT through the CSH30 interposing ring CT
4 times. twice.

Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40

To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
DE80125

Connection to Sepam series 60

To residual current I0 input, on connector E terminals 15 and 14 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam series 80
b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
2 1 b To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
S1
Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
turns S2 b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm², AWG 12)
turns b Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
b Maximum length: 2 m (6.6 ft).
It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam
6
(Sepam - CSH30 link less than 2 m (6.6 ft) long).
DE80126

Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.

2 1

S1

turns S2
turns

SEPED310017EN 367
 Installation ACE990 Core balance CT interface

Function
The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with
a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.
PE80318

Note: You must use an interface ACE990 with a core balance CT other than a CSH120, a
CSH200 or a CSH280, even if this core balance CT has the same transformation ratio than a
CSH120, CSH200 or CSH280.

Characteristics
Weight 0.64 kg (1.41 lb)
Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail
Amplitude accuracy ±1%
Phase accuracy < 2°
ACE990 core balance CT interface. Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s
(on the primary winding of an MV core
balance CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not
saturate)
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)

Description and dimensions

E ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT.
S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.

78 maxi 96 maxi
3.07 maxi 3.78 maxi
DE81196

mm
in. 50 11
1.97 0.43
E

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
3.94 maxi
100 maxi

1.53
39
6 S1 S2
ACE990

11
S 0.43
20 52
0.78 2.05

368 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE990 Core balance CT interface

Connection
Connection of core balance CT
Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface. 1
DE51682

The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990

interface input terminals. To define the 2 input terminals, it is necessary to know the
following:
Core balance CT ratio (1/n)
Core balance CT power
Close approximation of rated current In0
(In0 is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting
range between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0).

The table below can be used to determine:

The 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT
secondary
The type of residual current sensor to set
The exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following
formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns
with k the factor defined in the table below.

The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for
correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be
connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex).

K value ACE990 input Residual current Min. MV core

terminals to be sensor setting balance CT
connected power
Example: 0.00578 E1 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within 0.00676 E2 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A.
0.00885 E1 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990?
1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0, 0.00909 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
i.e. 5 A. 0.01136 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2. Calculate the ratio: 0.01587 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125.
0.01667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to
k = 0.01136. 0.02000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 0.02632 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2 VA core balance CT > 0.1 VA V OK. 0.04000 E1 - E2 ACE990 - range 1 0.2 VA

6
5. Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input
terminals E2 and E4.
6. Set Sepam up with: 0.05780 E1 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 2.5 VA
In0 = 0.0136 x 400 = 4.544 A. 0.06757 E2 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 2.5 VA
Select the closest value rounded to a single decimal 0.08850 E1 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
(example: 4.544 A rounded to 4.5 A)
0.09091 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
This value of In0 can be used to monitor current between 0.11364 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
0.45 A and 67.5 A. 0.15873 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
Wiring of MV core balance CT secondary circuit: 0.16667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal 0.20000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 5.5 VA
MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input 0.26316 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 7.5 VA
terminal.
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam series 60
To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam series 80
To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cables
Cable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m (160 ft) long
Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and
Sepam, maximum length 2 m (6.6 ft)
Cable cross-section between 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) and 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Resistance per unit length less than 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
Minimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms.
Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible
(2 cm or 5.08 in maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector.
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.

SEPED310017EN 369
 Installation Voltage transformers

Function
Sepam may be connected to any standard voltage transformer with a rated
secondary voltage of 100 V to 220 V.
058734N

058735N

Schneider Electric offers a range of voltage transformers

b to measure phase-to-neutral voltages: voltage transformers with one insulated MV
terminal
b to measure phase-to-phase voltages: voltage transformers with two insulated MV
terminals
b with or without integrated protection fuses.

Consult us for more information.

VRQ3 without fuses. VRQ3 with fuses.

DANGER Connection
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC All Sepam series 60 units have 4 voltage inputs to measure the 3 phase voltages and
ARC OR BURNS the residual voltage.
b Only qualified personnel should install this b The voltage measurement VTs are connected to the Sepam connector E .
equipment. Such work should be performed only b 4 transformers integrated in the Sepam base unit provide the required impedance
after reading this entire set of instructions and matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits.
checking the technical characteristics of the
device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective
earth and to the functional earth.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.

370 SEPED310017EN
 Installation MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 input / 6 output modules
Presentation

Function
The extension of the output relays included on the Sepam series 60 and
1
PE50020

Sepam series 80 base unit is done by the add of MES120 modules:

b On Sepam series 60, it is possible to add 2 MES120 modules (H1 and H2
connectors).
b On Sepam series 80, it is possible to add 3 MES120 modules (H1, H2 and H3
connectors).

A MES120 module is composed of:

b 14 logical inputs
b 6 relays outputs included 1 control relays input and 5 signalisation relays outputs.

Three modules are available for the different input supply voltage ranges and offer
different switching thresholds:
b MES120, 14 inputs 24 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
14 V DC
b MES120G, 14 inputs 220 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
155 V DC.
b MES120H, 14 inputs 110 V DC to 125 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
82 V DC
MES120 14 input / 6 output module.

Characteristics
MES120/MES120G/MES120H modules
Weight 0.38 kg (0.83 lb)
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Logic inputs MES120 MES120G MES120H
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 220 to 250 V DC 110 to 125 V DC
Range 19.2 to 275 V DC 170 to 275 V DC 88 to 150 V DC
Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 155 V DC 82 V DC
Input limit voltage At state 0 < 6 V DC < 144 V DC < 75 V DC
At state 1 > 19 V DC > 170 V DC > 88 V DC
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Control relay output Ox01
Voltage

Continuous current
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
24/48 V DC
-
8A
127 V DC
-
8A
220 V DC
-
8A
250 V DC
-
8A
-
100 to 240 V AC
8A
6
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8/4 A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A 8A
L/R load < 20 ms 6/2 A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
L/R load < 40 ms 4/1 A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 5A
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups Enhanced
Annunciation relay output Ox02 to Ox06
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 2/1 A 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R load < 20 ms 2/1 A 0.5 A 0.15 A - -
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 1A
Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups Enhanced

SEPED310017EN 371
 Installation MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 input / 6 output modules
Installation

mm Description
DE80078

in
3 lockable screw-type, removable, connectors.
1 20-pin connector for 9 logic inputs:
b Ix01 to Ix04: 4 independent logic inputs
b Ix05 to Ix09: 5 common point logic inputs.
2 7-pin connector for 5 common point logic inputs Ix10 to Ix14.
3 17-pin connector for 6 relay outputs:
b Ox01: 1 control relay output
b Ox02 to Ox06: 5 annunciation relay outputs.
Addressing of MES120 module inputs/outputs:
b x = 1 for the module connected to H1
6.69 b x = 2 for the module connected to H2
b x = 3 for the module connected to H3 (Sepam series 80 only).

4 MES120G, MES120H identification label (MES120 modules have no labels).

4.72

1.57

Assembly
Installation of an MES120 module on the base unit
b insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit
PE50026

b push the module flat up against the base unit to plug it into the connector H2
b partially tighten the two mounting screws 2 before locking them.
MES120 modules must be mounted in the following order:
b if only one module is required, connect it to connector H1
b if 2 modules are required, connect them to connectors H1 and H2 (maximum
configuration of Sepam series 60).

6 b if 3 modules are required, they have to be connected to the H1, H2 and H3

connectors (maximum configuration of Sepam series 80).

Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base

unit connector H2.

372 SEPED310017EN
 Installation MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 input / 6 output modules
Installation

Connection
1
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Wiring of connectors
DE51645

b wiring without fittings:

v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (u AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for one 1.5 mm² wire (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for one 2.5 mm² wire (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).

SEPED310017EN 373
 Installation Optional remote modules
Selection guide

4 remote modules are proposed as options to enhance the Sepam base unit
functions:
b the number and type of remote modules compatible with the base unit depend on
the Sepam application
b the DSM303 remote advanced UMI module is only compatible with base units that
do not have integrated advanced UMIs.
b the DSM303 advanced UMI module and the MCS025 synchro-check module must
not be connected to Sepam series 60 at the same time.

Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 20 series 40 series 60 series 80
S2x, T2x, S4x T4x, M4x, S6x T6x, M6x, S8x, T8x, M8x
B2x M2x G4x G6x C6x B8x G8x C8x
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module See page 376 0 1 0 2 0 2 2 0 2 2
MSA141 Analog output module See page 378 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module See page 380 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MCS025 Synchro-check module See page 382 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
Number of sets of interlinked modules/maximum number of 1 set of 3 interlinked 1 set of 3 interlinked 1 set of 3 interlinked 5 modules split between
remote modules modules modules modules 2 sets of interlinked
modules

374 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Optional remote modules
Connection

NOTICE Connection cords

Different combinations of modules can be connected using cords fitted with 2 black

1
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
RJ45 connectors, which come in 3 lengths:
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be
b CCA770: length = 0.6 m (2 ft)
connected with the special CCA785 prefabricated
b CCA772: length = 2 m (6.6 ft)
cord, supplied with the module and equipped with
b CCA774: length = 4 m (13.1 ft).
an orange RJ45 connector and a black RJ45
The modules are linked by cords which provide the power supply and act as
connector.
functional links with the Sepam unit (connector D to connector Da ,
Failure to follow these instructions can result Dd to Da , …).
in equipment damage.

Rules on inter-module linking

b linking of 3 modules maximum
b DSM303 and MCS025 modules can only be connected at the end of the link.

Maximum recommended configurations

Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 60: only 1 set of
interlinked modules
Base Cord Module 1 Cord Module 2 Cord Module 3
DE51646

DE80323

series 20/40/60 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303

series 40/60 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA772 MET148-2
series 40/60 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303
series 60 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA785 MCS025
series 60 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA785 MCS025

Sepam series 80: 2 sets of interlinked modules

Sepam series 80 has 2 connection ports for remote modules, D1 and D2 .
Modules may be connected to either port.

6
Base Cord Module 1 Cord Module 2 Cord Module 3
Set 1 D1 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303
DE80324

- -

Set 2 D2 CCA772 MSA141 CCA785 MCS025 - -

Example of inter-module linking on Sepam series 20.

SEPED310017EN 375
 Installation MET148-2
Temperature sensor module

Function
The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs)
of the same type:
PE50021

b Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting

b 3-wire temperature sensors
b A single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of
the CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords
b 2 modules for each Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 base
unit, to be connected by CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4
m or 13.1 ft) cords
The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilized by
the following protection functions:
b Thermal overload (to take ambient temperature into account)
b Temperature monitoring.

Characteristics
MET148-2 module
Weight 0.2 kg (0.441 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Temperature sensors Pt100 Ni100/Ni120
Isolation from earth None None
Current injected in RTD 4 mA 4 mA

Description and dimensions

DE80031

A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4

mm B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8
in
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord

6
3.46 (according to application)
t Grounding/earthing terminal

1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to:
b MET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8
(default position)
1.81
b MET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16
5.67 (for Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and series 80 only).

(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.

376 SEPED310017EN
 Installation MET148-2
Temperature sensor module

Connection
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS 1
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Connection of the earthing terminal

By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with
DE51649

cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a
4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
Connection of RTDs to screw-type connectors
b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12)
b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18)
Recommended cross-sections according to distance:
b Up to 100 m (330 ft) u 1 mm² (AWG 18)
b Up to 300 m (990 ft) u 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
b Up to 1 km (0.62 mi) u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km (0.62 mi)
Wiring precautions
b It is preferable to use shielded cables
The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree
according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance
b Only connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible,
to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B
b Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end.
Accuracy derating according to wiring
The error Δt is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the
cable cross-section:

L ( km )
Δt ( ° C ) = 2 × ----------------------
2
S ( mm )

b ±2.1°C/km for 0.93 mm² cross-section (AWG 18)

b ±1°C/km for 1.92 mm² cross-section (AWG 14). 6

SEPED310017EN 377
 Installation MSA141 Analog output module

Function
The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog
PE80748

signal:
b Selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting
b 0-1 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting
b Scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the
converted measurement.
Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with
a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is:
v minimum value = 0
v maximum value = 3000
b A single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770
MSA141 analog output module. (0.6m or 2 ft), CCA772 (2m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4m or 13.1 ft) cords.
The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.

Characteristics
MSA141 module
Weight 0.2 kg (0.441 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Analog output
Current 4 -20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA, 0-1 mA
Scaling Minimum value
(no data input checking) Maximum value
Load impedance < 600 Ω (including wiring)
Accuracy 0.5% full scale or 0,01 mA
Measurements Unit Series 20 Series 40 Series 60/
available Series 80
Phase and residual currents 0.1 A b b b
Phase-to-neutral and phase-to- 1V b b b
phase voltages
Frequency 0.01 Hz b b b
Thermal capacity used 1% b b b
Temperatures 1°C (1°F) b b b

6 Active power
Reactive power
0.1 kW
0.1 kvar
b
b
b
b
Apparent power 0.1 kVA b b
Power factor 0.01 b
Remote setting via communication b b b
link

378 SEPED310017EN
 Installation MSA141 Analog output module

mm Description and dimensions

in

1
DE80907

A Terminal block for analog output

Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord
Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord (according
to application)
Earthing terminal
3.46
1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc),
to be set to:
Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
1mA
or
mA
Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
2 Micro-switches to set the analog output type:
Ø 20

Micro-switches Position Output type

low (default position) 0-20 mA
4-20 mA
1 2
1.81
0-10 mA
5.67 2 high 0-1 mA

1 2

11 23

2
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.

Output Setting
PE80758

The analog output type is configured in 2 steps:

1. Hardware setting: set the 2 micro-switches:
on low position for a 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or 0-10 mA output type
on high position for a 0-1 mA output type.
2. Software configuration: select the desired output type in the SFT2841 setting
software Analog output module (MSA141) setting window and validate by
pressing the OK button.
Note : The 0-1 mA output works only if the 0-20 mA or 0-1 mA depending on switch output

6
type has been set in the SFT2841 setting software (step 2).

Analog output module (MSA141) setting window.

Connection
1 Connection of the earthing terminal
1 By tinned copper braid with cross-section 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with
PE80908

2 cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length 200 mm (7.9 in), equipped with a
3 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
Connection of analog output to screw-type connector
1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12)
or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18).
Wiring precautions
It is preferable to use shielded cables
Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end.

SEPED310017EN 379
 Installation DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module

Function
When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine
interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated
PE50127

advanced UMI.
It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating
location:
b Reduced depth < 30 mm (1.2 in)
b A single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772
(2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords.

The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.

Characteristics
DSM303 module
Weight 0.3 kg (0.661 lb)
Assembly Flush-mounted
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
DSM303 remote advanced UMI module.
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units

380 SEPED310017EN
 Installation DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module

Description and dimensions

1
The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional
screw-type fastening is required.

Front view Side view

mm
in 16 17

DE80033

DE80034
mm
in

4.6
3.78

0.98
5.99
0.6

1 Green LED: Sepam on

2 Red LED:
- steadily on: module unavailable
- flashing: Sepam link unavailable
3 9 yellow LEDs
4 Label identifying the LEDs
5 Graphic LCD screen
6 Display of measurements
7 Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data
8 Display of alarm messages
9 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry)
10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up)
11 LED test (or move cursor down)
12 Access to protection settings
13 Access to Sepam parameters
14 Entry of 2 passwords
15 PC connection port
16 Mounting clip
17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness
6
(gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary)

Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit
with a CCA77x cord.

CAUTION Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness < 3 mm or 0.12 in)

HAZARD OF CUTS mm
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove in
DE80060

any jagged edges.

Failure to follow these instructions can result
in injury.
98.5 0,5
3.88

5.67

Connection
Da RJ45 socket to connector the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it
MT10151

systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc).

SEPED310017EN 381
 Installation MCS025
Synchro-check module

Function
PE50285

The MCS025 module is used with Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
The MCS025 module checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit
breaker to ensure safe closing (ANSI 25).
It checks the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase between the two
measured voltages, taking into account voltage abscence.
Three relay outputs may be used to send the close enable to several Sepam units.
The circuit-breaker control function of each Sepam unit will take this close enable into
account.

The settings for the synchro-check function and the measurements carried out by the
module may be accessed by the SFT2841 setting and operating software, similar to
the other settings and measurements for the Sepam.

The MCS025 module is supplied ready for operation with:

b the CCA620 connector for connection of the relay outputs and the power supply
b the CCT640 connector for voltage connection
b the CCA785 cord for connection between the module and the Sepam base unit.

MCS025 synchro-check module.

Characteristics
MCS025 module
Weight 1.35 kg (2.98 lb)
Assembly With the AMT840 accessory
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Voltage inputs

6 Input impedance
Consumption
Continuous thermal withstand
> 100 kΩ
< 0.015 VA (VT 100 V)
240 V
1-second overload 480 V
Relay outputs
Relay outputs O1 and O2
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A/4A 0.7 A 0.3 A
Load L/R < 20 ms 6A/2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
Load L/R < 40 ms 4A/1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
Resistive load 8A
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Making capacity < 15 ms for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Relay outputs O3 and O4 (O4 not used)
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Load L/R < 20 ms 2A/1A 0.5 A 0.15 A
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC, -20 % / +10 % 110 to 240 V AC, -20 % / +10 %
47.5 to 63 Hz
Maximum consumption 6W 9 VA
Inrush current < 10 A for 10 ms < 15 A for one half period
Acceptable momentary outages 10 ms 10 ms

382 SEPED310017EN
Installation MCS025
Synchro-check module

Description
1
1 MCS025 module

A CCA620 20-pin connector for:

b auxiliary power supply

DE51654
b 4 relay outputs:
v O1, O2, O3: close enable.
v O4: not used

B CCT640 connector (phase-to-neutral or phase-to-

phase) for the two input voltages to be
synchronized

C RJ45 connector, not used

D RJ45 connector for module connection to the

Sepam base unit, either directly or via another
remote module.

2 Two mounting clips

3 Two holding pins for the flush-mount position

4 CCA785 connection cord

SEPED310017EN 383
 Installation MCS025
Synchro-check module

Dimensions
mm Gasket to ensure
mm in NEMA 12 tighteness
DE80079

DE80132
in
Mounting
1.57 clip

8.74
7.72 8.74

1.57
6.93

MCS025. 1.57 3.86 0.9

Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate

The MCS025 module should be mounted at the back of the compartment using the
AMT840 mounting plate.
mm mm
in in
DE80029

DE80081

0.25 1.58
4.84
1.58
7.95 1.58 9.05

1.58
6.38
1.58

6 8.5

9.23
0.4
0.60

AMT840 mounting plate.

Connection characteristics
Connector Type Reference Wiring
A Screw-type CCA620 b wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(> AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm²
(>AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.32 in)

B Screw-type CCT640 VT wiring: same as wiring of the CCA620

Earthing connection: by 4 mm (0.15 mm) ring lug
D Orange RJ45 connector CCA785, special prefabricated cord supplied with the MCS025
module:
b orange RJ45 connector for connection to port D
on the MCS025 module
b black RJ45 connector for connection to the Sepam base unit,
either directly or via another remote module.

384 SEPED310017EN
 Installation MCS025
Synchro-check module

Connection diagram
1
DE81030

(1) Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral connection. 6

NOTICE DANGER
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
connected with the special CCA785 cord, performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
supplied with the module and equipped with an technical characteristics of the device.
orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. b NEVER work alone.
Failure to follow these instructions can result b Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages.
in equipment damage. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional
earth.
b Terminal 17 (PE) on connector (A) of the MCS025 module and the functional
earth terminal on the Sepam unit must be connected locally to the cubicle
grounding circuit.
The two connection points should be as close as possible to one another.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

SEPED310017EN 385
 Installation Communication accessory
selection guide

There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessory:

b Communication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the
communication network
b Converters and other accessories, as options, which are used for complete
implementation of the communication network.

Communication-interface selection guide

ACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP-2 ACE969FO-2 ACE850TP ACE850FO
Type of Sepam
Sepam series 20 b b b b b b b
Sepam series 40/60/80 b b b b b b b b b
Type of network
S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN
or E-LAN (1) or E-LAN (1) or E-LAN (1)
Protocol
Modbus RTU b b b b (3) b b (3) b
DNP3 b (3) b (3)

IEC 60870-5-103 b (3) b (3)

Modbus TCP/IP b b
IEC 61850 b b
Physical interface
RS 485 2-wire b b b b
4-wire b
Fiber optic ST Star b b
Ring b (2)

10/100 base Tx 2 ports b

100 base Fx 2 ports b
Power supply
DC Supplied by Supplied by Supplied by 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V
AC Sepam Sepam Sepam 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V
See details on page page 389 page 390 page 391 page 392 page 392 page 398 page 398
(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN.
(2) Use of Echo mode is mandatory, see manual SEPED303002, SEPED305001 or SEPED305002.
(3) Not supported simultaneously (1 protocol per application).

6 Converter selection guide

ACE909-2 ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100 EGX300 ECI850
To supervisor
Physical interface 1 RS 232 port 1 port 1 port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port
2-wire RS 485 2-wire RS 485 10/100 base T 10/100 base T 10/100 base T
Modbus RTU b (1) b (1) b (1)
IEC 60870-5-103 b (1) b (1) b (1)
DNP3 b (1) b (1) b (1)
Modbus TCP/IP b b
IEC 61850 b
To Sepam
Physical interface 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port
2-wire RS 485 2-wire RS 485 2-wire RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485
2-wire or 4-wire 2-wire or 4-wire 2-wire or 4-wire
RS 485 distributed power b b b
supply
Modbus RTU b (1) b (1) b (1) b b b
IEC 60870-5-103 b (1) b (1) b (1)

DNP3 b (1) b (1) b (1)

Power supply
DC 24 to 48 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
AC 110 to 220 V 110 to 220 V

See details on page page 405 page 406 page 406 See EGX100 See EGX300 page 408
manual manual
(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as for Sepam.
Note: All these interfaces support the E-LAN protocol.

386 SEPED310017EN
 Installation Connection of communication
interfaces
Connection cords

CCA612 connection cord

Function
The CCA612 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, 1
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 communication interfaces:
b To the white communication port C on a Sepam series 20 or series 40 base unit
b To the white communication port C1 on a Sepam series 60 base unit.
b To the white communication ports C1 or C2 on a Sepam series 80 base unit.

Characteristics
b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft)
b Fitted with 2 white RJ45 connectors.

Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 Sepam series 80

DE80842

DE80844

CCA614 connection cord

Function
NOTICE The CCA614 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE850TP and ACE850FO
HAZARD OF DEFECTIVE COMMUNICATION communication interfaces:
b Never use the C2 and F communication b To the white communication port C on a Sepam series 40 base unit
ports on a Sepam series 80 simultaneously. b To the blue communication port F on a Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80
b The only communication ports on a Sepam
series 80 unit that can be used simultaneously
are ports C1 and C2 or ports C1 and F .
base unit.
6
Characteristics
Failure to follow these instructions can result b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft)
in equipment damage. b Fitted with 2 blue RJ45 connectors
b Minimum curvature radius = 50 mm (1.97 in)

Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80

ACE850 ACE850
DE80439

DE80440

CCA614

ACE937

CCA614

CCA612

SEPED310017EN 387
 Installation Connection of communication
interfaces
Characteristics of communication
networks
RS 485 network for ACE949-2, ACE959 and
ACE969TP-2 interfaces
RS 485 network cable 2-wire 4-wire
RS 485 medium 1 shielded twisted pair 2 shielded twisted pairs
Distributed power supply 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair
Shielding Tinned copper braid, coverage > 65%
Characteristic impedance 120 Ω
Gauge AWG 24
Resistance per unit length < 100 Ω/km (62.1 Ω/mi)
Capacitance between conductors < 60 pF/m (18.3 pF/ft)
Capacitance between conductor and shielding < 100 pF/m (30.5 pF/ft)
Maximum length 1300 m (4270 ft)

Fiber-optic network for ACE937 and

ACE969FO-2 interfaces
Fiber-optic communication port
Fiber type Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength 820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Fiber optic diameter (µm) Numerical aperture (NA) Maximum attenuation Minimum optical power Maximum fiber length
(dBm/km) available (dBm)
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700 m (2300 ft)
62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800 m (5900 ft)
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600 m (8500 ft)

Fiber-optic Ethernet network for the

ACE850FO communication interface
Fiber-optic communication port
Fiber type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
Type of connector SC

6
Fiber optic diameter (µm) TX minimum optical TX maximum optical RX sensitivity RX saturation Maximum
power (dBm) power (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) distance
50/125 -22.5 -14 -33.9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)
62.5/125 -19 -14 -33.9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)

Wired Ethernet network for the ACE850TP

communication interface
Wired communication port
Connector type Data Medium Maximum distance
RJ45 10/100 Mbps Cat 5 STP or FTP or SFTP 100 m (328 ft)

388 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE949-2
2-wire RS 485 network interface

Function
1
The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication
PE80321

network
b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with
a CCA612 cord.

Characteristics
ACE949-2 module
Weight 0.1 kg (0.22 lb)
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
2-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network
with standard cable
mm
DE80035

in Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with

Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m (1000 ft) 1000 m (3300 ft)
10 180 m (590 ft) 750 m (2500 ft)
3.46
20 160 m (520 ft) 450 m (1500 ft)
25 125 m (410 ft) 375 m (1200 ft)

Description and dimensions

A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord
1.81
t Grounding/earthing terminal
2.83
t
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected. 1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress). 6
2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 Ω) , to be set to:
2-wire Power supply
or b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
DE80127

network 24 V DC b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.

3 Network cable clamps
(inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).

Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
2-wire Power supply
or b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a
network 24 V DC CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings)
b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.

SEPED310017EN 389
 Installation ACE959
4-wire RS 485 network interface

Function
The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network
PE80322

b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
cord.

Characteristics
ACE959 module
Weight 0.2 kg (0.441 lb)

ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
4-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential
mm
Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
in
Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
DE80036

3.46 40 mA maximum in sending mode

Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network
with standard cable
Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with
Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m (1000 ft) 1000 m (3300 ft)
10 180 m (590 ft) 750 m (2500 ft)
20 160 m (520 ft) 450 m (1500 ft)
25 125 m (410 ft) 375 m (1200 ft)

1.81
5.67
Description and dimensions
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected. A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord

-wire Power supply D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
or

6
network 24 V DC
t Grounding/earthing terminal

1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in

progress).
DE80129

2 Jumper for 4-wire RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 Ω) , to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps
(inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).
Power supply
or
24 V DC
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a
-wire Power supply
or CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings)
network 24 V DC b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC
b The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not
(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed
the shielded cable (3 pairs). power supply module.
(2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power
supply module.

390 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE937 fiber optic interface

Function
1
The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star
system.
PE50024

This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.

Characteristics
ACE937 module
Weight 0.1 kg (0.22 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Power supply Supplied by Sepam
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
ACE937 fiber optic connection interface. Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Fiber optic interface
Fiber type Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength 820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)

CAUTION Fiber optic

diameter
Numerical Maximum Minimum optical
aperture (NA) attenuation power available
Maximum
fiber length
HAZARD OF BLINDING (µm) (dBm/km) (dBm)
Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic.
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700 m (2300 ft)
Failure to follow these instructions can result
62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800 m (5900 ft)
in serious injury.
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600 m (8500 ft)

Maximum length calculated with:

b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 µm fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)

Description and dimensions

6
mm C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.
in
DE80037

1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active

(sending or receiving in progress).
2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving).
3.46 3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).

1.81
2.83
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.

Connection
DE51666

b The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors
b Fiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings).

SEPED310017EN 391
 Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces

Function
PB103454

The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20,
Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent
communication networks:
b The S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a
communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following
protocols:
v IEC 60870-5-103
v DNP3
v Modbus RTU.
The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting.
b The E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote
ACE969TP-2 communication interface. parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software.

There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces, which are identical except for the
S-LAN port:
PB103453

b ACE969TP-2 (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire

RS 485 serial link
b ACE969FO-2 (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic
connection (star or ring).
The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS 485 type port.

Compatible Sepam
The ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 multi-protocol interfaces are compatible with
the following Sepam:
b Sepam series 20 version u V0526
b Sepam series 40 version u V3.00
ACE969FO-2 communication interface. b Sepam series 60 all versions
b Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V3.00.

392 SEPED310017EN
Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces

Characteristics
1
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 module
Technical characteristics
Weight 0.285 kg (0.628 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC
Range -20%/+10% -20%/+10%
Maximum consumption 2W 3 VA
Inrush current < 10 A 100 μs
Acceptable ripple content 12%
Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms
2-wire RS 485 communication ports
Electrical interface
Standard EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply ACE969-2 not required (built-in)
Fiber optic communication port
Fiber optic interface
Fiber type Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength 820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Maximum length of fiber optic network
Fiber diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum optical Maximum fiber
(µm) aperture (dBm/km) power available length
(NA) (dBm)
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700 m (2300 ft)
62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800 m (5900 ft)
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600 m (8500 ft)
Maximum length calculated with:
b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 µm fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi). 6
Dimensions
mm
in
DB114880

service

Rx Tx on Rx Tx
ACE969TP-2
B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5
B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5 94
S-LAN E-LAN 3.70
Rc Rc
e1 e2 Rc Rc

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

144 51.2
5.67 2.0

SEPED310017EN 393
 Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces
Description

ACE969-2 communication interfaces

ACE969TP-2 ACE969FO-2
1 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6
2 Power-supply terminal block

DB114628

DB114629
3 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to
the base unit with a CCA612 cord
4 Green LED: ACE969-2 energized SENS
DE LE
CT URE
SENS
DE LE
CT URE

5 Red LED: ACE969-2 interface status

b LED off = ACE969-2 set up and communication on
Rx
Tx
on
Rx
Tx

operational
Tx Tx
Rx Rx V- V+
V- V+ 4 5
5 B A 3
B A 3 4 1 2
1 2
b LED flashing = ACE969-2 not set up or setup 69TP
-2 E-LA
N
9 69 FO-2 E-LA
N
9 ACE
incorrect ACE
S-LA
N S-LA
N

b LED remains on = ACE969-2 has faulted 5 3 4

5
3 4 1 2
6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades 3 4
5
1 2

1 2
7 E-LAN 2-wire RS 485 communication port
(ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2)
8 S-LAN 2-wire RS 485 communication port
(ACE969TP-2) 2 1 8 7 2 1 9 7
9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port
(ACE969FO-2).

2-wire RS 485 communication ports

1 Draw-out terminal block, with two rows of S-LAN port (ACE969TP-2) E-LAN port (ACE969TP-2 or
connections to the RS 485 2-wire network: ACE969FO-2)
b 2 black terminals: connection of RS 485 twisted- 2 1
2 1
pair (2 wires)
DB114630

DB114631
b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted pair for

s
s
distributed power supply Rx Tx on Rx Tx Rx Tx on Rx Tx
2 Indication LEDs:
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending B A V- V+ B A V- V+
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

3 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance S-LAN E-LAN LAN E-LAN
matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 Ω), to be set
to: Rc Rc Rc
b Rc , if the interface is not at the line end (default Rc Rc Rc
position)
b Rc, if the interface is at the line end. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

6
3 3

Fiber optic communication port

1 Indication LEDs: S-LAN port (ACE969FO-2)
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending 1
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving
DB114632

2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving)

3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending). Rx Tx on Rx Tx

B A V+
1 2 3 4 5

S-LAN E-LAN

Rc
Rc

1 2 3 4 5

3 2

394 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

Power supply and Sepam

1
b The ACE969-2 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using
a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.84 ft, white RJ45 fittings)
b The ACE969-2 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional
earth.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Terminals Type Wiring

e1-e2 - supply Screw terminals b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to
DB114795

2.5 mm²(u AWG 24-12)

or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to
1 mm²(u AWG 24-18)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Schneider
Electric fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
Protective earth Screw terminal 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft)
DE51845 DE51962

and max. cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Functional earth 4 mm (0.16 in) Earthing braid, supplied for connection to
ring lug cubicle grounding

SEPED310017EN 395
 Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

2-wire RS 485 communication ports

DB115265

(S-LAN or E-LAN)
b Connection of the RS 485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to terminals A and B
b In case of ACE 969TP wired with ACE969TP-2:
v connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to terminals 5(V+) et 4(V-)
b In case of ACE969TP-2 only:
v connection only on the terminal 4(V-) ( ground continuity)
v no need of external power supply
b The cable shields must be connected to the terminals marked 3(.) on the
connection terminal blocks.
b Terminal marked 3(.) are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals
of the ACE969TP interface (protective an functional earthing): Ie the shielding of the
RS 485 cables is earthed as well.
b On the ACE969TP-2 interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN RS 485
networks are earthed by the terminal 3.

If ACE969TP and ACE969TP-2 are used together, the external

power supply is required.
DB115263

If ACE969TP-2 is used alone, the external power supply is not

required. The Reference V- must be connected between the
modules.

396 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

Ring Optic star Fiber optic communication port (S-LAN)

DE81271

1
connection connection

Optic star CAUTION

HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the fiber optic.
ACE969FO-2 Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.

The fiber optic connection can be made:

b point-to-point to an optic star system
ACE969FO-2 b in a ring system (active echo).
ACE969FO-2 The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors.
The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.

SEPED310017EN 397
 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces

Function
PB105301

The ACE850 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 40,
Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
ACE850 interfaces have two Ethernet communication ports to connect a Sepam to
a single Ethernet network depending on the topology (star or ring):
b For a star topology, only one communication port is used.
b For a ring topology, both Ethernet communication ports are used to provide
redundancy. This redundancy conforms to the RSTP 802.1d 2004 standard.

Either port can be used for connection:

b To the S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port to connect Sepam to an
Ethernet communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the two
following protocols:
v IEC 61850
v Modbus TCP/IP TR A15
b To the E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote
ACE850TP communication interface.
parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software

There are two versions of the ACE850 interfaces, which are identical except for the
type of port featured:
PB105300

b ACE850TP (Twisted Pair), for connection to an Ethernet network (S-LAN or E-

LAN) using a copper RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet link
b ACE850FO (Fiber Optic), for connection to an Ethernet network (S-LAN or E-LAN)
using a 100Base FX fiber-optic connection (star or ring)

Compatible Sepam
The ACE850TP and ACE850FO multi-protocol communication interfaces are
compatible with:
b Sepam series 40 version u V7.00
b Sepam series 60 all versions
b Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V6.00

ACE850FO communication interface. The ACE850 multi-protocol communication interfaces will only work if TCP/IP
firmware option (ref. 59754) has been ordered with Sepam series 40,
Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80.

398 SEPED310017EN
Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces

Characteristics
1
ACE850TP and ACE850FO module
Technical characteristics
Weight 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC
Range -20%/+10% -20%/+10%
Maximum consumption ACE850TP 3.5 W in DC 1.5 VA in AC
ACE850FO 6.5 W in DC 2.5 VA in AC
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms in DC < 15 A 10 ms in AC
Acceptable ripple content 12%
Acceptable momentary outages 100 ms
Wired Ethernet communication ports (ACE850TP)
Number of ports 2 x RJ45 ports
Type of port 10/100 Base TX
Protocols HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850, TCP/IP, RSTP 801.1d 2004
Baud rate 10 or 100 Mbps
Medium Cat 5 STP or FTP or SFTP
Maximum distance 100 m (328 ft)
Fiber-optic Ethernet communication ports (ACE850FO)
Number of ports 2
Type of port 100 Base FX
Protocols HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850, TCP/IP, RSTP 801.1d 2004
Baud rate 100 Mbps
Fiber type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
Type of connector SC
Fiber optic diameter (µm) Tx minimum optical power Tx maximum optical RX sensitivity (dBm) RX saturation (dBm) Maximum
(dBm) power (dBm) distance
50/125 -22.5 -14 -33.9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)
62.5/125 -19 -14 -33.9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)

Dimensions
mm
6
DE80441

in

ACE850FO

108
4.25
127,2
Sepam
F C
P2
100
P1
100
5
S80 S40 BASE- FX BASE- FX
Tx Rx Tx Rx
4
3
2
1

58
2.28

mm
in
DE80403

171,2
6.74

58
2.28

SEPED310017EN 399
 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces
Description

ACE850TP communication interface

1 ACE850 communication interface status LED
b LED off = ACE850 de-energized
DE80430

ACE850TP 1 b Green LED permanently on = ACE850 energized and operational

2 b Red LED flashing = ACE850 not configured and/or not connected to the base
3 unit
4 b Red LED permanently on = ACE850 not operational (initialization in progress
5 or failed)
Sepam P2 P1 6 2 STS LED: communication status: green permanently on = OK
3 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: off = 10 Mbps, permanently on = 100 Mbps
F C 10/100 10/100
S80 S40 BASE-TX BASE-TX

4 Ethernet Port 2 activity LED: flashing on transmission/reception

5 Ethernet Port 1 100 green LED: off = 10 Mbps, permanently on = 100 Mbps
6 Ethernet Port 1 activity LED: flashing on transmission/reception

ACE850TP: Front view.

7 Power-supply terminal block

8 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid
DE80431

9 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with the CCA614
cord:
b Sepam series 40: communication port C (identified by a white label on the
Sepam unit)
b Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80: communication port F (identified by
7 8 9 10 11 a blue label on the Sepam unit)
10 RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P2 (E-LAN or S-LAN)
ACE850TP: View of underside.
11 RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P1 (E-LAN or S-LAN)

ACE850FO communication interface

1 ACE850 communication interface status LED
b LED off = ACE850 de-energized
DE80432

ACE850FO 1 b Green LED permanently on = ACE850 energized and operational

2 b Red LED flashing = ACE850 not configured and/or not connected to the base
3 unit
4 b Red LED permanently on = ACE850 not operational (initialization in progress
5 or failed)
Sepam P2 P1 6 2 STS LED: communication status: green permanently on = OK
3 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: permanently on = 100 Mbps
F C 100 100
S80 S40 BASE- FX BASE- FX

6
4 Ethernet Port 2 activity LED: flashing on transmission/reception
Tx Rx Tx Rx

5 Ethernet Port 1 100 green LED: permanently on = 100 Mbps

6 Ethernet Port 1 activity LED: flashing on transmission/reception

ACE850FO: Front view.

7 Power-supply terminal block

8 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid
DE80433

9 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with a CCA614 cord:
b Sepam series 40: communication port C (identified by a white label on the
Sepam unit)
b Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80: communication port F (identified by
a blue label on the Sepam unit)
7 8 9 12 13 14 15 12 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2
ACE850FO: View of underside. (E-LAN or S-LAN)
13 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2
(E-LAN or S-LAN)
14 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1
(E-LAN or S-LAN)
15 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1
(E-LAN or S-LAN)

CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.

400 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

Connection to Sepam
DE80444

1
b The ACE850 communication interface should only be connected to
Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 or series 80 base units using a CCA614
prefabricated cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, blue RJ45 fittings).
b Sepam series 40: Connect the CCA614 cord to connector C on the Sepam
base unit (white label).
b Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80: Connect the CCA614 cord to connector
F on the Sepam base unit (blue label).
4321

Connection of power supply

CCA614

The ACE850 interfaces must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC.
ACE850
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
CCA614 performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional
ground.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
CCA614 Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
CD

Connecting the ACE850 to Sepam series 40.

Terminal Assignment Type Wiring

3 -/~ Screw terminals b Wiring without fittings:
DE80445

4 +/~ v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.5 to

2.5 mm² (u AWG 20-12)
or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.5 to 1
mm² (u AWG 20-18)

6
v Stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v Recommended wiring with Schneider
Electric fitting:
4321 - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
CCA614 - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
v Tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v Stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
1 Protective Screw terminal 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft)
DE51845 DE51962

earth and max. cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Functional 4 mm (0.16 in) Earthing braid (supplied) for connection to
ACE850 earth ring lug cubicle grounding

CCA614

C1 C2 F

D1
CCA614 D2

Connecting the ACE850 to Sepam series 60 or series 80.

SEPED310017EN 401
 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

ACE850TP or ACE850FO communication

architectures
Performance
Redundancy performance tests have been conducted using RuggedCom switches
(RS900xx, RSG2xxx family), compatible with RSTP 802.1d 2004.
To ensure optimum performance of the protection system during communication
between Sepam units via GOOSE messages, we strongly recommend setting up a
fault-tolerant fiber-optic ring structure as shown in the connection examples.
Note: Protection performance during communication between Sepam units via GOOSE
message is only ensured by using:
b Fiber-optic connections
b IEC 61850-compatible managed Ethernet switches

ROOT Ethernet switch

The ROOT Ethernet switch is the master switch of the RSTP reconfiguration function:
b A single ROOT Ethernet switch per Ethernet network, in the main loop of the
network
b A Sepam unit must not be the ROOT Ethernet switch of the network

Example of Sepam units connected in a star configuration

Supervisor or RTU
DE81023

Fault tolerant fiber-optic

ring communication
S-LAN network E-LAN

ROOT Ethernet switch

P1/P2 ACE850

6
P1/P2 ACE850 P1/P2 ACE850 P1/P2 ACE850

Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 80 series 40 series 60 series 40

402 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO
Multi-protocol interfaces
Connection

Example of Sepam units connected in a ring configuration

1
DE81024

Supervisor or RTU
Fault tolerant fiber-optic
ring communication
S-LAN network E-LAN

Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet switch 1

switch 3 switch 2
(ROOT)

Ring 1 Ring 2

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
ACE850 TP TP TP TP ACE850 FO FO FO

Sepam 1 Sepam 2 Sepam 3 Sepam 4 Sepam 5 Sepam 6 Sepam n

series 40 series 40 series 40 series 60 series 40 series 40 series 80

Recommendations for connecting Sepam units in ring

configuration
When connecting Sepam units in the same ring configuration, the ACE850 interfaces
must be of the same type (either ACE850TP or ACE850FO).
In the worst-case scenario, each Sepam unit must not be separated by more than 30
communicating devices connected to the network (other Sepam units or Ethernet
switches) from the ROOT Ethernet switch.
A worst-case analysis must be performed for all the Sepam units in each network
topology.
Example:
b In the best-case scenario, Sepam 2 of ring 1 is separated from the ROOT Ethernet
switch by 2 devices: switch 2 and Sepam 1.
b In the worst-case scenario, i.e. if the connections between switches 1 and 2 and
between Sepam units 1 and 2 of ring 1 are broken, Sepam 2 of ring 1 will be
6
separated from the ROOT Ethernet switch by 4 devices: switch 3, switch 2, Sepam
4 and Sepam 3.

SEPED310017EN 403
 Installation ACE909-2
RS 232/RS 485 converter

Function
The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected
PE80317

to a 2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the
ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic
dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two-way simplex
(half-duplex, single-pair) transmission.
The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the
distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969-2 interfaces.
The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor
communication settings.

ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter.

Characteristics
DANGER Mechanical characteristics
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Weight 0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
ARC OR BURNS Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
b Only qualified personnel should install this Electrical characteristics
equipment. Such work should be performed only Power supply 110 to 220 V AC ± 10%, 47 to 63 Hz
after reading this entire set of instructions and Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
checking the technical characteristics of the and frame, and between ACE power supply
device. and interface supply
b NEVER work alone. Galvanic isolation 1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces
before working on or inside it. Consider all Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating
sources of power, including the possibility of (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
backfeeding. Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
device to confirm that all power is off. Transmission delay < 100 ns
b Start by connecting the device to the Distributed power supply for Sepam 12 V DC or 24 V CC, 250 mA max.

6
protective earth and to the functional earth. interfaces
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
use. distributed supply
Failure to follow these instructions will result Environmental characteristics
in death or serious injury.
Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC Value
standard
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive
coupling
in common mode
2 kV with direct coupling
in common mode
1 kV with direct coupling
in differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential mode
1.2/50 µs impulse waves 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

404 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE909-2
RS 232/RS 485 converter

Description and dimensions

1
mm
A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m (33 ft).
in
DE80306

B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power-supply terminal block
3.34
4.13 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 LEDs:
b ON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized
b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active
1.77 b Rx: on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and
4.13 2.56 line impedance matching resistors.
Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
mm
in 2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
DE80022

1.75 matching by 150 Ω resistor

5 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format

(same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network).
2.22
1.42 Rate (bauds) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
1200 1 1 1
2400 0 1 1
4800 1 0 1
9600 0 0 1
0.63 19200 1 1 0
38400 0 1 0
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2. Format SW2/4 SW2/5
With parity check 0
Without parity check 1
1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam) 1
DE80529

2 stop bits 0

Converter configuration when delivered

b 12 V DC distributed power supply
b 11-bit format, with parity check
6
b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.

Connection
RS 232 link
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A
b Maximum length 10 m (33 ft)
b Rx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2
b 0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-
b Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C
b Reversible phase and neutral
b Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).

SEPED310017EN 405
 Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS 485/RS 485 converters

Function
The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a
PE80316

2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network
polarization and impedance matching.
The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed
power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969-2 interfaces.
There are 2 types of ACE919 converter:
b ACE919CC, DC-powered
b ACE919CA, AC-powered.

ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converter.

Characteristics
DANGER Mechanical characteristics
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Weight 0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
ARC OR BURNS Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
b Only qualified personnel should install this Electrical characteristics ACE919CA ACE919CC
equipment. Such work should be performed only Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 24 to 48 V DC ±20%
after reading this entire set of instructions and ±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
checking the technical characteristics of the Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating 1 A rating
device. (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
b NEVER work alone. Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment and frame, and between ACE power supply 1 min
before working on or inside it. Consider all and interface supply
sources of power, including the possibility of Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
backfeeding. Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing Transmission delay < 100 ns
device to confirm that all power is off. Distributed power supply for Sepam 12 V DC or 24 V CC, 250 mA max.
b Start by connecting the device to the interfaces

6
protective earth and to the functional earth. Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in distributed supply
use. Environmental characteristics
Failure to follow these instructions will result Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
in death or serious injury. Electromagnetic compatibility IEC standard Value
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive
coupling
in common mode
2 kV with direct
coupling
in common mode
1 kV with direct
coupling
in differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential
mode
1.2/50 µs impulse waves 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

406 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS 485/RS 485 converters

Description and dimensions

1
A Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply.
mm B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
DE80307

in
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.
3.34
4.13 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and
line impedance matching resistors.
1.77 Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
4.13 2.56 Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
mm
matching by 150 Ω resistor
in
DE80022

1.75
Converter configuration when delivered
12 V DC distributed power supply
2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
2.22
1.42

0.63

Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.

Connection
2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply
To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A
DE51670

L+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals

Shielding.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-
Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. 6
Power supply
To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C
Reversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA)
Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).

SEPED310017EN 407
 Installation ECI850
IEC 61850 Sepam server

Function
The ECI850 can be used to connect Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Sepam
series 60 and Sepam series 80 to an Ethernet network using the IEC 61850
PE80319

protocol.
The ECI850 creates the interface between the Ethernet/IEC 61850 network and a
Sepam RS 485/Modbus network.
A PRI surge arrester (ref. 16339) is supplied with the ECI850 to protect its power
supply.

Compatible Sepam
The ECI850 servers are compatible with the following Sepam:
b Sepam series 20 version u V0526
b Sepam series 40 version u V3.00
b Sepam series 60 all versions
b Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V3.00.
ECI850: IEC 61850 Sepam server.
Characteristics
ECI850 module
Technical characteristics
Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lb)
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Power supply
Voltage 24 V DC (± 10%) supplied by a class 2 power supply
Maximum consumption 4W
Dielectric withstand 1.5 kV
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Storage temperature -40 °C to +85 °C (- 40 °F to +185 °F)
Humidity ratio 5 to 95% relative humidity
(non condensing) at +55 °C (131 °F)
Degree of pollution Class 2
Tightness IP30
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emission tests
Emissions (radiated and conducted) EN 55022/EN 55011/FCC Class A
Immunity tests - Radiated disturbances

6 Electrostatic discharge
Radiated radiofrequencies
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
Magnetic fields at the network frequency EN 61000-4-8
Immunity tests - Conducted disturbances
Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4
Surges EN 61000-4-5
Conducted radiofrequencies EN 61000-4-6
Safety
International IEC 60950
USA UL 508/UL 60950
Canada cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 60950)
Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS 60950
Certification
Europe e
2-wire/4-wire RS 485 communication port
Electrical interface
Standard 2-wire or 4-wire differential RS 485 EIA
Max. number of Sepam units per ECI850 2 Sepam series 80 or
2 Sepam series 60 or
3 Sepam series 40 or
5 Sepam series 20
Maximum network length 1000 m (3300 ft)
Ethernet communication port
Number of ports 1
Type of port 10/100 Base Tx
Protocols HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850
TCP/IP
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps

408 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ECI850
IEC 61850 Sepam server

Characteristics (cont’d)
1
PRI surge arrester
Electrical characteristics
Nominal operating voltage 48 V DC
Maximum discharge current 10 kA (8/20 μs wave)
Nominal discharge current 5 kA (8/20 μs wave)
Protection level 70 V
Response time 1 ns
Connection
With cage terminals Cables with cross-section 2.5 to 4 mm2 (AWG 12-10)

Description
1 LED: power-up/maintenance
2 Standard LEDs:
PE80063

b RS 485 LED: network link active

v On: RS 485 mode
v Off: RS 232 mode
b Flashing green Tx LED: ECI850 transmission
active
b Flashing green Rx LED: ECI850 reception active
3 Ethernet LEDs:
b LK green LED on: network link active
b Flashing green Tx LED: ECI850 transmission
active
b Flashing green Rx LED: ECI850 reception active
b 100 green LED:
v On: 100 Mbps network speed
v Off: 10 Mbps network speed
4 10/100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection
by RJ45 connector
5 Connection of the 24 V DC supply
6 Reset button
7 RS 485 connection
8 RS 485 parameter-setting selector switches
9 RS 232 connection

6
Setting the RS 485 network parameters
The network polarization and line impedance matching resistors and type of 2-wire/
Recommended settings 4-wire RS 485 network are selected by means of the RS 485 parameter-setting
DE80262

selector switches. These selector switches are configured by default for a 2-wire
RS 485 network with network polarization and line impedance matching resistors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 Network line impedance matching SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
2-wire (by default)
with resistor
2-wire RS 485 OFF ON
4-wire RS 485 ON ON

Network polarization SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

at the 0 V ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
at the 5 V ON
4-wire

Setting the RS 485 network parameters. Selecting the RS 485 network SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
2-wire network ON ON
4-wire network OFF OFF

Setting the Ethernet link parameters

The TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the ECI850 to
set the Ethernet link parameters.

SEPED310017EN 409
 Installation ECI850
IEC 61850 Sepam server

Dimensions
mm 65.8
in 2.59

DE80263
57.9
35 2.28 80.8 45.2
1.38 3.18 90.7 1.78
3.57

2.5
72 49.5 0.10
2.83 1.95
68.3
2.69

NOTICE Connection
RISK OF DESTRUCTION OF THE ECI850 b Connect the power supply and RS 485 twisted pair using cable with cross-section
b Connect the PRI surge arrester in accordance y 2.5 mm2 (uAWG 12)
with the wiring diagrams below. b Connect the 24 V DC power supply and the earth to inputs (1), (5) and (3) of the
b Check the quality of the earth connected to the PRI surge arrester (ref. 16339) supplied with the ECI850
surge arrester. b Connect outputs (2), (8) and (6), (12) of the PRI surge arrester to the - and +
Failure to follow these instructions can result terminals of the black screen terminal block
in equipment damage. b Connect the RS 485 twisted pair (2-wire or 4-wire) to the (RX+ RX- or RX+ RX-
TX+ TX-) terminals of the black screw terminal block
b Connect the RS 485 twisted pair shielding to the terminal of the black screw
terminal block
b Connect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector

2-wire RS 485 network

+
DE80447

-
+24 V (1) (7) (3) (5) (11)

PRI
Ref : 16339

6 (2) (8) (6) (12) ECI850

A
ACE949-2

B A
ACE949-2

B
(7) V+ V+ V+
(6) V- V- V-

Rx+ (3) L- L-
Rx- (4) L+ L+
(5)

4-wire RS 485 network

+
DE80448

-
+24 V (1) (7) (3) (5) (11)

PRI
Ref : 16339
ECI850 ACE959 ACE959
(2) (8) (6) (12)
A B A B
(7) V+ V+ V+
(6) V- V- V-

Rx+ (3) Tx+ Tx+

Rx- (4) Tx- Tx-
Tx+ (1) Rx+ Rx+
Tx- (2) Rx- Rx-
(5)

410 SEPED310017EN
 Installation ECI850
IEC 61850 Sepam server

Example of architecture
1
The diagram below shows an example of the communication architecture with
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam servers.
Note: Rc, line impedance matching resistor
Supervisor
or RTU
DE81028

Ethernet TCP/IP/IEC 61850

ECI850 ECI850 ECI850 ECI850

S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN
and E-LAN and E-LAN and E-LAN and E-LAN RS 485/Modbus

Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2

Sepam Sepam
series 80 series 80

RS 485/Modbus

Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2

Sepam Sepam
series 60 series 60

RS 485/Modbus

Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2 6

Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 40 series 40 series 40

RS 485/Modbus

Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-2

Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 20 series 20 series 20 series 20 series 20

Maximum Advised Configuration

The maximum configuration of Sepam for an ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
of level 1 is to be choosen between the following configurations:
b 5 Sepam series 20,
b 3 Sepam series 40,
b 2 Sepam series 60,
b 2 Sepam series 80.

SEPED310017EN 411
6

412 SEPED310017EN
Use Contents

User-machine interfaces 414

Presentation 414
Selection guide 415
Description of the advanced UMI 416
Description of the mimic-based UMI 417
Local operation on the UMI 418
Types of operations and passwords 418
Display of operating information 419
Operating functions not requiring a password 421
Operating functions requiring a password 422
Entry of parameter and protection settings 423
Local control using the mimic-based UMI 425
SFT2841 setting and operating software 426
Welcome window 426
Presentation 427
General screen organization 428
Use of the software 430
Creation of user messages 431
Disturbance recording 432
Implementing the Motor start report and trend functions 433
Logic-equation editing 435
Default settings 436
Configuration of a Sepam network 438
SFT2841 software Mimic-diagram editor 443
Presentation 443
General screen organization 445
Use 447
Principles 453
Methods 454
Testing and metering equipment required 455
General examination and preliminary actions 456
Checking of phase current and voltage input connections 457
With 3-phase generator 457
With single-phase generator and voltages delivered by 3 VTs 459
With single-phase generator and voltages delivered by 2 VTs 460
LPCT type current sensors 461
Checking of residual current
and residual voltage input connections 462

7
Checking of residual current input connection 463
Checking of residual voltage input connection 464
With voltage delivered by 3 VTs in open delta arrangement 464
With voltage delivered by 1 neutral point VT 465
Checking of Sepam C60 unbalance current input connections 466
Checking of logic input and output connections 467
Checking of GOOSE logic input connections 468
Checking of optional module connections 469
Validation of the complete protection chain 470
Test sheet 471
Sepam series 60 471
Troubleshooting assistance 473
Replacing the base unit
Replacing the battery 477
Maintenance tests 478
Firmware modifications 479
Application cartridge firmware 479
Base firmware 480
Cartridge and base firmware compatibility table 481

SEPED310017EN 413
 Use User-machine interfaces
Presentation

Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam base units:
b mimic-based UMI
b advanced UMI.
The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions.

A Sepam with a remote advanced UMI is made up of:

b a bare base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
b a remote advanced UMI (DSM303)
v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
the facility manager
v for connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord.
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module DSM303 are presented on
page 380.

Comprehensive data for facility managers

All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand:
PE80711

b display of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/
or in bar graphs
b display of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and
Sepam resetting
b display of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major
protection functions
b adaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to
new operating constraints
b display of Sepam and remote module versions
b output testing and logic input status display
b entry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings.

Sepam base unit with integrated advanced UMI.

Local control of devices using the mimic-based UMI

The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as
PE80733

local control of devices:

b selection of the Sepam control mode
b view device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam.

Ergonomic data presentation

b keypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation
b menu-guided access to data
b graphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol
b excellent display quality under all lighting conditions : automatic contrast setting
and backlit screen (user activated).

7
Sepam base unit with mimic-based UMI.

Working language
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based
UMI are available in 2 languages:
PE50474

b English, the default working language

b and a second language, which may be
v French
v Spanish
v another "local" language.
Please contact us regarding local language customization.

Connection of Sepam to the parameter setting tool

Customized Chinese advanced UMI. The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter
setting.
A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS 232 communication
port on the front of the unit.

414 SEPED310017EN
Use User-machine interfaces
Selection guide

Base unit With remote advanced With integrated With mimic-based UMI
UMI advanced UMI

PE80734

PE80735

PE80736
Functions
Local indication
Metering and diagnosis data b b b
Alarms and operating messages b b b
List of activated protection functions b b b
Main protection settings b b b
Version of Sepam and remote modules b b b
Status of logic inputs b b b
Switchgear status on the animated b
mimic diagram
Phasor diagram of currents or voltages b
Local control
Alarm acknowledgement b b b
Sepam reset b b b
Output testing b b b
Selection of Sepam control mode b
Device open/close order b
Characteristics
Screen
Size 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 240 pixels
Automatic contrast setting b b b
Backlit screen b b b
Keypad
Number of keys 9 9 14
Control-mode switch Remote / Local / Test
LEDs
Sepam operating status b base unit: 2 LEDs visible on back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back
b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs
visible on front

7
Indication LEDs 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI 9 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front
Mounting
b bare base unit, mounted at the Flush mounted on front of cubicle Flush mounted on front of cubicle
back of the compartment using the
AMT880 mounting plate
b DSM303 remote advanced UMI
module , flush mounted on the front
of the cubicle and connected to the
base unit with the CCA77x
prefabricated cord

SEPED310017EN 415
 Use Description of the advanced UMI

Integrated advanced UMI

Identifi- Picto Description
cation

DE80094
1 Green LED: Sepam on.
2 Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
3 9 yellow indication LEDs
(L1 to L9 from left to right).
4 Label identifying the indication LEDs
5 Graphical LCD screen.
6 Display of measurements.

7 Display of switchgear, network and machine

diagnosis data.
8 Display the alarm history.

9 Two-function key, depending on the screen

displayed:
b "Confirm" function for the entered values
and selection.
10 Two-function key, depending on the screen
displayed:
b "Clear" function used to:
v acknowledge the active alarm
v reset the peak demand measurements
and diagnosis information
v clear the alarm history
b "Cursor up" function.

11 Two-function key:
b key pressed for five seconds: LED and
display test

19
b key pressed briefly: Cursor down

12 Display of Sepam data.

NOTICE
13 Display and adaptation of the settings of
active protection functions. DAMAGE TO CARTRIDGE
Do not install or remove the memory cartridge with the power on.
14 Access to screen for password entry. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
15 PC connection port.
16 Backup battery.
17 Protective battery cover.
18 Memory cartridge.
19 Door.

DSM303 remote advanced UMI module

7
DE80128

416 SEPED310017EN
Use Description of the mimic-based
UMI

Identifi- Picto Description

cation

DE80095
1 Graphical LCD screen.
2 Green LED: Sepam on.
3 Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
4 Local closing of devices selected on the
mimic-based UMI.
5 Local opening of devices selected on the
mimic-based UMI.
6 Allocation label of leds.
7 7 yellow leds,
1 red led (I),
1 green led (O),
(L1 to L9 upwards)
8 Move cursor up.

9 Confirm data entry.

10 Move cursor down.

11 PC connection port.
12 Transparent door.
13 Access to screen for password entry.

14 Display the mimic-diagram.

15 Reset the latched information.

16 Display the alarm history.

26
17 Key used to:
b acknowledge the active alarm
b reset the peak demand measurements
and diagnosis information
b clear the alarm history.
18 Two-function key:
b key pressed briefly: display of
switchgear, network and machine
diagnosis data.
b key pressed for five seconds: LED and
display test. NOTICE
19 Display and adaptation of the settings of
DAMAGE TO CARTRIDGE
active protection functions.
20 Display of measurements and phasor
Do not install or remove the memory cartridge with the power on.
diagram. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
21 Display of Sepam data.

22 Three-position key switch to select Sepam

control mode: Remote, Local or Test.
23 Backup battery.

7
24 Protective battery cover.
25 Memory cartridge.
26 Door.

SEPED310017EN 417
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Types of operations and passwords

Types of operations
The Sepam UMI can be used for three types of operations:
b normal operations: e.g., consult operating information, reset Sepam and
acknowledge current alarms
b protection settings: e.g. modify the tripping set point of an active protection
function
b modify Sepam parameters: e.g. change the operating language or set the internal
clock.

Protection setting and parameter operations require a password.

Passwords
Protection setting and parameter operations are protected by two different
passwords:
b password for protection settings
b password for parameter settings
The passwords have 4 digits.
The default passwords are 0000.

The table below indicates the operations authorized for each password.

Operations No password Protection-setting Parameter-setting

password password
Normal operation b b b
Set the active b b
protection functions
Modify Sepam b
parameters

Entry of passwords
1. Press the key to access to screen for password entry.
DE51564

2. Press the key to position the cursor on the first digit.

3. Scroll the digits using the cursor keys and .
4. Confirm to go on to the following digit by pressing the key.
(Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits.)
5. When the four digits have been entered, press the key to position the cursor
on [Apply].
6. Press the key again to confirm.

Validity of passwords
Indication of password validity
Screen for password entry. b After entry of the protection-setting password, the pictogram is displayed at
the top of the screen.
b After entry of the parameter-setting password, the pictogram is displayed at
the top of the screen.
DE51565

The pictogram remains displayed as long as the password is valid and the

7
corresponding operations are authorized.
End of validity
A password is deactivated:
b by pressing the key
b automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes.

Loss of passwords
Please contact our local after-sales service representative.

Indication of password validity on the display:

= password for protection settings is valid.

= password for parameter settings is valid.

418 SEPED310017EN
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Display of operating information

Categories of operating information

Sepam operating information is grouped in four categories:
b measurements, accessed via the key
b diagnosis data, accessed via the key
b the alarm history, accessed via the key
b the settings of active protection functions, accessed via the key.

These five categories for the operating information are divided into subcategories to
facilitate access to the desired information.

Key Category of information Sub-category

Measurements b Current
DE51566

b Voltage
b Frequency
b Power
b Energy
b Phasor (on mimic-based UMI only)
Switchgear, network and machine b Diagnostic
diagnosis b Tripping context 0 (last recorded tripping
context)
b Tripping context -1 (next to last recorded
tripping context)
b Tripping context -2
b Tripping context -3
b Tripping context -4
Selection screen for measurements. b Out-of-sync context
Alarm history b List of alarms in sets of four
(16 last recorded alarms) b Detailed information on individual alarms
Sepam data b General information:
v identification of the base unit
DE51567

v minimum required version of SFT2841

software
v general parameters
v Sepam internal clock
b Remote modules:
v module identification
b Inputs/outputs:
v status and test of logic outputs
v status of logic inputs
Settings of active protection Access to each individual protection function,
functions by selecting its ANSI code

Selection screen for active protection functions.

SEPED310017EN 419
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Display of operating information

Example: measurement loop Access to operating information

b After selecting a category by pressing the corresponding key, a selection screen
displays the subcategories.
DE51568

b Select the subcategory with the cursor, using the and keys (the selected
subcategory is displayed in inverse video).
b When the selection is validated by the key, the system displays the first screen
presenting the operating information of the selected subcategory.
b Press again the key of the category displayed to go on to the next screen.
b The diagram opposite shows the progression in a given subcategory.
b When a screen cannot be completely displayed, use the and keys.

420 SEPED310017EN
Use Local operation on the UMI
Operating functions not requiring a
password

Reset the latched information

The key is used to reset latched information.
Sepam resetting must be confirmed.
The alarm messages are not erased.

Acknowledge the active alarm

When Sepam displays an alarm, the key is used to return to the screen
displayed prior to the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm.
The key does not reset the latched information.

Reset the peak demand measurements

The following measurement and diagnosis information can be reset using the Sepam
UMI:
b demand current
b peak demand current
b peak demand power.

Proceed as follows to reset the information:

1. Display the screen showing the information to be reset.
2. Press the key.

Clear the alarm history

The alarm history (last 16 alarms) stored by Sepam can be cleared as follows:
1. Press the key to display the alarm history.
2. Press the key.

Test the LEDs and the display

The test on the LEDs and the display checks each LED and each pixel in the display.

Proceed as follows to run the test:

1. Press the key for five seconds.
2. The nine LEDs go on successively in a predefined sequence.
3. Then the pixels in the display go on successively in a predefined sequence.

SEPED310017EN 421
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Operating functions requiring a
password

Reset the diagnosis information

The diagnosis information for certain protection functions can be reset using the
Sepam UMI, after entering the parameter-setting password.
The information is listed below:
b the number of starts before inhibition, linked with the "Starts per hour" function
(ANSI 66)
b heat rise calculated by the "Thermal overload" function (ANSI 49RMS).

Proceed as follows to reset the information:

1. Enter the password for parameter settings.
2. Display the screen showing the information to be reset.
3. Press the key.

Test the logic outputs

It is possible to change the status of each logic output for five seconds. The check
DE81043

on logic-output connections and switchgear operation is thus simplified.

The screens on the logic outputs may be accessed in the "Sepam information"
category, then in the "Inputs/outputs" subcategory.
The first screen presents the logic outputs of the base unit and up to three additional
screens present the logic outputs of the additional MES120 modules.
A "Logic outputs" screen presents the status of all the logic outputs for a module and
can be used, following entry of the parameter-setting password, to change the status
of each output to check its operation.

Screen presenting the logic outputs of the base unit and the Proceed as follows to test a logic output:
status of each output, with the possibility of testing each output. 1. Enter the password for parameter settings.
2. Display the screen showing the logic output to be tested.
3. Go to the selection field for the output to be tested by pressing the key4.
4. Scroll the addresses of the logic outputs in the module using the cursor keys
and to select the desired logic output.
5. Confirm the selected output by pressing the key.
6. Press the or key to go on to the [Test] box.
7. Press the key to change the status of the logic output for five seconds.

422 SEPED310017EN
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Entry of parameter and protection
settings

Data entry principles

The principles behind the entry of parameter and protection settings are identical.
DE51570

There are four steps in modifying parameter or protection settings using the Sepam
UMI:
1. Enter the suitable password for either the protection or the parameter settings
(see "Entry of passwords", page 418).
2. Display the screen with the value to be modified (see "Display of operating
information", page 419).
3. Modify the values using one of the three entry methods offered, depending on the
type of parameter or protection settings:
b entry of Boolean values
"General parameters" screen. b selection of a value among a number of options
b entry of numerical values
4. Final confirmation of all the new parameter or protection settings for use by
Sepam.

Entry of Boolean values

Boolean parameters and protection settings are shown on the Sepam display as two
DE51571

buttons, representing the two status conditions of Boolean data.

For example, the language used for the operating texts on the Sepam UMI is a
Boolean parameter that can have one of two states:
b English
b a local language (e.g. French).

To modify the value of a Boolean parameter or protection setting, proceed as follows:

1. Position the cursor using the and keys.
2. Confirm the selection using the key.

Selection of a value among a number of options

Setting screen for the "phase overcurrent" protection function
(ANSI 50/51). Certain parameters and protection settings must be selected from a finite number of
possibilities.
1. Boolean setting. For example, the type of tripping curve for the "phase overcurrent" protection function
2. Selection of a value among a number of options. is selected from among 16 predefined curves (DT, SIT, VIT, EIT, etc.).
3. Numerical value.
4. Boxes for final validation (Apply) or to cancel (Cancel) the
procedure. To select the desired parameter or protection setting, proceed as follows:
5. Pictogram indicating that the user is authorized to modify 1. Position the cursor on the value to be modified using the and keys.
parameters and protection settings (after entry of the 2. Confirm using the key.
parameter-setting password). 3. Scroll the possibilities using the and keys.
4. Confirm the new value by pressing the key.

Entry of numerical values

Numerical parameters and protection settings are shown on the Sepam display as
three digits, with or without the decimal point and the unit symbol.

7
To modify the value of a numerical parameter or protection setting, proceed as
follows:
1. Position the cursor on the value to be modified using the and keys.
2. Confirm by pressing the key to position the cursor on the first digit.
3. Scroll the characters using the cursor keys and : the available characters
are the digits from 0 to 9, the decimal point and a space.
4. Confirm to go on to the following digit by pressing the key.
5. After confirming the third digit, the cursor is positioned on the unit symbol.
6. Scroll the available units using the and keys and confirm the selected
unit by pressing the .

SEPED310017EN 423
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Entry of parameter and protection
settings

Final confirmation of modifications

After modifying one or more parameters or protection settings on a screen,
confirmation is required before Sepam takes the modifications into account.

To confirm all the parameter and protection settings modified on a screen, proceed
as follows:
1. Position the cursor on the [Apply] box at the bottom of the screen using the
key.
2. Confirm using the key.
The new parameter or protection settings are taken into account by Sepam.

424 SEPED310017EN
 Use Local operation on the UMI
Local control using the mimic-based
UMI

Sepam control mode

A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode.
PE80330

Three modes are available: Remote, Local or Test.

In Remote mode:
b remote control orders are taken into account
b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order.
In Local mode:
b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order
b local control orders are enabled.
Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventive-
maintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.

Local control using the mimic-based UMI.

View device status on the animated mimic diagram

For safe local control of devices, all information required by operators can be
displayed simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI:
b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated,
graphic indication of device status in real time
b the desired current, voltage and power measurements.
The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied,
predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch.

Local control of devices

All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be
controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI.
The most common interlock conditions can be defined by logic equations.

The sure and simple operating procedure is the following:

b select the Local or Test control mode
b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys
or . Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is
authorized and informs the operator (selection window with a solid line).
b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key (the
selection window flashes).
b device control by pressing:
v key : open order
v or key : close order.

SEPED310017EN 425
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Welcome window

Description
The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched.
PE80759

It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens, and provides access to the
Sepam parameter and protection setting files:
b In disconnected mode, you can open or create a parameter and protection setting
file for a Sepam
b When connected to a single Sepam unit, you can access the parameter and
protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC
b When connected to a Sepam network, you can access the parameter and
protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC via a
communication network.

Language of SFT2841 screens

SFT2841 software can be used in English, French or Spanish. The language is
selected at the top of the window.

Using SFT2841 in disconnected mode

Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for Sepam
prior to commissioning.
The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be
downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode.
b To create a new parameter and protection setting file, click on the icon for the
relevant Sepam family.
Welcome window. b To open an existing parameter and protection setting file, click on the icon
for the relevant Sepam family.
Sepam series 60
Using SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit
DE81044

Connected to a single Sepam unit mode is used during commissioning:

b To upload, download and modify Sepam parameters and settings
RS 232 b To have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning.
The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to the port on the front panel
SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the serial port. of the Sepam via an RS 232 port using the CCA783 cord or via an USB port using
Sepam series 60 the CCA784 cord.
To open the parameter and protection setting file on the Sepam once it is connected
DE81045

to the PC, click on the icon.

CCA784

SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the USB port.

Using SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network

SFT Connected to a Sepam network mode is used during operation:
2841
DE81046

b To manage the protection system

7
To
supervisor b To check the status of the power supply
b To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply.
The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via
Sepam series 20 a communication network (connection via serial link, telephone line or Ethernet). This
network forms the E-LAN engineering network.

The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network, and provides
access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the
network.
Sepam series 40
To open the connection window, click on the icon.

See “Configuration of a Sepam network” page 441 for details of how to configure the
E-LAN engineering network from the connection window.
Sepam series 60

SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network.

426 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Presentation

The SFT2841 software is used to set up and operate

Sepam units. It operates in the Windows environment

PE80760
(XP or Vista).
All the data used for the same task are grouped in the
same screen to facilitate operation. Menus and icons
are used for fast, direct access to the data required.

Normal operation
b display of all metering and operation data
b display of alarm messages with the time of
appearance (date, hour, min, s, ms)
b display of diagnosis data such as tripping current,
number of switchgear operations and cumulative
breaking current
b display of all protection and parameter settings
b display of the logic status of inputs, outputs and
LEDs.
The SFT2841 software is the solution suited to
occasional local operation, for demanding personnel
who require fast access to all the information.

Example of a measurement display screen.

Parameter and protection settings (1)

b display and setting of all the parameters of each
PE80761

protection function on the same page

b set-up of general settings and Sepam data
b set-up of control and monitoring functions
b input data may be prepared ahead of time and
transferred into the Sepam in a single operation
(loading function).
Main functions performed by SFT2841
b changing of passwords
b entry of general settings (ratings, integration period, …)
b entry of protection settings
b modification of assignments for control and
monitoring functions
b enabling/disabling of functions
b entry of mimic-based UMI parameters
b saving of files.

Saving
b protection and parameter setting data may be saved

7
b printing of reports is possible as well.
The SFT2841 software may also be used to retrieve
disturbance recording files and display them using the
Example of a directional earth fault protection setting screen.
SFT2826 software tool.

Operating assistance
Access from all screens to a help section containing all
the technical information needed to use and
commission Sepam.

(1) Modes accessed via 2 passwords (protection setting level,

parameter setting level).

SEPED310017EN 427
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
General screen organization

A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a

1
graphic interface that has the conventional Windows

PE80718
2
features. 3
All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the
same way.
They include:
1 The title bar, with:
b name of the application (SFT2841)
b identification of the Sepam document displayed
b corner symbols for window adjustments 4
2 The menu bar, for access to all the SFT2841
software functions (unavailable functions are
dimmed).
3 The toolbar, a group of contextual icons for quick
access to the main functions (also accessed via
the menu bar).
4 The work zone available to the user, presented in
the form of tab boxes.
5 The status bar, with the following information
relating to the active document: 5
b alarm on Example of hardware configuration screen.
b identification of the connection window
b SFT2841 operating mode, connected or not
connected
b type of Sepam
PE80763

b identification of Sepam edited

b identification level
b Sepam operating mode
b PC date and time.

Guided navigation
A guided navigation mode is proposed to make it easier
to enter all of the Sepam parameter and protection
settings. It guides users through all data input screens
in the natural order.
The sequencing of the screens in guided mode is
controlled by clicking on 2 icons in the toolbar 3:
b : to go back to the previous screen
b : to go to the next screen.

The screens are linked up in the following order:

1 Sepam hardware configuration
2 General characteristics
3 CT/VT sensors
4 CT/VT circuit supervision

7
5 Particular characteristics Example of general characteristics screen.
6 Control logic
7 Logic input/output assignments
8 Assignment of GOOSE logic inputs
9 Setting screens for the protection functions
available, according to the type of Sepam
10 Logic equation editor
11 Various tabs of the control matrix
12 Parameter setting of the disturbance recording
function
13 Set-up of the mimic-based UMI

On-line help
The operator may look up on-line help at any time via
the "?" command in the menu bar.
Acrobat Reader is required for on-line help. It is
provided on the CD.

428 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
General screen organization

Details of the different screens

PE80764
b identification: entry of the password gives the
user access rights to the parameter and protection
setting mode (valid for 5 minutes)

b selection of a new application from a list of

application files with factory settings. The file suffix
identifies the application.
e.g.: "appli.G62" is for a Generator 62 application

b opening of an existing application which, in

principle, should be located in the "Sepam" sub-
directory of the "SFT2841" directory. A type of
application may be selected by choosing the type of file
(e.g.: file type *.S60, or *. G62 or *.* to obtain the
complete list of files)

b saving of an application: go to the "Sepam" sub-

directory of the "SFT2841" directory, and name the file.
The application suffix is updated automatically

b configuration and complete or partial printing of

the current configuration file
Example of tripping contexts screen.
b print preview of the configuration file
b control matrix: used to assign logic outputs, LEDs and messages to
b hard-copy of the current screen information produced by the protection units, logic inputs and logic equations.
This function may also be used to create messages. See "Creation of user
b Sepam parameter setting: messages".
v "Sepam hardware" tab: hardware configuration.
v "General characteristics" tab: setting of the network, b special functions:
remote control and monitoring, password management v "Rec" tab: parameter setting of the disturbance-recording function
and Sepam label printing parameter v -based UMI" tab: parameter setting of the mimic-based UMI
v "CT/VT sensors" tab: configuration of current and
voltage sensors b (1) Sepam diagnosis:
v "CT/VT supervision" tab: implementation and v "Diagnosis" tab: general characteristics, software version, fault indicator and
configuration of CT and VT sensor supervision Sepam time-setting
v "Particular characteristics" tab: v "Input, output and LED status" tab: gives status and proposes an output test
parameter setting of transformer, motor/generator v "Remote indication status" tab: remote indication status
rotation speed
v "Control logic" tab: parameter setting of the b (1) main measurements:
switchgear control, logic discrimination, genset v "UIF" tab: voltage, current and frequency values
shutdown, de-excitation, load shedding and restart v "Other" tab: power, energy and rotation speed values
functions v "Temperatures" tab
v "Logic I/Os" tab: management of logic input and
output assignment b (1) diagnosis:

b protection functions:
v "Application" tab: overview of the protection
v "Network" tab: unbalance / negative sequence, V-I phase displacement, number
of phase and earth trips and total harmonic distortion values
v "Machine" tab: running hours counter, impedance and thermal overload values
7
functions available in the application with graphical
v "Tripping context" tab: gives the last 5 tripping contexts
view of the single-line diagram. A double click on a
protection function label gives quick access to the (1) switchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, auxiliary voltage and
b
setting tab
circuit breaker data
v 1 tab per protection function: setting of the
parameters of each protection function, with a mini- (1)
matrix for setting of the outputs, LEDs and disturbance b management of alarms with history and time-tagging
recording
b (1) disturbance recording: this function is used to record analog signals and

b creation of logic equations: see description in logical states. See "Disturbance recording".
"Control and monitoring functions" chapter
b guided navigation: see previous page

b on-line help: see previous page

(1) These icons are only accessible in "connected to Sepam" mode.

SEPED310017EN 429
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Use of the software

Disconnected mode Connected mode

Sepam parameter and protection setting Precaution
Sepam parameter and protection setting using When a laptop is used, given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static
SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file electricity, the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an
containing all the characteristics that are specific to the earthed metal frame before physically connecting the CCA783 cord.
application, a file that is then loaded into Sepam at the Note : If you are unable to connect to Sepam, check that the SFT2841 software version used is
time of commissioning. actually compatible with your Sepam. See “Compatibility of Sepam version/SFT2841 version” on
page 473.
Plugging into Sepam
NOTICE b plugging of the 9-pin connector (SUB-D type) into one of the PC communication
RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION ports.
b The device must only be configured and set by Configuration of the PC communication port via the "Communication port" function in
qualified personnel, using the results of the the "Options" menu.
installation protection system study. Connection to a USB port on the PC is possible using the CCA784 cable.
b During commissioning of the installation and b plugging of the 6-pin connector into the connector (round MiniDin type) situated
following any modification, check that the Sepam behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module.
configuration and protection function settings are
Connection to Sepam
consistent with the results of this study.
2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam:
Failure to follow these instructions can result b "Connection" function in the "File" menu
in equipment damage. b choice of "connect to the Sepam" at the start-up of SFT2841.
Once the connection with Sepam has been established, "Connected" appears in the
Operating procedure: status bar, and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone.
1. Create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set User identification
up (the newly created file contains the factory settings The window intended for the entry of the 4-digit password is activated:
of the Sepam parameters and protection functions).
b via the "General characteristics" tab, "Passwords" button…
2. Modify the Sepam general settings and protection
b via the "Identification" function in the "Sepam" menu.
function settings:
The "Return to Operating mode" function in the "Passwords" tab withdraws access
b all the data relating to the same function are grouped
rights to the parameter and protection setting mode.
together in the same screen
b it is advisable to enter all the parameters and Loading of parameters and protection settings
protection settings in the natural order of the screens Parameter and protection setting files may only be loaded in the connected Sepam
proposed by the guided navigation mode. in Parameter setting mode.
Entry of parameter and protection settings Once the connection has been established, the procedure for loading a parameter
b the parameter and protection setting input fields are and protection setting file is as follows:
suited to the type of value: 1. Activate the "Load Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu
v choice buttons 2. Select the file (*.S60, *.S62, *.T60, *.T62, *.M61, *.G60, *.G62, *.C60, according
v numerical value input fields to the type of application) which contains the data to be loaded.
v dialogue box (Combo box) Return to factory settings
b the user must "Apply" or "Cancel" the new values This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode, via the "Sepam" menu. All
entered before going on to the following screen of the Sepam general settings, protection settings and the control matrix go back to
b the consistency of the new values applied is the default values.
checked: The return to factory settings does not erase the logic equations.
v an explicit message identifies inconsistent values The logic equation editor must be used to delete them.
and specifies the allowable values
Unloading of parameter and protection settings
v values that have become inconsistent following a

7
The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be unloaded
parameter modification are adjusted to the closest
in Operating mode.
consistent value.
Once the connection has been established, the procedure for unloading a parameter
and protection setting file is as follows:
1. Activate the "Unload Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu
2. Select the *.rpg file that is to contain the unloaded data
3. Acknowledge the end of operation report.
Local operation of Sepam
Connected to Sepam, SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in
the advanced UMI screen, plus the following functions:
b setting of Sepam’s internal clock, via the "Sepam diagnosis" tab
b implementation of the disturbance recording function: enabling/disabling of the
function, retrieval of Sepam files, start-up of Wavewin-SE
b consultation of the history of the last 250 Sepam alarms, with time-tagging
b access to Sepam diagnostic data, in the "Sepam" tab box, included in "Sepam
diagnosis"
b in Parameter setting mode, switchgear diagnosis values may be modified:
operation counter and cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a
breaking device is changed.

430 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Creation of user messages

This operation is carried out using the control matrix

( icon or "Application / Set control matrix" menu).

PE80765
When the matrix is displayed, select the "Events" tab,
double-click on the empty box of the message to be
created, or on an existing message to modify it.
A new screen may be used to:
b create a new user message:
click on the "Create messages" button
b modify the message you have created or an existing
user message:
1. Select the message number in the "No." column.
2. Click on the "Modify" button.
3. An editing or bitmap window may be used to create
text or drawings.
b assign the message to the line in the control matrix:
1. Select "message" if it has not already been
selected.
2. Select the new predefined or user message in the
corresponding "No." column.
3. Click on "Assign".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking on the "OK" button.

Example of message creation screen.

SEPED310017EN 431
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Disturbance recording

Disturbance recording is configured from the icon.

1. Check the "On" option.

DE81230
2. Set:
b the recording number
b the duration of each recording
b the number of samples stored per period
b the number of Pretrig periods (number of periods
stored before the event triggering disturbance
recording).
3. Then draw up the list of logic I/O that need to appear
in the disturbance recording.
If one of the parameters is modified: recording number,
recording duration, number of Pretrig periods, all the
recordings already made will be deleted (warning
message displayed).
A change in the list of logic I/O does not affect existing
recordings.
4. Click on the "Apply" button.

The Disturbance recording function is operated from

the icon, then via the Disturbance recording tab.
Each recording is identified in the list by its date.
Example of disturbance recording configuration screen.
Manual disturbance recording: click on the "New
recording" button: this causes a new time-tagged item to
appear in the list.
DE81231

Viewing a recording
Select one or more disturbance recordings then click on
.

The "Start Record Viewer" button is used to launch the

viewing software (compatible with the COMTRADE
format) in order to read the selected files.

7 Example of disturbance recording display screen.

432 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Implementing the Motor start report
and trend functions
The Motor start report (MSR) function is configured
from the icon .

DE81232
1. Check the "On" option.
2. Set:
b the tripping confirmation (optional)
v circuit breaker
v protection 48/51
b the duration of a recording, either using a duration
expressed in seconds, or using the sampling frequency
3. Then draw up the list of variables that need to appear
in the Motor start report (up to 5 variables in the case of
a normal cartridge and up to 10 variables in the case of
an extended cartridge).
The outlined parameters in the figure
opposite are deemed to be critical. If one of these pa-
rameters is modified, all the recordings already made
will be deleted (warning message displayed).
The critical parameters are as follows:
b recording duration in seconds
b sampling frequency
b selected point list
4. Click on the "Apply" button.
Example of a Motor start report configuration screen.

The Motor start report (MSR) and Motor start trend

(MST) functions are operated from the icon then
DE81233

via the "MSR and MST" tab.

An MST is created when the 1st MSR in a 30-day peri-
od ends.
Downloading / Viewing files
Each recording is identified in the list by its creation
date. The MSR and MST files are sorted from the most
recent to the oldest.
Select one or more MSR and/or MST files then click on
.
For each Data log file, a binary file in COMTRADE for-
mat is downloaded.

The "Start Record Viewer" button is used to launch the

viewing software (compatible with the COMTRADE for-
Example of a Motor start report and trend (MSR and MST) runtime screen.
mat) in order to read the selected files.

Characteristics of MSR and MST functions depending on the type of cartridge used
Maximum number of selectable variables Maximum number of MSR files Maximum number of MST files 7
Standard cartridge 5 5 12
Extended cartridge 10 20 18

SEPED310017EN 433
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Mise en œuvre de la fonction
Enregistrement de données (DLG)
The Data log (DLG) function is configured from the
icon .

DE81234
1. Select the tripping source from the following values:
b Logic equation
b SFT2841 (by default)
b Remote control order
b Logic or GOOSE input
2. Select the type of recording:
b Circular
b Limited
3. Select:
b the total number of files
b the duration common to each file
b the sampling frequency.
The outlined parameters in the figure opposite are
deemed to be critical. If one of the parameters is modi-
fied, all the recordings already made will be deleted
(warning message displayed).
The critical parameters are as follows:
b type of recording
b total number of files
b file duration
b sampling frequency
Example of Data log configuration screen.
b selected point list

The Data log (DLG) function is operated from the

icon then via the "Data log" tab.
DE81235

This screen is dual-purpose. It can be used to:

b download/view one or more available Data log files
b trigger recording of Data log files.
Downloading / Viewing files
Each recording is identified in the list by its creation
date. The DLG files are sorted from the most recent to
the oldest.
Select one or more DLG files then click on .
For each Data log, a binary file in COMTRADE format
is downloaded.
The "Start Record Viewer" button is used to launch the
viewing software (compatible with the COMTRADE for-
mat) in order to read the selected files.
Triggering a Data log
Provided that the SFT2841 software has been config-
ured as a tripping source in the configuration screen, it

7 is possible to start and stop a Data log by clicking on the

"Start" and "Stop" buttons in the Data log runtime
screen.
Example of Data log runtime screen.

In the case of a Data log in "Limited" mode, the "Stop"

button can be used to stop a recording prematurely.

434 SEPED310017EN
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Logic-equation editing

Presentation
Logic-equation editing consists of:
PE80768

b entry and checks on logic equations

b setting the delays used in the logic equations
b loading the logic equations in Sepam.

The logic-equation editor of the SFT2841 software is accessed via the icon.

The logic-equation editor includes:

1 a zone to enter and display the logic equations
2 an editing assistance tool
3 a tool for setting time delays.

Logic-equation editor screen.

Entry of logic equations
The syntax required for logic equations is presented in the "Control and monitoring
functions" chapter.
PE50427

Logic equations are entered in text:

b directly in the equation entry zone
b or using the editing assistance tool.
The editing assistance tool offers guided access to variables, operators and
functions. Via the tab sheets and tree structures, the user can select program
elements and then click the "Add" button. The selected element is placed in the entry
zone.

Check on the logic equations

The syntax of logic equations can be checked by clicking:
b the "Equation check" button during entry of logic equations
b the "Apply" button during final confirmation of the logic equations entered.
An error message is displayed if the check detects an error. The message indicates
the type of error and the line containing the error.

Editing assistance tool. Setting time delays

Time delays can be entered directly in a logic equation.
Example: V1= TON(VL1, 100), "On" time delay, set to delay the shift to 1 of variable
VL1 by 100 ms.
PE50428

To improve equation legibility and facilitate time delay settings, it is preferable to use
the time delay editor to:
b create a time delay, indicating its duration and name (used in writing the logic
equation)
b delete a time delay
Time delay editor. b adjust a time delay by modifying its duration without having to make changes in
the equation entry zone
b display the list of delays used in the logic equations, with their names and
7
durations.
Example:
Create SwitchOnDelay with a duration of 100 ms.
In the entry zone, use the time delay: V1=TON(VL1, SwitchOnDelay).

Load the logic equations in Sepam

Logic equations are transferred to Sepam in connected mode:
b directly by clicking the "Apply" button
b when a configuration file containing logic equations entered in disconnected mode
is loaded.
In both cases, loading results in a short interruption in Sepam operation and
automatic restart at the end of loading.

SEPED310017EN 435
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Default settings

The default settings (or factory settings) are present in Sepam the first time it is used.
It is possible to go back to the Sepam default settings at any time by using the
"Factory settings" function in the SFT2841 software. These settings are also used to
initialize the SFT2841 software setting files.
Parameter Default value
Hardware configuration
Model Integrated UMI
Identification Sepam xxx
COM1, Ethernet Off
MET148-2 No. 1, 2 Off
MSA141 Off
MES120 No. 1, 2 Off
MCS025 Off
General characteristics
Frequency 50 Hz
Incomer/feeder S60, S62, M61, C60 applications: feeder
G60, G62, T60, T62 applications: incomer
Phase rotation direction 1_2_3
Group of settings Group A
Remote protection setting enabled Off
Remote control with select before operate Off
(SBO)
Integration period 5 min
Active-energy increment 0.1 kWh
Reactive-energy increment 0.1 kVAR.h
Temperature °C
Sepam working language English
Time synchronization mode None
Protection setting password 0000
Parameter setting password 0000
Cumulative breaking current alarm 65535 kA²
threshold
CT-VT sensors
Single-line type 1
I - CT rating 5A
I - Number of CTs I1, I2, I3
I – Rated current (In) 630 A
I - Base current (Ib) 630 A
I0 – Residual current None
V – Number of VTs V1, V2, V3
V - Rated primary voltage (Unp) 20 kV
V - Rated secondary voltage (Uns) 100 V
V0 - Residual voltage 3V sum
Vnt - Neutral point voltage None
Particular characteristics

7 Rated voltage Un1

Rated voltage Un2
Rated power
20 kV
20 kV
30 MVA
Vector shift 0
Rated speed 3000 rpm
Zero speed threshold 5%
Number of capacitor steps 1

436 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Default settings

Parameter Default value

Control logic
Switchgear control On, circuit breaker
Logic discrimination Off
Genset shutdown Off
De-excitation Off
Load shedding Off
Restart Off
Automatic transfer Off
Logic I/O assignment
O1, O3 On, NO, permanent
O2, O5 On, NC, permanent
Protection
Activity All protection functions are "off"
Latching 21B, 27D, 32P, 32Q, 38/49T, 40, 46, 48/51LR, 49RMS,
50BF, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 64REF, 67, 67N
Participation in switchgear control 21B, 32P, 32Q, 37, 38/49T, 40, 46, 48/51LR, 49RMS,
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 64REF, 67, 67N
Genset shutdown 12, 40, 50/51 (units 6, 7), 50N/51N (units 6, 7), 59N,
64REF, 67, 67N
De-excitation 12, 40, 50/51 (units 6, 7), 50N/51N (units 6, 7), 59N,
64REF, 67, 67N
Setting Approximate values consistent with general
characteristics by default
Matrix
LED According to front panel marking
Disturbance recording Pick-up
All protection functions except for 14, 27R, 38/49T,
48/51LR, 49RMS, 50BF, 51C, 66
Logic outputs O1: tripping
O2: inhibit closing
O3: closing
O5: watchdog
Disturbance recording
Activity On
Number of recordings 6
Duration of a recording 3
Number of samples per period 12
Number of Pretrig periods 36

SEPED310017EN 437
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network

Connection window
The SFT2841 software connection window is used:
b To select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one
b To set up the connection to the selected Sepam network
b To select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters, settings,
and operation and maintenance information.

Configuration of a Sepam network

Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations.
A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name. It is saved on the SFT2841
PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory (default: C:\Program
Files\Schneider\SFT2841\Net).

Configuration of a Sepam network is in 2 parts:

b Configuration of the communication network
b Configuration of the Sepam units.

Configuration of the communication network

To configure the communication network, first define:
b The type of link between the PC and the Sepam network
b The communication parameters, according to the type of link selected:
v direct serial link
v link via Ethernet TCP/IP
v link via telephone modem.
PE80421

Configuration windows for the communication network, according to the type of link: serial link,
modem link (STN) or Ethernet link (TCP).

438 SEPED310017EN
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network

Direct serial link

The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 (or fiber-optic) multidrop network.
PE80422

Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC, the PC itself will be
connected either directly to the RS 485 network (or fiber-optic HUB), or via an
RS 232/RS 485 converter (or fiber-optic converter).

The communication parameters to be defined are:

b port: communication port used on the PC
b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds
b parity: None, Even or Odd
b handshake: None, RTS or RTS-CTS
Configuration window for the serial link communication b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms
network. b number of retries: from 1 to 6.

Link via Ethernet TCP/IP

The ACE850 communication interface can be used to connect a Sepam series 40,
PE80423

Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 unit directly to an Ethernet network.

All the Sepam units can also be connected to an RS 485 multidrop network over one
or more Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP gateways (for example: EGX gateways or ECI850
servers that act as Modbus TCP/IP gateways for the link with the SFT2841 software).
Use on an IEC 61850 network
SFT2841 can be used on an IEC 61850 network. In this case, it can be used to define
the IEC 61850 configuration of Sepams connected to this network. See the Sepam
IEC 61850 Communication user's manual (reference SEPED306024EN) for more
information.
Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP/IP communication
network. Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP gateway
See the setup manual for the gateway used.
In general, the gateway should be assigned an IP address.
The configuration parameters for the gateway’s RS 485 interface must be defined in
accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration:
b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds
b character format: 8 data bits + 1 stop bit + parity (none, even, odd).
Configuration of communication on SFT2841
When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841, the following communication
parameters must be defined:
b type of device: Modbus gateway, ECI850 or Sepam
b IP address: IP address for the connected remote equipment
b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms.
A time-out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations.
Communication via the TCP/IP gateway may, however, be slowed down if other
applications want Modbus TCP/IP or IEC 61850 access at the same time.
The time-out value should then be increased (2 to 3 seconds).

7
b number of retries: from 1 to 6.
Note 1: SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol.
Although communication is IP-based, use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network
based on an Ethernet network (LAN – Local Area Network).
The operation of SFT2841 over a WAN (Wide Area Network) cannot be guaranteed because of
the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus protocol, causing
communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam.
Note 2: SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified, and direct activation of the
outputs. These operations, which could involve the operation of electrical switchgear (opening
and closing), and thus risk the safety of people and installations, are protected by the Sepam
password. In addition to this protection, the E-LANs and S-LANs must be designed as private
networks, protected from external actions by all suitable methods.

SEPED310017EN 439
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network

Link via telephone modem

The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network using an industrial
PE80424

STN modem.
This modem is the called modem. It must first be configured, either via AT commands
from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied
with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem manufacturer’s manual).

The PC may use an internal or an external modem. This modem on the PC side is
always the calling modem. It must be installed and configured in accordance with the
Windows modem installation procedure.

Configuration window for the communication network via Configuration of the calling modem in SFT2841
telephone modem.
When configuring a Sepam network, SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems
installed on the PC.
The communication parameters to be defined are:
b modem: select one of the modems listed by SFT2841
b telephone no.: no. of the remote modem to be called
b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds
b parity: none (not adjustable)
b handshake: none, RTS or RTS-CTS
b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms.
Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because
of the transit time through the modems. A time-out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms
is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations. In some cases, the poor quality of the
telephone network may require a slower speed (9600 or 4800 bauds). The time-out
value should then be increased (2 to 3 seconds).
b number of retries: from 1 to 6.
Note: the speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured under Windows with the
same values as for SFT2841.

440 SEPED310017EN
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network

Configuration of called modem

The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem. It must first be configured,
PE80424

either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that
may have been supplied with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem
manufacturer’s manual).
Modem RS 485 interface
In general, the configuration parameters for the modem’s RS 485 interface must be
defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration:
b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds
b character format: 8 data bits + 1 stop bit + parity (none, even, odd).
Telephone network interface
Configuration window for the communication network via
Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the
telephone modem.
telephone line, error correction and data compression. These options are not
appropriate for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam, which is based on the
Modbus RTU protocol. Their effect on communication performance may be the
opposite of the expected result.

It is therefore highly advisable to:

b Invalidate the error correction, data compression and telephone line quality
monitoring options
b Use the same end-to-end communication speed between:
v the Sepam network and the called modem
v the called modem (Sepam side) and the calling modem (PC side)
v the PC and the calling modem (see recommended configurations table).

Sepam network Telephone network PC modem interface

38400 bauds V34 modulation, 33600 bauds 38400 bauds
19200 bauds V34 modulation, 19200 bauds 19200 bauds
9600 bauds V32 modulation, 9600 bauds 9600 bauds

Industrial configuration profile

The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side.
These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an
"industrial profile", as opposed to the configuration of modems used in offices.

Depending on the type of modem used, the configuration will either be via AT
commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have
been supplied with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem
manufacturer’s manual).

Characteristics of the "industrial profile" configuration AT command

Transmission in buffered mode, without error correction \N0 (force &Q6)
Data compression deactivated %C0
Line quality monitoring deactivated %E0
DTR signal assumed to be permanently off (allows the modem
connection to be established automatically on an incoming call)
CD signal off when carrier is present
&D0

&C1
7
All reports made to Sepam blocked Q1
Character echo suppression E0
No flow control &K0

SEPED310017EN 441
 Use SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network

Identification of Sepam units connected to the communication

network
PE80425

The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by either:
b Their Modbus address
b Their IP address
b The IP address for their gateway and their Modbus address
These addresses can be configured in either of the following ways:
b Manually, one by one:
v the "Add" button is used to define a new device
v the "Edit" button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary
v the "Delete" button removes a device from the configuration
Sepam network connected to SFT2841. b Or automatically for Modbus addresses, by running an automatic search of the
Sepam units connected:
v the "Automatic search"/"Stop search" button starts or interrupts the search
v when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit, its Modbus address and type are shown
on screen
v when a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841, its Modbus
address is displayed. The text "???" indicates that the device is not a Sepam.

The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the UMI window closes, by
pressing the "OK" button.

Access to Sepam information

To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network, select the
PE80769

Sepam network configuration you want, select the device connected to the TCP/IP
network and press "Connect".
The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window. SFT2841 polls all the
equipment defined in the selected configuration. Each Sepam queried is represented
by an icon:

b Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 actually connected to the network

b Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 actually connected to the network

b Sepam configured but not connected to the network

b Device other than Sepam connected to the network.

A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed:
b Sepam Modbus address
b Type of application and Sepam identification
b Any alarms present
Access to parameters and settings for a Sepam series 60 b Any minor/major faults present.
connected to a communication network.

To access parameters, settings and operation and maintenance information for a

particular Sepam, click on the icon for that Sepam. SFT2841 then establishes a

7
point-to-point connection with the selected Sepam.

442 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Presentation

Description
SFT2841 Sepam setting and operating software includes a mimic-diagram editor
that can be used to personalize the mimic diagram for local control on the mimic-
based UMI of Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 units.
A mimic-diagram or single-line diagram is a simplified diagram of an electrical
installation. It is made up of a fixed background on which symbols and
measurements are placed.

The mimic-diagram editor can be used to:

b create a fixed, bitmap background (128 x 240 pixels) using standard drawing
software
b create animated symbols or use predefined animated symbols to represent the
electrotechnical devices or other objects
b assign the logic inputs or internal status conditions that modify the animated
symbols. For example, the logic inputs for the circuit-breaker position must be
assigned to the circuit-breaker symbol to enable the display of the open and closed
conditions
b assign the logic outputs or internal status conditions that are activated when an
opening or closing order are issued for the symbol
b display the current, voltage and power measurements on the mimic diagram.

Mimic-diagram and symbols

The symbols making up the mimic-diagram constitute the interface between the
mimic-based UMI and the other Sepam control functions.
There are three types of symbols:
b Fixed symbol: represents the electrotechnical devices that are neither animated or
controlled, e.g. a transformer
b Animated symbol with one or two inputs: represents the electrotechnical devices
that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, but cannot be
controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for switch-disconnectors without remote control, for
example.
b Controlled symbol with one or two inputs/outputs: represents the electrotechnical
devices that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, and can
be controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for circuit breakers, for example.
The symbol outputs are used to control the electrotechnical device:
v directly via the Sepam logic outputs
v by the switchgear control function
v by logic equations.

Local control using a symbol

"Controlled - 1 input/output" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols are used to
control the switchgear corresponding to the symbol via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
Control symbols with two outputs
"Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols have two control outputs for opening and 7
closing of the symbolized device.
An order on the mimic-based UMI sends a 300 ms pulse on the controlled output.
Control symbols with one output
"Controlled - 1 input/output" symbols have one control output. The output remains in
the last state to which it was ordered.
A new order results in a change in the output state.
Inhibition of orders
"Controlled - 1 input/output" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols have two
inhibition inputs that, when set to 1, block opening and closing orders. This makes it
possible to create interlocking systems or other order-disabling systems that are
taken into account by the UMI.

SEPED310017EN 443
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Presentation

Symbol animation
Depending on the value of their inputs, symbols change. A graphic representation
corresponds to each state. Animation is carried out automatically by changing the
symbol each time the state changes.
The symbol inputs must be assigned directly to the Sepam inputs indicating the
position of the symbolized switchgear.
Animated symbols with two inputs
"Animated - 2 inputs" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols are animated
symbols with two inputs, one open and the other closed.
This is the most common situation in representing switchgear positions.
The symbol has three states, i.e. three graphic representations: open, closed and
unknown.
The latter is obtained when the inputs are not matched, in which case it is impossible
to determine the position of the switchgear.

Symbol inputs Symbol state Graphic representation

(example)
Input 1 (open) = 1 Open
Input 2 (closed) = 0

Input 1 (open) = 0 Closed

Input 2 (closed) = 1

Input 1 (open) = 0 Unknown

Input 2 (closed) = 0

Input 1 (open) = 1 Unknown

Input 2 (closed) = 1

Animated symbols with one input

"Animated -1 input" and "Controlled -1 input/output" symbols are animated symbols
with one input. The value of the input determines the state of the symbol:
b input set to 0 = inactive
b input set to 1 = active
This type of symbol is used for simple presentation of information, for example the
racked out position of a circuit breaker.

Symbol inputs Symbol state Graphic representation

(example)
Input = 0 Inactive

7
Input = 1 Active

Symbol inputs/outputs
Depending on the desired operation of the mimic-based UMI, Sepam variables must
be assigned to the inputs of animated symbols and the inputs/outputs of controlled
symbols.

Sepam variables assigned to symbol inputs

Sepam variables Name Use
Logic inputs Ixxx Symbol animation directly based on device positions
Outputs of predefined Switchgear control V_CLOSE_INHIBITED Circuit-breaker operation disabled
functions Position of key on the front V_MIMIC_LOCAL, b Representation of key position
panel of Sepam V_MIMIC_REMOTE, b Operation disabled depending on the control mode
V_MIMIC_TEST
Logic equations V_MIMIC_IN_1 to b Representation of Sepam internal status conditions
V_MIMIC_IN_16 b Cases where operation is disabled

Sepam variables to be assigned to symbol outputs

Sepam variables Name Use
Logic outputs Oxxx Direct control of devices
Inputs of predefined functions Switchgear control V_MIMIC_CLOSE_CB Circuit-breaker control using the switchgear-control function
V_MIMIC_OPEN_CB via the mimic-based UMI
Logic equations V_MIMIC_OUT1 to Order processing by logic functions: interlocking, order
V_MIMIC_OUT16 sequence, etc.

444 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
General screen organization

Main screen of the mimic-diagram editor 1

The main screen of the mimic-diagram editor is, by 2

PE80770
default, organized as presented below. 3

1 The title bar, with:

b the name of the application
b identification of the document 4
b handles for window adjustments
2 The menu bar for access to all functions
3 The main toolbar, a group of contextual icons for
quick access to the main functions
4 The mimic-diagram explorer, with the list of
symbols and measurements in the current mimic
diagram.
A toolbar specific to this zone. 5
5 A drawing zone showing the diagram displayed on
the mimic-based UMI.
This is the work zone where the user can place 6
symbols and measurements.
6 The symbol library containing the symbols used in
the mimic diagram.
A toolbar specific to this zone.
Icons in the main toolbar
Select a new diagram in the library of existing diagrams
Open an existing diagram
Open a symbol library
Save a diagram
Zoom forward and back
Display the value of the zoom in %. The value of the zoom can also be
entered directly
On-line help

SEPED310017EN 445
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
General screen organization
Pe50379

A1

A2

B2 B1 B3 B4 B5 C1 C2

Mimic-diagram explorer Mimic-diagram editor Symbol library

Description Description Description
A1 List of symbols contained in the mimic B1 Mimic diagram. C1 Tabs to select a symbol library
diagram Double-click the diagram to open the
drawing software
A2 List of measurements contained in the B2 Symbol contained in the mimic diagram C2 Symbols in the library

7
mimic diagram
Double-click a symbol or measurement to open the B3 Measurements contained in the mimic Double-click a symbol to open the "Symbol
"Symbol properties" window. diagram properties" window.
Icons in the toolbar Double-click a symbol or measurement to open Icons in the toolbar
Read or modify diagram properties the "Symbol properties" window. Create a new symbol library
Click and hold to move a symbol or a
Copy a symbol from the library measurement in the diagram. Open a symbol library

Delete a symbol Close a symbol library

B4 Coordinates of the selected symbol or Save the symbol library to the same file
measurement in pixels or a different file
B5 Dimensions of the selected symbol or Read or modify symbol-library properties
measurement in pixels
Create a new symbol

Delete a symbol

446 SEPED310017EN
Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Use
The mimic-diagram editor can be used on three different levels, depending on the
degree to which the diagram is personalized:
b simple use, e.g. to adapt a predefined diagram
b advanced use, e.g. to complete a predefined diagram
b expert use, e.g. to create a new diagram.

Simple use
This level is the least complicated and should be used first.
To adapt a predefined diagram, proceed as follows:
1. Select a predefined diagram template in the IEC or ANSI libraries.
2. Set up the diagram properties:
b finish the diagram
b assign the symbol inputs and outputs, if necessary
3. Save the diagram.
4. Quit the mimic-diagram editor.

Advanced use
To complete a predefined diagram, proceed as follows:
1. Select a predefined diagram template in the IEC or ANSI libraries.
2. Add an existing symbol or measurement to the diagram.
3. Set up the diagram properties:
b finish the diagram
b select the new measurements to be displayed
b assign the symbol inputs and outputs, if necessary
4. Save the diagram.
5. Quit the mimic-diagram editor.

Expert use
Creation of a completely new diagram requires in-depth knowledge of all the
functions offered by the mimic-diagram editor.
To create a new diagram, proceed as follows:
1. Create new symbols in the symbol library.
2. Set up the properties of the new symbols.
3. If applicable, create new diagram templates on the main window.
4. Create the new diagram:
b add the symbols
b add the measurements
b draw the background of the diagram
5. Set up the diagram properties:
b select the new measurements to be displayed
b assign the symbol inputs and outputs, if necessary
6. Save the diagram.
7. Quit the mimic-diagram editor.
7

SEPED310017EN 447
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Run the mimic-diagram editor

The mimic-diagram editor can be accessed only if the Sepam series 60 was set up
PE80771

with a mimic-based UMI on the "Hardware set-up" screen in the SFT2841 software.
The mimic-diagram editor of the SFT2841 software is accessed via the icon and
the "Mimic-based UMI" tab.
Click the [Edit] button to run the mimic-diagram editor.
Simply close or reduce the mimic-diagram editor to return to the setting and
operating screens in the SFT2841 software.

When the mimic-diagram editor is run:

b if a diagram is already linked to the Sepam, the editor displays the diagram
b if a diagram is not linked to the Sepam, a window opens for selection of a
predefined diagram template in one of the two diagram libraries supplied:
v diagrams complying with standard IEC 60617
v diagrams complying with standard ANSI Y32.2-1975.
Access to the mimic-diagram editor.

Select a predefined diagram template

The window used to select a predefined diagram template is displayed:
PE50432

b when the mimic-diagram editor is opened for the first time

b when the File/New command is clicked
b when the icon is clicked.

Two libraries of predefined diagrams are supplied:

b diagrams complying with standard IEC 60617
b diagrams complying with standard ANSI Y32.2-1975.
For each Sepam application, each library contains a number of predefined diagram
templates corresponding to the most frequently encountered single-line diagrams.

Other diagram templates can be managed by clicking the [Browse the templates]
button.
Selection of a predefined diagram template.
To see the available diagrams, select a subcategory (e.g. substations).
A number of diagrams are then displayed in the "Template of mimic diagram"
window.

To select a diagram template, click the drawing and immediately confirm by clicking
[OK].

448 SEPED310017EN
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Set up the diagram properties

Operation of a mimic-diagram can be completely personalized.
PE50433

The icon in the toolbar of the diagram explorer provides access to the "Properties
of the mimic diagram" window.

Personalization of diagram properties is broken down into four operations:

1. Indication of the general diagram properties: diagram name, description and
version.
2. Modifications in the diagram.
3. Checks on the measurements displayed in the predefined fields based on the list
of values measured by Sepam.
4. Assignment of inputs/outputs to the animated/controlled symbols making up the
diagram.
Modifications in the diagram
Personalization of diagram properties. Click the [Modify] button for the drawing to run the drawing software on the PC
(MS Paint by default). The background is displayed, without the symbols or the fields
reserved for the measurements.
The drawing software can be used to rework the diagram, e.g. by adding text or
modifying the title.
Check on diagram measurements
Each "Measurement" symbol in the diagram is linked by default to the corresponding
Sepam measurement.
For example, the "I1" symbol is linked to the value of current I1, the phase 1 current
measured by Sepam.
It is possible to display additional measurement values that can be selected in the
"Measurements" list.

Logic input/output assignment

The [Modify] button for input/output assignment opens the "I/O assignment" window
PE50434

used to check and modify the Sepam variables assigned to each input and output of
each symbol.
Proceed as follows to modify the symbol inputs and outputs in a mimic-diagram:
1. Select a symbol.
2. Select an input to be modified, if applicable.
3. Select the desired Sepam input variable among the available inputs (it is not
possible to assign a Sepam output variable to a symbol input)
b click the [Assign] button to link the Sepam variable to the symbol input
b click the [Delete] button to release the symbol input.
4. Proceed in the same manner to modify the assignment of a symbol output, if
applicable.
5. Confirm the modifications by clicking [OK].
6. Celect the next symbol and proceed in the same manner.
Logic input/output assignment.

7
Modify the background of the diagram
The background is the drawing, without the symbols or the fields reserved for the
PE50384

measurements.
The background can be modified using the drawing software on the PC (MS Paint by
default):
b to add text or modify the title of the diagram
b to add descriptions for new measurements
b to complete the single-line diagram and add new symbols to the diagram.

The drawing software can be run:

b via the "Diagram properties" window
b by double-clicking the diagram on the main editor window.
It is necessary to save the new drawing and quit the drawing software before
returning to the mimic-diagram editor.

Drawing of the background of the diagram.

SEPED310017EN 449
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Add an existing symbol to the diagram

Proceed as follows to add an existing symbol to a diagram:
1. Select an existing symbol in one of the symbol libraries.
2. Add the symbol to those already in the diagram by clicking the icon in the
diagram explorer.
The new symbol is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the diagram.
3. Modify the drawing by adding the graphic elements required to connect the new
symbol in the mimic-diagram.
4. Correctly position the new symbol in the diagram:
b select the new symbol with a click on the left mouse button
b hold and drag the symbol to the desired position in the diagram.
To precisely position the symbol, it is possible to indicate the desired coordinates:
b open the "Symbol properties" window
b modify the symbol coordinates (X, Y) in the "Specific" zone
b confirm the new position by clicking [OK].
5. Test the animation of the new symbol:
b open the "Symbol properties" window
b modify symbol state: modify the data in the "VALUE" field in the "Specific" zone
b confirm the new state by clicking [OK] and check the new graphic representation
of the symbol in the diagram.

Add a measurement to a diagram

The following measurements can be shown on a diagram:
PE50433

b current: I1, I2, I3, I0, I0Σ

b voltage: V1, V2, V3, V0, U21, U32, U13
b power: P, Q, S, Cos ϕ.

Proceed as follows to add a measurement to a diagram:

1. Display diagram properties by clicking the icon in the diagram explorer.
2. In the "Measurements" list, click the box for the measurement to be added and
confirm by clicking [OK].
3. The new measurement is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the diagram.
modify the drawing by adding the description of the new measurement, e.g. "I0 =".
4. Correctly position the new measurement in the diagram:
b select the new measurement with a click on the left mouse button
b hold and drag the measurement to the desired position in the diagram.
Personalization of diagram properties. To precisely position the new measurement, it is possible to indicate the desired
coordinates:
b open the "Symbol properties" window
b modify the measurement coordinates (X, Y) in the "Specific" zone
b confirm the new position by clicking [OK].
5. Modify the display size of the new measurement:
b open the "Symbol properties" window
b modify the display size of the measurement by changing the value in the "Size"
field in the "Specific" zone
b confirm the new size by clicking [OK] and check the new graphic representation of

7 the measurement in the diagram.

Delete a symbol or measurement in the diagram

Proceed as follows to delete a symbol or measurement in the diagram:
1. Select the symbol or measurement to be deleted in the diagram explorer.
2. Delete the symbol or the measurement by clicking the icon in the diagram
explorer.

450 SEPED310017EN
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Create a new symbol

Two libraries of predefined diagrams are supplied in the "Symbol library" window:
PE50435

b a set of diagrams complying with the IEC standard

b a set of diagrams complying with the ANSI standard.
It is not possible to create new symbols in the two libraries. Each symbol is
represented by an icon.

Proceed as follows to create a new symbol:

1. Create a new library by clicking the icon or select a previously created library.
2. Create a symbol in the library by clicking the icon.
3. Select the type of symbol in the "New symbol" window among the five types of
symbols available.
The five types are presented in the section below.
The symbol is displayed in the library with a default icon.
4. Set up the symbol properties by double-clicking the symbol. The "Symbol
properties" window is displayed to personalize the graphic representation of the
symbol and assign the inputs and outputs.
See the section on "Definition of symbol properties".

Five types of symbols

Creation of new symbols. Symbol type Default Inputs Example of IEC Outputs
icon symbol
Animated - 1 input

Animated -
2 inputs

Controlled -
1 input/output

Controlled -
2 inputs/outputs

Fixed

SEPED310017EN 451
 Use SFT2841 software
Mimic-diagram editor
Use

Set up the symbol properties

The properties of a symbol can be personalized in the "Symbol properties" window.
PE50440

Personalization of symbol properties is broken down into four operations:

1. Indication of the general symbol properties: name and description.
2. Modification of the symbol icon.
3. Modification of the graphic representations of symbol states.
4. Assignment of the inputs/outputs linked to the symbol.

Modify the symbol icon

The icon represents the symbol in the library of symbols.
Click the [Modify] button "3" to run the drawing software. The icon is displayed and
can be modified as desired, as long as the format (32 x 32 pixels) is maintained.
It is necessary to save the new icon and quit the drawing software before going on
to the next step.

Modify the graphic representations of symbol states

The animated or controlled symbols are represented in the diagram in two or three
different states.
Definition of symbol properties: A graphic representation corresponds to each state.
1 Symbol name
Click the [Modify] button "4" to run the drawing software. The graphic representation
2 Symbol description
3 Modify the icon of a symbol state is displayed and can be freely modified.
4 Modify the graphic representations of symbol states It is necessary to save the new representation and quit the drawing software before
5 Modify input/output assignments going on to the next step.
6 Position and test the symbol in the diagram

Assign the inputs/outputs linked to the symbol.

The [Modify] button "5" opens the "I/O assignment" window used to assign a Sepam
variable to each input and output of the symbol.
PE50436

Proceed as follows to assign a symbol input:

1. Select a symbol input.
2. Select a Sepam input variable among the available inputs (it is not possible to
assign a Sepam output variable to a symbol input).
3. Click the [Assign] button to link the Sepam variable to the symbol input.

Proceed in the same manner to assign a symbol output.

Input/output assignment. Create a new predefined diagram template

A personalized mimic-diagram can be saved as a template for later use, similar to
the predefined diagram templates in the IEC and ANSI diagram libraries.

7
Proceed as follows to save a personalized diagram as a diagram template:
1. Select the command File / Save as…
2. Open the directory \SDSMStudio\Template.
3. If necessary, create a personalized directory in addition to the existing \IEC and
\ANSI directories.
4. Indicate the name of the diagram file with the .sst extension.
5. Set the type of file as "Document template (*.sst)".
6. Save the mimic diagram.

When the mimic-diagram editor is run, the new predefined diagram templates are
proposed in the personalized directory or in the "Others" directory.

452 SEPED310017EN
Commissioning Principles

DANGER Protection relay testing

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning, with the dual aim of maximizing
ARC OR BURNS availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being
b Only qualified personnel should commission commissioned. The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate
this equipment. Such work should be performed tests, keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the
only after reading this entire set of instructions. protection chain.
b NEVER work alone. Therefore, protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies, the
b Obey all existing safety instructions when performances of which are not totally reproducible, must be systematically submitted
commissioning and maintaining high-voltage to detailed testing, not only to qualify relay commissioning, but also to check that they
equipment. actually are in good operating order and maintain the required level of performance.
b Beware of potential hazards and wear personal The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing, since:
protective equipment. b the use of digital technology guarantees the reproducibility of the performances
Failure to follow these instructions will result announced
in death or serious injury. b each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory-qualification
b an internal self-testing system provides continuous information on the state of the
electronic components and the integrity of the functions (e.g. automatic tests
diagnose the level of component polarization voltages, the continuity of the analog
value acquisition chain, non-alteration of RAM memory, absence of settings outside
the tolerance range) and thereby guarantees a high level of availability

Sepam is therefore ready to operate without requiring any additional

qualification testing that concerns it directly.

Sepam commissioning tests

The preliminary Sepam commissioning tests may be limited to a commissioning
check, i.e.:
b checking of compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules
during a preliminary general check
b checking of the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered
with the setting sheets
b checking of current or voltage input connections by secondary injection tests
b checking of logic input and output connections by simulation of input data and
forcing of output status
b validation of the complete protection chain (possible customized logical functions
included)
b checking of the connection of the optional MET148-2, MSA141 and MSC025
modules.
The various checks are described on the next page.

SEPED310017EN 453
 Commissioning Methods

General principles
b All the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated
and the MV circuit breaker racked out (disconnected and open)
b All the tests are to be performed in the operating situation.
The SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all
Sepam users. It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests. The tests
described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool.

For each Sepam:

b only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions
activated
(A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on)
b use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests.

Checking of current and voltage input connections

The secondary injection tests to be carried out to check the connection of the current
and voltage inputs are described according to:
b the type of current and voltage sensors connected to Sepam, in particular for
residual current and voltage measurement
b the type of injection generator used for the tests: three-phase or single-phase
generator
b the type of Sepam.
The different possible tests are described further on by:
b a detailed test procedure
b the connection diagram of the associated test generator.

Determination of checks to be carried out

The table below indicates the page on which the following are described:
b general tests to be performed according to the type of measurement sensors and
type of generator used
b additional tests to be performed for certain types of Sepam, with a single or three-
phase generator

General tests
Current sensors Voltage sensors Three-phase Single-phase
generator generator
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
1 or 2 core bal. CTs page 463 page 463
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
3 V0 VTs page 464 page 464
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
1 or 2 core bal. CTs 3 V0 VTs page 462 page 462
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 2 phase VTs page 458 page 460
3 V0 VTs page 464 page 464
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 2 phase VTs page 458 page 460

7
1 or 2 core balance CTs 3 V0 VTs page 462 page 462
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
1 neutral point VT page 465 page 465
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 3 VTs page 457 page 459
1 or 2 core bal. CTs 1 neutral point VT pages 463 and 465 pages 463 and 465
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 2 phase VTs page 458 page 460
1 neutral point VT page 465 page 465
3 CTs or 3 LPCTs 2 phase VTs page 458 page 460
1 or 2 core bal. CTs 1 neutral point VT pages 463 and 465 pages 463 and 465
Additional tests
Type of Sepam Type of test
C60 Checking of unbalance current input page 466
connections

454 SEPED310017EN
Commissioning Testing and metering equipment
required

Generators
b dual sinusoidal AC current and voltage generator:
v 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country)
v current adjustable up to at least 5 A rms
v adjustable up to the rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of the VTs
v adjustable relative phase displacement (V, I)
v three-phase or single-phase type
b DC voltage generator:
v adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC, for adaptation to the voltage level of the logic input
being tested.

Accessories
b plug with cord to match the "current" test terminal box installed
b plug with cord to match the "voltage" test terminal box installed
b electric cord with clamps, wire grip or touch probes.

Metering devices (built into the generator or separate)

b 1 ammeter, 0 to 5 A rms
b 1 voltmeter, 0 to 230 V rms
b 1 phasemeter (if phase displacement (V, I) is not identified on the voltage and
current generator).

Computer equipment
b PC with minimal configuration:
v Microsoft Windows XP or Vista
v 400 MHz Pentium processor
v 64 MB of RAM
v 200 MB free on hard disk
v CD-ROM drive
b SFT2841 software
b CCA783 serial connection cord or CCA784 USB connection cord between the PC
and Sepam.

Documents
b complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules, with:
v phase current input connections to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box
v residual current input connection
v phase voltage input connections to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box
v residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box
v logic input and output connections
v temperature sensor connections
v analog output connection
v connection of the synchro-check module
b hardware BOMs and installation rules
b group of Sepam parameter and protection settings, available in paper format.

SEPED310017EN 455
 Commissioning General examination and
preliminary actions

Checking to be done prior to energizing Determination of parameter and protection settings

Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment, use All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined ahead of time by
the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to the design department in charge of the application, and should be approved by the
check: customer.
b identification of Sepam and accessories determined It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary, or
by the contractor even consolidated by a network coordination study.
b correct earthing of Sepam (via terminal 13 of the 20- All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of
pin connector E and the functional earthing terminal commissioning:
located on the back of the Sepam unit) b in paper file format (with the SFT2841 software, the parameter and protection
b correct connection of auxiliary voltage (terminal 1: setting file for a Sepam may be printed directly)
positive polarity; terminal 2: negative polarity) b and, when applicable, in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using
b presence of the DPC (detection of plugged the SFT2841 software.
connectors) bridge on terminals 19-20 of the 20-pin
connector E . Checking of parameters and protection settings
b presence of a residual current measurement core Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been
balance CT and/or additional modules connected to entered or downloaded during commissioning testing, to confirm the conformity of
Sepam, when applicable the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the
b presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the study.
current inputs and voltage inputs The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection
b conformity of connections between Sepam terminals settings.
and the test terminal boxes. 1. Go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841
software, in the order proposed in guided mode
Connections
2. For each screen, compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values
Check that the connections are tightened (with recorded in the parameter and protection setting file
equipment non-energized). 3. Correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered
The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in correctly, proceeding as indicated in the SFT2841 section of the Use chapter of this
and locked. manual.
Energizing Conclusion
Switch on the auxiliary power supply. Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive, as of that phase, the
Check that Sepam performs the following initialization parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are
sequence, which lasts approximately 6 seconds: considered to be final.
b green ON and red indicators on In order to be conclusive, the tests which follow must be performed with these
b red indicator off parameter and protection settings.
b pick-up of "watchdog" contact.
The first screen displayed is the phase current
measurement screen.

Implementation of the SFT2841 software

for PC
1. Start up the PC.
2. Connect either the PC RS 232 serial port or the USB
port to the communication port on the front panel of
Sepam using either the CCA783 cord or the CCA784
cord.
3. Start up the SFT2841 software, by clicking on the

7 related icon.
4. Choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked.

Identification of Sepam
1. Note the Sepam serial number given on the label
stuck to the right side plate of the base unit.
2. Note the references defining the type of application
indicated on the adhesive label on the Sepam
cartridge.
3. Note the Sepam type and software version using the
SFT2841 software, "Sepam Diagnosis" screen.
4. Enter them in the test sheet.

456 SEPED310017EN
 Commissioning Checking of phase current
and voltage input connections
With 3-phase generator

Procedure
1. Connect the 3-phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test
terminal boxes, using the plugs provided, according to the appropriate diagram in
terms of the number of VTs connected to Sepam.

Block diagram with 3 VTs connected to Sepam

L1
DE81042

L2
L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
I0
14

V V1

V V2

A A A V V3

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N
3-phase
generator
A V

SEPED310017EN 457
 Commissioning Checking of phase current
and voltage input connections
With 3-phase generator

Block diagram with 2 VTs connected to Sepam

L1
DE81041

L2
L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
I0
14

V V1

V V2

A A A V V3

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N
3-phase
generator
A V

2. Turn the generator on.

3. Apply the 3 generator voltages V1-N, V2-N and V3-N, balanced and set to the

7 rated secondary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VTs (i.e. Vns = Uns/3).

4. Inject the 3 generator currents I1, I2 and I3, balanced and set to the rated
secondary current of the CTs (i.e. 1 A or 5 A) and in phase with the voltages applied
(i.e. generator phase displacement:
α1(V1-N, I1) = α2(V2-N, I2) = α3(V3-N, I3) = 0°).
5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following:
b the value indicated for each of the phase currents I1, I2 and I3 is approximately
equal to the rated primary current of the CTs
b the value indicated for each of the phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2 and V3 is
approximately equal to the rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VT
(Vnp = Unp/3)
b the value indicated for each phase displacement ϕ1(V1, I1), ϕ2(V2, I2) and
ϕ3(V3, I3) between currents I1, I2 or I3 and voltages V1, V2 or V3 respectively is
approximately equal to 0°
6. Turn the generator off.

458 SEPED310017EN
 Commissioning Checking of phase current
and voltage input connections
With single-phase generator and voltages
delivered by 3 VTs

Procedure
1. Connect the single-phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test
terminal boxes, using the plugs provided, according to the block diagram below.

Block diagram
L1
L2
De81040

L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
I0
14

A V V ph-N

I N V N
1-phase
generator
A V

2. Turn the generator on.

3. Apply the generator V-N voltage set to the rated secondary phase-to-neutral

7
voltage of the VTs (i.e. Vns = Uns/3) between Sepam’s phase 1 voltage input
terminals (via the test box).
4. Inject the generator I current, set to the rated secondary current of the CTs
(i.e. 1 A or 5 A) and in phase with the V-N voltage applied (i.e. generator phase
displacement α(V-N, I) = 0°) to Sepam’s phase 1 current input (via the text box).
5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following:
b the value indicated for I1 phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary
current of the CT
b the value indicated for V1 phase-to-neutral voltage is approximately equal to the
rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VT (Vnp = Unp/3)
b the value indicated for the phase displacement ϕ1(V1, I1) between the I1 current
and V1 voltage is approximately equal to 0°
6. proceed in the same way by circular permutation with the phase 2 and 3 voltages
and currents, to check the I2, V2, ϕ2(V2, I2) and I3, V3, ϕ3(V3, I3) values
7. Turn the generator off.

SEPED310017EN 459
 Commissioning Checking of phase current
and voltage input connections
With single-phase generator and voltages
delivered by 2 VTs
Description Procedure
Check to be carried out when the voltages are supplied 1. Connect the single-phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test
by a 2 VT assembly, with the VT primary circuits terminal boxes, using the plugs provided, according to the block diagram below.
connected between phases of the distributed voltage,
which means that the residual voltage is obtained
outside Sepam (by 3 VTs connected via their
secondary circuits in an open delta arrangement) or,
when applicable, is not used for the protection function. Block diagram
L1
L2
DE81039

L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
I0
14

A V U ph-ph

I N V1 N
1-phase
generator
A V

7 2. Turn the generator on.

3. Apply (via the test box) the voltage delivered at the
V-N terminals of the generator, set to 3/2 times the
6. Proceed in the same way to check the I2, V2, ϕ2(V2, I2) values:
b apply the generator V-N voltage set to 3Uns/2 in parallel between terminals 1-2
and 4-2 of Sepam’s voltage inputs (via the test box).
rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of the VTs b inject an I current set to 1 A or 5 A and in phase opposition with the V-N voltage
(i.e. 3 Uns/2) between terminals 1-2 of Sepam’s (i.e. α(V-N, I) = 180°) to Sepam’s phase 2 current input (via the test box)
voltage inputs. b obtain I2 ≅ Inp, V2 ≅ Vnp = Unp/3 and ϕ2 ≅ 0°. In the absence of residual voltage,
4. Inject the generator I current, set to the rated V3 = 0, U32 = 3Unp/2.
secondary current of the CTs 7. check the I3, V3, ϕ3(V3, I3) values as well:
(i.e. 1 A or 5 A) and in phase with the V-N voltage b apply the generator V-N voltage set to 3Uns/2 between terminals 4-2 of Sepam’s
applied (i.e. generator phase displacement α(V- voltage inputs (via the test box)
N, I) = 0°) to Sepam’s phase 1 current input (via the test b inject a current equal to 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the V-N voltage (i.e. α(V-N, I)
box). = 0°) to Sepam’s phase 3 current input (via the test box)
5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following: b obtain I3 ≅ Inp, V3 ≅ Vnp = Unp/3 and ϕ3 ≅ 0°. In the absence of residual voltage,
b the value indicated for I1 phase current is V3 = 0, U32 = 3Unp/2
approximately equal to the rated primary current of the 8. Turn the generator off.
CT (Inp).
b the value indicated for V1 phase-to-neutral voltage is
approximately equal to the rated primary phase-to-
neutral voltage of the VT (Vnp = Unp/3)
b the value indicated for the phase displacement
ϕ1(V1, I1) between the I1 current and V1 voltage is
approximately equal to 0°

460 SEPED310017EN
Commissioning Checking of phase current
input connections
LPCT type current sensors

Phase current measurement by LPCT Procedure

sensors The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the
b The 3 LPCT current sensors are connected via an same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or LPCT sensors. Only
RJ45 plug to the CCA671 connector which is to be the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values
mounted on the rear panel of Sepam, identified as B1 . change.
b The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box, the
not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the fail-safe ACE917 injection adapter is required.
position. The ACE917 adapter is inserted between:
b The rated primary current In measured by the LPCT b the standard injection box
sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting b the LPCT test plug:
and configured by microswitches on the CCA671 v integrated in the Sepam CCA671 connector
connector. v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory.
The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on
the CCA671 connector: the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the
microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA671.
The injection value depends on the rated primary current selected on the CCA671
connector and entered in the Sepam general settings, i.e.:
b 1 A for the following values (in Amps): 25, 50, 100, 133, 200, 320, 400, 630
b 5 A for the following values (in Amps): 125, 250, 500, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.

Block diagram (without CCA613 accessory)

DE81038

Sepam C60

SEPED310017EN 461
 Commissioning Checking of residual current
and residual voltage input
connections

Description Procedure
Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is 1. Connect according to the diagram below:
delivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected b the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box using the plug
in an open delta arrangement and when the residual provided,
current is obtained by a specific sensor such as: b a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary
b CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT circuit of the core balance CT or CT, with the wire passing through the core balance
b CSH30 interposing ring CT (whether it is installed on CT or CT in the P1-P2 direction, with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end.
the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which
encompasses the 3 phases, or on the neutral
connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs) Block diagram
b other core balance CT connected to an ACE990
Note: the number of CTs/VTs connected to the Sepam current/voltage connector phase inputs
interface. is given as an example and is not used for the test.
DE81037

L1
L2
L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box

4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2
5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
14 I0

A I0 V V0

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N
1-phase

7
or 3-phase
A V
generator

2. Turn the generator on.

3. Apply a V-N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs connected in
DE50359

an open delta arrangement (i.e. Uns/3 or Uns/3)

4. inject an I current set to 5 A, and in phase with the voltage applied (i.e. generator
Sepam series 60 is equipped with one residual current phase displacement α(V-N, I) = 0°).
input which may be connected to a core balance CT 5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following:
installed on the cables, tank earthing cable or neutral b the value indicated for the measured I0 residual current is approximately equal to
point of a transformer, or on the earthing cable of a 5A
motor or generator. In some cases, reading of the ϕ0 b the value indicated for the measured V0 residual voltage is approximately equal to
angle is impossible due to the position of the core the rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VTs (i.e. Vnp = Unp/3)
balance CT (e.g.: transformer tank earthing cable or b the value indicated for the phase displacement ϕ0(V0, I0) between the I0 current
neutral point) or because only one of the two I0 or V0 and V0 voltage is approximately equal to 0°
measurements is necessary or possible. When this is 6. Turn the generator off.
the case, simply check the measured residual current
value I0.

462 SEPED310017EN
 Commissioning Checking of residual current
input connection

Description Procedure
Check to be carried out when the residual current is 1. Connect according to the diagram below:
measured by a specific sensor such as: b a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary
b CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT circuit of the core balance CT or CT, with the wire passing through the core balance
b CSH30 interposing ring CT (whether it is installed on CT or CT in the P1-P2 direction, with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end
the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which b when applicable, the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box,
encompasses the 3 phases, or on the neutral so as to only supply Sepam’s phase 1 voltage input and therefore obtain a residual
connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs) voltage V0 = V1.
b other core balance CT connected to an ACE990
interface,
b and when the residual voltage is calculated in Sepam Block diagram
or cannot be calculated (e.g.: assembly with 2 VTs
Note: the number of CTs connected to the Sepam current connector phase inputs is given as an
connected via their primary circuits) and is therefore not example and is not used for the test.
available for the protection function.
L1
DE81036

L2
L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
14 I0

A I0 V V1 = V0

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N

7
1-phase
or 3-phase
A V
generator

2. Turn the generator on.

3. When applicable, apply a V-N voltage set to the rated secondary phase-to-neutral
DE50359

voltage of the VT (i.e. Vns = Uns/3).

4. Inject an I current set to 5 A, and when applicable in phase with the V-N voltage
Sepam series 60 is equipped with 2 independent applied (i.e. generator phase displacement α(V-N, I) = 0°).
residual current inputs which may be connected to a 5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following:
core balance CT installed on the cables, tank earthing b the value indicated for the measured I0 residual current is approximately equal to
cable or neutral point of a transformer, or on the 5A
earthing cable of a motor or generator. In some cases, b when applicable, the value indicated for calculated V0 residual voltage is
reading of the ϕ0 angle is impossible due to the position approximately equal to the rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VTs
of the core balance CT (e.g. transformer neutral point (i.e. Vnp = Unp/3)
or tank earthing cable) or because only one of the two b when applicable, the value indicated for the phase displacement ϕ0 (V0, I0)
I0 or V0 measurements is necessary or possible. When between the I0 current and V0 voltage is approximately equal to 0°
this is the case, simply check the measured residual 6. Turn the generator off.
current value I0.

SEPED310017EN 463
 Commissioning Checking of residual voltage
input connection
With voltage delivered by 3 VTs in
open delta arrangement
Description Procedure
Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is 1. Connect according to the diagram below:
delivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected b the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box, so as to only
in an open delta arrangement, and when the residual supply Sepam’s residual voltage input
current is calculated in Sepam or cannot be calculated b when applicable, the generator current terminals to the current test terminal box,
(e.g.: assembly with 2 CTs) and is therefore not so as to only supply Sepam’s phase 1 current input, and therefore obtain a residual
available for the protection function. current I0Σ = I1.

Block diagram
Note: the number of VTs connected to the Sepam voltage connector phase inputs is given as an
example and is not used for the test.
L1
DE81035

L2
L3

Current test Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
I0
14

A I1 = I0 V V0

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N
1-phase
or 3-phase
A V
generator

7
2. Turn the generator on.
3. Apply a V-N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs installed in an
open delta arrangement (i.e., depending on the case, Uns/3 or Uns/3).
4. When applicable, inject an I current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs
(i.e. 1 A or 5 A) and in phase with the voltage applied (i.e. generator phase
displacement α(V-N, I) = 0°).
5. Use the SFT2841 software to check the following:
b the value indicated for the measured V0 residual voltage is approximately equal to
the rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VTs (i.e. Vnp = Unp/3)
b when applicable, the value indicated for the calculated I0Σ residual current is
approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CTs
b when applicable, the value indicated for the phase displacement ϕ0Σ (V0, I0Σ)
between the I0Σ current and V0 voltage is approximately equal to 0°
6. Turn the generator off.

464 SEPED310017EN
 Commissioning Checking of residual voltage
input connection
With voltage delivered by 1 neutral
point VT
Description Procedure
Check to be carried out when the Sepam residual 1. Connect the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box, so as to
voltage input is connected to 1 VT installed on the only supply Sepam’s residual voltage input.
neutral point of a motor or generator (in which case the
VT is a power transformer). Block diagram

L1
De81034

L2
L3

Sepam series 60 Voltage test

terminal box
4 B1 E 1
1 I1 V1 2
5 4
2 I2 V2 5
6 7
3 I3 V3 8

13

20 E
DPC 19

15
14 I0

V V1 = Vnt

I1 I2 I3 N V1 V2 V3 N
1-phase
or 3-phase
A V
generator

7
2. Turn the generator on.
3. Apply a V-N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the neutral pointt VT
(i.e. Vnts).
4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that the measured neutral point voltage Vnt
is approximately equal to the rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage of the VTs
(i.e. Vnts).
5. Turn the generator off.

SEPED310017EN 465
 Commissioning Checking of Sepam C60 unbalance
current input connections

Description
Check to be carried out on Sepam C60 units with measurement of capacitor unbalance
currents, apart from checking of the phase current input connections.
Since the capacitor unbalance currents are not related to the voltages measured by
Sepam C60, it is not necessary to inject voltage to check the Sepam C60 capacitor
unbalance current input connections.

Procedure
1. Connect the single-phase current generator to the corresponding test terminal
box, using the plugs provided, according to the block diagram below.

Block diagram
DE81033

C60

7 2. Turn the generator on.

3. Inject the generator current I set to the CTs’ rated secondary current
(i.e. 1 A, or 5 A) to Sepam’s unbalance current input (via the test box).
4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that the unbalance current value indicated I0
is approximately equal to the CTs' rated primary current.
5. Turn the generator off.

466 SEPED310017EN
 Commissioning Checking of logic input
and output connections

Checking of logic input connections

Procedure
Proceed as follows for each input:
PE80427

1. If the input supply voltage is present, use an electric cord to short-circuit the
contact that delivers logic data to the input.
2. If the input supply voltage is not present, apply a voltage supplied by the DC
voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input, being sure
to comply with the suitable polarity and level.
3. Observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software, in the
"Input, output, indicator status" screen
4. At the end of the test, if necessary, press the SFT2841 [Reset] button to clear
all messages and deactivate all outputs.

SFT2841: input, output, indicator status.

Checking of logic output connections

Procedure
Check carried out using the "Output relay test" function, activated via the SFT2841
PE80428

software, in the "Sepam Diagnosis" screen.

Only output O5, when used for the watchdog, can be tested.
This function requires prior entry of the "Parameter setting" password.
1. Activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software
2. The activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds.
3. Observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the
related switchgear (if it is ready to operate and is powered), or connect a voltmeter
to the terminals of the output contact (the voltage cancels itself out when the contact
closes).
4. At the end of the test, press the SFT2841 [Reset] button to clear all messages and
deactivate all outputs.

SFT2841: output relay test.

SEPED310017EN 467
 Commissioning Checking of GOOSE logic input
connections

Procedure
This check is carried out using the "GOOSE test" screen accessed from the "Input,
output and LED status" tab in the SFT2841 software.
PE80429

This screen can be used to perform 2 types of test on GOOSE logic inputs:
b A test by controlling a GOOSE test variable
b A test by forcing remote indications (TS)
Test by controlling a GOOSE test variable
The test by controlling a GOOSE test variable is used to check that IEC 61850
communication is fully operational with all the Sepam units included in the IEC 61850
configuration.
This test allows to activate 4 GOOSE logic input test variables
(LD0.GSE_GGIO1_Test1 to LD0.GSE_GGIO1_Test4).
These 4 GOOSE logic input test variables use 4 test data items defined in the
IEC 61850 model of the Sepam units.
Using the SFT850 software, the user configures the test logic to be used with these
4 test variables.
Clicking on the [Test] button sets the selected GOOSE test variables to 1 for the
duration specified.

SFT2841: GOOSE logic input test Test by forcing remote indications (TS)
The test by forcing remote indications is used to check the configuration of the relays
subscribed to the GOOSE inputs to be used and the control logic associated with the
GOOSE inputs to which the Sepam is subscribed.
The screen initially displays the actual state of the Sepam remote indications
For each remote indication to be enforced, the test consists of:
1. Select the number of the remote indication to be forced by placing the pointer on
the corresponding numbered box. If it exists, the description of the IEC 61850
variable corresponding to the remote indication appears in a pop-up.
2. Check that the remote indication selected matches the IEC 61850 variable
displayed in the pop-up.
3. Click on the remote indication(s) to be forced:
b Click once to force to 0
b Click twice to force to 1
4. Set the test duration by entering the desired value.
5. Click the [Test] button: All the selected remote indications are forced for the set
duration.
This function is available whether the SFT2841 software is connected on the front
panel of the Sepam or to a Sepam network.

468 SEPED310017EN
Commissioning Checking of optional module
connections

MET148-2 module MCS025 module voltage inputs

temperature sensor inputs Procedure
The temperature monitoring function provided by 1. Connect the single-phase voltage generator to the corresponding test terminal
Sepam T60, T62, M61, G60, G62, C60 units checks the box, using the plugs provided, according to the block diagram below.
connection of each RTD that is configured.
An "RTD FAULT" alarm is generated whenever one of Block diagram
the RTDs is detected as being short-circuted or
disconnected (absent).

DE51264
To identify the faulty RTD or RTDs:
1. Display the temperature values measured by
Sepam using the SFT2841 software.
2. Check the consistency of the temperatures
measured:
b the temperature displayed is "****" if the RTD is
short-circuited (T < -35 °C or T < -31° F)
b the temperature displayed is "-****" if the RTD is
disconnected (T > 205 °C or T > 401° F).

MSA141 module analog

output
1. Identify the measurement associated by parameter
setting to the analog output using the SFT2841
software.
2. Simulate, if necessary, the measurement linked to
the analog output by injection.
3. Check the consistency between the value measured
by Sepam and the indication given by the device
connected to the analog output.

2. Turn the generator on.

3. Apply a voltage V-N set to the rated secondary voltage Vns sync1
(Vns sync1= Uns sync1/3) in parallel between the input terminals of the 2 voltages
7
to be synchronized.
4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that:
b the measured voltage difference dU, frequency difference dF and phase
difference dPhi values are equal to 0
b the close enable sent by the MCS025 module is received on the Sepam logic input
assigned to this function (logic input in 1 status in the "Input, output and LED status"
screen).
5. Use the SFT2841 software to check that for the other Sepam units concerned by
the "Synchro-check" function the close enable sent by the MCS025 module is received
on the logic input assigned to this function (logic input in 1 status in the "Input, output
and LED status" screen).
6. Turn the generator off.

SEPED310017EN 469
 Commissioning Validation of the complete
protection chain

Principle
The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes
tripping of the breaking device by Sepam.

Procedure
1. Select one of the protection functions that triggers tripping of the breaking device
and separately, according to their incidence in the chain, the function or functions
related to the programmed or reprogrammed parts of the program logic.
2. According to the selected function or functions, inject a current and/or apply a
voltage that corresponds to a fault.
3. Observe the tripping of the breaking device and the operation of the adapted parts
of the program logic.
At the end of all the voltage and current application type checks, put the covers
back on the test terminal boxes.

470 SEPED310017EN
Commissioning Test sheet
Sepam series 60

Project:........................................................ Type of Sepam

Switchboard: .............................................. Serial number
Cubicle: ....................................................... Software version V
Overall checks
Check off the box v when the check has been made and been conclusive
Type of check
Preliminary general examination, prior to energizing v
Energizing v
Parameter and protection settings v
Logic input connections v
Logic output connections v
Validation of the complete protection chain v
Validation of the adapted functions (via the logic equation editor) v
Analog output connection to the MSA141 module v
Temperature sensor input connections to the MET148-2 module v
Voltage input connections to the MCS025 module v
Checking of phase current and voltage inputs
Check off the box v when the check has been made and been conclusive
Type of check Test performed Result Display
Phase current and phase Secondary injection of CT Rated primary current of CTs I1 =.................... v
voltage input connections rated current into B1 , connected to B1
i.e. 1 A or 5 A
I2 =.................... v
I3 =.................... v
Secondary injection of phase VT rated primary phase-to-neutral V1 = .................. v
voltage (the value to be voltage Unp/3
injected depends on the test
V2 = .................. v
being performed) V3 = .................. v
Phase displacement ϕ(V, I) ≅ 0° ϕ1 =................... v
ϕ2 =................... v
ϕ3 =................... v
Residual current input Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value I0 I0 =.................... v
connections balance CT primary circuit
7
When applicable, VT rated primary phase-to-neutral V0 = .................. v
secondary injection voltage Unp/3
of the rated phase-to-neutral
voltage of a phase VT Phase displacement
ϕ0 =................... v
Uns/3 ϕ0(V0, I0)≅ 0°

Tests performed on: ..................................................................... Signatures

By: ...................................................................................................
Comments:
......................................................................................................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................

SEPED310017EN 471
 Commissioning Test sheet
Sepam series 60

Project:........................................................ Type of Sepam

Switchboard: .............................................. Serial number

Cubicle: ....................................................... Software version V

Residual current and voltage input checks
Check off the box v when the check has been made and been conclusive
Type of check Test performed Result Display

Residual voltage input Secondary injection VT rated primary phase-to-neutral V0 = ................... v

connection of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp/3
To 3 VTs in open delta in an open delta arrangement
arrangement (Uns/3or Uns/3)

When applicable, CT rated primary current I0Σ = .................. v

secondary injection
of CT rated current, Phase displacement ϕ0Σ(I0, I0Σ) ϕ0Σ = ................. v
i.e. 1 A or 5 A

To 1 neutral point VT Secondary injection VT rated primary phase-to-neutral Vnt = .................. v

of the rated voltage voltage Vntp
of the neutral point VT (Vnts)

Residual current and Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value I0 I0 = .................... v
residual voltage input balance CT primary circuit
connections

Secondary injection VT rated primary phase-to-neutral V0 = ................... v

of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp/3
in an open delta arrangement
(Uns/3 or Uns/3) Phase displacement ϕ0 = ................... v
ϕ0(V0, I0)≅ 0°
Sepam C60: Secondary injection of the CT rated primary current I0 = .................... v
unbalance current input CT rated current, i.e. 1 A
connections or 5 A

Tests performed on: ..................................................................... Signatures

By:...................................................................................................
Comments:
......................................................................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

472 SEPED310017EN
 Maintenance Troubleshooting assistance

Nothing happens when Sepam is switched on:

b all LEDs off
b nothing displayed on Sepam display.

There is probably an auxiliary power fault.

Possible cause Action / remedy
Connector A not plugged in. Plug in connector A.
Connectors A and E reversed. Put connectors in correct positions.
Auxiliary power absent. Check the auxiliary power level
(range = 24 V DC to 250 V DC).
Polarities reversed on terminals 1 and 2 Check that the + polarity is on terminal 1
of connector A. and the – polarity on terminal 2.
Correct if necessary.
Internal problem. Change base unit (see page 477)

Compatibility of Sepam version/SFT2841 version

The About SFT2841 screen indicates the minimum version of the SFT2841 software
that is compatible with the Sepam being used.
About SFT2841
DE81032

To display this screen on the Sepam UMI:

b Press the button.
Please use SFT2841 b Select the General menu.
b The About SFT2841 screen can be found just after the About Sepam screen.
Check that the SFT2841 software version you are using is higher than or the same
12.0 as that indicated on the Sepam screen.
If the SFT2841 software version is lower than the minimum version compatible with
the Sepam being used, the SFT2841 software cannot be connected to Sepam and
the SFT2841 software displays the following error message: SFT2841 software
version incompatible with the connected device.
SFT2841 compatible version screen.

SEPED310017EN 473
 Maintenance Troubleshooting assistance

MAJOR fault: Sepam is in fail-safe position

b ON LED of UMI on in front
b LED of UMI on in front
PE50359

or LED of DSM303 remote advanced UMI flashing

Major faults are only cleared after the cause of the fault b green LED on rear panel on
is corrected and Sepam is switched on again. b red LED on rear panel on.

Note : The list of self-tests which place Sepam in the fail-safe position can be found in the Control
and monitoring functions chapter.

Connection cannot be made with SFT2841

1 Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

Memory cartridge absent. Switch off Sepam.

Install the memory cartridge and secure it
by tightening the 2 integrated screws.
Switch Sepam on again
Fault message on display: Major internal fault. Change base unit (see page 477).
major fault
Connection can be made with SFT2841
Possible cause Action / remedy
SFT2841 indicates major fault, but no missing Change base unit.
module: Base unit internal fault.
Memory cartridge not compatible with version of Note the version using the SFT2841 software,
the base unit (see below). Diagnosis screen.
Contact the local support team.
The hardware configuration is incorrect or Use the SFT2841 software, in connected
incomplete. mode, to determine the cause.
The SFT2841 Diagnosis screen displays the
missing items in red (see table below).

Check on hardware configuration using SFT2841

Diagnosis screen Possible cause Action / remedy
CCA630, CCA634, CCA671 Connector absent. Install a connector.
connector in B1 position If the connector is present,
displayed in red. check that it is plugged in
correctly and held in place
by the 2 screws.
LPCT sensors not connected. Connect the LPCT sensors.
Connector in position E Connector E unplugged or no Plug in connector E.
displayed in red. jumper between terminals 19 Fit the jumper.
and 20.
MES120 module in H1 or H2 MES120 module absent. Install MES120 module.
position displayed in red. If the MES120 module is
present, check that it is
plugged in correctly and held
in place by the 2 screws.
If the fault is still present,

7
replace the module.

Rules on compatibility between the cartridge and the base unit

The major index of the base-unit version must be greater than or equal to the major
PE10156

index of the cartridge-application version.

Example: The base unit with a version V1.05 (major index = 1) and an application
with a version V2.00 (major index = 2) are not compatible.
Fault message displayed If this rule is not observed, a major fault occurs and Sepam displays the message
if cartridge is not compatible. opposite.

474 SEPED310017EN
 Maintenance Troubleshooting assistance

MINOR fault: Sepam is operating in downgraded mode

b ON LED of UMI on in front
b LED of UMI flashing in front
b green LED on rear panel on
b red LED on rear panel flashing.

Note : The list of self-tests which place Sepam in downgraded operation mode can be found in
the Control and monitoring functions chapter.

Inter-module link fault

2 Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

Faulty wiring. Check remote module connections: RJ45

plugs of CCA77x cords clipped correctly into
sockets.
Fault message on display:
inter-module link fault.

MET148-2 module not available

3 LEDs Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

MET148-2 green and red LEDs Faulty wiring. Check module connections:
off. RJ45 plugs of CCA77x cords
clipped correctly into sockets.
Fault message on display: MET148-2 green LED on. No response from MET148-2 Check the position
MET148-2 not available. MET148-2 red LED off. module. of the module number
selection jumper:
b MET1 for first MET148-2
module
(temperatures T1 to T8)
b MET2 for second MET148-2
module
(temperatures T9 to T16).
b If the jumper position needs
to be changed, reboot the
MET148-2 module
(by disconnecting and
reconnecting the
interconnection cord).
MET148-2 red LED flashing. Faulty wiring, MET148-2 Check module connections:
powered but loss of dialogue RJ45 plugs of CCA77x cords
with base unit. clipped correctly into sockets.
If the MET148-2 module is the
last in the chain, check that the
line terminating jumper is in
the Rc position. In all other
cases, the jumper should be in
the position marked Rc .
MET148-2 red LED on. More than 3 remote modules Remove a remote module.
connected to connector D1 on
base unit.
MET148-2 module internal Change MET148-2 module.

MSA141 module not available

fault.
7
4 LEDs Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

MSA141 green and red LEDs Faulty wiring, MSA141 not Check module connections:
off. powered. RJ45 plugs of CCA77x cords
clipped correctly into sockets.
Fault message on display: MSA141 green LED on. Faulty wiring, MSA141 Check module connections:
MSA141 not available. MSA141 red LED flashing. powered but loss of dialogue RJ45 plugs of CCA77x cords
with base unit. clipped correctly into sockets.
If the MSA141 module is the
last in the chain, check that the
line terminating jumper is in
the Rc position.
In all other cases, the jumper
should be in the position
marked Rc .
MSA141 red LED on. More than 3 remote modules Remove a remote module.
connected to connector D1 on
base unit.
MSA141 module internal fault. Change MSA141 module.

SEPED310017EN 475
 Maintenance Troubleshooting assistance

MCS025 module not available

5 LEDs Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

MCS025 LED flashing. Faulty wiring, MCS025 Check that a CCA785 cord is
powered but loss of dialogue used with orange RJ45 plug
with base unit. on MCS025 end.
Fault message on display: Check module connections:
MCS025 not available. RJ45 plugs of CCA785 cord
clipped correctly into sockets.
MCS025 LED on. Internal fault or MCS025 fault. Check connections (DPC
function - detection of plugged
connector).

DSM303 module not avaliable

LEDs Possible cause Action / remedy
DSM303 LED on and Module internal fault. Replace the DSM303 module.
display off.

Faulty Sepam UMI

Display Possible cause Action / remedy
Advanced or mimic-based UMI Display internal fault. Replace the base unit.
display off. See page 477.

Detection of Sepam CPU overload

10 Possible cause Action / remedy
PE50139

The application configured exceeds the CPU Switch off some protection functions.
capacity of the Sepam unit. For further information, contact your local
support center.
Fault message on display:
CPU overload.
Alarms
"METx FAULT" message.
RTD fault
Possible cause Action / remedy
An RTD on a MET148-2 module is Since the alarm is common to the 8 channels
disconnected or short-circuited. of the module, go to the temperature
measurement display screen to determine
which channel is affected by the fault.
Measurement displayed:
Tx.x = -**** = RTD disconnected (T > 205 °C
(401 °F))
Tx.x = **** = RTD short-circuited (T < -35 °C
(-31 °F))

"BATTERY LOW" message.

Battery fault
Possible cause Action / remedy
Battery low, absent or incorrectly installed. Replace the battery.
See page 477.

476 SEPED310017EN
 Maintenance Replacing the base unit
Replacing the battery

Replacing the base unit

The memory cartridge is easily accessible and can be removed from the front of
PE80779

Sepam. It reduces the duration of maintenance operations.

When a base unit fails, simply:
1. Switch off Sepam and unplug connectors
2. Remove the memory cartridge
3. Replace the faulty base unit with a replacement unit (no memory cartridge)
put the memory cartridge in the new base unit
4. Plug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again.

If there are no compatibility problems (see page 474), Sepam is operational with all
its standard and customized functions, without requiring any reloading of protection
and parameter settings.

Replacing the battery

Characteristics
1/2AA format 3.6 V, 0.8 Ah lithium battery
Recommended models:
b SAFT model LS14250
Memory cartridge accessed from the front.
b SONNENSCHEIN model SL-350/S
Recycling the battery
The used battery should be sent to a certified recycling company
in compliance with the European Directive 91/157/EEC OJ L78
dated 26.03.91 on batteries and accumulators containing certain dangerous
materials, modified by directive 98/101/EEC OJ L1 dated 05.01.1999.
Replacement
1. Lift off the protective battery cover after removing both fixing screws.
2. Change the battery, being sure to use the correct type and polarity.
3. Replace the protective battery cover and both fixing screws.
4. Recycle the used battery.
Note : The battery can be replaced with the Sepam energized.

SEPED310017EN 477
 Maintenance Maintenance tests

DANGER General
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC The logic inputs and outputs and the analog inputs are the parts of Sepam least
ARC OR BURNS covered by the self-tests. (The list of Sepam self-tests can be found in the Control
b Only qualified personnel should maintain this and monitoring functions chapter).
equipment. Such work should be performed only They should be tested during a maintenance operation.
after reading this entire set of instructions. The recommended interval between preventive maintenance operations is 5 years.
b NEVER work alone.
b Obey all existing safety instructions when
commissioning and maintaining high-voltage Maintenance tests
equipment. To perform maintenance on Sepam, see Chapter 7, page 453. Carry out all the
b Beware of potential hazards and wear personal recommended commissioning tests according to the type of Sepam to be tested,
protective equipment. except for the test specific to the differential function which is not necessary. If the
Failure to follow these instructions will result MCS025 Synchro-check module is present, test its voltage inputs as well.
in death or serious injury.
First test all the logic inputs and outputs involved in tripping the circuit breaker.
A test of the complete chain including the circuit breaker is also recommended.

478 SEPED310017EN
Maintenance Firmware modifications
Application cartridge firmware

The table below describes the firmware version history of the Sepam series 60 application cartridge.
The following information is provided for each firmware version:
release date,
compatible SFT2841 version,
improvements,
new features added.
Firmware Firmware SFT2841 Improvements New features
version version version
release date compatibility
V7.10 May 2011 V12 or above Creation of the Sepam series 60 based on the
firmware of the Sepam series 80 version 5.26.
V8.01 December V13 or above Protection 48/51LR: integration of the zero speed bit Management of the new extended cartridge model
2012 from 49RMS. (twice the number of disturbance recordings + new
Protection 50/51: the H2 restraint on Max(I) is applied MSR/MST/DLG functions).
to the additional channels. Protection 27: addition of setting using a custom
Protection 59: the drop out/pick up ratio rises to 99% curve.
and the setting interval changes from 1% to 0.5%. Protection 49RMS: addition of thermal model with 2
Protection 66: modification of parameters to manage constants whose entry can be configured by a genetic
the number of hot starts and number of cold starts. algorithm. Option of configuring the transformer type in
Upward and downward compatibility with the previous the transformer scenario.
version. Protection 78PS: extension of choice (equal-area
Protection 81H: Modification of the resolution (0.01 criterion, power swing, internal angle calculation) and
Hz), the reset difference (0.05 Hz), the setting range (fN- combined use (areas and power swing, angle and power
1 Hz to fN+5 Hz) and the blocking range (20% to 90% swing) of protection principles.
Un). Phase rotation direction managed by the
Protection 81L: Modification of the resolution setting communication (GOOSE, Modbus, etc.).
(0.01 Hz), the reset difference (0.05 Hz), the setting MSR (Motor Start Report) function: archiving of 2 to
range (fN-10 Hz to fN+1 Hz) and the blocking range 144 s of measurements upon motor tripping.
(20% to 90% Un). Downloading of COMTRADE files via the SFT2841
Notification by remote indication when a disturbance software, supervision software, ACE 850 and ACE969
recording is available. (TP and FO). MSRs displayed on integrated advanced
I'n pick up from 30 A to 40 A. UMI or
Logic discrimination: Inhibition of the logic integrated mimic-based UMI.
discrimination blocking order (formerly fixed at 200 ms) MST (Motor Start Trend) function: storage of changes
can be configured. (min, max, average of MSR measurements) in 144
samples over a 30-day period. Management of 12 to 18
periods depending on the cartridge model. Trends
displayed on integrated advanced UMI or
integrated mimic-based UMI. Downloading of
COMTRADE files via the SFT2841 software,
supervision software, ACE 850 and ACE969 (TP and
FO).
DLG (Data LoG) function: archiving of measurements
offered by SEPAM over a period from 1 s to 30 days,
management of 1 to 20 periods depending on the
cartridge model. Downloading of COMTRADE files via
the SFT2841 software, supervision software, ACE 850
and ACE969 (TP and FO).
V8.02 May 2013 V13 or above Synchronization context: Initial context date forced
to 2000/00/00 00:00:0000 when no other context is
present.
Disturbance record: If a power loss occurs during

7
a disturbance recording, CFG indicates the number of
valid samples before power loss.
The next samples have the value 0,
Digital I/O: Input status is taken into account only
when the end of the initialization is effective,
Improved accuracy on the trip time of the 50BF,
Modbus: stabilization of the TS240 “Ethernet
communication fault” transmission by increasing the
number of confirmations,
Logic selectivity: blocking is achieved if the circuit
breaker is in the closed position. Reset of protections
occurs only when the breaker is in closed position,
The rounding of the calculation of the nominal
active power is reviewed to coincide with SFT2841
software one,
Disturbance: the "nrate" bit is set to 0 instead
of 1 to allow the COMTRADE reader to use the date
of each point instead of a fixed sampling,
Fixed an issue causing the Sepam fallback on an
avalanche warning issued by the Logipam.
V8.03 August 2013 V13 or above Fixed an issue when loading some files that
result Logipam definitive fallback
ECI850 : Improvement to enable unloading
DataLog files configured in a circular mode.
V8.04 February 2014 V13 or above Modbus : improved management of the saturation
of stamped events stacks to avoid returning again
already issued events
Modbus : synchronisation du bit "perte info" du mot
de contrôle avec la saturation réelle de la pile.
V9.00 December V15 or above Automatic transfer (AT) : Back to the nominal Creation of a second 6.25 kA...15 kA setting range for
2014 frequency of the frequency control in 200 ms Unp ≤ 20 kV.
instead of 5 s when the voltage is less than 20% of Unp,
Improved main channels réinitalisation of the
50N/51N protections in factory parameters
reinitialization.

SEPED310017EN 479
 Maintenance Firmware modifications
Base firmware

The table below describes the firmware version history of the Sepam series 60 base.
The following information is provided for each firmware version:
release date,
compatible SFT2841 version,
improvements,
new features added.
Base Firmware SFT2841 Improvements New features
firmware version version
version release date compatibility
V7.20 May 2011 V12 or above Creation of a common base firmware platform for
the Sepam series 80 and for the new Sepam series 60.
V8.01 December V13 or above MSR, MST and DLG new files handling.
2012 Effective rotation direction in 32-bit diagnosis zone
V9.00 December V15 or above
2014

480 SEPED310017EN
Maintenance Firmware modifications
Cartridge and base firmware
compatibility table

Respect the compatibility between the Sepam series 80 cartridge and the
base according to the following table.
Firmware Base
version
Cartridge 7.XX 8.XX 9.XX
7.XX
8.XX -
9.XX - -

Compatible with all features

Compatible but with limited features
- Not compatible
Note : The latest version of Sepam firmware is compatible with all the
Sepam hardware versions.

SEPED310017EN 481
 Notes

482 SEPED310017EN
 ART.838008 © 2016 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved

Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, rue Joseph Monier As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
CS 30323 of the information given in this publication.
F - 92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Printed on recycled paper.
Capital social 896 313 776 €
www.schneider-electric.com
Production: Schneider electric
Publication: Schneider Electric
Printed:
SEPED310017EN/4 02/2016